Audio

132: How Ryan Grant Scaled His Amazon Retail Arbitrage Business To 7 Figures

132: How Ryan Grant Scaled His Amazon Retail Arbitrage Business To 7 Figures

Ryan Grant is someone who I met at the Import Summit last year and I’ve been following his work every since.

He runs the popular site OnlineSellingExperiment.com where he talks about all of his adventures selling physical products online.

Now if you recall way back in episode 17, I had Jessica Larrew on the podcast to talk about her Amazon retail arbitrage business.

Well Ryan has taken that same model of retail and online arbitrage and scaled it to small company with employees.

What is online and retail arbitrage? It’s the process of buying from retail stores and liquidation outlets and selling those products on Amazon.

Anyway, last time we spoke, Ryan had a pretty nifty operation going on and I want to catch up with what he’s up to today. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Ryan got into selling online.
  • Ryan’s motivations for starting his business
  • How to scale a retail arbitrage business
  • How he knows what goods are going to sell.
  • Where he consistently finds goods to sell.
  • How he deals with unsold inventory.
  • The many challenges of running a retail arbitrage business

Other Resources And Books

OnlineSellingExperiment.com

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activities 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked. My online store got hacked long ago, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you get hacked. Right now you can get 3 months of SiteLock free if you go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: All right we’re good now, okay. Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Ryan Grant on the podcast today. Ryan is somebody who I met at the Import Summit last year, and I’ve been following his work ever since. He runs the popular site onlinesellingexperiment.com, where he talks about all his adventures selling physical products online.

If you recall way back in episode 17, I had this woman named Jessica Larrew on the podcast to talk about her Amazon retail arbitrage business. Well Ryan has taken a similar model of retail and online arbitrage, and he’s scaled it to a small company with employees and procedures. Now what is online and retail arbitrage? It’s the process of buying from retail stores and liquidation outlets, and selling those products on Amazon.

Anyways last time we spoke Ryan had a pretty nifty operation going on, and I want to catch up with him and see what he’s up to today. With that welcome to the show Ryan, how are you doing today man?

Ryan: Doing great Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, give us the quick background story; tell us about your business, how you got started, and kind of what you sell, and how your operation is like today?

Ryan: Sure, so I got started selling on Amazon back in 2008 when I was a freshman in college. I went to the college book store with the text books that I had paid quite a bit of money for, and saw what they were offering for those books, and was quite disappointed with the offer. So I began to explore other options for selling those books which ultimately led me to Amazon.

Then throughout college I would sell my books, I would sell friend’s books, and eventually started buying books from essentially as many students as possible at the university I went in Minnesota. Then we gradually expanded to other campuses as well, primarily focused just on text books. Then I had that going from about 2008, and in 2013, that was about 2 years after I graduated was still doing the text book stuff.

I had a job as an accountant, didn’t really like that, so I decided to see if I could pursue selling on Amazon as a full time income. On September 2013 is when I started my current operation, which is the primary income source for me now, and then that is selling arbitrage products like Steve mentioned in the introduction.

So it’s everywhere from online stores, retail stores, we’ll buy liquidations and close out from companies that are looking to get rid of goods in bulk, and then we’ll buy direct from manufacturers of brands. We don’t try to label anything at the moment, but we’ll buy like tickets. That’s why a company like Mitel for example we don’t buy from them, but we buy direct from those.

The operation currently, there is myself and then there is 7 other people, and they have a variety of roles to running the operations of the business, going out to these stores and some of our sources, and purchasing the goods. Then there is people that are processing the goods for Amazon at their warehouses as well removing price stickers, doing all the things that need to be done to meet Amazon’s requirements.

It’s been a gradual process, but all about the past 3 and a half years, and working at the point where my time isn’t needed to run the business day to day. That goal was pretty much realized in January of this year, so for the past 5 or 6 months I’ve been able to pretty much have things continue to grow without a ton of my direct involvement. There still sometime that goes there, but it’s primarily focused exclusively on growth as opposed to just day to day operations. That’s a quick look at where things are at today.

Steve: Awesome, is the textbook operation still alive or is that…

Ryan: The textbook operation is not currently going; it’s something I might revive now that we’ve got a bigger team in place. It’s something I see out of doing just because it’s fairly capital intensive and very seasonal. There is 2 main times a year to buy textbooks at the end of each semester.

So I switched over to buying products that sell better year round, but now that the business is in a better financial position, and then there is more manpower as well, it’s something that I’m looking to put back into the fold in the near future, most likely in December of this year when the close of the next college semester comes.

Steve: Interesting, I’ve been out of school for a long time, they still use paper text books?

Ryan: Yes they do.

Steve: They do, okay.

Ryan: They try to [inaudible 00:06:47] e-books. Honestly they end up being a lot more expensive for students, because they can’t resell them when they’re done with them. So even if you pay like 200 bucks for a book, and then at the end you can sell it for 120 bucks, you only loose 80 buck. So even if the e-book was 20% cheaper at the beginning, and you paid 160, you come out quite a bit better with the physical book.

Steve: I see that makes sense. Did you ever work as an accountant?

Ryan: I did, yeah I worked at an accounting firm in Minneapolis for about one year and 9 months. I made it through two busy seasons is what they call it or two tax seasons April through January to April. By the end of the second one I knew…

Steve: You had enough.

Ryan: I wasn’t going to stick it out.

Steve: Were you doing your Amazon thing while you were working as an accountant?

Ryan: I was doing it a little bit, so I knew I wanted to quit my job previous, well honestly within the first 6 months I had it. I kind of began planning my exit. One of the big reasons I didn’t quit right away is I just wanted to be in a good financial position to give myself as much run way to try out something new as possible.

One of the things I wanted to do before I quit was to buy an owner occupied duplex which I was able to do, and then I got that in place, and then I started to spend more time on the Amazon business prior to quitting. So I would say like the past six months before I quit I was trying to spend five to ten hours a week at least on the Amazon business.

It was still the point where I was making between $500 and $1000 dollars a month at the point when I quit. I felt that the time investment would scale up to a full time income if I was able to dedicate full time hours to the Amazon business, which ultimately played out pretty well.

Steve: I was hoping you would be able to walk me through the arbitrage business, and how the business works exactly. Back when you didn’t have a full team, can you talk about where you got the products and what the procedure was like, and how you priced everything, that sort of thing?

Ryan: Yeah, we can well do that. Back when it was just me, my main sources initially were just retail source, Wal-Marts, Targets, Toys R Us, things like that, that were available nationwide. Then some of the better sources were some of the Mom and Pop discount type source that were only available in my area just due to people not being able to get their hands on the same products nationwide, it helps to maintain prices online.

The general concept though is you go into these stores, you look for items that are sold at a discount, or might only be available in your region, and you’re looking for items that will be selling for more on Amazon than they are in the stores, or in the store that you’re sourcing in or you’re buying in. Sourcing is the term that’s generally used in the arbitrage world for going and finding products.

You have an app on your phone, now there is one called the Amazon seller app, it’s completely free, and it does pretty much everything you need. You use the camera on the phone to scan the barcode on the products, and it’s going to display all the details on that product. You will be able to see the price it’s selling for on Amazon.

You’ll also be able to see the fees that will come out if you sell it via the fulfillment by Amazon program, so you can see exactly how that compares with the prices at that store. Then you can also see the reviews of the product, and the sales record of the product. The sales record of the products is something specific to Amazon, and it gives you an idea of how well that product sells.

The law of the sales right number, the better the product sells as a general rule, and that number is going to fluctuate over time. Basically you’re looking for products that return the minimum return on investment that you’re looking for. I normally recommend starting out somewhere between 50 and 100% depending on your risk tolerance straight away.

Steve: This is after fees, Right?

Ryan: Exactly, after fees as that gives you some margin for error if prices go down, if the item [inaudible 00:11:16] and things like that. The higher you can stretch what you set right away, the higher the probability of success, and the more things can go wrong, you still come out okay.

The primary things on the app like right away I’m looking at, the number one thing is the net pay out or the net amount that I will get after fees. Then you calculate your ROI percentage based on that, and then I want a sales rank. Generally speaking there is many caveats to this, but generally speaking less than 10,000 is an item that is going to sell relatively quickly in most categories.

One of the things about sales rank is that every category on Amazon has a different sales rank, so textbooks or books is an entire category, and it’s entirely separate from say the health and beauty category in a sales rank of say 50, 000 in both categories is going to sell through in at a vastly different rates. So those are cut signs are some of the things you pick out right away. Starting with looking for items right under 100,000 is a decent way to start, and then as you get sales, you can iterate on that and find out what’s working, and expand those rankings to what works best for you.

Steve: In terms of just a product, like I wouldn’t just walk in to like a Wal-Mart and just start randomly scanning stuff, right? Do you have any criteria, or where you like to go typically?

Ryan: Yeah, typically I like to start with like the clearance sections of the store, and then that works better like local discount stores and Wal-Marts, places that don’t have nationwide clearance. Target for example they typically, if an item is on clearance at one Target, it’s typically on clearance at thousands of other Targets throughout the country, and there is many people who do this.

We issue a lot of competition on the listings, and then the prices go down. Generally speaking I’m looking for either clearance items or items that are discounted, or the other type of category of item I like to look for is regional products, or something that’s only going to be available to my…

Steve: Give me an example of that.

Ryan: In Minnesota there is a leap year soft drink, it’s called Dad’s [inaudible 00:13:32] and it’s only available in certain areas. It’s available for example at [inaudible 00:13:38] usually. You can get a liter bottle for about a dollar. For quite a while you could sell a three pack of them for about $25.

Steve: Really?

Ryan: Yeah, and these even you didn’t have to ship merchant fulfilled, so that’s not using Amazon’s FBA program just because it’s an item that can explode, because of– like that item is only available in Minnesota for example. If people move to another state, and they really loved that product, they’re often willing to pay a very huge premium for it online. That’s the logic for the regional product, and it’s just a little bit more exclusive, and they are let’s say a copy of the board game monopoly, or something that’s going to be available in every store.

Steve: Do you only have an idea of what products you’re looking for when you do this, or is it random like you walk in a clearance section, and you look for regional products

Ryan: Yeah, it depends on what is available in each store. Basically with this model you’ll sell just about anything. It doesn’t really matter if it’s a toy or if it’s a [inaudible 00:14:56] item for example, or if it’s toothpaste.

All that really matters is what it’s going for online versus what you can buy it for, and the sales process. Really it’s not that focused when you’re doing the retail arbitrage. You evaluate the opportunities that exist in whatever store that you are in regardless of the category.
Steve: Amazon has gotten a little more strict about on gating for categories, right? Do you have any comments on that, like food and beverage for example you have to get on gated for that?

Ryan: Yes they are, so if you’re brand new to the count you won’t be able to sell grocery, health, and beauty. You won’t be able to sell like clothes, shoes, luggage, high end handbags, sunglasses, things like that. Mainly consumables and high end products or things that are easily counterfeited are the main products that you can’t sell right out of the gate.

There is an approval process for all of them. It generally involves buying direct from wholesalers or distributors, so those will be buying more high up the supply chain, more direct from the brand or from a distributor of those brands, and then you submit those invoices to Amazon, and then you’ll be allowed to sell pretty much any product in those categories.

If you get the approval once, you’ll get to go to sell all the products in that category. It’s not generally something I would recommend just right out of the gate. There’s tons of categories that are available to sell in upon. But if you give it a go and you have some real success, and you’re looking to expand, then I definitely recommend looking into getting that approvals and spending the time to get that approval, because there is less competition in those products and categories just due to not all new sellers being able to sell them, so it’s a little bit more exclusive.

Steve: Okay, so once you do find a product, and presumably you’re listing it on top of another process listing, right? Another listing on Amazon?

Ryan: Correct, yeah.

Steve: It’s right, okay. So does that mean that you have to constantly monitor your listing to make sure you have the buy box?

Ryan: Yes, so you’re always looking to have the buy box, and then that’s a pretty big topic in and of itself, because there is many components that go in to winning the buy box. The ones that you can easily control are your feedback percentage, your fulfillment method, and what your price is.

Feedback is, you can use tools to make sure that you’re maximizing your feedback and sending follow up sequences to buyers to maximize that percentage. Fulfillment method if you get a bomb going for the buy box when you use fulfillment by Amazon program versus shipping the item yourself. The closer you are to the lowest price generally speaking, the higher the chance you’ll have the buy box.

Steve: When you’re talking about feedback in the world of retail arbitrage, is that seller feedback, or is that product feedback that you’re more concerned about?

Ryan: That would be seller feedback.

Steve: Okay, got it. So does that imply then that your sequences are more focused on getting the person to leave you seller feedback, like the product feedback doesn’t matter at all at that point, right?

Ryan: Exactly, yeah it’s purely to get a feedback for the individual seller.

Steve: Okay, and then are you doing all of your stuff FBA when you can?

Ryan: Absolutely, yeah.

Steve: Okay and I’m just curious how many skews do you have outstanding today across all your employees and everything?

Ryan: That’s a good question.

Steve: It doesn’t have to be exact; I’m just trying to get an idea of what ball park it is.

Ryan: Between three and 5,000 I would say.

Steve: Three and 5,000 skews, okay. So for all those skews you have to monitor whether you have the buy box on a day to day basis, right?

Ryan: Yep, and there is software that we use to do that. It’s called the repricer, and you set up rules to have– basically have them change your price depending on what is going on with these individual listings so that you don’t have to monitor each one individually.

Steve: One thing I’ve always been curious about is if everyone is using this repricing software, doesn’t the price just continue sinking lower and lower?

Ryan: It can, it depends on which rules you use for the repricer. So my recommendation to people and what I do personally is I don’t want you participating in the item continuing to drop in price. So what I want my profiles to do is to maximize my sales value, so generally what I’ll do is I’ll price lately between one cent above the lowest price, and about one a half percent above the lowest price depending on the individual products, and depending on the category.

Rarely am I going to contribute pushing the price down, because I want my price a little bit above, and you’re still able to take the buy box even at a higher price than the other buy boxes. There is many factors that go into it such as the location of the item relative to where the customer is and things like that.

Then the most aggressive profile that I usually do is matching the buy box, or matching the FBA price. So if another seller has it set to consistently beat whoever lowest price is, or they always want to be say a cent below the lowest offer available, then I will sort of contribute to that.

Another important piece with the repricer is you set up a minimum price or a floor price that repricer won’t go below regardless of what the market is doing, but then you have to take action on the listing if you wanted to drop the price further. So there’s quite a few precautions.

But yeah if people don’t know what they’re doing with repricer, it can get ugly and in reality that can create some buying opportunities too, because if two people are every 15 minutes, they are lowering their price by a penny or by 10 cents, that reduces prices very quickly, but then that creates an arbitrage opportunity to ultimately buy the item from those sellers, and sell back at the same listing.

So if you do some tricks to take advantage of those situations for profit still, but to the overall market place when the repricer gets in to the hands of someone who doesn’t know how to use it, it’s a little bit dangerous.

Steve: So you obviously need the buy box to make sales, but from what it sounds like you’re saying is that the buy box can shift multiple times during the day?

Ryan: Absolutely, different people, say someone on the East Coast and someone on the West Coast could be looking at an identical products, and see a different story on the buy box at the same exact time. So yeah the buy box is constantly rotating, and there is reports that you can run in Amazon on kind of individual item basis to see what percentage of the time you are in the buy box, and then that can help you tweak your repricing, and also create a pricing strategies at the minimum.

Steve: So what do you like to see this percentage at, because presumably all your items have other people selling on it, right?

Ryan: Most do. I would say 95% probably have other sellers. Typically the percentage, it purely depends on the demand for the product. Like if you’re selling say one of the top selling toys…

Steve: Like a chiboka mask for example.

Ryan: Like a chiboka mask, exactly. If you’re selling one of those, it might not matter if you only have the buy box one percent of the time if you have say 10 units or less. Then say it’s a book or a home improvement item that doesn’t sell very often, you might want the buy box more like 50% of the time if you can have that.

So I don’t know, it really depends on a per item basis, but at the minimum I usually like double digit percentages on most listings unless– so 10% or more unless it’s something that’s really flying off the shelves.

Steve: Interesting, do you do any bundling?

Ryan: I don’t do very much bundling; it’s mainly selling on existing listings for now.

Steve: Okay, I was going to ask for your opinion on how like Amazon’s cracking down on the bar codes right now, especially for bundling of bigger brands, but it doesn’t sound like you encounter that at all.

Ryan: Yeah, I haven’t had to deal with that juice yet, it sounds like– I mean if people want to be 100% safe, it sounds like you want a GS1 which is the official place, that’s the safest route to go. It’s more expensive, but it ensures your bases are covered.

Steve: Okay and so one question I’ve always wondered about just the whole retail and online arbitrage space is how do you consistently get goods to sell on a consistent basis?

Ryan: With this type of business, it really is all a function of spending. It’s all based on the products you’re buying and buying correctly. Over the past three years we’ve created with my business pretty specific buying guidelines that we’re looking for, and criteria that we’re looking for in products.

So we’re looking for a certain return on investment, we’re looking for a certain sales rank, certain reviews, there is some other things we factor in as well. But when we buy products that fit those criteria, and then when it’s spread out over enough skews, it has a way of being consistent over time.

I don’t know, it’s kind of like the more or less divine guidelines or the formula, if you put the right inputs into the formula, you get the right output. It’s only sure on top of if you buy right, and then if you’re on top of every pricing and making sure that you’re controlling your inventory levels on each individual item, you tend to get pretty usable results.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory costs are easily the worse aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports, whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off you first 6 months, now back to the show.

The people who are doing the buying right now for you, are they literally still walking into Wal-Marts, or do you have like a more consistent source of goods now.

Ryan: The Wal-Mart piece, some are literary still walking into Wal-Marts, but we also have– like some of our online sources are more sustainable, and then some of our wholesalers are wholesale sources where we buy direct from either the distributor, or direct from the company. Those are products we also consistently buy again and again.

Steve: How does that work actually, so are you kind of acting like a marshals in a way?

Ryan: In the sense of like buying from a distributor?

Steve: Yeah.

Ryan: Sure, in a sense it’s more or less like let’s just say I like using with the game monopoly for examples, so if you can buy that direct from Hasbro I believe they’re– it’s Hasbro or Parker Brothers, whoever makes it. You can buy that say direct from them for 6 bucks a unit, and then you can sell it Amazon for 15, and make I don’t know 3 or 4 bucks.

The way that works is essentially you buy 100 to start, then once you get down to say 25 units, you just call them up and say, “Hey I want another 100 units of this,” then you can keep selling that. So we just do that with various products on Amazon.

Steve: But someone like Hasbro is not going to want to sell to someone who just sells on Amazon, right?

Ryan: Generally speaking no. They would be able to handle that on their own, and Hasbro for example, they probably aren’t going to give someone like me the discounts that I would need to even make a profit. Yeah, this tends to work better with much smaller companies who are looking for more a soldier for their products.

Steve: Can you give me an example so like a much smaller like no name brand or?

Ryan: Yeah like a no name brands let’s say generally yeah– let’s see.

Steve: You don’t want to give away that.

Ryan: I don’t want to give away specific products, that’s kind of one of the unfortunate things about an Amazon arbitrage business is that you can’t directly promote yourself to everyone out there, or it kind of creates problems.

Steve: Well, so it’s not important what the exact company is, but why doesn’t that company just list its own stuff on Amazon?

Ryan: That’s a good question. They might not have the expertise, they might not have all the– the short answer is they should, but they might not for a variety of reasons. Like a lot of companies for example they sell products, they just might sell from a reseller presence for like physical transactions, they don’t do much in the role of e-commerce at all. There is lots of people that really don’t even know that it’s an option.

Steve: For these guys then, are you creating a new listing, or do they already have a listing existing at Amazon?

Ryan: We went only targeting ones that have an existing listing, and it will help them to improve the listing, because we just like to see some sense of demand for the products which is hard to do before it’s on Amazon, and then we’ll have to improve it if needed.

Steve: Wait okay, so they are already selling on Amazon then or?

Ryan: Well someone has sold their product on Amazon previously.

Steve: Got it, got it.

Ryan: Pretty much anybody could create a listing for any product they want regardless of if they are the actual brand or not, and then all people going forward will use that listing to sell for that unique UBC.

Steve: Okay, and so you’re helping the brand with their listing?

Ryan: Well yes, I guess so we would improve the listing which helps the brand. Ultimately I guess our main service though is helping them with sales. The way we do that though is by improving the listing that their products are on. They can go through some steps to register on their own, that’s not always something we’ll have them go through, it’s more or less…

Steve: I’m just curious like I’m that company, you’re helping me do this, after a while I’m just going to be like wow thanks, I’m going to just start shipping my own stuff there. So I’m just curious, like what the turnover is like between the vendors that you use?

Ryan: Most of the ones that we’re targeting, they’re looking to sell wholesale, like they don’t want to go direct to the consumer, they want to sell 100 units at a time, make their hit to the margin, and then they’re happy with that. I mean we don’t see a ton of turnover due to them moving on and wanting to sell the products on their own. A more likely scenario that happens is too many sellers come in that are willing to sell at a lower margin, or Amazon themselves comes in and sells that same products. Those are the bigger things that we run into.

Steve: Then there are guys who are selling you the wholesale stuff; do they have relationships directly with the brands?

Ryan: Yes, they work in direct with the brands, sometimes they represent many, sometimes they represent just one. It ultimately depends on the business and the individual.

Steve: And then do those guys have retail shops as well, or are they purely like a middle man?

Ryan: Most of them are purely a middle man.

Steve: Interesting, okay. I’m just wondering what the incentive for brands to work with these guys are? I guess there is liquidation outlets?

Ryan: Some are liquidation, like liquidation has gone to a whole another ball game. I guess the reason brands in my opinion do it is because they are good at making the products, there’s kind of like a private label or importing any product. They are just the first line of the food chain, like they get all the value with the IP that their brand has, like the components of like a game of monopoly for example costs nothing to make.

If they can sell it in bulk for six or seven bucks to one level, and then they turn around and sell it for 10, and the retailer sells it at 15, everybody gets some piece of the pie, but some of these big companies just don’t want to go through– they got the manufacturer piece, but they don’t want to get involved with the sales.

I agree with you they could cut out all these levels and create a lot of margin for themselves. I don’t think they see it as their core businesses. That’s similar to like where stores like Target and Wal-Mart, they’ll move items on clearance to clear shelf space if they don’t sell on there, so ultimately ship them as liquidators, because they know that that shelf space to them is more valuable than really recouping any value for a small percentage of the products.

It’s ultimately that each process in my opinion is just focusing on their core business and not ruining what they’re good at, at the expense of opportunities that appear to be shining objects.

Steve: Would you say that in the arbitrage game like the Holy Grail is to find these wholesale outlets as opposed walking through like a Wal-Mart or Target?

Ryan: It’s definitely a lot more sustainable, so yes. That’s ultimately the direction I’m trying to go in my business is make it sustainable

Steve: Where do you find these wholesale outlets, like do you just go on the internet, or is there a procedure for finding them?

Ryan: Pretty much we’ll go to like tradeshow websites, and see if we can find people that are looking to sell their products. Then reach out to them if their product is already on Amazon, and see if we can represent them there, or if they’re willing to sell to us, or we’ll sell it on Amazon, but then go to Google and see if we can find a distributor with the arbitrage on to you.

You’re selling a ton of different products, so you know what sells well in some cases, and you might not be able to get it in retail stores any more. You could go and look at the packaging and then go direct to the source, and see if you can find it that way. So there is quite a few different options for finding them.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Ryan: It really comes down to preference though, like the deals are out there in retail stores, they are out there on online stores; they are out there in wholesale. It’s just thinking which one is your focus, and go on with it. In my opinion resale arbitrage is a really good way to keep and create cash to ultimately find out the things…

Steve: Sure.

Ryan: That’s the route my business has taken. We’ve been doing that for a long time, we’ve got good systems in place, so there is no point of really slowing down, but with the excess cash flow, that’s starting to build up a wholesale business and things that are more sustainable than just constantly going into the retail stores.

Steve: So are you doing wholesaling now then, and private labeling?

Ryan: The wholesaling like the piece where we– I guess the terms that we are…

Steve: Yeah they are a really fussy yeah.

Ryan: Yeah, so wholesale what I talk about there is purchasing direct from a distributor or manufacturer, or a brand. That we’re doing, but we’re not like wholesaling products out to someone else.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Ryan: So my college is there.

Steve: For your staff, I’m just curious like how do you assign them to source, like you got seven guys, right?

Ryan: Yup, and three of them source pretty much all the time, and then one sources some of the time, then the other three are in the warehouse working at wholesale, or working on shipping products out the door.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of your assignment, so you mentioned you do a little bit of everything, right? So how do you decide like how do you distribute resources whether you want them to go to retail stores versus reaching out to wholesalers, and that sort of thing?

Ryan: Yeah so the retail stores we’ve got schedules for each person, and there are certain stores that we know that we can just historically we’ve done well on. We want to make sure we hit those stores every couple of weeks, so that we’re constantly getting those spaces covered. Then one of the guy’s primary focus is wholesale, because that’s a priority.

We let the cash available at any given point in time; we have a spending threshold that we’re looking to hit each month. Initially we’ll hit our main retail spots, our retail arbitrage type locations, spend pretty much as much as we can there. Then depending on what available budget we have left, we’ll shift the time to wholesale, because the wholesale type buying where we’re buying direct from the distributor or manufacturer, those take a little bit longer to pan out, and they are not as expensive right away. You are in charge of like…

Steve: But you have to put down more money upfront though for those, don’t you?

Ryan: You do, but normally we’re starting with the task order that’s less than $1000.

Steve: So do your workers pull up to like Wal-Mart in like 18 wheeler?

Ryan: They should, but it’s pretty normal occurrence. They actually all have just photos to dance…

Steve: Oh really, okay so we’re talking still pretty small quantities right? Whatever can fit, it’s a done.

Ryan: Yeah, it only calls for services needed, it’s up to them. I have a truck with a topper and stuff, so you can really load up if needed, but most of the [inaudible 00:38:05] there are coming from the source, so you’ll just have regular cars.

Steve: This issue of trust like what’s stopping them from just buying the stuff themselves and doing the same thing on the side?

Ryan: Sure, well we try to build that trust with each one of the guys before turning them over to be able to source. Then we also have like a basic non-compete agreement that says you’re not going to use this strategy for yourself while you’re doing it for me. They are compensated based on how much they buy too, and they only know one piece of the puzzle.

We centralize them based on the amount that they purchase, and then they still only know one piece of the puzzle, like they might see that the items sells for this, but then they’re dropping it off at our warehouse, and the rest of the process is handled for them. Even though they know quite a bit, but they don’t necessarily know everything it takes to actually make the money.

Steve: So the buyers do the buying, and then do you take care of the listing part then, is that like your secret source?

Ryan: No, listing was outsourced now too beginning in January. That’s taken care of too, but each person is fairly segmented, like a sourcer to source, the lister lists and ships, and then the shippers pretty much just process items. So try to make sure that each person right away only knows exactly what they need to, but then as they show interest and aptitude to do more, then we’ll look into moving them into other roles and get them further into the business as it makes sense.

Steve: Okay, and then so do you have like a big warehouse to run this operation then?

Ryan: My warehouse is about 725 square feet, so it’s…

Steve: Okay so it’s tiny.

Ryan: Yeah, it’s pretty much just used as a processing space. We bring the products in and then one of the benefits of having a smaller space is it forces you to get products back out the door quickly, because we’re ultimately shipping them all to Amazon’s warehouse, and then they handle the rest.

Steve: So is your turnaround like a day then?

Ryan: Most of the time that will be our average.

Steve: Okay, so I know for a fact that Amazon is making it much harder for people to arbitrage these days. Can you just comment on some of the recent Amazon changes, and how that’s affected you at all if it has affected you at all?

Ryan: Yeah, so I guess it’s very strange this particular…

Steve: I don’t know, I’m asking that question to you in general yeah.

Ryan: Okay, things that make it harder, there are certain brands or certain product lines that they are becoming stingy on I would say. For example there was a game that was selling extremely well, it was called Pie Face in December, and then Amazon– right away anybody could sell it, you could list it, but then half way through they issued restrictions, so that not everyone could sell it unless you submitted invoices.

The reason they did that was because there were counterfeit sellers mainly from overseas, but some from US as well who were selling on these listings and taking advantage of the demand. So that types of issues happening more and more. With that Amazon is doing what they can, and they are putting restrictions in place. Sometimes these restrictions come into place after you already have the items at Amazon’s warehouses, and then you’re kind of stuck with the inventory, or you have to sell via another route.

Steve: What’s your other route, just curious?

Ryan: Next option for us is usually eBay, and then after that we’re going to look to basically liquidate it. I’ve used liquidation.com before, and then there are some companies locally that will pay you effectively pennies on the dollar for items you can’t sell. So that’s our last stop, but we’re usually able to get rid of most of what doesn’t sell on Amazon on eBay.

Steve: Can you comment a little bit about just arbitrage, the landscape in general, because I know a lot of people are starting to go into it. As a result of that there is more and more people hopping on these listings, so what is your secret sauce so to speak on how to stay above like all the other people who are entering the space?

Ryan: That’s one of the things about an arbitrage opportunity is eventually people come in and try to close– not try but over time they get close. Some of the things that we do, we’re very diligent on our margins, we have very specific buying guidelines, so we can weather the storm if we need to, if the price on an item starts to increase, we’re pretty specific about where we purchase from.

With three years of experience of doing this with many people involved, we know which places are good, which places we can get better than average deals, like in some places we’re getting better deals than are available to the general public. In some cases it is as much as 50% off what the stores generally sells it for. Since we’re buying in such large quantities, we get volume discounts.

Building relationships with the right people in the stores goes a long way, and then just– I mean to the point the business is now at the point too where there is quite a bit of capital available, so we are not forced to sell products at a loss if we don’t want to. There is definitely times where we take losses, but if say we have a lot of stock in, and then because there is like a clearance at Target, it might be 3 to 6 months before that item re-bounce.

Initially when all those sellers come in, the price will go down, but if you look at prices reach outs, and there are a few sites out there that will show you these, eventually items recover. Very few the price deteriorates, and then consistently stays down. So if you are able to weather that storm and hold on until a better opportunity to sell, that creates a lot of opportunities as well, because a lot of people are looking to sell the items within say 30 or 60 days, and then they’ll sell it no matter what the prices after that timeframe.

Generally we’re looking to sell the items quickly too, but we’re not forced to just based on having more capital.

Steve: What’s your goal on moving a particular buy, within 30 days or?

Ryan: Our typical goal is within 90 days, we want to be sold out, and then that’s on some of our like higher quantity, I mean that’s the full quantity we’re buying on like a retail arbitrage buyer. Then we will adjust that too based on what the ROI percentage is. If it’s a lower ROI percentage we’re wanting it to move quicker, but if it’s say a 200% ROI we might be okay holding it for 5 to 6 months.

Steve: When you say low, low is like 50%?

Ryan: Low would be like 25%.

Steve: 25%, okay and normal is 100% for you would you say?

Ryan: I would say about 75% is pretty common for the bulk of the stuff we’re doing, and then once we’re talking wholesale or buying direct from the distributors or manufacturers, that then drops a bit, then it’s going to be anywhere from 30 to 75% range. It depends on…

Steve: Okay, but those are easier to manage, right?

Ryan: Oh yeah, you’re getting started at once, and then until you can keep some of the products as long as you want.

Steve: Okay, so let me ask you this, like how much longer do you think that this whole getting into retail arbitrage and online arbitrage is going to last?

Ryan: I think it’s going to last quite some time, so it’s hard to put an exact time line on it. Just based on what I see from myself and then all the people I know selling on Amazon, I know a lot of people that are doing quite well at it to the point where I’m confident if you know what you’re doing you can do really well.

At the same time I do see lots of people coming in, so I think eventually the gaps are going to close or start compressing. But with enough money or with enough inputs I think there is still going to be a lot of opportunity either way. I mean in reality the fact that you can go in a Wal-Mart and buy something and make 75% return on your investment in a month on products that are generally available on the shelf is ridiculous.

Steve: Yeah, it’s pretty crazy.

Ryan: Yeah, I think it’s got a long way to go. Online arbitrage, there’s tons of tools and services coming out lately that are making it more accessible to get the information you need to make purchases, but if you’re disciplined in your buys, and you really put in the time to get the right items to your research, I think there is a lot of runway for both retail and online arbitrage.

I think it’s a great way to create cash, but then at the same stroke and I think it’s wise to diversify and to wholesale or private label, or another sourcing method that’s going to be more sustainable for the long run.

Steve: So just curious you mentioned that you have really good cash flow from this, how are you expanding going forward?

Ryan: Right now we’re looking, like the primary amount of the new cash will be going to wholesale, so buying direct from the manufacturers and distributors. We will be looking to potentially add either people locally or potentially virtual assistants to help us with a lot of that research, and we’ll do the actual outreach. That’s the primary focus for the near term is to get as much money in the wholesale type accounts as possible.

In terms of financing that, it will just be through the business, like through– because at the beginning is very much to spend [inaudible 00:48:50] pretty much since the beginning I didn’t start. I started with I don’t know three to $5,000, I don’t know the exact number any more, and then use credit cards strategically, never get any interest, and then I’ve just used cash the whole way, and now we’ll do multiple millions in sales this year.

Steve: Do you guys take out loans, or is this just money within the business that you reinvest?

Ryan: I have access to a lot of credit, but I haven’t used it yet, so everything so far has just been finance with cash in the business.

Steve: Okay, that’s cool man, awesome.

Ryan: Yeah, it’s been good.

Steve: Well, hey Ryan I want to be respectful of your time, we’ve been chatting for quite a while. Where can people check out your work, I know you have a blog at Online Selling Experiment, but if anyone has any questions for you, where can they find you?

Ryan: Yeah, the best place is probably the website as you mentioned onlinesellingexperiment.com. You can email me if you want, my email is Ryan@onlinesellingexperiment.com. Twitter is @walkaway50K, and that is on the first blog post on my blog which is titled walking away from 50k, which I did after I left my job.

Steve: This is your accounting position?

Ryan: So that became the Twitter handle, so any of those places are best, but yeah reach out if you have questions.

Steve: Cool, hey well thanks for coming to the show Ryan, I really appreciate it

Ryan: Yeah Steve, thanks.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I find it amazing how Ryan has managed to scale a business model that is inherently not easily scalable, and with all the latest Amazon announcements about brand gating, I’m going to have to follow up with Ryan to see how this has affected his business.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode132. I want to thank sitelock.com once again for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should give SiteLock a look. They can also help you with your site speed issues as well, and did you know that ecommerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers.

Now SiteLock offers a service called TrueSpeed that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. Go check out SiteLock today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. If you go to that link you will get three months free. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

131: Which Ecommerce Business Model Is Right For You With Steve Chou

131: Which Ecommerce Business Model Is Right For You With Steve Chou

Today I decided to do a solo episode because it’s been a long time since I’ve taken the mic to give some of my own opinions.

A lot of people have been asking for advice lately on what type of ecommerce business model to pursue so I put together a quick and dirty episode to describe all the different models out there and give you enough information for you to make an educated decision for yourself.

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How dropshipping works
  • How private labeling works
  • How selling wholesale works
  • The pros and cons of each business model
  • Which business model is the most sustainable in the long run

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activities 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked, and a long time ago my online store actually got hacked, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues on my site, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, you can call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you even get hacked. For more information, go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I thought I do a solo episode mainly because I’ve been getting a lot of questions lately about what type of e-commerce business model to pursue. Every time I publish an article on entrepreneurship that encourages my readers to start their own businesses, I find myself tip-toeing across a very fine line.

On one hand starting an online business, an e-commerce business is pretty simple, relatively risk free, and it doesn’t require a lot of startup capital, but on the other hand running a successful business also requires a ton of hard work, perseverance, and a little bit of luck. The problem is when I emphasize the enormous amount of work that’s involved to launch a company; I tend to turn people away from wanting to start a business. But when I emphasize simplicity, people tend to harbor unrealistic expectations and expect a quick path to riches.

In fact one of the number one questions I do get asked is how long it actually takes to make good money with an e-commerce business. It’s unfortunate and this is a pattern that I’ve been seeing, but a lot of would be entrepreneurs tend to choose the business model to pursue based purely on how easy it is to start, as opposed to considering the actual probability of success. In fact just the other day I was getting emails from people asking me, why they should go through the hustle of selling physical products online when they can just be an affiliate.

Why should they start their own inventory when they can simply drop ship all their goods, and why should they even bother setting up a shopping cart when they can just put up a blog, and sell advertizing? What makes things even more confusing is that these people, they are on Facebook, and they are looking at their feeds, and every time they go on Facebook they see a brand new business guru pushing yet another e-commerce business model.

While a lot of these methods are legit, just the sheer number of choices is pretty overwhelming even to me, like I had to go through, and watch some of these webinars to just get an idea of what some of these gurus were pushing. Now I don’t really consider myself a guru, but I do get quite a few emails from readers asking for advice on what type of business model to begin.

What I thought I do today is go over all the different e-commerce business models that I’ve seen online, and give some commentary on them, and discuss the pros and cons, and let you decide for yourself. Whatever you do you should never pursue a business model simply because of how easy it is to start. Instead you got to make sure you consider other factors like the long term sustainably of the business as well as the probability of success.

Now keep in mind that when you are listening to the business models that I am about to describe, some of these business models are really easy, they have very low barriers to entry, low cost, and lower overhead. Some of these business models are easy to start, but they are super competitive. Some of these business models require a decent upfront investment to start. Some of them require inventory, some of them require that you put up your own website.

So I’m going to discuss the pros and cons of all these business models based on the following criteria, how easy it is to get started, how quickly you can make money, and the defensibility of your business and its long term potential to create sustainable income, and basically how hard it is to make money, and how easy it is for some of them to just go ahead, and all of a sudden launch a competitor to your business.

If you have been reading my blog for a long time, I have this strong belief that the more work and the more effort that you put into your business to be successful, the more sustainable your business will be in the long run, because it will be that much harder for someone to copy you. So that being said one of the most popular business models that I get asked about is drop shipping.

Now if you guys aren’t familiar with drop shipping, drop shipping is basically when you put up a website to take orders, but you don’t have to carry any inventory. Instead of fulfilling the products yourself, what happens is when you get an order, you don’t fulfill yourself, you send it over to your vendor, and then the vendor is responsible for shipping the order to the end customer.

One of the huge advantages of this business model is that you don’t have to carry any inventory; you don’t have to do any order fulfillment. It’s really cheap to start up a drop ship business, because all you need is a website essentially, and infact as part of my 6 day mini course I show you how to set up aside an open cart for 5 bucks a month, and you can easily do drop shipping with just a very simple open cart shopping cart.

It is really simple to start basically, all you need to do is find a vendor who is willing to drop ship for you, and all of a sudden you have a whole bunch of products that you can list on your site. In order to get one of these vendors to approve you, you have to show them that you are legit. Often times you might have to put up your website, and a good looking website, and populate it with mock products before you can even get approved as a retailer, but once you do get approved, you will have access to that vendor’s entire portfolio which you can list in your shop.

What’s nice about the drop shipping with your own website model also is that you are in full control of your store brand, because you own the website, but the downside of drop shipping of course is that the margins are super low. Mainly because someone else is storing all the inventory, and doing all the fulfillment for you, naturally you are going to have to pay for that.

Now the profit margins for typical drop ship stores are anywhere between 10 and 30%, and most people who I have met, who have had successful drop ship stores tend to sell products that are more expensive, anywhere from $200 to $1000. Because the profit margins are slimmer, you want to sell more expensive products to make up for that fact.

Now because the margins are so low, paid advertizing becomes a little bit more challenging, because you don’t have as much margin to play with, and as a result of that often times you are going to be stuck relying on search engine optimization only, and all the free traffic that Google can get for you, or you might rely on social media or Pinterest or Facebook.

Some of the drop shippers that I know who have been successful, they have been able to run Google shopping campaigns successfully, but in terms of regular Adwords or Facebook ads, they have not been able to get that profitable, mainly because it requires a larger margin to get those advertizing mediums to work.

Now the other thing that can be problematic as well with drop shipping is that you might be competing with other shops carrying the exact same product you are, except physically carrying inventory, and because their margins are higher they have a little bit more flexibility in what they can do with their products in terms of promotions and that sort of thing. Finally since you are selling other people’s products, you aren’t really in control of the product mix. A vendor can obsolete a product at any time, and you will have to update your website accordingly.

The other downside of drop shipping is that you are not really in control of your customer support, because you are not the one fulfilling the products. And so let’s say an order comes in, and you send it over to your vendor, and the customer complains that they never got it, well guess what, you are responsible for the fulfillment even though you are not the one doing it. What ends up happening is you have to contact the vendor and act as the go between, between the customer and your vendor to make sure the product reaches the end customer.

Anything that goes wrong it’s on you; it’s your store’s reputation and not your vendor’s. What’s also complicated also is maintaining inventory issues, because you don’t really want to be selling stuff when your vendor is out of stock. And so you want to make sure you work with the right vendors that have the EDI system in place, so that you can track the inventory and make sure you don’t sell something that is accidentally out of stock. But overall what makes a drop shipping a little bit more fragile in terms of business model for me, is that you’re heavily dependent on your vendors for your business reputation.

A vendor can cancel the drop shipping arrangement anytime. They can discontinue products, and basically you are at their mercy. The other thing I don’t like of course is the fact that the margins are low, which greatly limits the paid advertizing options. For our store at Bumblebee Linens, we spend a lot of money on paid advertizing, because it converts very well, and our margins are really high, so that we can afford to do them.

The next business model I want to talk about is drop shipping from Amazon to eBay. Now this is also known as eBay Amazon arbitrage, and here is how it works. First you find products at Amazon that are selling higher on eBay, and then you take the images and the product copy from the Amazon product, and you post an identical listing on eBay that is significantly higher in cost.

There is a bunch of courses and software out there that will do this for you pretty automatically, and the reason this business model works is because people who shop on eBay tend not to shop on Amazon, and for some reason there is a lot of people on eBay who are not aware that eBay is not the cheapest place to be shopping. As soon as the auction closes on eBay the seller then purchases the exact same product on Amazon, and has it shipped over to the eBay customer.

And so basically you are just leveraging the difference in prices from Amazon and eBay. What ends up being problematic to the brand owner is that the product gets shipped in an Amazon box. Let’s say you are an eBay customer and you get shipped a product in an Amazon box, you are going to be thinking to yourself, what’s going on here, and you might actually go and check up on Amazon for that exact same product, and then discover that you got ripped off.

Usually what happens is that that customer will complain to the brand directly, which usually results in a return, and so just this practice tends to piss off brand owners. I know a couple of brand owners who have complained and have gotten some of these eBay sellers banned, so this is a pretty dangerous business model. Personally I actually hate people that do this, but it is attractive if you want a business that has no over head costs, there is no website required, you don’t need vendors at all.

Basically all you need is an eBay account, and an Amazon purchasing account, and that’s it. Easy to get started, but you know you are going to get nasty letters from brand owners, you might get banned on eBay, you might get banned on Amazon. Personally I just don’t like people who do this business model, because you are not really adding any value at all. The other big downside of course is that you constantly have to be on the lookout for new products, and you have to watch the prices on Amazon like a hawk to make sure that you are still making a profit.

Overall that business is great for cash flow, but I wouldn’t even really call that a business, it’s more like money making scheme that’s temporary. The next business model I want to talk about is called retail arbitrage or RA for short, and it has become increasingly popular over the last couple of years because of Amazon. If you recall I had Jessica Larrew on the podcast a while back. She makes 6 figures doing this, and she has been teaching other people how to do this as well, and here is how it works.

Basically you walk into a liquidation store like a TJ Max or a Marshalls, and you go straight to the clearance section, and you will find that there is always going to be products that are cheaper than Amazon retail prices. So you basically go in, you buy the entire clearance section, and then you list those products on Amazon. The reason this model works is because a lot of consumers don’t have access to some of these stores, the only thing they have access to is Amazon, and so they are willing to pay higher prices.

What’s really nice about this business model is that you don’t need a website, you can leverage Amazon’s huge market place for instant sales, there is practically no start up cost except for your initial inventory. But the major downside here is that your business is 100% at the mercy of Amazon, and you basically constantly need to go on these shopping trips to find new goods to list on the platform, which basically means that the amount of money you can make doing retail arbitrage is limited to the amount of time you can go shopping for bargains.

Also in the last couple of weeks I would say Amazon has introduced a lot of new rules that strongly discourage this business model. So for example Amazon has been preventing sellers from selling certain brands without approval from the manufacture. Let’s say you just bought a couple of thousand dollars worth of Legos …

I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running e-commerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory cost are easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in e-commerce businesses. They are experts at handling all e-commerce related reports, whether they be from Amazon, Shopify, Big Commerce, Stripe, you name it.

All you got to do is sign up and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you. So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it is reasonably priced, and the best part is you can get 20% off your 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co./mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months, now back to the show.

Recently Amazon actually started gating Lego products, and so you spend a couple of grand on this and guess what? Obviously you can’t sell this on Amazon anymore, and you are stuck with a couple of grand worth of legos that you can’t really get rid of because you can no longer sell those on Amazon. In fact all it takes is for Amazon to shut down a couple of brands that you have inventory of, and could shut your business down just like that. That’s why retail arbitrage is risky right now.

Amazon is placing more focus on supporting brands which does not favor retail arbitrage. They’ve also introduced some large upfront cost to sell certain brands anywhere from $500 to $5000 from what I heard just for the privilege of selling a brand. And also recently they’ve started enforcing using GS1 bar codes that where your barcodes must actually match the brand that you are selling. All of those factors are making retail arbitrage really difficult right now, and so as a result, while this business is easy to do and it can be lucrative, it is pretty risky right now because Amazon can ban your brand.

Next business model I want to talk about is drop shipping on Amazon, and drop shipping on Amazon against versus your own site, they are actually quite similar. The only difference is that you are drop shipping to people who’ve bought on Amazon instead, and the procedure is the same. You need to find drop ship vendors who are willing to ship products to the end customer on your behalf, and it’s important to note that this business model does not use FBA or fulfilled by Amazon.

Basically you are responsible for filling the order to the end customer in a timely manner, and this business model is attractive because there is no start up cost, you don’t need a website. Because you are going with a drop ship vendor you can instantly have hundreds of products at your disposal that you can list on Amazon, but of course the problem with drop shipping is that everyone has access to the exact same products. The fact that it is so easy to list something on Amazon, there is probably a high probability that particular item that you are trying to drop ship on Amazon is already being listed on there.

The other thing that’s extremely dangerous about this business model is that Amazon has really strict requirements on seller quality, and on time shipments. That’s why finding a reliable vendor is of the utmost of importance. So let’s say you have a huge sale, and you sell a whole bunch of products, but for some reason your distributor or your vendor has had an inventory glitch, and you can’t really fulfill the products to the end customers, and so what you end up doing is you have to cancel a whole bunch of orders on Amazon.

Well guess what? Amazon is probably going to ban your account for doing that. Like I said Amazon is really strict on, on time shipments, and the fact that you don’t cancel orders that you’ve already taken in. If you guys are interested in this business model, in episode 108 of my podcast, my buddy John Rampton, he was doing drop shipping on Amazon, and he actually got banned for the exact same reason I just described.

Basically he lost his 7 figure business overnight. So while this business model is very easy to get into, and it doesn’t have that much upfront cost to it, it is extremely risky, and it’s not really a sustainable business model. If you are thinking about doing this business model, go and listen to episode 108 first.

All right the next business model is private labeling your own goods. Now private labeling is the act of placing your own brand or label on a product that you produce yourself. Basically the way it works is you first have to find a manufacturer to produce products for you in bulk, and basically they will allow you to put your own brand on the product. What a lot of people are doing right now is they are going to Ali Baba to find these manufacturers.

Once you produce your product, you then ship off all of your goods to Amazon FBA, and you take advantage of Amazon’s huge market place to sell your goods. Because you are manufacturing, and you are buying your own products in bulk, you have to put more money upfront to actually get those products into Amazon’s warehouse first. So the typical minimum of investment I would say to do a private label product, the minimum, absolute minimum, is plan on the order of $500.

Preferably you should have a 1000 or a couple of 1000 in order to purchase that initial inventory. In general what’s really nice about this business model is that you don’t need a website, you don’t need to generate your own traffic, because Amazon’s market place is getting you all the sales. There are no inventory requirements, because Amazon is housing all of your inventory, and the best part is that you are producing products with your own brand on it, so in theory there are no competitors.

Now overall this business model is a little bit more challenging than the others, because it requires interaction with a vendor outside the country typically. You will have to likely deal with an Asian vendor where the cultures are different, but the big positive is that you own your own brand, you own your own products, and the margins are super high, greater than 66%. In fact for our store, for our private label products, our margins tend to be on the order of 75 all the way up to 95%. Because Amazon’s market place is so large, you can make a lot of money really quickly especially over the holidays when Amazon goes nuts.

Now the downside of course of private labeling on Amazon is that you are dependent on Amazon. It’s been getting really competitive lately. If you have a successful listing on Amazon chances are you will get piggy backed or hijacked. What that basically means is you might have other sellers trying to sell on your listing something that is not the exact same product, and the upshot of this is if you end up selling a popular product, you basically have to monitor your products like a hawk.

You also have to monitor your feedback for your products, because Amazon can ban you at anytime in the event that you get a string of negative feedback. The reason why this is really dangerous is because you are investing a large sum upfront for inventory, and so if you ever do get banned on Amazon for any reason, you could get stuck with a lot of unsellable products.

Now I have been selling private labeling products on Amazon for a couple of years now, and the market place is pretty cut throat, and I’ve met and encountered a bunch of scumbag sellers. I’ve gotten tons of piggy backers. I had one dude over the holidays, he bought up all my inventory, so I had nothing to sell for that particular product over the holidays, and then once the holidays were over, he ended up returning all the merchandize, and so I didn’t get to keep the money for those products, and I lost out on the holiday sales as well.

Stuff like this is going to happen, and it’s just a fact of doing business on Amazon. But you know overall selling private label products is actually the way I recommend, because you own the brand, you own the product, and you have the option of selling these private label products on your own website. It is by far the most sustainable way of making money on Amazon of any of the other models that I have presented so far.

Next business model I want to talk about is closely related to selling private label products on Amazon, it’s selling wholesale products on Amazon using FBA. To sell wholesale products on Amazon, you first have to find distributors who offer a variety of products to sell, and basically you buy those products that you think are going to be profitable, and then you list them on Amazon.

You send the on Amazon using FBA, and margins are typically on the order of 50%. Now similar of a private labeling, there is very few barriers to entry, you just need some product, then you just ship over to Amazon, and Amazon pretty much does the rest. You don’t really need a website. All you basically need to do is find wholesalers with large product catalogues.

Once you sign up with a couple of vendors, you instantly have access to hundreds of products to sell at your disposal. The main difference between private labeling and selling wholesale is that when you sell wholesale, you don’t have to buy a large upfront quantity of goods like private labeling. When you are doing wholesale often times the minimum order for a particular product is on the order of $100.

When you do wholesale, it’s really easy to just get a bunch of product, and just list them on Amazon, see which one sells, discard the ones that don’t sell, and then focus on the ones that do. But the main downside to selling wholesale on Amazon is that you are probably going to be selling the exact same product as someone else, and the thing about Amazon is that it’s really easy to list a product on there.

And so if you are listing a product on there, chances are someone is also listing the exact same product as well, and when that happens the price tends to erode really quickly. This is actually something that happened to my buddy Lass. For about a year he was the only seller of this wholesale product on Amazon, but all of a sudden got discovered by someone else. Then it was only a matter of months, it happened so quickly, and he said all of a sudden he had all this inventory that he couldn’t make a profit on, and he ended up having to just liquidate everything for no profit.

Selling wholesale on Amazon might sound attractive on the surface. In terms of long term potential, and sustainably, it’s not so great because you are selling other people’s products on Amazon, and chances are there is going to be others selling the exact same thing. Moving right along the next business model is selling wholesale products on your own website, and carrying inventory. Now 5 years ago this was pretty much the only business model around.

It’s a pretty traditional model, you basically carry products, you hold inventory, and then you ship to people who buy from your website. Margins tend to be on the order of 50% when you do wholesale, and you need to handle your own inventory, which is a negative to a lot of people, but you can use a 3PL or a 3rd Party Logistics firm to handle the shipping and fulfillment for you, or you can even use Amazon FBA. Whenever an order comes in, you can go on Amazon’s interface and have Amazon ship a product to the end customer, and so that way you can list on Amazon as well on your own website pretty easily.

Now what’s nice about doing wholesale on your own site once again is that the minimum order is a lot less than private label, often times on the order of 100 bucks. The main advantage of selling on your own website wholesale versus Amazon is that you are in control of your store brand; you are in control of what your shop looks like. You can probably do a better job with the sales process, putting content on there to convince people to buy, having an email sequence, and a funnel again to convert customers over.

The downside of selling wholesale once again as with all wholesale business models is that you are selling the same products as other people, and whenever that happens the prices tend to erode pretty quickly. You really need to differentiate yourself based on content and the sales experience in your customer service in the event that you decide to sell wholesale on your own site.

Now I saved the best business model for last which is basically selling private label products on your own website. It has the highest long term potential, because you are in charge of everything. You own the product because you are manufacturing your own products. You are driving traffic to your own store, you are in control of your own traffic, your own advertizing and everything. The downside of course is that you really need to know how to do all of these things on your site. You can’t rely on Amazon to drive traffic for you.

You basically have to learn how to drive traffic yourself, and similar to selling private label on Amazon it does require some upfront capital as well to import some of these goods from overseas, but it does carry the greatest long term sustainability. You are in control, you can set pricing, you can define the product however you want, you can never get banned by anyone. So in the long run, and this is the business model that I really favor in case you want to start a long term sustainable business.

If you are willing to put forth the work, selling your own branded products on your own site is easily the most secure way to run an e-commerce business. We have been in business since 2007, and things are still going strong, we have been growing in double and triple digits every single year. That’s just a high level overview of all the different e-commerce business models that I’ve seen around, and based on the webinars that I’ve been seeing on Facebook as well which I’ve watched.

Those are the basic e-commerce business models that people are pushing right now. Now it’s important to note that there is nothing that excludes you from combining the different models, so for example just because I run my own site doesn’t mean that I can’t sell on Amazon as well. Just because I sell my own private label products does not mean that I can’t drop ship either, and just because I sell private label products on Amazon doesn’t mean that I can’t mix it up and sell wholesale products on Amazon as well.

I suggest that you give all these business models a try to see which one fits your personality, but overall just keep in mind that selling private label products is the way to go in the long run if you want to create a sustainable business. It doesn’t matter whether you are selling on Amazon or your online store, owning your own brand and your products is the way to go. My philosophy is that if you are going to be spending the time and the effort to launch a business, you may as well chose a business model that is built to last, something that is sustainable in the long run.

Now for our e-commerce, we sell private label products on Amazon, we sell private label products on our own store, and we also sell wholesale products on our own store as well. In the past, in the very beginning, we also dropped hipped a couple of items to fill out our store, because when we first launched we didn’t have a whole lot of products in our store. So in order to fill out some of the categories we had a couple of drop shipped items that we actually ended up not really selling that many, because we jacked up the price, but it was just there to make the store look fuller.

One thing that you guys can do though if you are a little bit more risk averse is you can start out selling wholesale, and then find the wholesale goods that are selling the best, and then go and private label those products. Try to produce your own brand, make modifications to make those products better, and then just start selling under your own brand. The key thing to remember is that the more effort that you place on your business, the more defensible it’s going to be.

If there is one take away that you take out of this episode is that you don’t want to be tempted into just starting a business just because it’s quick and easy and little risk, because chances are it’s not going to be sustainable. Now let’s just take retail arbitrage for example, Amazon is already changing the rules by preventing any arbitrage seller from selling certain brands. I know for a fact that Amazon is going to be starting brand central pretty soon, which will allow other private label sellers to prevent other people from piggy backing on their brands.

And so when it comes down to just starting an e-commerce business, you really need just to be conscious of your cash flow needs, and decide whether you are going to be satisfied with doing something that’s a little bit more temporary in nature versus something built to last. One of the main reasons I like the private label route is because the barriers to entry are higher, because you got to source products, establish relationships with vendors in Asia. That’s one extra thing that a competitor has to do to copy your business idea, and that’s not even taking to account the relationships with the vendors that I have.

Those are very valuable, and it’s very hard for someone to replicate a relationship, because it takes time to establish that. And of course because I manufacture a lot of my own products, and I control my own website, it’s much more difficult for someone else to carry the exact same products, or to copy my site. I’ve got years of SEO work in there, I’ve got years of content, I’ve got years of B to B customers that I have built up overtime, and it’s really hard to take that away.

On the Amazon front as well, you know once brand central kicks in, it’s going to be hard for other people to sell my products as well. Amazon is less defensible than having your own website, but it’s really good to just launch your products on Amazon, pick the ones that are doing well, and then create your own website based on the products that are doing well on Amazon. Okay, and so hopefully that has provided you with a high level overview of all the business models.

I really don’t recommend drop shipping on Amazon or selling wholesale on Amazon, or especially doing the Amazon eBay arbitrage in the long run, because those business models tend to be less defensible. Well I hope you enjoyed that solo episode, and going forward I might mix in more solo podcasts in with the interviews if the response is positive.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode131. I also want to thank sitelock.com once again for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should probably give SiteLock a look. They can help you with your site, and your site speed issues as well, and did you know that e-commerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers.

Now SiteLock also has a service called TrueSpeed, which is a content delivery network that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. Go check out SiteLock today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob, once again that is sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

130: Tips And Tricks On How To Find Suppliers And Source Product In Asia With Manuel Becvar

Tips And Tricks How To Find Suppliers And Source Product In Asia With Manuel Becvar

Today I have Manuel Becvar on the show. Now Manuel and I had exchanged several emails in the past few years but it wasn’t until Will Tjernlund and Peter Zapf of Global Sources and I started chatting did I get to know Manuel.

If you’ve never heard of Manuel, he runs ImportDojo.com which is a site that helps others source goods from Asia.

In fact, Manuel runs a sourcing service as well and he has been helping me source a few things from China.

Anyway, Manuel has a ton of experience sourcing products from Asia and he’s got a ton of contacts as well.

What You’ll Learn

  • The best way to find good suppliers
  • Services that Manuel recommends
  • Alibaba vs Global Sources vs Canton Fair vs Panjiva and Import Genius
  • How to perform quality control in Asia
  • How to negotiate MOQs.
  • How to get the attention of a supplier to let them know you’re serious.
  • How to attract quality suppliers.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Manuel Becvar on the show. Now Manuel and I exchanged several emails in the past, but it actually wasn’t until Will Chanlin and Peter Zapf of Global Sources and I started chatting did I start getting to know Manuel better. For all of you who have never heard of Manuel, he runs ImportDojo.com, which is a site that helps others source goods from Asia.

In fact Manuel runs a sourcing service as well, and he’s actually been helping me source a couple of things from China. I’ll probably write about the experience as soon as I have some product in hand to talk about. Anyway Manuel has a ton of experience sourcing products from Asia, and he’s got a ton of contacts as well. His blog at ImportDojo.com is also an excellent resource that you should check out as well.

With that, welcome to the show Manuel. How are you doing today man?

Manuel: Hey Steve, doing great. Thanks for having me on the show. I’m really excited.

Steve: We’ve been chatting for a little bit. I never got the whole back story. How did you get started in ecommerce, and what was the back story behind Import Dojo?

Manuel: It goes a long way I guess. Originally I’m from Austria. I moved to Hong Kong in was late 2005 when I was asked by a big DIY retail in Austria to take care of some of the import products in their sourcing office in Hong Kong. I moved to Hong Kong in 2005, and I’ve been working for this retailer and sourcing office for a while.

Then I changed jobs and essentially I ended up going back to that same company again in 2011. I was there until 2014. From 2005 to 2014 I was in several different positions in different companies mainly sourcing, going to China, accompanying buyers to factories, going to the exhibitions, negotiating prices, the whole package as a product manager based in Hong Kong.

Steve: What type of products were you sourcing for those companies?

Manuel: Mainly electronics actually. A couple of household products, but I think I’d say my expertise really lies in electronics, consumer electronics, household electronics, lighting, solar items, pretty much everything would apply. Beginning of 2014 I always wanted to have my own company, but never really figured out the right idea. Then in 2014 I just started to contact a couple of my customers.

They were really interested in my idea which was mainly purchasing products from China, consumer electronics, but modify them, improve them, put my own private label on them, have a nice packaging. In 2014 I started Mandarin Gear which is still my consumer electronics brand. I started out offering to my existing and older customers.

I started to realize that most of the people don’t really have any idea how to import from China, and all the regulations, the processes that come along with it. In late 2014 I also got into Amazon a little bit, but not that much. I started to write up a little guide on importing which quickly turned into a 65 pages eBook called the Import Bible. I think people can download it on my site for free.

I realized people want to know more. Not just the basic process, but also in-depth knowledge on sourcing from China, how to deliver to Amazon and the whole package. I created Import Dojo in early 2015 which was in the beginning just really a blog, and then where you can download my free eBook. I wrote three more books, and then made this into an online course with over 100 video tutorials right now.

On the side I started offering sourcing for mainly Amazon sellers who are not comfortable working with Chinese suppliers, or who like the experience or just want someone professional to handle the entire thing. All the while I also focused on my own Amazon business, and that’s what I’m doing today.

Steve: Can we talk about Mandarin Gear a little bit. What does that sell?

Manuel: Mandarin Gear sells Bluetooth speakers, smart phone accessories, but also have a French press of house hold product into it. They’ll be 3 new products under the brand coming up, but Mandarin Gear I mostly sell to retailers in Europe, the retail, not ecommerce.

Steve: I see, so you’re wholesaler.

Manuel: Exactly. I improve the product. Let’s say a Bluetooth speaker, I see it at the factory, I like to design, but for example the sound output is not good, or the finishing is not good. What I essentially did is I changed some of the components inside, made the sound better, changed the finishing let’s say from cheap plastic looking to rubber coating, and a nice packaging instruction manual and all that. Then put my label on top and offer it to buyers in Europe together with customer sales follow up and customer service.

Steve: How did you find your customers for that business?

Manuel: Mainly those were all contacts that I gathered in the 10 years that I was working as an employee in Hong Kong.

Steve: I see, okay.

Manuel: I was working as a sales person at some point, but also as the product manager for the retailer. I’ve collected a lot of contacts in the industry.

Steve: How does that differ from selling to the consumer like on Amazon versus being a wholesaler? Would you say that it’s easier? It’s harder? Okay.

Manuel: Oh no. It’s a lot more difficult, and it takes a long time. For some of my products I’m working on a customer for over a year now. They have long processes especially the big companies. There’re so many hierarchies and so many decisions, different decision makers. People quit their jobs. You need to talk to a new decision maker. The product goes through a long testing period. They need a lot of different samples. They want improvements done.

It’s complicated, but let’s say if you have a large retailer, and you’ve been working on that retailer for a long time and they do place an order, the benefits are good, are great because in one go you can sell 10,000, 20,000, 30,000 units of a product. Even if you only make a dollar profit on it, that’s $30,000 in your pocket in one day.

Steve: Right, and they’ll probably buy consistently from you too, right?

Manuel: Exactly. It’s about the reorders from those retailers. They will not just place reorders for the existing items. Once you have created a trustworthy relationship, they’ll also be interested in sourcing other products from you. You extend your assortment with them in a way. It has its up and downs, but it’s a lot more difficult to deal with retails than selling yourself on Amazon or ecommerce.

Steve: Is that why you’ve transitioned over to Amazon?

Manuel: Yes. One reason is because it’s easier. It’s not easy but it’s easier. Also retail slowing down a lot, ecommerce is hurting the retail in Europe massively. I’ve got all my retailers complaining, “Look, we need better prices. Amazon.de or UK, the prices are a lot lower.” Customers can have it within 2 days from the comforts of their homes.

Less and less people go actually into shops unless it’s a textile product or shoes or clothing. They still go to the store for that, but simple products, consumers are really shifting to ecommerce in Europe, and that’s hurting the retailers a lot.

Steve: Interesting. Do you sell the same products to your retailers? Do you sell the same items on Amazon?

Manuel: No. The ones I sell to the retailers are not available on Amazon.

Steve: I see. I was going to ask if you’re competing against your own customers.

Manuel: No.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about your fall away into Amazon. You have a sourcing company, and you obviously deal with a bunch of people, who you say don’t quite understand the sourcing process that well. What are some of the common mistakes that you’re seeing with some of the new people who are trying to source products from Asia?

Manuel: I think the most common mistake is not to have any inspections. Just the other day I was talking in a Facebook group. Someone said can you ship directly to Amazon? And I said, “Yes. I’ve been doing it a long time.” And she asked me what are the pitfalls, and it should be okay if I asked the supplier to take a few photos and send to Amazon. And I’m like, no, I mean there are so many things that can go wrong during a production.

The number one thing I tell people is always have an inspection, because even if you have a very good relationship with your sales contact at the factory, he’s not assembling the product.
Also in the production line, there can be many mistakes and even if you– let’s say you give very clear directions what the packaging is to look like, or how many labels you need, I’ve seen it so many times. I think I never had any inspection that went pass on the first time.

First of all, always have an inspection, second do a thorough background check on your supplier, not just trusting let’s say Alibaba goods supplier or background checked. You really need to look into each supplier’s in-depth, ask them for company registration certificates for different products. You need to ask who are his customers, which markets does he work for.

When you get the feeling okay this guy is delivering for example products to the Middle East, and he’s never worked with a customer in the US, I mean it’s probably very difficult to handle my order for the US. So make sure you work with suppliers that really work in your market, that know your requirements and most of all that are interested in working with you.

I mean if you are having troubles speaking to a supplier in the beginning and not getting answers to your questions, imagine how it would be when you actually later placed the order and tried to work with him. Find suppliers that are actually interested in your business.

Steve: Let’s talk about the– sorry.

Manuel: Just one last thing. Always get samples. Never place orders just through email, never having seen the actual product and probably get samples from different suppliers as well. I think those are let’s say three to four main pitfalls that people should look into.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about the inspection process. Do you grab samples off the line as well as do an inspection at the very end? What is your procedure? Who do you use and how much does it cost?

Manuel: Right now I use two different inspection companies. One is called chinaqualitycheck.com. It’s a very simple inspection service. I mean, they charge $100, but I only use them for like really simple products. Let’s say I have a big brush, or let’s say a silicon product that doesn’t need a lot of testing or handling in the production.

And on the other hand I work with AsiaInspection. I think it’s other really popular right now. They charge $309. The prices that I mentioned here are for final shipping inspection. So that’s not an online inspection or drawing any samples. That’s just the inspection before shipment.

I use them for like more complicated products, although I’ve used them for my recent products and the French press which is also the case study which required a bit more of looking into products. If I have an electronic product, I always use AsiaInspection. And in some cases I even use let’s say really reputable companies like TUB, Bureau Veritas or even Intertek in some cases, but they charge $400, 500 up.

Steve: So do you do any online inspection as well, or just at the end before the delivery?

Manuel: Sometimes. If I work with a supplier for a long term already, I do just the final inspection. But let’s say I have a complicated or difficult product, and I’m working with a supplier for the first time, I’ll probably also have an online inspection just to make sure everything is according to my requirements, and not that I show up on the last day of production with the final inspection, and I find out too many problems that can’t be reworked any more. So sometimes yes. If I work with a new factory, I also have online inspections.

Steve: Has it ever happened to you where at the very end the entire batch was bad?

Manuel: Not bad in a way that you couldn’t rework it anymore, but yes it happened quite a few times already. I mean mostly it’s labels missing or scratches on the product or dusty or whatever, but it also happened that– for example I got a completely different color manufactured, and I found that at the final inspection. That was too late.

Steve: So what do you say to the manufacturer at that point?

Manuel: Well, I do have contracts and purchase order agreements in place. So whenever I place an order, I tell him right away, these are my requirements. I will do an inspection, I pay for it. If there is anything wrong, and I find out during the inspection, we have to do a re-inspection and he has to rework the goods until they are what I ordered. If he doesn’t do that, he doesn’t get the rest of his money. Yeah, that’s pretty much.

Steve: I’m just wondering if any relationships that you had have been strained as a result of an inspection at the very end not turning out how you want, and then the manufacturer actually not making any money on the deal, because what they did was not up to your specifications.

Manuel: It happens. I had a product recently that didn’t go so well in the production, and in the end we had to rework twice and the supplier was not really willing to do any rework, but there’s nothing you could do. I mean he’s still waiting for his money and eventually we shipped the product and everything was okay. But I mean he’s not happy. Obviously he wants me to reorder or he wants me to place new order so that he can make up the loss.

For me, it really depends. If the supplier is like, “Okay, we realize the problem, we apologize, we’ll rework it, it’s all on our cost,” I may go ahead with the supplier in the future. But if he’s like really unwilling to help, and if he screws up the order entirely then yeah, I’ll just try to get the product shipped out, see that it’s okay. Well, if it really sells well, I’ll probably look for a supplier parallel. Yeah, I might not work with him again.

Steve: How do you find your suppliers?

Manuel: I have the advantage of being here for 11 years and every year I go to I’d say 20 to 25 exhibitions. So I’ve made a lot of contacts in the past. That’s why we also– I think I mentioned that before, we have a sourcing company. We have a database of over 1500 suppliers. We’ve collected a lot of context in the past. But for all of your listeners out there, I think the safest or best way to go is alibaba.com or globalsources.com where you can find most of your products.

I do go on through there sometimes especially if I look for new products, and we don’t have a supplier for it yet. You go through the background check, the vetting process with those suppliers. It’s the same as with my existing suppliers, I still do background check with them, because maybe management has changed, or they’ve changed the location or the production line has increased or decreased even.

Steve: Can we talk about your background check process? What do you do?

Manuel: All right, let’s say I have to go through Alibaba or let’s say I found a supplier at the exhibition. The first thing I probably do, I send him a general email with my company information. I also attach my company profile. It’s a simple PDF that I’ve put together, who I am. I introduce myself professionally, because I want him to have the feeling, “Okay this guy is serious.”

And if I see in the first reply that he doesn’t reply my questions, I know that he is not serious and I won’t move forward with him anyway. But if he’s serious, I will ask him for, I want to see his company registration. I will send him an exo [ph] file, I call it my vendor profile where he has to fill in certain things like how much turnover does he have, where is his factory located? Who are his customers? Which markets does he work with? Does he have certifications, like for example, FTA, or MCC for electronic products?

I want to see a couple of those, let’s say softcopies of the PDF reports. I want to see them. I want to actually see the certificate is issued in his name, and the certificate is not 25 years old. I want him to be proactive and deliver all those things to me, and if I feel he does that and he over delivers maybe, I feel comfortable working with him.

Steve: That’s interesting. You start out with those questions like right on the first interaction.

Manuel: Yes mostly. I mean, if I’m– let’s say I’m serious about a product that I really want to develop, then my first email will be very detailed to the supplier with a lot of questions.

Steve: I see. Can you comment a little bit about Alibaba versus Global Sources?

Manuel: I like both. Not sure I’m allowed to say who I prefer.

Steve: Yeah let’s not do that.

Manuel: I think we both know Peter from Global Sources is doing an excellent job on helping the community, but having said that Alibaba is great to find everything. You find really pretty much anything on Alibaba. It’s actually not been out there as long as Global Sources. Global Sources has longer background, but you may not find everything on Global Sources than you find on Alibaba.

Alibaba has good filters to actually find and search the supplies and products that you need. Global Sources on the other hand also has different background checks for example they do an actual credit check with the factory. They actually sometimes go to their office and check if they really operate in that specific location. For example I exhibited as a supplier of myself with Mandarin Gear last year in April at the Global Sources show.

To get there you have to actually have to be listed on Global Sources, and I had to go through a 3 stage verification process. They actually checked with me as a supplier, who I’m I, where is my business registration, what is my business turnover and so and so. I have gone through it personally, and I can say they are very professional on checking the suppliers.

Since I’m not on Alibaba I can’t say much about that, but one thing Alibaba is really quoted is the mass of products that you can find there. There is good suppliers on Alibaba and on Global Sources as well.

Steve: When would you use one over the other?

Manuel: If it’s a really special product, I’d probably only find it on Alibaba. If it’s a really common product, but I need to find a very good supplier, maybe even a bit more pricey, then I would probably go on to Global sources.

Steve: Reading between the lines it seems like Global Sources, the quality of the vendors tend to be better than Alibaba, because they do more vetting. Whereas it sounds like Alibaba has a much wider breadth of product options as opposed to Global Sources for that reason.

Manuel: I think that is correct, absolutely yes.

Steve: Have you ever used Panjiva or ImportGenius before?

Manuel: No I haven’t, actually I have never used them. I know that ImportGenius, I think you find suppliers based on records, is that correct?

Steve: That is correct.

Manuel: Never used them.

Steve: Just curious and I have a bunch of students in my class, and I’m just what is your procedure for doing this is. How do you negotiate minimum order quantities in the beginning for some of those people who might not have as much money to invest in upfront shipment of products?

Manuel: What you have to consider is that most Amazon sellers including myself, we are actually small fish for most factories. Retailers place orders of 10000, 20000, 30000 pieces up. When you come to a supplier and you say, “Okay I want the color box packaging, I want labels on it, I want engraving or logo on my product, and I want 300 pieces.” They are going to laugh at you.

What you need to consider is that it takes a factory a lot of work and effort to actually produce let’s say 500 pieces. It can be done within an hour or so, but to set up the production line just for this very small client, and disturb the regular production line for the large client. It’s a lot of effort for the factory. Some of them are unwilling to do smaller quantities.

Having said that I think you can approach it from 2 different ways. First you may want to only go for white box packaging, so that the supplier doesn’t have to bring a large quantity of packaging. If possible second option, you have to appeal to his business sense like, “All right, this is medium. Our first order, but in the future if everything goes well, we order 2000, 4000, 6000 pieces.” You appeal to his business sense and say, “For the sake of cooperation please accept my smaller order this time.”

Another thing that you can do is if the supplier tells me, “Sorry we can’t do less than a 1000 pieces.” I say, “Okay how about if I pay you 30 cents more and you do 500 pieces?” Surprisingly more suppliers are willing to do that. No one dares to ask because everyone wants to have cheap, cheap.

They may move on to a large supplier who does smaller quantities. I’d rather go with bigger suppliers who have a proper production set up, proper factory facilities, maybe a pay little bit more than the competition. You don’t ask for white box that usually brings down the MOQ by half. Appeals to his business sense and ask for corporation.

Steve: Are there any things that you do to be more attractive to a potential supplier? You mentioned this document that you send out. What does that document contain? It’s just an intro of you and your company?

Manuel: Yes, that’s actually a good point. That actually shows professionalism. That’s a good way to convince a supplier for smaller MOQs. It’s basically a PDF that I’ve created 2 years ago. Its 10 pages, basically an introduction about me and my company, what is my general turnover, which markets do I sell to.

Basically information about myself and I also show a bit of packaging examples. It’s just meaning top show the supplier, “Okay I’m not just test buyer at gmail.com who is looking for 10 samples to test the market. I’m really a serious guy who is looking to invest money into this factory and to place orders and look for a long term business relationship.”

Steve: If you are someone brand new, what would you suggest?

Manuel: I’d say take an hour, create a small PowerPoint, or at least put some wordings together on who you are when you introduce yourself to the supplier, look professional. A lot of times since I’m also a supplier as Mandarin Gear, I get emails from potential customers and they are like, “Hi there, saw your product, please quote price.” I’m like, “Who are you?

I want to do business with you, but please introduce yourself, show me that it is worth my time to actually spend time on preparing offers for you.” It takes a lot of time to prepare professional offers. I think you refuse those guys, I see it a lot with Amazon sellers who are just new that it’s not about being polite, but it’s about being professional. Show that you are a serious buyer that you want to do business in China.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory cost are easily the worse aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at hailing all ecommerce related reports, whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced. The best is that you get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that is bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off you first 6 months, now back to the show.

Let’s flip the script a little bit since you run a wholesale company. What are some things that you look for when someone is contacting for the very first time?

Manuel: You mean as a buyer? I’m the supplier, and …

Steve: Yeah you are the supplier and someone else is approaching you. What makes a proposal stand out?

Manuel: Well since I’m Caucasian, I’m Western; I have a different approach to business than most Chinese people. Most Chinese people will probably not do a thorough a research like me. When I get an email from Steve Chou mywifequitherjob.com, I probably look him up. I probably look at what he is doing, and how he is presenting himself on the internet, how he is presenting himself in the email, how he introduces himself.

I want to know what business or what are the quantities I can do with this guy, pretty much what I said. Have a proper presentation about yourself, and have online presence. At least 1 or 2 pages with about me section, and what the business does. A lot of suppliers do that actually, they look people up online. They do, yes.

Steve: They do? Let‘s switch gears a little bit and talk about one of your recent case studies that I saw on your blog where you sold $7000 worth of product in 10 days in a pretty competitive niche, and that product that you revealed was a French Press coffer maker, right?

Manuel: Correct.

Steve: Just curious, first of all why did you select a French Press which is pretty darn competitive in the first place?

Manuel: It is, yeah. I saw it in the exhibition at the Canton Fair in October 2015. I’m an avid coffee lover; I drink a lot of coffee every day. I have a proper coffee machine with the capsule machine you call it. I always loved the idea of the French Press, because I think it really looks stylish. I saw that line, and I saw it had a copper finishing. I really liked the finish, and I thought, can I actually go into that niche because I know it is very competitive.

It’s a very competitive product. I looked it up online, and there you go, there was no one with a copper version except the original brand Bodum. Their sales were very low, the price was very high. I thought, yeah actually that is a product that I could go for, because I have an advantage over those guys in terms of pricing. The look was also different in that one. I was the only other seller for this product.

Of course there are right now I think over 60 different designs on the French press on the market. I’m still doing okay now. Right now I’m not doing any promotions, because I’m waiting for my third re-order to come in. I’m almost running out of stock again for the second time. I looked it up in Amazon, I saw there’s only 1 other seller which is Bodum.

The design still looked different, and I went for it because I also had … Like I said I love coffee, and when I feel good about a product even if the competition is good. If I feel I can bring something good for this product and bring this over also in my listing, that my product is really superior, I go for it. I don’t even think too much about it, over analyzing, just go for it.

Steve: How large was your first order?

Manuel: 1008 pieces, product $4.53 including shipping, and testing and everything was about $8, $8000 investment.

Steve: It sells for?

Manuel: $29.90, I make between $14 to $16. Now that I’m shipping by sea the larger quantity, I actually make $18 profit.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about the negotiation process. What did the vendor, first of all how many vendors did you approach, and what was the initial bid, how did you negotiate them down?

Manuel: I approached a total about 10 suppliers. 4 of my own suppliers that I know have similar products, and the rest I actually found on Alibaba and Global sources. In the course I also wanted to show that I don’t just go to my own suppliers, but I also source on those sites.

I think 5 of them replied with proper answers, and some of them didn’t reply, and some of them just left out my main questions, they were avoiding my questions. I found 5 initially, they were all in a pretty similar price range, one was very obviously expensive. He was a trading company, and after the 1st round I need to …

Steve: Just curious, how many of those that passed the initial screen came from Global Sources versus Alibaba versus your own supplier?

Manuel: My own supplier which was the one I actually placed the order with. Then I had 2 from Alibaba and 1 from Global sources. Global sources didn’t have that many listings on suppliers on that product.

Steve: I think Peter is telling me that Global Sources is really good for electronics, is that accurate?

Manuel: Correct, also their exhibitions in Asia, they heavily focus on electronics actually.

Steve: Okay that was probably part of the reason why it was harder to find a French Press on that platform.

Manuel: Probably, but the one that I got on Global sources, if I remember correctly the response was very good. They were also very professional, immediately sending me a copy of certificates, and eager to do business with me from the start. The next thing I did, you really need to compare apple with apples. I checked is the material the same for all products? Is the outlook the same, and eventually you order sample.

I didn’t really negotiate the prices right away. I filtered down to 3 suppliers who really had a good response. There was 1 Alibaba supplier, 1 Global Sources, and my own supplier that I met at the exhibition that were in the run. Yeah, I approached all three of them, all different samples. And prices were pretty similar on all three, but I just had the best feeling with the guy that I actually met at the show, because I met him personally.

Steve: Right, yes of course okay.

Manuel: If I wouldn’t have met this guy, I probably would have gone either with Alibaba or Global Sources supplier, because they both had a very good background. They had very high factory standards, one actually had BSCI standard which is the business social consumer initiative, which means the factory has a very high labor standard. People have access to fresh water; the factory is checked if there was no child labor. They are treated fairly; they get paid overtime and so on.

Steve: Can we talk about that a little bit, like where can you check all these things?

Manuel: Well, I guess you could look it up on my blog, or up in my book where I talk about the most common certifications and factory standards. For example BSCI is one of the highest factory standards. I mean if a factory tells you oh we have ISO 9001, I mean that’s nothing. Nearly every factory has that and it’s just to say that they work according to structured process.

So ISO 9001 is not the best sign. If the factory has BSCI that means they work with very large retailers like [inaudible 00:36:19], Wal-Mart, [inaudible 00:36:21], Amazon and so on. So the large retailers, they only work with those factories who have this kind of standard. If you look at…

Steve: I would imagine the minimum order quantities would be a lot higher for those factories too though, right?

Manuel: That’s true for example one of the factories had BSCI, they wanted a 5000 MOQ. And I only wanted to start out with a thousand pieces that maximum. And I mean that factory that I didn’t go with that had BCSI was actually cheaper than the one that I went with. But because of the MOQ was non-negotiable, I went with the other one. Otherwise I would have probably gone with the BSCI audited factory.

Steve: So you didn’t change anything about this product right, you kind of bought it as is, is that accurate?

Manuel: That’s correct. Well I added three extra fuel gauze. I did change the screw on the handle to make it also copper look, because it was a plain metal look. But other than that I just took it is, as it was.

Steve: I’m just wondering like why they wouldn’t bulge on the minimum order quantities if it was already an item that they kind of produced?

Manuel: Because I asked for FDA certificate. I asked for both silicates heat resistant class. And the standard product only comes with — the standard for a thousand pieces on that big factory only comes with regular class and no FDA certificate.

Steve: Okay I see, so you didn’t modify it?

Manuel: I guess so you could say, yeah.

Steve: Right to the point where it’s not one of their standard products?

Manuel: Yeah, but I didn’t change the outlook or anything. I just said I want a higher quality material, and yeah I guess in that way I changed it a bit.

Steve: Okay, and then so you sourced 1000 pieces, and you probably got an inspection and everything and you got everything sent in. Given that it’s a very competitive product, can you kind of talk about your product launch a little bit?

Manuel: Sure. I had different stages of product launch. The first one was obviously friends and family open Facebook review groups. And then I also launched through my email customer list, so I had a large list of customers that I collected over the years.

Steve: Customers for which products?

Manuel: Pretty much everything. And actually through the customer email list, I didn’t do so much sale. The really big sale came from my blogger list. I would talk about another thing that I did on the launch, but my own tools. I went through yeah the Facebook review groups, my customer emails, and I reached out to bloggers.

So I guess five or six weeks before my launch I went to Google, I looked for coffee bogs, I looked for coffee magazine, I looked for people just talking in general about coffees, coffee machines or coffee — different coffee beans and what not. So I reached out so I think about 25 bloggers. Three responded, and I eventually ended up with one blogger who wanted to do a review. I paid him $50, he got a free sample, and he actually gave me about up to today I think about 80 pieces of sale…

Steve: Not bad.

Manuel: Just from that blogger. So in the second week I used paid tools. One of them was ZonBlast. I also Review Kick, back then it was free. Review Kick went well also their reviews were good, but what really — yeah sorry.

Steve: I was just going to say so for those services did you get them away for free, or heavily discounted?

Manuel: You mean the product price, right?

Steve: That’s correct yes.

Manuel: I gave them away heavily discounted like $1, so instead 3.99 most of them I’d give away for $1.

Steve: So those reviews ended up being non-verified reviews, right?

Manuel: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay.

Manuel: Yeah, but I mean some of them are still there, but some of them have been removed from my listing. And then yeah I used ZonBlast, which was a big giveaway and also heavily discounted, and that pretty much put me on page– well for my main keyword on page one pretty first.

Steve: How many did you have to giveaway to get on page one?

Manuel: I think it’s all like giveaway up till today about 120 pieces, so more than 10% of my product — of my inventory.

Steve: Okay, that’s actually not a whole lot given– I’m just thinking coffee press. Were you targeting like copper coffee prices or?

Manuel: My main keyword that I targeted was French — no wait. French press coffee maker. But the biggest keyword would be French press, which is like three million searches and French press coffee makers like 150,000 searches. So for the main keyword I only got to take page 2 actually, and just briefly I think on page one.

But what really– because I didn’t giveaway so much, what really helped a lot was the blogger, and my email list of course and yeah the Facebook groups. And all that together was really, yeah it was really helpful. I also used [inaudible 00:41:38] in week four which put me — left me on the page — on page two of the main keyword. And my main keyword was still on page one. And that also helped a lot.

Steve: So I’m curious how did that blogger link to your Amazon product, was it just a direct link, did you do anything special with the URL? Because I know a bunch of people have been doing certain things that kind of encourage Amazon to rank your product with a certain keyword?

Manuel: I hadn’t done anything like that for the bloggers. I just actually asked him also to give him — sorry to give him an incentive. I asked them if they were not already as an Amazon affiliate. I asked him to sign up as an Amazon affiliate, and you can get the link from Amazon, and then you just post it in your blog post. I didn’t really ask him to do any targeting keywords or anything like that; I just told him you can make additional money by being an Amazon affiliate. So he only used an Amazon affiliate link.

Steve: Okay, I’m just wondering if that actually had a bigger impact on the ranking of your product, because you were driving outside traffic to your Amazon listing which was resulting in sales.

Manuel: Looking back it would have probably been smarter to have not a super URL, but some sort of keyword link yeah, it would have been better.

Steve: Oh no, I was just curios if that actually contributed more. Because like the ZonBlast and all those things it was obvious even though those reviews were not verified that they had a tremendous impact like the ZonBlast part?

Manuel: I think so, it makes sense to have the keyword targeted yeah, I think it would have made sense.

Steve: Okay and did those rankings last? I mean are you still on the front page for those keywords?

Manuel: No, actually I sold out middle of May, because in the last few weeks before I sold out I was like doing 25 to 50 units a day. So I didn’t expect that, and I pre-ordered way too late, I was waiting for more results. And yeah I sold out in middle of May, and kind of now I’m back. And then I came in with another 200 pieces at the end of May.

So I’m trying to keep inventory for now until prime day and until my stock comes back in, so right now my ranking is really bad to be honest. But I’m doing a few more giveaways when the big stock comes in, and I should be able to climb up again.

Steve: So are you doing a much larger order in time for the holidays, like what’s your next order size going to be?

Manuel: One is at sea now, it’s 2,500 pieces. And I’ll see how fast, let’s say 500 pieces go, and then I’ll probably do another order with 4000 pieces also by sea, and pretty fast probably, so yeah larger re-orders.

Steve: And then when you are sending stuff by sea over directly to Amazon, are you using anyone to help you with any process?

Manuel: Yes, well I use forward to that, I have been using for many years now. I kind of trained her the whole Amazon process. Like I’m doing the laboring in the factory myself, then she picks it up from the factory, she palletizes it. She puts the pallet labels on it. She handles the entire customs process in China, and in the US. She calls or their agent in the US, they call Amazon to make an appointment, and she delivers right to Amazon.

Steve: Okay, so you had someone that you’ve worked with for a long time cover all this for you?

Manuel: Yes.

Steve: And in terms of your defect percentage, do you have an idea of what that looks like?

Manuel: It was about 1%, but throughout to 14 pieces I think since I have launched. So pretty low, actually the Amazon defect rate is pretty low. I mean a normal rate for retail would be 5%, but Amazon is 1% is pretty ridiculous actually. I’m happy with my 1%.

Steve: Cool, and then after this you are in the process of launching a bunch of other different products as well, right?

Manuel: Yes, well I’ve been working on Amazon for a while now, but this was my very first product on the Mandarin Gear. I worked with my partner; he has his Amazon account with green products. Through him and I was just the back office guy for him. And now that I have launched through my own Amazon account, the public product, I have been in the process of launching six new products. Two already launched, and three more coming in the next few weeks.

Steve: Do you know anything about like Amazon presence over in Asia, like is there a presence over there?

Manuel: You mean in terms of a market place, or people working?

Steve: Yeah market places in Asia as opposed to — I mean you are concentrating in the US right now. But I was just curios what it’s like around where you live?

Manuel: Amazon is not really present here, I mean they are in India, but it’s very small. I mean yes of course they are in Japan, but it’s very difficult to handle Japan orders. I mean if you don’t have the product that doesn’t fit the Japanese market, it’s difficult. And also the import procedures are a lot more difficult. You need translating for the listing and everything. And you need Japanese customs support.

So if you don’t have someone who is helping, you it’s very complicated. As for China, they are not in china right now, but they are working a lot to help Chinese factories to go into the US or other companies. But we had other sites here that are predominant like Zalora and Lazada for example.

Steve: And are you taking advantage of those marketplaces, or are you just focusing on the US market in the beginning?

Manuel: For me its US market only, because I guess it’s very easy for me to deal with the US market also with the Hong Kong Company. And I have so many other different projects like kick starter and my sourcing company, the [inaudible 00:47:47] platform and courses, so yeah I’m trying to scale right now, but I will– the thing is to focus on Amazon US.

Steve: Okay, well cool hey Manuel it was great talking to you today. If anyone out there wants to find you online or access any of your awesome resources that you mentioned, where can they find you?

Manuel: Just look up importdojo.com. You can sign up for the newsletter, you will also get the free eBook, and the mail and my company details on the website, and yeah everyone please feel free to reach out, I would be happy to answer questions.

Steve: Awesome Manuel. Well hey thanks for coming on the show, I really appreciate it.

Manuel: Thanks for having me Steve, thanks a lot.

Steve: All right take care.

Manuel: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Manuel is an expert when it comes to importing and he’s actually helped me find some vendors as well for our linen store. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode130, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends and share this episode.

And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, signup right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

129: How Nathalie Lussier Created A 7 Figure Business Selling Software And Courses Online

How Nathalie Lussier Created A 7 Figure Business Selling Software And Courses Online

Today, I’m thrilled to have Nathalie Lussier on the show. I’ve actually known Nathalie for a heck of a long time now dating back since 2010. In fact, I remember the early days when we were both launching our blogs

But since 2010, Nathalie has been kicking butt. She first found success with her site Raw Foods Witch where she teaches people about the benefits of raw foods. But what I love about Nathalie is that she’s a techie.

With her tech, design and marketing skills, she also created NathalieLussier.com where she now helps small online businesses get off the ground. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nathalie started Raw Foods Witch turned it into a success
  • How her blog transitioned into a software and training course company
  • How Nathalie gets traffic to her websites
  • How she built a strong community
  • How she gets ideas for her software tools

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.
Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Nathalie Lussier on the show. Now I have actually known Nathalie for a heck of a long time now, and I think I just checked my email inbox and we were emailing back in 2010. In fact I remember the early days when we were both just launching our blogs.

Since 2010 Nathalie has been kicking butt, and she first found success with her site Raw Foods Witch where she teaches people about the benefits of raw foods. What I love about Nathalie is that she is a techy. With her tech, design, and marketing skills she also created Nathalie Lussier media where she now helps small online businesses get off the ground. In fact she is what I call a triple threat. With that welcome to the show, how are you doing today Nathalie?

Nathalie: I’m great, thanks so much for having me on the show Steve, this is awesome.

Steve: Give us your back story. I still remember the good old days with your blog, the Billionaire Woman, I don’t know if you …

Nathalie: Yes totally, that’s like really vintage.

Steve: That’s like 2009, right?

Nathalie: Yes.

Steve: I want to say what happened to that site actually?

Nathalie: That was my first real blog. I stared blogs when I was 12 or 13 before blogging was an actual thing. That was my real like, okay I’m going to try to make this into something real. It was called billionairewomen.com, and what ended up happening, it was all about wealth and mindset for women and that stuff, which is more of a passion than anything else.

People are … Obviously men kept emailing and commenting looking to hook up with Billionaire Women, like it was like a dating service or something. I was just fed up with that. Finally I was like okay this is just not quiet the right scene that I’m trying to attract here.

Steve: That’s hilarious, how did that move into raw foods … Is it Raw Foods Witch or Raw Foods Switch?

Nathalie: Originally it was Raw Foods Switch. That was the original intent of the site. What I ended up realizing is that nobody wanted to switch their entire diet to raw food. My boyfriend at the time who is now my husband was like, “Why don’t you just move that S around and make it Raw Foods Witch, because it could be fun and playful, and you like witches.”

He used to bring up the Teenage Witch and all these different things I was into. I was like, “Wow yeah okay let me try that.” Then as soon as I made that change to the domain, it was the exact same domain, but I just redesigned the site and had like a little witch on a carrot stick, everything changed, because it was a lot more playful and it wasn’t as dogmatic to switching your entire diet. A lot more people got behind the brand.

Steve: That was a site that actually was your breakthrough, right?

Nathalie: Yes exactly.

Steve: Would you say that that design aspect was what flipped the switch?

Nathalie: Yes, I think the design was huge. I also feel like I got a lot more clarity when I started blogging more about that topic. Actually talking to my ideal potential customers. When I was first blogging at rawfoodsswitch.com, I was writing to a lot of other people who were in the raw foods space.

When I made that transition to the witch I was like, “I need to really talk to people who were like me a couple of years ago before I started eating more fruits and vegetables.” I started writing really simple posts like what to do with an avocado, or how to open an avocado, or how to make your first screens movie.

When I started really bring it back to basics, I was able to really speak to the people back that could benefit from the information I was sharing. Before that I was just blogging for other bloggers like me.

Steve: It basically just landed a person. I think I went on that site you were actually dressed up as a witch, right?

Nathalie: Yes, it was the videos definitely.

Steve: Yeah, is the traffic going to that site, is it mainly SEO? Did you ever buy ads, or was it just collecting emails and building an audience?

Nathalie: Even to this point it’s practically 80% SEO at this point. We’ve got really good articles on different topics that people are searching for. The site comes up a lot; my people are looking for things. That was also key thing because I had learned SEO a little bit before I started this website.

I knew I could do something in this market. I never paid for ads, I don’t think that was really on my radar at the time, but I did do guest posting and I did other webinars and things with other people in the industry. I think that also helped a lot.

Steve: Were the articles that you chose to write about, was that very deliberate?

Nathalie: Yes, originally in the beginning they were not deliberate by any means. It was just like, “Hey here is the salad dressing that I really like.” But then I did some research on what people were searching for, and a lot of times they wanted to know what’s the difference between juicing and smoothies, or which blender should I get. Once I started writing some articles about the topics that people were actually searching for, that’s when things really started to take off on the SEO side.

Steve: How is that site monetized?

Nathalie: Right now we have Google Adsense, and then we also have Amazon affiliate links. I used to have an information product or a course that I taught, it was called Cure Cravings Forever. That was actually the main revenue at the time, but I have since sub-setted that course, because I’m no longer as active on the site. I didn’t want have to support that as much.

Steve: Was that site the one that allowed you to quit your job or your husband’s job or?

Nathalie: Yeah, actually when I started my business I didn’t have a job. I was fresh out of college, and I actually turned down a job on Wall Street to start this business. Basically in the first couple of months it was definitely touch and go. I was living with my boyfriend, and he was sending me little ads for different job openings that he wanted [inaudible 00:07:17], because sometimes things weren’t picking up as quickly as I expected or wanted to. Then things definitely did take off. That wasn’t actually the site that led to him quitting his job, that came a little bit later when I started the nathalielussier.com brand.

Steve: You didn’t take your job on Wall Street to start blogging?

Nathalie: No actually, yeah I … Well basically when I was graduating; I had actually worked on Wall Street as an intern, so I had some experience. I knew that at least for me it wasn’t quiet the right path. I had this like intuitive nudge that if I said yes I would just wake up 40 years down the line and wonder what happened to my life. Just because I knew how fast paced that environment was.

I probably wouldn’t have a chance to step off the treadmill so to speak. I knew I had to say yes or no right when I was graduating. Luckily enough my parents were like, “You are crazy.” But also, “It’s not the biggest deal.” You can try something, and if you fail you can always get another job. That was an interesting position for sure.

Steve: Did you have a nest stake saved up at that point?

Nathalie: I did, luckily the internships were paid. I actually had money to start my business.

Steve: Okay, and before we switch gears and talk about your software and courses business. I wanted your opinion; we started blogging way back in the day 2009, 2010. You’ve been doing since you’ve been 12, 13. Do you think today that blogging is still a viable way to make a significant amount of money?

Nathalie: I think the internet is a viable way to make a lot of money. I don’t think necessarily blogging by itself so much, just because even if you just look at magazines or newspapers like that … The whole advertising model is dying if you will, because it’s just not the way the people consume content as much these days.

I do feel like there is definitely ways that once you have built an audience that you can monetize it, whether that is through sponsored stuff or through creating your own products or services or that kind of thing. I think there is definitely tons of opportunity to have a successful business online, but I don’t think just blogging is really what it’s going take these days.

Steve: Great because we both have podcasts, we both have blogs and then we both do a little bit of video. You probably do a little bit more video than I do. If you were to start all over again would you just pick 1, or would you do all 3?

Nathalie: Such a good question. I feel like you have to eventually do all 3. Not necessarily, obviously if you hate video, if you hate audio don’t force yourself. I do feel like there’s different mediums that reach people in different ways. For example, text, Google is still primarily text based when you’re searching.

Having a blog or having really good SEOed pages on your sited is really key if you want to show up for certain things whether it’s local or a specific service that you offer, a product that you offer. But then some people much prefer to listen on the go, that’s why podcasting can reach those audiences. The same goes for videos, some people just hate reading. They would rather watch something.

I feel like eventually you will probably want to go in all directions, but I also like to caution people not to try to do everything at once. I would say pick one, get really good at it, and then add on the other one, which I think is something that both of us have done. We started with a blog, and then later we added on the other pieces once we kind of mastered the first one.

Steve: It’s really overwhelming to try to do even more than one thing at a time. I agree with you. That’s why I asked you the question, because people have been coming to me and they’ve been asking, “Hey, should I start a blog?” I’m like, “Blogging is just so saturated now that you really have to do something extraordinarily special in order to stand out, in order to succeed today.” Whereas back when we started it was a little easier I think.

Nathalie: I think that’s true, definitely. I think that there is always the first mover’s advantage. If you were to discover a new niche market of which I don’t know if that’s possible either, but maybe if I can do a new type of weaving baskets that people love, you could totally be the first one in that market. Then yes, you could definitely get away with just a blog or something like that. I think there is something to be said for what you mentioned there.

Steve: What I like about you now is we kind of have similar backgrounds. I’m a hardware, software guy, I run a blog, an ecommerce store training class, and now I’m moving into software myself. I was just curious; you transitioned over from your blog at Raw Foods Witch over to software and training courses. I was just curious what your motivations and how that happened.

Nathalie: It’s a really interesting story, because I like to call it my spiral staircase since I studied software in school. I didn’t actually go into that field when I graduated, because I started this business. It almost felt like I threw out the baby with the bath water, because I had all this training, but then here I was talking about healthy eating which had nothing to do with technology.

At the same time people kept asking me, “Who made your website, and how are you doing all these technical stuff on your own? Can I hire you?” In the beginning I actually put these people off. I was like, “No. I don’t do this. My passion is about healthy eating.” Then finally I realized there’s enough people who are asking this. Maybe this is actually something that comes super natural to me. Maybe I should go in that direction.

When I did that, that became the first time I hit the 6 figures in my business. I started actually designing people’s websites. I did that for about a year until I basically maxed out on my capacity of being able to do that.

Steve: This was like a consulting basis?

Nathalie: Exactly, consulting and actually implementing people’s websites. I actually hired other designers and developers to work with me. It was becoming this whole thing, and then I realized, “Wait, this wasn’t the business I wanted to start.” I took a step back and then that’s when I started doing more of the training courses because I realized I do have a gift of simplifying technical complicated things. I also applied that there into the technical trainings that I created and marketing trainings that I had learned along the way.

What that ended up happening is, it was still little bit too complicated. I realized, okay well I can simplify one more step by actually making software that does it for you. That’s how I brought my husband into the business, and got him to quit his job so that he could co-lead this company and be our main developer for all the different software products that we’ve since released.

For example, I’ll just give you a concrete example. I was teaching people how to create beautiful opt-ins on their website, but they still had to learn some HTML and some CSS code to really make it look how they wanted. My husband and I developed the PopupAlly plug-in which is actually … It lets you do pop ups as well as embedded optins on your site and really design everything without needing to touch any code. That was really from seeing people struggle with me trying to teach them all these things, so that now they can just install it, and customize it the way they want it to be and it’s really, really easy.

Steve: Customize it as in like drag and drop or?

Nathalie: Yeah, exactly. You can basically choose what colors, fonts, images, where you want everything to show up … Really simple. We have some templates too, but that’s really like, if you want to do a horizontal opt-in you can do it. If you want to do a transparent pop up, you could do that too.

Steve: You started out with courses, and then evolved in the software then or?

Nathalie: That’s right, yeah.

Steve: What were your first courses about?

Nathalie: Definitely the first course was in my Raw Food business and that was called, Cure Cravings Forever, but then once I transitioned to more of the tech space and the marketing space my first course I think was actually … Yeah, it was called Websites Made Easy. It was all about building your first WordPress website.

Steve: The reason you chose that topic was because you were getting a lot of people asking about it.

Nathalie: Exactly. I was doing it for people. I was setting up websites and helping them with that. Then I realized I had met my capacity doing that with one on one clients. How about if I teach people how to do it, and show them the shortcuts that I had learned along the way?

Steve: How did you launch that class in the very beginning? How big was your list at the time? Did you have a big audience?

Nathalie: Yeah. Around that time I think … It’s hard to say. I probably had 5,000 people on my list.

Steve: Those people were gathered from … Those obviously weren’t Raw Foods people, right?

Nathalie: I did actually invite all the people on my Raw Foods list over to my new business.

Steve: Really?

Nathalie: Yeah, I did.

Steve: That’s really random. How did that work out?

Nathalie: You would be surprised. There were so many people who emailed and who said, “I’ve been waiting for you to do this.” I was like, “What? That makes no sense.” For some reason I had just been … People were curious about my website and all the things I was doing. I think they were just ready to do their own stuff, but following in my footsteps I guess.

Steve: Interesting. You had a list of Raw Foods people.

Nathalie: Yes. I definitely grew some of that list about technology and marketing as well in between before I launched the course, because I had about a year in between there.

Steve: Was your strategy building up your list? Was that just through content at that point?

Nathalie: Yes. At that point I was doing a weekly little mini-tech tutorial. I was calling it, Getting Techy With It. I would teach like a new tool or a new plug-in or a new thing that I thought would help people, and that helped bridge the gap between the first business and the second one.

Steve: Was this video based?

Nathalie: Yes, they were all video tutorials.

Steve: Interesting. Who were the people you were attracting?

Nathalie: I was attracting actually a lot of other health coaches and people in the raw food business, and who had their own blogs. Like I said originally I was blogging to that audience by mistake, but then they saw how I became successful after I stopped blogging to them. That helped initially. Then through word of mouth I got connected with other business owners and people in the marketing space or small business space. That really brought in the right people for what I was doing.

Steve: How did you launch your course, the very first one?

Nathalie: The very first one I did a webinar, and I sold it at the end of the webinar. Then I actually taught the program live on a webinar. Basically I used the free webinar to sell a paid webinar. That was the simplest way I could imagine doing it.

Steve: Wait, time out, that’s confusing. You used a free webinar to launch a paid webinar, meaning the paid webinar was your course.

Nathalie: Exactly. Then I recorded it and then that became my … You can log in and watch it.

Steve: Interesting. How much did you charge?

Nathalie: It was a $97 offer.

Steve: How many did you sell at that first course, that first webinar?

Nathalie: I don’t remember the exact number, but it went on to sell like hundreds. I’m pretty sure the very first time, like when I did my first live webinar, probably 20 is what I’m estimating.

Steve: That’s a good amount right there like for the first one. At that point, were you like, “This is a better business model?”

Nathalie: Yeah. I basically realized, okay if I can scale this, then it’s way different than actually working with clients. Also at that time I was realizing that working with clients really left me at their mercy a little bit. The week before my wedding, I was working on a really big project. One of my developer contractors basically said, “Okay I’m done. I can’t work on this anymore.”

I was left holding on to the project and trying to finish it and wrap it up before my wedding. That was the D-day. I had a couple of experiences like that that made me realize, there is something to this courses and product way of doing things.

Steve: I was looking on your portfolio software, and I noticed a webinar piece of software that you sell too. I’m starting to see a trend here. You start doing something. Did people ask you about how to do webinar?

Nathalie: Yes. That’s something that I keep realizing. I see people struggle with things and then I’m like, “Oh I think I can solve their problem.” I will develop something to do that. With WebinarAlly, I just was seeing people not necessarily doing enough webinars to warrant paying $400 a year or $100 a month for different webinar software. Also being not technically savvy enough to use the free Google Hangouts and copy and pasting code and doing all these things.

We developed WebinarAlly which is a super simple plug-in that works on WordPress, but that integrates Google Hangouts and helps you schedule your webinars and handles some of those things that make it too complicated to use usually. It’s just a super simple onetime $27 fee. People are just eating it up, because it’s that in between place. They are not quite ready to invest tons of money on webinars, but they need to try it in order to actually see if they’re going to be good at it, and if it’s something they want to do in their business.

Steve: How did you market this piece of software? Was it just to your list? Did ever buy ads or anything?

Nathalie: Yes. Initially we did our big launch to our list. We got a lot of word of mouth marketing from it, because it’s a no brainer in price point. People are like …

Steve: It’s super cheap. Like 27 bucks is like you don’t even have to think about it.

Nathalie: Exactly. That actually was huge just from word of mouth. We had residual sales from launching it. Then we did actually run … We tested some Google AdWords and then we also ran some ads on Facebook. It’s interesting. We’ve actually realized that for this price point, it doesn’t quite scale very well for ads, but we do sell it through the different products that we have, cross sale naturally that way. It works out pretty well.

Steve: Can you talk about why you priced it so low at 27 bucks?

Nathalie: Absolutely. Like I said I saw the need in the market place where there was just really expensive options or something free, but that’s really complicated. That was one of the initial things. We also toyed with the idea of just making it free because we do have a free version of PopUpAlly.

That was our, “Hey, maybe we can do a 2nd free plug-in and see if that works.” We realized we wanted it to have a big reach, but also we wanted people who were serious enough to be doing webinars in their business. That was our little compromise there.

Steve: With that $27, do they get free upgrades?

Nathalie: Yes. As long as they paid, yes, we’re going to be upgrading that. We’re probably not going to be building a ton of new features for it, but yeah.

Steve: Wow, because I find that just the maintenance of software is a huge expense. Do you find support for the plug-in is a problem at all?

Nathalie: Luckily with this one we have some good video tutorials and even written knowledge based articles. We haven’t had a lot of issues. But for some of our more complicated products … I wouldn’t say complicated, but they have more features. They have a lot more potential little pitfalls like PopUpAlly and ProgessAlly.

Yes, we do have a renewal. If you want to get future updates and if you want to keep getting support we do have that in place. We also like to keep that low, because we want people to feel like, “I like the software. I want to keep supporting it. It’s not going to take such a huge chunk out of my wallet either.”

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory costs are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book-keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it’d be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it.

All you got to do is sign up, and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you. No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to Bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s Bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Interesting, I’m just curious now that we’ve been talking. In terms of just revenue, where do you derive the most? Is it the software, or the courses, or affiliate stuff?

Nathalie: Good question. Now that you mentioned I’m like probably 33% each.

Steve: Really, okay.

Nathalie: Yeah. It is pretty sleek across all of them. The software is where we are focusing more these days, but the courses that we’ve created are still selling really well. That’s totally cool by us too.

Steve: Are the courses hands off? Do you give anything live for the courses or?

Nathalie: Yes. We basically have our membership program which is called Heartquarters, and that’s where we house all of the courses I have created over the years. We do maintain and update them if things go out of date. With that we basically have a quarterly coaching call with me. Every quarter I get on a Google Hangout and then we answer people’s questions. Then we also have a Facebook group where people can ask questions and support each other as well.

Steve: Is this like an all you can eat type of thing?

Nathalie: Interestingly enough it used to be you get access to everything, but we’ve recently switched to a credit based system, because it’s called Heartquarters, people earn hearts every month. You earn hearts for doing different things, like completing a course, supporting your accountability partners in the group. You also just get hearts every month for staying active. You can use your hearts to redeem courses.

We have all kinds of other cool things like you can actually get free hosting. It seems random, but you can also use it for plug-ins or anything else that we’ve created for them. It makes you a little bit more intentional when you use your hearts as opposed to just saying, “I have access to everything. I’ll get back to it later.” When you have them in your account, you’re like, “I need to use my hearts.” Then people actually unlock and finish things a lot more than they used to.

Steve: Interesting, so do you have to pay to get some hearts in the beginning or?

Nathalie: No, when you join you get I think it’s 300 hearts right away, so you can start unlocking things on your 1st day. But then to keep going, you have to either wait a little bit or you can purchase more hearts or you can just be more active, and that will earn you more hearts.

Steve: Is it a onetime fee to join?

Nathalie: It’s a yearly or a monthly fee.

Steve: I see, so it’s recurring revenue.

Nathalie: Exactly.

Steve: Okay cool. So how much do you charge?

Nathalie: For the full year it’s $750 or $79 a month.

Steve: You’re constantly adding content to this repository of courses.

Nathalie: Exactly, yeah. The way that we do it is that we ask our students, “What do you want to learn next?” Then we decide, “Okay, we’ll create a course about that.”

Steve: That’s ingenious. This heart thing, it doesn’t annoy people though that once they pay they want to access everything.

Nathalie: Well when we first switched over because we made the switch in early 2016, the old members were like, “Hey. I used to have access to everything.” We didn’t take anything away, but then they realized for any new stuff, they would have to use their hearts. We’re generous enough with the heart set, you can unlock stuff.

Obviously you can’t unlock everything on day 1. We’ve also seen people buying hearts, because they are eager enough to keep going. Also I feel like it really makes you choose what you want to focus on. One of the problems I see a lot with online marketing and online space is the shinny object syndrome. This is our way of combating that.

You can actually take one course, finish, implement, and then you go on to the next one, as opposed to saying, “I’m just to going to watch a little bit of this and a little bit of that and never actually get anything done.”

Steve: Interesting, so these hearts, like the implementation of that, is that something you custom coded?

Nathalie: That’s something that’s available in our AccessAlly Plug-in. It works with Infusionsoft and Ontraport and WordPress, and soon to be Convert … Not Convert but ActiveCampaign. Basically it’s a tag based thing with the CRM.

Steve: Interesting, okay. Then to sell these courses, do you do any paid ads or is it webinars?

Nathalie: Yes. We do ads that bring people into our space if you will, into our funnel and then we definitely do webinars, and do all kinds of other things to get people into the Heartquarters. The other thing that worked really well for us is that we have inside of our members’ area, we have some free courses. We have something called a 30 day list building challenge.

It’s actually happening right now, but it’s always available. That’s free and people join, but then they’re welcomed into our members’ area and they see all the other courses that are greyed out and that are on display, but not available. When they click on that they can sign up for the full … I think they can do the monthly or the full year, and then unlock those courses.

Steve: They actually get a log in.

Nathalie: They do.

Steve: By into your funnel, do you mean an email list? They’re giving you their email address?

Nathalie: Exactly, yes.

Steve: Okay, so once they give you their email address, they automatically get an account with your …

Nathalie: They do.

Steve: In which they see they can access anything.

Nathalie: Right or they can access all of the 30 day challenge videos. There is 30 videos and they are for them, 1 a day for 30 days. Alongside that they’ll see there is also a module about Facebook ads, or there is a module about doing an Amazon book, or there is a module about affiliate marketing. If they are curious about that, they can click on that and then decide to enroll in the program.

Steve: Interesting, okay. Can we talk a little bit about this email sequence, because I know you sell a whole bunch of different products? Does that mean you have separate email sequences for each?

Nathalie: Yes and no. Basically our main entry point is the 30 day challenge. That is 30 emails over 30 days which is a lot. But also it is the most high value thing that we give away for free. That’s why we want people to go there. People get amazing results from going through that challenge. But then we do also have smaller one-off things that we offer. For example we have an eBook all about how to setup your webinars, and that leads into WebinarAlly.

Then we have an eBook about how to use gamefication in your membership course, and that’s to sell our membership plug-ins. Yes, we do have smaller things that lead into separate funnels, but for all of our courses, the 30 day challenge is how we introduce them to it.

Steve: How does the 30 day challenge work?

Nathalie: It’s a free challenge that people just go, they put in their email address to sign up. Then over the 30 days they’ll get one email with one video, and a really simple action item that they can take to really grow their list. They also get to join our Facebook group. Right now we actually have a contest running, so when you complete the items on each day or share it on Facebook, you earn an entry towards the contest.

We’re giving away just some fun prizes for our products and for events that I’m going to be speaking at, and all kind of things like that. We are really trying to make that as interactive as possible. That’s something I will probably going to keep doing throughout the rest of the year too.

Steve: That’s sounds amazing. Every day for 30 days there is a video.

Nathalie: Yes. That was a pretty intense video shoot day.

Steve: Are these really short videos?

Nathalie: Yes. They are really short videos. Most of them are about two minutes. Some of them go up to about 10 minutes if they’re a little bit more technical, but yeah. They’re pretty short, and it’s really meant to be a digestible action item that you can take every day to grow your list. That’s why they are not super intense.

Steve: It’s something like, “Here is how you install PopupAlly, and collect email addresses that way.

Nathalie: Right, exactly or here is how to research where you should write a guest post, or how here is how to join Facebook groups that might be with your ideal audience in them.

Steve: I see. Then some of them lead to your products and some of them do not.

Nathalie: Exactly. I would say 80% of them don’t, but some of them do.

Steve: Then by the end of these 30 days, what’s the goal?

Nathalie: Yes. At the end of the 30 days, the ideal scenario for most people is that they’ve built a list, and now they’re probably thinking of launching a course or a product. We have a course that teaches that, so that’s our launch and profit course.

Steve: I see, so it leads in from the 30 day challenge to another sequence about courses.

Nathalie: Exactly, yes.

Steve: Okay, interesting. You teach them how to build an audience and then the next logical step is to create something that you can sell to the audience, and then that leads to WebinarAlly.

Nathalie: Yes.

Steve: This is interesting. I like it.

Nathalie: There is a lot of layering that’s happened over the years, but that’s how everything interconnects.

Steve: Are you guys using InfusionSoft by any chance?

Nathalie: We are, yes.

Steve: Because I noticed you had another piece of software that did something with InfusionSoft. I don’t remember.

Nathalie: Yeah, so that’s the AccessAlly that I mentioned. That’s the membership site plug-in that integrates with InfusionSoft that does all the cool tracking and credit system and unlocking and up-selling and cross-selling, and all that stuff.

Steve: When do you actually sell the full blown membership site?

Nathalie: You mean like the membership program?

Steve: At what point in the sequence?

Nathalie: That actually tends to happen on more of kind of when we do a launch kind of thing. It either happens when people see the courses and then they unlock them, or we’ll just do a promotion for them.

Steve: Can we talk about what a promotion would look like?

Nathalie: Yeah, absolutely. We actually just wrapped one up about a month ago.

Steve: How does it work? Do you do a webinar, or how does it work?

Nathalie: Yes, pretty much every time we do a promotion we’ll have a webinar. Sometimes we’ll have several webinars just because people are in different time zones. Sometimes we actually have the exact same content on all the webinars, but it’s just to catch people at different times. We’ll also invite our affiliates to help promote. We do have a good number of affiliates. Different affiliates will promote different things.

Some people just want to promote the software and some of them actually just prefer promoting the courses in the memberships. We’ll invite them to promote. We also do an affiliate contest. We do have prizes for affiliates who promote as well. We do kind of an email sequence leading up to the webinar, and special bonuses to get people to take action.

Steve: Can we talk about that? What do these pre-email sequences look like?

Nathalie: Yes. Depending on what the focus is, so for example our last one the focus was kind of on this new accountability feature that we added to the membership site. We talked a lot about accountability, so I had blog posts about how accountability groups are important for business.

Then we also had testimonials or other ways that people have enjoyed that feature already, or kind of gotten a lot out of in the course or the program. Then we just lead all of these things back into the webinar. So whatever the webinar topic is and getting them to show up live.

Steve: What was the topic of the last webinar?

Nathalie: The topic of the last webinar was all about productivity. I realized having an accountability group plus having the right information, and making sure you’re working on the most important things in your business really makes the biggest difference, especially because I just had a baby three months ago.

It was very high on my mind at the time of like, you should really be working on that 20% of the stuff that makes you 80% of the results in your business. That was kind of the main focus. But also getting people to realize that there is the shinny object thing, and you need to really be clear on what these next steps are for your business.

Steve: These webinars that you have with the affiliates, is it one big gigantic webinar with all the affiliates combined, or do you do separate ones per affiliate?

Nathalie: For this one it was just one. In the past we have done different webinars with different audiences and different joint venture partners, because of the baby. I was like I combine our efforts into one webinar.

Steve: Totally, interesting. In terms of the topic, not everyone who comes in is going to know you are. I was curious how you structure the webinar.

Nathalie: Yeah. I like to start with my story definitely to make sure people know how I came here, what my expertise is, and just kind of situate everybody and give them some context. The other thing I like to do is to really showcase our clients and our customers. If I have any good case studies that relate to the topic, I like to bring those up, or even just showcasing what they’ve done on their websites, and what they’re seeing in terms of results as a result of taking the courses that we’ve put together.

I think that’s huge too, because I could talk about myself all day, but it doesn’t really mean much, whereas if somebody else actually has direct experience with my work, or with our tools or anything like that, it speaks so much more than just myself.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Nathalie: I was going to say also in terms of the flow of the webinar I definitely like to actually deliver real value, and have people to be able to start taking action on whatever I say after we hangout whether they sign up for something or not. My goal is really to make the offer just such a no brainer it’s an immediate yes for people. That usually means bonuses or special price or something that really makes them go, “Wow. I would be crazy not to say yes to this.”

Steve: In terms of your last webinar since that’s probably the freshest in your mind, what piece of productivity did you teach about, and what were some of your bonuses that you gave out?

Nathalie: The biggest thing that I’ve been realizing is and I kind of look at my community as my feedback loop for what to teach. What I’ve realized is that some people are actually really good when it comes to productivity. They can get so much stuff done in a day, because they have read all of the blogs, and they’ve got the cool planner, and they’ve got the cool apps and all the productivity stuff.

They’re applying all these productivity knowledge to the wrong activities I would say, or at least the easier activities because there is always those activities that are outside your comfort zone, and that push your buttons a little bit. For myself when I first starting in business having sales conversations, or reaching out to somebody who would actually be a potential partner or somebody who would promote something, that was always too scary for me to actually do.

I would put that off and then I would tweak my website, or do something that was really easy to do. I felt like I did so much or I accomplished so much or I checked so much off my to do list, but that 20%, it was not getting done, that stuff that actually moves the needle in your business. That was a really big key take away from that webinar. Then in terms of the bonuses that we offered, well we offered a really cool way to get your website hosted for free on WP Engine when you sign up for the Heartquarters program. We’ve actually partnered with WP Engine.

We’ve designed some templates for people to get started with their WordPress websites. If they were brand new and they were kind of like, “There is just too much to do. I don’t know how to get started. I don’t even have a website yet.” Or if they have website, their website is hosted somewhere else, but they keep getting hacked and they’re like, “I’m done with this cheap hosting,” then that was a big reason to get them onto our platform.

Steve: Interesting, and that WP Engine is like an affiliate relationship too, right. You benefit from that?

Nathalie: Yeah, we’ve actually moved it in-house, so we kind of handle the hosting ourselves. The tech support is handled by WP Engine, but we actually host the sites ourselves. People can use our plug-ins already installed. We’re moving towards an environment that we can help setup so that it’s not from scratch anymore.

Steve: Interesting, so you’re a hosting company too.

Nathalie: Yes. Very recently we went into that as an experiment because again every single I feel like I see a problem that people are having and I’m like, “I wonder if I can solve this for them.” Sometimes people have a hard time choosing a theme or setting up the plug-ins or getting really started on how to point their domain and a lot of stuff. Now we can really help them. They can literally just click the button inside of our members’ area and say, “Start my website.”

Steve: Interesting, are these servers hosted by WP Engine then, because I can’t imagine why they would to support …

Nathalie: Yes, they are.

Steve: Okay that makes sense then.

Nathalie: There is totally a WP Engine host. You get all the same features, but the main thing is that I guess we have our own scripts and things setup in between.

Steve: Right, they give you further access so you can custom manage the people that you’re bringing in so to speak.

Nathalie: Exactly.

Steve: That’s an interesting relationship. You have that offer. Do you usually discount?

Nathalie: Sometimes we do. For this one we didn’t, because it’s kind of a no brainer price at this point.

Steve: What was the pricing for?

Nathalie: It was $79 a month or 750 for the year.

Steve: Was there any scarcity introduced?

Nathalie: Yes, because we were doing our next coaching call. I think it was a week or two after the webinar, that was kind of the main like come and get coached, and you’d actually get some support for your business.

Steve: How do those coaching calls work? Do you get a lot of people to show up? What’s the attendance like?

Nathalie: Good question. Sometimes we have 20 people, 30 people. It does depend a lot because we have some people who are in different time zones like across Europe and Australia. It really depends on what time we schedule it for, but I do try to make it at least accessible as much as I can for those different time zones.

The people who show up get so much out of it, and that’s really to me the biggest thing. Of course they are recorded so people can also send in their questions. People do that as well. There is always so much activity after, because everybody is like, “Oh my God, I’m so fired up again.” I do feel like there is a lot of value in those calls.

Steve: Is there an agenda beforehand, or is it just Q&A?

Nathalie: What we usually do is we’ll go over people’s quarterly priorities, and that’s the thing that we do in our business too, is that we plan everything on a quarterly basis. I kind of bring people into our process and get them to do it live as well. They’ll share what their priorities are.

I will also coach them if I’m like, “Okay. That doesn’t look very realistic. Or maybe you should try a little bit outside your comfort zone on that particular piece.” There is some but then there is also plenty of time for actual questions too.

Steve: You don’t actually bring in any people to your webinars. You just bring in new people to your list, and then you setup these webinars strictly to your list. Is that …

Nathalie: Yes, exactly. That actually works better for us at this point.

Steve: Then in terms of the post-webinar, I imagine you have some sequence as well?

Nathalie: Yes we do. That’s right.

Steve: How many emails is that?

Nathalie: It really varies, but I would say no less than 4 usually.

Steve: What is your way of getting them to actually open these emails?

Nathalie: Good question. We do try to test our different subject lines to make sure that they are actually useful, and also have that curiosity and that open loop. Also if it’s like the last day to sign up with bonuses, just letting people know like, “Last chance or this is going away now, bonus is going away, that kind of thing.” We try to make it as curiosity based, but also let them know what’s happening so that they don’t miss it because of a cryptic subject line.

Steve: Here is something I’ve been struggling with. After a while, let’s say you discount the course or you offer bonuses, after a while people are only going to sign up during the webinar. How do you combat that?

Nathalie: Yes. Something we’re actually testing right now inside of our members’ area is we’re going to be offering a one month’s trial, and basically that is going to have a timed expiration date to take us up on that trial. Basically we’re kind of making the first month as easy to say yes to as possible, and then assuming that they enjoy what’s in there, they’re actually getting a discount by using that first month. It’s going to a dollar trial.

That is something that we’re just testing. I totally hear what you’re saying about like, “Wait, are people going to wait?” I also think that there is always new people finding you. That’s the other piece of that coin.

Steve: Sure and those people who have the one month trial don’t have access to everything because they don’t have enough hearts, right?

Nathalie: Exactly, yeah. There is definitely a reason to stay.

Steve: Interesting. This is really good stuff. I haven’t actually heard anyone use gamefication really in their courses. Are there other rewards for these hearts once you’ve unlocked everything?

Nathalie: Yeah, so the next thing we’re going to be rolling out which I’m really excited about it is going to be critiques. It’s going to be live with me, either an opt-in page, or a sales page or something that you want critiqued on your website. They are going to be individual and you can use your hearts to unlock that. We’ve actually built that into our ProgressAlly plug-in.

We’re calling them private notes. It’s kind of an individual way to communicate with customers inside the members’ area. It almost looks like a chat box, but it’s actually static on a web page. You could say, “This is the page for copy critiques,” but every single person will see a different reply, so that it’s individual to each person.

They can also review it down the line. It’s not like an email where they can archive it or whatever, but it’s going to be there inside their members’ area. That’s something that I’m kind of pumped about. Anybody else who does coaching on that individual basis, if you need to send notes after your coaching call or anything like that, you could use that ProgressAlly feature.

Steve: Interesting, yeah so what’s funny is the way I run my class I have points also. I do a little bit of gamefication. They get points for participating, for attending the weekly live sessions, and then they can redeem those points for a free consult or website critique. I’ve been doing those for five years now actually. I’ve got a whole bunch of them.

Nathalie: Oh my God, I love it.

Steve: I like the other ways that you’ve been talking about where some people, they go through a class and then they just start watching random videos and skip all over the place. I like how you have this heart system which keeps them on track.

Nathalie: Yes, and we actually have an assessment as soon as they join. They fill out some questions and then we recommend which course is best for them next, so that it’s not so overwhelming like, “Should I do a podcast or should I do a blog?” Like kind of what you’re saying.

We tell them like, “Based on where you’re at right now and what your skill sets are, we recommend these next steps.” That way it really sends them in the right direction, and then if they finish that course and they start implementing, then they could take the assessment again technically and go onto the next piece.

Steve: Would you say that your class is mainly targeted to people who want to build an audience and sell some digital product?

Nathalie: Yes. I would say that. There is definitely people who are on the ecommerce side, but they are a much, much smaller percentage. I do think that the online info space is definitely more the target market.

Steve: Okay, interesting. In terms of the people who’ve taken your class, is there a specific demographic? Are they into healthy eating, or is it just all over the place?

Nathalie: At this point, it’s a bit more broad. We’ve got like photographers, definitely some health coaches, regular coaches, life coaches, yoga people, even like dog trainers. We’ve got a pretty wide range of people at this point. It does tend to attract mostly women. We have a couple of guys, but for the most part it’s mostly women.

Steve: Actually we’re running out of time here, but I just was curious since you work with your husband primarily on this business. I’ve mentioned this several times in the past in podcasts. I’ve even had my wife on the podcast, where we actually don’t work that well together. We argue a lot especially if we’re overlapping on stuff. I’m just curious what the dynamic is like with your husband when you guys work together.

Nathalie: I think we work pretty well together. We think very differently, but we’re easily on the same page. One of the things that we learned the hard way was actually organizing one of our live in person conferences, because we were kind of giving each other orders, and we realized that that does not work very well for a relationship. We came up with the because rule.

Whenever we tell each other to do something or that we need to do something, we say, “Because.” Then we explain why. That really puts everything into context, and it takes the forceful ordering around kind of attitude out of it, and it’s like, “Oh okay. We’re immediately on the same page.” It’s like, “Oh okay well this might not be the highest priority, but I understand why we need to do this or whatever in whatever situation.” That can really diffuse some of that forceful energy that might be coming from working together with your spouse.

Steve: Interesting, I can see my wife going, “We’re doing it this way because you’re stupid.”

Nathalie: The other thing too is that we try to also have time where we don’t talk about business. It’s a little bit harder these days.

Steve: That’s hard to do for us. It’s probably really helpful now that you have your baby also that you guys both work together and at home, so you can alternate the duties I would imagine.

Nathalie: Yes. That’s been really helpful. For example when I’m on this interview, he’s on baby watch if she wakes up. If he has to really focus on something I can totally be there. It really helps us alternate. It also feels like we get to spend more time with her that way too, so we actually see her grow up, but also get a lot of work done which is kind of nice.

Steve: That’s awesome. Do you have a staff to run all this, or is it just you and your husband?

Nathalie: Oh yeah. We have … I think we’re up to a team of 7 now.

Steve: Oh really.

Nathalie: Yeah. They are all over North America. We’ve got people in Seattle and Canada and Colorado. We’ve got support, tech support. We’ve got a writer, a project manager in marketing, and then another developer, and then my husband and myself. We have a video editor as well.

Steve: That’s amazing. That’s awesome.

Nathalie: Yeah.

Steve: I want to respectful of your time and we’re running out of it. I do want everyone to know where they can find you, your courses and your products.

Nathalie: Yeah, absolutely. Like I mentioned the 30 Day List Building Challenge is a great way to get introduced to my work. That’s just that 30daylistbuildingchallenge.com, but to check out all of our products you can go to AmbitionAlly.com. You’ll see we’ve got all kinds of cool stuff for WordPress, and if you don’t use WordPress, then you can go and check out NathalieLussier.com.

We’ve got our off the chats podcasts there that you can take a listen too which Steve has been on and you as I said was very, very well loved and acclaimed, so that’s awesome. Those are the main places where I hang out, and I would love to get to know everybody and have you guys join us inside of our Face book groups, and see if there is any problems I can solve for you.

Steve: Nathalie needs more males.

Nathalie: Yes, come on down.

Steve: That’s the key take away that I got. Her sites are just so beautifully well designed as well. You guys should definitely check them out.

Nathalie: Thank you.

Steve: All right Nathalie, thanks a lot for coming on the show. I really appreciate you.

Nathalie: Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

There you have it. What I love about Nathalie is that she’s a triple threat. She can market, she can code, and she can sell. I really admire what she’s done with her software business.

For more information about this episode, go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode 129. If you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest complement that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

If you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to My Wife Quit Her Job for more information. Sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

128: The Dark Side Of SEO And Little Used Ways To Rank In Search With Glen Allsopp

The Dark Side Of SEO And How To Rank In Search With Glen Allsopp

Today, I’m thrilled to have Glen Allsop on the show. Glen runs the awesome site ViperChill.com where he teaches people how to get traffic to their websites.

Glen and I actually go way back to 2010 where we were members of the same blog voting group and we’ve loosely kept in touch since. He’s got an amazing array of articles that go into incredible depth. I want to say a short post for him is like 3000 words. And the reason why I follow Glen’s work is because he talks about topics that other people would not dare talk about.

For example, he talks about his experiments with private blog networks. He does in depth analysis on link building, both white and grey hat tactics. He doesn’t write very often, but when he does he always drops an atomic bomb in your brain. And with that, enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to avoid getting penalized by Google and why big companies are getting away with it.
  • Some SEO tactics big companies are using that are black hat.
  • Which grey hat tactics would Glen consider using for new sites.
  • Glen’s main strategy when it comes to ranking a site in search.
  • Where Glen promotes his content.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Glen Allsopp on the show. Glen runs the awesome site viperchill.com where he teaches people how to get traffic to their websites. Glen and I actually go way back to I want to say early 2010 where we were a member of the same blog group, and we’ve kind of loosely kept in touch ever since. He’s got an amazing array of articles that go in to incredible depth. I want to say that a short post for him is like 3,000 to 4,000 words. I’m not even exaggerating.

The reason why I follow Glen’s work is because he talks about topics that other people would not dare talk about. For example, he talks about his experiments with private blog networks. He goes in depth on analysis on link building, both white and grey hat tactics. He doesn’t write very often, but when he does, he always drops an atomic bomb in your head. With that welcome to the show Glen, how are you doing today man?

Glen: Steve I’m very here. Thank you for that awesome introduction.

Steve: It’s been so long, and jeez I’m so happy to have you on the podcast today. A bunch of people in the audience probably know who you are, but if you won’t mind just giving a very brief intro, how you got started online and the history behind ViperChill, your agencies and basically what you’ve been up to online.

Glen: Yeah, sure. It was my birthday last month. I turned 27 years old. The reason I say that just to put things into perspective. I actually started ViperChill 11 years ago. So I was 16 years old. You can go and check that in archives. You can see how terrible my website designs and my writing used to be. ViperChill was pretty much one of the first sites I started. It was actually the second website.

The first website I started was a Deejaying website. I was trying to get into Deejaying at the time. I wasn’t trying to get famous; I was just at home and having fun with it. I turned tables and stuff like that. I set up a website about it and no one came. I decided to learn about how Google works, and we started ranking for things like Deejay forums and reviews for particular equipments and stuff like that.
I realized I was actually having a lot more fun working out how Google works than it was actually learning how to mix tracks together and matching beats and stuff like that, so I started ViperChill. It was very much a kind of a diary of my SEO experiments. Like I said it was just something I seemed to enjoy far more than actually the original reason I had actually learned SEO in the first place.

As you said, we go way back, so I think 2008, 2009 something like that. I have 6, 7, 8 years now. I started plug in ID. I had just moved to South Africa. I got offered a job there when I was 18. Someone had found me, they were reading my blog, they found me on an SEO forum and they said, “Would you like to move to South Africa and come and work for us.” I was in college at the time. I had a part time job in a closed store in the UK. I turned it down. I thought it was ridiculous. I don’t know anyone in South Africa.

I goggled a bit about it and I was like it’s so unsafe, don’t go there. Like I said I was still living with my parents, still at home, I was like 16, 17 at this point. I told my mom like, “Hey this crazy guy in South Africa offered me a job to go and do internet marketing with all these big brands.” She said, “So you said yes?” I was kind of surprised and she said, “You know you don’t like college which is true.” I’m folding clothes in some shop and working out all my spare hours trying to rank websites in Google. She said, “Just go and do it.”

A few weeks later, I was 17 about to turn 18, I moved to Cape Town, South Africa and that’s where I started plug in ID. If anyone listening, it’s no longer online. I did end up selling that website. But yeah, that’s pretty much how we met and how my journey started.

Steve: I was just kind of coming through your blog and on your about page I think it said that you cleared 7 figures last year in 2015. I’m pretty sure that ViperChills isn’t really monetized. I was just wondering what you guys do actually just to generate revenue?

Glen: A lot of– we talked a bit about before the show. What I spent the last few years doing. Kind of go back to my original story a bit. I got to work with all these amazing clients in South Africa. I got to do instant marketing for like Land Rover and Nissan and Hewlett Packard, like the South African division. I got to work with all of these awesome clients, but the problem is, I soon learned when you are working with these awesome clients, although it sounds good, they are so slow to making any changes that you recommend.

You know if there’s an article I think they should write that could go viral, or an SEO change that they should implement to get more search traffic, that has to go to my manager, to their marketing manager, to their legal team, back to their manager, back to my manager, back to me. A change that should have really taken like a day for a personal website could take two months for one of these big clients. It wasn’t really ideal.

What I started doing on the side was I know about SEO, I know how to rank. I started deciding to rank more websites. I got into the affiliate kind of stuff and ranking websites that way. Like I said, one of the first websites was ViperChill and I just really loved doing SEO, and especially doing it for other people and new challenges and stuff like that. For the last two or three years now, we have built– so I say we is my business partner Diggy. We have built almost a dozen, so 10 or 11 I think maybe now niche focused SEO agencies.

So we have an SEO agency that only works with companies in Singapore. We have an SEO agency that only works with car dealers in the US, and so on. The reason I do that, is so it’s all one company, but the reason I separate all of the branding is because these companies, they want to work with someone who they feel, this is the guy I want. When you are selling SEO, you’ve got to compete with hundreds of thousands of emails that companies get saying, “Hey we can do SEO for you. Do you want SEO or do you want link building.” You don’t stand out. It’s very difficult.

What we did is we branded ourselves to say the SEO agency for Singapore, and yeah when we contacted people they would say, “Oh he’s doing SEO, but he only does it for guys in Singapore. He must know what he’s doing.” Pretty much all of my revenue for last year and pretty much the three years before that as well is just doing SEO for clients.

Steve: So that’s really smart. I imagine you pick very lucrative verticals to go into. You mentioned car dealers, right?

Glen: Yeah.

Steve: That means you probably own like all the SEO guys from the car dealerships I would imagine, right?

Glen: It’s actually very competitive space.

Steve: Oh it is, okay.

Glen: The reason I got into it is actually I found two brands. I’m trying to remember their names right now. I think one is called Auto Shop Solutions, and they build websites just for car dealers. There was another one who do like mailings, like direct mailings for car dealers. They print out the little fliers they can send out to potential clients and so on. I thought these guys have been doing a lot of money doing website sign just for car dealers. These guys are making a lot of money doing direct mail just for car dealers. I want to try SEO.

As I got into it, I did notice there was quite a bit of competition. Sadly I like to work remotely. A lot of potential clients do want to be able to meet you face to face as well which isn’t something that I wanted to do personally. But yeah, we do pretty well and like I said, as long as you have the right angle when you are approaching someone, you know, “This is my SEO Company. I only work with car dealers. I’ve researched how Google ranks websites in the automotive niche. I know the big competitors already. I know what kind of content people share in that industry. Would you like me to help you as well?” That’s pretty much…

Steve: That’s a very compelling argument. What I really like about you Glen as I mentioned earlier is that you cover topics that no one else really covers, and that just makes it super interesting. You talk a lot about SEO in your posts, and I was hoping to kind of steer the conversation towards like anomalies and grey hat tactics that are still working to rank in search today, even though Google has pretty much scared everyone from manual link building.

Glen: Right.

Steve: So let’s start with– you mentioned private blog networks earlier in our conversation. Are those still working, and is it dangerous?

Glen: First of all they definitely still work. Two to three years ago they were, I can’t say they were working better, but people were less scared to implement the tactic. So people were, I could happily say, “Hey, I run private blog networks,” and though people thought it was a bit, not purely white hat, they don’t really have such negative opinion about it. And then the official Google announcement came that we are cracking down the link networks. Everyone got scared and worried about it and so on. When Google say something you know people listen and they get worried.

I find today that the guys who do private blog networks and the people who build them generally do so privately which is myself as well. I still rank affiliate websites to this day and little niche websites. I don’t do this for clients, but I think it’s important to know what works. I think any good SEO should know all of the “earned links”– I’m making little speech bubbles speech marks with my fingers here. They should know what works naturally and what’s on the other side of the fence as well.

They are generally frowned upon by Google. They are kind of frowned upon if you say you offer that as a service or you do it. But as long as you can build them in a way that’s– it’s some way to review the website manually, it would look like a legitimate website, then for the most part you can be pretty safe.

That being said, you know if you are working with a huge client, you know like Land Rover or Hewlett Packard or something, obviously I wouldn’t go and do that for them. They could get a lot of negative backlash and so on. If you are happy to do it privately and for your own websites, it’s definitely something I would be comfortable recommending as long as you know the risks involved, but as far as doing it for clients and big brands and stuff like that, generally a no, no with that tactic.

Steve: I mean if you are doing a private blog network just for yourself, really that’s just a collection of websites then at that point, right?

Glen: Yeah, so it’s let’s just say you want a website, you want to rank for how to learn Spanish or something like that, and you want to sell a video course or an eBook or whatever on that topic, then you would go, and the way to rank in Google, a very simplistic way to break it all down is that you need links. So you need other websites linking to you. Now it’s not the easiest things in the world.

There are tens of thousands, maybe hundreds of thousands of websites on how to learn Spanish. They are all trying to compete. They are all on traffic from Google. They are all trying to get links. It’s not that easy. The short cut and the route many of us take is to go and build your own website on the similar topics, building out other websites on how to learn Spanish, and then linking them back to my original website in the hope that we’ll rank higher.

Steve: How do you get those, I mean there’s only so much time. You probably have to spend a lot of time to build up the sites in your blog network.

Glen: To be honest, my own experience is that the blog networks themselves do not have to be very good sites at all. Actually, especially two years ago, I would set up websites that were just three or four pages. They would still pass for what we call like link juice to what we also call the money site, that’s a website that we want to rank. They would still pass the juice. What you want to do is to kind of again the speed up the process which is why we do private link networks in the first place, and to kind of level the playing field a little bit is you want to find domains that used to be used for a website originally.

So someone had build a website, they’ve build a resource on the topic and for whatever reason, they let the website die, the domain expired, you can go and register it and so on. Then what we do is go pick up those domains that expired, put a website on it. There are people who recommend copying the old content. I would never do that.

First of all it’s illegal. But there are actually a lot of services out there that would copy the content from a website, how it used to look like before it experienced. But I will just build up new content on that website. And the reason we do this is because people were already linking to that website originally, so it kind of has again the most authority that it can pass on to your website.

Steve: Interesting. Yeah, I heard about this like a couple of years ago, but all of a sudden like no one started writing about it anymore. It’s still in fact is effective is what you are saying?

Glen: Yeah, and the reason no one is writing about it like I said is because of that Google update which made everyone, if you want to have a clean image when you are talking about internet marketing and SEO, then you kind of veer away from talking about private link networks.

Steve: I see, I see, interesting. So you recommend doing it just for yourself. I was going to say like the point of a private blog network is to be able to sell access to it. But it sounds like no one is really selling access to it. They are being extremely careful about who they allow into this network.

Glen: Yeah, there are certainly quite a lot of people who still sell access. I used to do the same. I don’t do that anymore. I actually sold the business that I did that with. So there are definitely people who still sell access to their private networks, but you are more likely to find them on private forums like Black Hat World and so on, than you are people being open about it in public like there used to be.

Steve: I see. One of the things that also intrigued me lately, and you are not the only person to have told me this, but there’s all these places where you can still buy back links on very reputable sites. Is that still going on with some of the larger companies that you know of, and like is it risky and where can you find places to do this?

Glen: What a lot of people do to get links on the most authoritative websites, and I’m talking about Forbes, Huffington Post, ink.com, entrepreneur.com, and obviously the respected big brands in different industries outside of business and marketing is that they connect with the people who are writing articles for those websites. Of course, Entrepreneur, they are not going to have a big section in their websites side basting sponsored links and here’s all the links.

What you can do is you can find someone who is regularly contributing to the website and say, “Hey I have a client, or I have my own website. I would like you to link to it. Would you sell a link in your next article, or is there anything else I can do for you?” I’ve heard of examples of people like fixing someone’s logo on their website in return for them writing about them on Forbes or something like that. It’s not always a direct money transaction, but generally it’s about reaching out to again the regular contributors. I can’t even speak today. I’m not going to try and say that word again. Reaching out to them and just seeing would they mention you.

That’s kind of– I wouldn’t say underground, but it’s you know, it’s not something that they are going to be saying, “Hey pay me money and I will write for you on Forbes.” You have to connect with them yourself and see what you can do with that. As far as buying links goes and seeing opportunities, what I recommend if you want to see how deep paid links buying goes on the internet is find– generally it’s kind of open source software and open source tools, and they allow you to sponsor the kind of development of their tool and in return they will give you a link back as a thank you.

Now of course any opportunity to get links, SEO will take advantage of. If you go to any kind of big open source software, open sourcing and people can get for free and they can download it and put it on their server whatever it is, even something like My SQL, they have a sponsors page, phpBB forum software. They have a sponsor’s page, and you will see the people who are already taking advantage of link buying.

And then because I’m a real total nerd when it comes to this SEO stuff, not only will I see, okay who’s buying all the links in this page, but then I’ll go and check all of the other back links and you know you it just– if you keep going and you keep going down the warm hole, and seeing all of the sites that are buying links somewhere, you will find all of these other opportunities in other websites where they are clearly buying links. Now, again not all of them are very open, so they are not all honest like hey, sponsor us for a $20 and you get a link.

Actually, one I contacted two weeks ago, has six sponsors and they look like kind of clearly generic websites, and they charge $10,000 a year for the link, so some people are paying a lot of money for these back links. Not all of them are open, and a lot of them you can see that the link is clearly bought, like it just doesn’t fit with the website. So maybe a website about WordPress themes and in the photo they have a link to law firm Michigan or something like that.

Although they don’t clearly state that they sell links, you can, and I generally do contact them, and how much are you selling links, how much do you sell them for and so on. Again it’s not something you will see out in the open too much, but there’s definitely a big industry and a lot of money being spent on links.

Steve: But if you can spot them, doesn’t that mean that Google can probably spot them as well.

Glen: Yeah, well here is the thing, let’s just say, I can’t remember which one. Say my SQL, what it is the other one, phpMyAdmin, they also have a lot of sponsor links on their website. There’s no way to detect whether I went and bought that for myself or someone bought it for me, and try to do negative things to my SEO. What SEOs generally would like Google to state– so a couple of days ago I read this amazing comment by Danny Sullivan.

He writes for Search Engine Land, pretty much the biggest authority on updates to Google and Bing and Yahoo and so on. His comments back from a few years ago when Google was saying no follow links in infographics and “no follow” just for everyone else means make sure that the link doesn’t count. You’re trying to get search, increase search engine rankings for it, and make sure you do that. And Danny said, “Google, will you just say we can’t do any link building. It would be so much easier than saying you can’t do this, you can’t do this, don’t do this, don’t do this.”

Yes, you have to be careful with any kind of link building. What I do is again, you have to keep your mind this, although I could buy and be buying links for myself, someone else could be buying them for me, and you know I could be penalized. I think Google has to be very careful, and the ideal solution for pretty much everyone, not only I think for Google’s reputation but for SEOs and link builders is for Google to just not count links that they don’t think are worth passing on.

I’m sure someone from Google already knows phpMyAdmin. You know it’s one of the biggest server softwares in the world used by millions of people. I’m sure if someone from Google found that sponsorship page, ideally they would just say this link isn’t passing any credit. You can keep buying it, you can keep thinking it’s helping your SEO, but actually we are not passing on any weight from this domain.

Again, although some of these links are very easy to spot, we don’t know who’s buying them. It could be someone trying to hurt the reputation of someone else. So ideally they are just not counted and you don’t really know.

Steve: If you decide to go this route, what are some best tactics to avoid getting penalized?

Glen: If you are going to be buying links?

Steve: Yes.

Glen: I think the safest route is generally to try and get links in content. So contacting webmasters who blog, people who write for these big websites. There’s no– without speaking with the writer directly, there’s no guaranteed way to know whether or not a link was paid for. In my view although it’s a bit of an idealistic view, if I find a website of mine got penalized, and again this happens very, very rarely these days.

Actually the people who tend to get penalized are the ones who are very public about their websites. I think it was Spencer Haws from Niche Site Pursuits. He was doing, he was using– I can’t remember exact thing. I think he was using PBNs, but he was very public about his case study and what was going on, and then a few months later on he got a thin content, or a bad back link warning, or something like that from Google.

So it’s generally the guys who are public about what they are doing with SEO tend to get caught, because they are kind of admitting to their process, and those who are– I don’t really see any big penalties happening for a lot of sites. For example the last major Google penalty that kind of got the SEO world talking was for Rap Genius, and this was a couple of years ago now.

They describe what Rap lyrics really mean and song lyrics, and they get millions of visitors a month. They were found to be doing some shady stuff like openly asking their audience for reviews and back links and so on, and they only got caught because they were actually asking about it in public. It wasn’t something like Google detected themselves. Someone blogged about it, and SEO blogged about it, Google saw that SEO’s blog post, and then they got penalized.

So as I was going to say, if I find a website of mine is going to get penalized which is very, very rare, it hasn’t happened for a long time, I could theoretically go on build the same links for my competition, get them penalized and have a better website of mine ranking high.

Steve: Right. So what’s really cool is that as I was just combing through some your articles in the last year, and you are pointing out that a lot of big companies are getting away with just blatant link building. And would you consider that black hat, grey hat, and why are they getting away with it?

Glen: The post I think you’re referring to is my article 16 companies dominating Google?

Steve: Yes.

Glen: So originally that post was entirely supposed to be about one network. It was about Hearst Media and for those who don’t know Hearst Media they own brands like, Elle, Esquire, Cosmopolitan, Woman’s Day and so on. So they owned a lot of fashion titles and they took those to the web, and they all started linking to one website bestproducts.com.

Now, I see nothing wrong with that, okay so Steve if you start a new website, it’s pretty normal for you to want to link to that from your own website not necessarily for such traffic and rankings, but to let your audience know I have this new website, and it’s fairly normal to want to link it from your website.

So what they were doing is for all of their websites Cosmo, Elle, Esquire, Vogue, and so on you will see in the footer of those websites every single one of them links to a brand new website which is bestproducts.com. Now again, because they own the website, I don’t see anything wrong with that tactic. However, what I don’t really like seeing is that Google have massively rewarded this tactic. I can’t remember the exact numbers, but this Best Products is now getting a few million visitors per month from Google, and it’s only a couple months old.

So anyone else trying to do the same thing for a product review website unless you work for one of these big brands, then you have no chance of getting those amazing links. So in my theory again Hearst weren’t doing anything wrong, but I really don’t like seeing Google give them so much weight, because it’s not something someone else can replicate, and in other words it’s just big money taking over.

So I wouldn’t say it’s black hat or grey hat or anything like that. It’s totally normal for a website to want to link to their other websites, but as far as Google are giving it so much credit is pretty disappointing for the SEO world.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most, bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory cost are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, Bigcommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who will handle everything for you.

So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. And the best part is you can get 20% off your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: So there’s another example you gave I think on a different article where Houzz was putting in links on their widgets or something like that. I mean is that blatantly black hat too?

Glen: Yes. I tend to find black hat as hacking websites and stuff like that. It’s very negative term to me, so I will put this more on a grey hat side of things. So what they were doing, so Houzz, I think they are going to IPO next year and probably for a few billion dollars they’re valued at the moment, home design community.

You can put a widget on your website showing like bathroom photos or the latest house photos in that community and so on, and what they were doing is they were sticking in I think it was about ten links to all of their pages on their websites if you installed the widget. So you think the widget preview just shows you that you are going to get nice bath photos that you can put on the side bar of your home design blog, but in reality when you install the widget you had ten links to all of these different pages on Houzz.

Now I audit them, I don’t really like auditing, but I hated seeing this, because there are a lot of webmasters who had no idea. They are just normal mom and pop bloggers, whatever. They don’t think about link building and SEO, they are putting these widgets on their site, and they’re suddenly linking to all of these pages on Houzz.

They don’t really know what it is and what it’s for. So again I audited them on my blog, and within 24 hours they took away all of those links, they removed all of the links from their widget. No comments, no emails from them, but I was pretty proud of that. It’s nice to see and I checked…

Steve: It’s clearly working, right?

Glen: Yeah clearly working. Their search traffic was through the roof. And so I checked a few months ago, and although they removed it previously, they have now added one link back. It’s fine to add a link in a widget, but should really be no followed again. That’s kind of telling Google don’t count this link as something for search engine rankings. They are not doing that. They certainly should know that there should be no following that link and they’re linking to the photos pages on their website.

I’m pretty sure it’s just houzz.com/photos and that’s H-O-U-Z-Z for anyone again for people listening houzz.com/photos, but that links to all the other main pages on their site like bathroom photos, bedroom photos, kitchen photos, and those such terms they’re ranking pretty number one for everything in Google. Their search terms are sending them hundreds of thousands of visitors every single month. So again they went back to the kind of that shady grey hat ways, they are putting links on people’s website that people don’t know about, and they’re getting a lot of search traffic in return.

Steve: How do you feel about, let’s just take about a WordPress plug-in for example, like a free plug-in, but within that plug-in there’s like a little back link going back to their site? I mean does that tactic work, and how do you feel about that in terms of risk?

Glen: If the link is– on a general level forgetting about such changes for a second, I think that’s fine. If you’re using a free plug-in and add something to your website you give credit to the author. Now when it comes to search, Google recommends and strongly recommends that you no-follow that link again. So you’re telling them don’t use this link as something that would count for my search engine rankings, but it may send me traffic from that website to mine which is fine.

So if it’s going to be a popular plug in and it’s going to be used by a lot of people, very risky, someone’s going to mention it, someone’s going to talk about it, maybe Google are going to find it. Another thing, you have to be worried about is having too many links with the same text. You have … If I’m trying to rank for a holiday in Spanish. Even 90% of my links are just holiday in Spanish. There is something very odd going on there unnatural. It’s probably going to set off a few flags …

Steve: Houzz has been getting away with this right, maybe because they are such a strong domain that it doesn’t matter as much?

Glen: Yeah, exactly that’s pretty much my theory is that because they have many types of links anyway, some that don’t fit into the ideal criteria, they are left alone. To be honest that theory was thrown away when we see what happened when Hearst Media sent all their links to BestProducts.com. They didn’t have any other type of link, just links from every page in the footer of their other websites and now they are just ranking for everything in Google.
Again this is the reason I test so much, and the reason I write infrequently, but when I do I try and cover something in such depth is because what Google always say and what they recommend and what should be the case is actually very often not the case at all. Houzz get away with it one because Google didn’t find it. They are definitely not as smart as we think they are.

Two they have a strong brand and they have so many links that they negate the less quality ones. Again Best Products showed us that Google just aren’t good at saying these links shouldn’t count. They’ve got to scan what billions of web pages every day, rank for billions and billions of different search terms. There’s going to be a lot of things that they get wrong.

Steve: One thing I wanted to talk about is a lot of people listening they are not going to have really strong domains or really strong websites. I wanted to just switch gears a little bit and just talk about how you would proceed to rank let’s say a brand new ecommerce site in search. What would be your strategy at a high level?

Glen: The first thing I would do is just make sure all my onsite stuff is good. I don’t have a lot of duplicate pages. I’m not duplicate content everywhere; you want have a unique descriptions for your items and so on. Just always, although links are the most important factor you definitely just want to make sure you take care of the fundamentals to make sure that when you are getting links that they actually have a bit more effect. If I was going to start a brand new ecommerce blog I would definitely focus on trying to be creative and very transparent. I’d have a blog on there, content marketing. Although I’m focused on a lot of other aspects of link building I actually enjoy content marketing the most. I love having ideas for content and actually putting it out there.

In the ecommerce industry for instance I think you have to be creative. For example one company, it’s a bit borderline on ethics, but they are a slippers company in the UK and what they did is they ordered a slipper in size 43. That’s UK sizes; no more if it’s a 10 in UK it would be 43 in America. We are talking about a 44 in the UK, whatever that is in the States. They ordered it from China, and then they created this article saying, “Oh we ordered some slippers from China but they got our size wrong. The guys are sleeping inside the slipper, they got our size wrong.”

And obviously everyone started talking about it. Everyone linking to it, they got links in the Daily Mail, the Metro in the UK, they Guardian Newspaper. Look what happened when these guys ordered slippers from China. They got, lost in translation, wasn’t the case at all. They ordered the slippers themselves; it’s a viral stunt. It depends on your definition …

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit. How important is it to be deliberate with the keywords that you are targeting for a post as opposed to just making something go viral?

Glen: Well the thing that you have to keep in mind is that links to a page to spread throughout a website. They started ranking for slipper related terms but if people are searching for slippers they don’t really want to read an article on big slippers, they want to actually buy the product.
What you have to do is there’s two things; first of all keep in mind that the link authority and link juice whatever you want to call it should theoretically flow through to other pages on the website so you have your category pages ranking higher naturally. The other point is make sure there are elements on the page, on that page that will direct people to relevant product categories on your site.

For example Amazon, they rank for pretty much everything but those internal pages don’t actually have a lot of back links. It’s just because their domain as whole has built up so much authority. As long as you are getting links from other sources they don’t always have to be for specific keywords to a page that you actually want to rank high in Google when people are searching for product terms but it should help your website authority overall.

Steve: Interesting, because right now for my blog I always take the time, I fire up Long Tail Pro, and I look for keywords that I can rank for pretty easily for the post but it sounds like I should probably be mixing those up with maybe viral titles to just attract more back links which in turn will spread that juice to my other posts. Is that accurate?

Glen: Yeah I think it depends on the audience. For your blog, you have a specific audience. I think it would be a bit strange for them if you suddenly started writing things with click bait titles that were clearly designed just to attract links. I think that might put your audience off a little bit. Whereas an ecommerce brand they don’t, if they don’t already have a following like you said it’s a new site they can test new things and get away with things a little bit better.

One website I found doing very well with this was a … I think they sell kilts and just men’s clothing basically. They created a tactical army kilt. They created this kilt with all these pockets and so on, and it was a fake product, but everyone started talking about it and they got many requests that they actually made it into a real item, a kilt that you can actually take into battle with you. Yeah it got a lot of people talking.

It depends on your audience. I’m trying to think of a big clothing brand. Like a Louis Vuitton or Gucci or something like that it would be very bad for their brand to try and put out these viral stuff in order to get links and so on. For someone just starting out in this specific niche industry can definitely be a way to get people noticing your brand.

Steve: How do you feel about having the blog on a sub domain as opposed to the main domain which is what you might have to do with if you use a fully hosted shopping cart for example? Is it an absolute no, no?

Glen: I definitely prefer a blog to be on a sub folder. How Google worked for a long time and I believe this still to be the case is that a sub-domain is essentially being thought of as a new domain. Any “juice” that you want to pass from the sub domain to the main site isn’t really there unless the blog itself has a lot of links to it. Whereas as you are on a sub folder the authority of the main domain is passing authority to those sub pages and now those blog articles can rank higher because of the authority of the demand.

Preferably if you have the option definitely you put a blog on a sub-folder. If it’s going to be an integral part of your marketing anyway and you are going to be taking it seriously people are going to be linking to your blog. If it has to be on a sub folder, people have made it work, it’s definitely not impossible but ideally it would be on a sub-folder for me rather than a sub domain.

Steve: Okay and since we’ve been talking about grey hat tactics would you employ any of these tactics to give a boost to an ecommerce store if you were starting out?

Glen: As long as they know the risks involved then it’s something I would do. For example if I could get someone on the Huffington Post I don’t know what I’m selling. Let’s just say I’m selling a new line of designer glasses.

Steve: Sure.

Glen: If Huffington Post are doing a blog post, if they have a writer who talks about accessories and fashion and stuff like that. If I could suggest to them do a blog post comparing the UV protection of cheap sunglasses compared to for a dollar or those that costs $300. Giving them ideas for content and getting links from them and maybe the case that it’s a friend of mine or I paid them for that mention.

Or I gave them advice in their own websites, in their careers, something in return for that link. In Google’s world, ideal world I wouldn’t get that link or it shouldn’t count because I actively went out to seek that link unnaturally. Whereas to me what … I guess the simple solution is to try and build links that will also send traffic.
Do people really go and check out the sponsor’s page of phpMyAdmin? Not really, do they really go and click on these links not really. If I’m commenting on blogs or I’m participating in forums or I’m trying to offer great content on my website all of the things that could also get traffic to my of site then it’s generated the links I would want to build. Sometimes there are … Google have made it so that people are scared to do any link building.

In their eyes pretty much anything could be seen as grey hat if it’s not somehow I just got … Randomly got a link from these websites, it just happened. I actively go out and seek links. I guess that’s always seen as against their guidelines, but for a new site I’ll definitely try and reach out to influencers and authorities and see if there is any way I can get them to talk about me and of course send links back to my site.

Steve: Using that Huffington Post example, essentially Google has forced us to use social engineering to get these links. I was just curious what your strategy would be to reach out to someone on Huffington Post in your example who is writing about fashion or whatever that could be relevant to your store.
Glen: Sometimes it’s very obvious and that someone is already sending out links that are on a page basis. For example there is a guy … I’m not going to say his name. There is a guy who writes for Businessinsider.com in their wall room section. Very clearly half the articles he writes are … I don’t know if it’s him personally being paid or Business Insider trying to do in content ads or whatever it is, native ads if you want to call them.

I don’t know if it’s them collecting the money, but those articles are clearly being paid for. In that case I would just go to the guy and say again I’m trying not to say his name. I would just contact …

Steve: No that’s fine. What are some elements that you can instantly determine that these links are paid for? Are they just totally out of context or?

Glen: It’s just too much promotion and nice things and so many links. The one I saw recently was like this guy writes the best blog on this topic and then with a weird keyword link. He also just has a new book coming out which you can find here, I really recommend it. It’s just whereas if Mark Zuckerberg does something they’re really critical.

Whereas this new guy who no one’s ever heard of they are super nice about it and they just want to link to all pages of his website, which really stands out to me. Yeah you can just watch, for example one person I found recently is actually a team of people, 4 or 5 guys. I just noticed that in half the articles they were writing for Forbes and Entrepreneur they were all linking to each other.

You would say, “Guys look I know what’s going on.” I’m often very direct, “Look I know what’s going on I want to get in. I want to get a piece of this action as anyways get involved.” Same for Business Insider I would be very direct. Whereas if I wasn’t too sure or I just wanted to reach out at someone from Huffington Post I would generally just say something like, “Hey I really enjoyed your article about X. I also have a website like this is there any way we could discuss how I could help promote myself, it could be worth your time.” Don’t directly mention money or anything like that just saying, “I’m happy to … I’m happy to do something in return for your time.”

Steve: Interesting and when the people do respond do they just give you a rate sheet or how does it usually work, the conversation?

Glen: Funnily, if it’s a website, if I’m buying the link directly from a website and not a writer for one of these things they will literally reply with 2 sentences. “Hey Glen … “Actually I don’t use my name but will reply to the person the alias that I’m emailing from. If they see it’s from ViperChill as they go its, he just wants to write about me and selling links or whatever. They will say, “Hey yeah homepage link is $20 a month, if you want me to write a post for you its $100. If you want me to write the content it’s $150.” They’ll be very, very direct in their response a lot of the time. Other people will dismiss it.
If you do email someone who would never accept money which is a lot of people they will just ignore the email. Other people they are, “Yeah what do you have in mind.” I have an upcoming article on X, I could probably mention it, would you pay for that and so on.

Steve: Okay how do you feel about services like Tomoson which are places where you pay money for bloggers to review items?

Glen: What was that website sorry, Tomoson?

Steve: Tomoson yeah.

Glen: I don’t know about it personally.

Steve: Okay or just sites in general that hook you up with bloggers that are willing to review products.

Glen: Well the one thing that you have to be wary of is one of the links no follow or due follow, are they going to pass any juice? If they are generally the ones that aren’t going to be passing link authority, link juice. If they are is it easy for someone else to be able to do the same? Can a hundred people go to that same person and get links that’s going to look a bit dodgy for your website.

It’s going to … Maybe they are going to get flagged in the future or something like that. The one thing you want to be careful of in any network is you want to make sure that you don’t know about the website upfront. I don’t want … If there is a big database of all of these people selling reviews then that’s a bad sign. It’s very easy to see then of course someone else can see that, someone else being Google staff could see that and potentially crack down on that also.

As far as traffic and stuff goes again now everything is about search. If it could send you traffic go for it but probably you might want to as for that link to be no follow. If you are trying to get due follow links then just make sure it’s not too easy for everyone else to do the same and then not too obvious about what they are doing.

Steve: Okay and I’m just curious I’m jumping around a little bit here but what are your views on just content on your blog in terms of being a little thin? For example let’s say you had a blog for 5 or 6 years and some of your earlier posts are just really crappy. Do you recommend going back and deleting those or going back and rewriting them to make them much more complete? What are your thoughts on just kind of going through your old content?

Glen: Yeah I think I’m actually doing that right now. I rank 4th, 3rd or 4th in Google anywhere you search from, for WordPress SEO. I’m actually going to talk about interesting little text here right now and that post written in 2010 or ’11 I think it was. It still ranked for that even though it’s 6 years old. I have actually been working, that was around a 3,000 web post. It’s actually now a 10,000 word post in Evernote.

Steve: I was about to say 3000 words is pretty short for your Glen.

Glen: Yeah it’s about 10,000 words in Evernote. I still have to format that and spell check it and then I’m actually going to update that article because it still gets so much traffic. I definitely recommend to answer your question directly, yeah. If you can go back the way to maximize your time is to see which pages are getting the most search traffic already and start with those. They are …

Steve: Just turn those into much more comprehensive resources?

Glen: Yeah more comprehensive resources and just implementing things that are more talked about today. For example content upgrades, where you can offer someone a PDF of your post or a checklist that they can follow. They weren’t popular a few years ago; people didn’t used to use them. Now you can implement that in an old article and start getting more email subscribers for that post.

That’s exactly what I’m going to be doing on my WordPress SEO article. Making a more comprehensive, more up to date, more relevant, checking that the sources that maybe you linked to in the past still exist and so on. Maybe adding content upgrades, maybe linking to other relevant pages and posts on your site that you didn’t have previously.

Going back to what I did, that … like I said the articles was written in 2010 or 2011. Around 3 years ago Google made a massive update around freshness. Pretty much all search results had a date in them when the article was published. You’ll see that now you can search for anything, personally development, marketing related. You will see a date for a lot of results, not all of them for when the article was last updated. I had dropped to … What I did first of all it looked bad.

I thought people were going to Google searching for WordPress SEO in 2013 and they are seeing my article is written in 2010. They are probably not going to click on the result. I added a line of text, the first line of text in the article I changed it to last updated June 2014 or something like that. Within a few days Google noticed that change and everyone then assumed my article was fresh, I didn’t change anything else on the page.

Steve: Interesting.

Glen: I only changed the first sentence and then it looked like it was a more relevant article. Now I actually did this, I am planning to update the post but I did this as an SEO experiment very recently. I once again changed it. If you go to viperchills.com/wordpress-SEO the only thing I changed in the article was the first sentence that says last updated March something 2016. Now the reason I did this is because my page had dropped to 7th or 8th. My ranking had dropped 7th or 8th in Google for WordPress SEO and WordPress SEO guide.

Now 2 years later I updated that text showing that it was more fresh and my rankings have came back up to 3rd or 4th. It’s just something slightly unethical at least if you haven’t actually updated the page. For me it was an experiment to see are Google still giving value to content that they believe is more fresh, and I definitely believe that is the case.

Steve: Do you think that’s why comments are important because when someone leaves a comment technically that updates the page right?

Glen: Yeah originally, and I’m actually working on a big article for this that’s why I’m interested in it right now. Is that originally comments didn’t seem to be affecting the date that Google were picking up on. Actually a lot of bloggers that removed their dates from their comments because they didn’t want it to look older than it was. You’ll see that in Ramit Sethi, my friend Ramsey.

Steve: The same thing I did too yeah.

Glen: Yeah and was yours because of SEO reasons or just …

Steve: It was more because I didn’t want someone to come in and see an old article and just immediately dismiss it.

Glen: Right okay, yeah I can understand that. Definitely a lot of people did it for SEO reasons. I faked that in a way but I do plan on updating the article. As I was saying comments didn’t used to seem to be noticed by Google, however the dates are now. A good example of this is Udemy, the online training community.
If someone writes a new review on the page for a course Google will take that date for the latest review and put that as when the course was actually last updated. Even though the course could’ve been published years ago people now see it in search results and think, “Hey it’s only … It was updated 2 days ago, I’ll click on this.”

Steve: Interesting. Okay you are suggesting that adding the dates back into the comments might be valuable from a freshness perspective?

Glen: Absolutely, and but of course there is the other side of the coin like you said someone comes to my article in WordPress SEO they see a comment from 2010 they would concern that it’s still relevant today.

Steve: What are your views on the disavow tool and removing potentially bad backgrounds? Do you ever use that tool at all?

Glen: Yeah I think it’s a huge pain to be honest with you. It’s like Google are outsourcing their own job. As I was saying earlier it would be so nice if Google just … If they could just figure out we are not going to count these links. You don’t have to disavow them but we are worth more than $100 billion we are just going to … We are going to use our engineers and find out which links we should encounter.
We are not going to count those links, whereas they are saying, “Go out there and actively tell us which links you have that you don’t think are relevant.” And we are in Google’s playing field so there is not really too much we can do about it. If you do have a lot of links and you have warnings and stuff and webmaster tools then it’s just something that you have to do.

Steve: Okay you do use it but only when you get a warning or do you proactively do it?

Glen: Yeah if I’m taking on a new client then I’ll proactively do it just to … If I’m going to be building good new links, I want them to have the best effect possible. I don’t want to it to be, the website to be hindered in any way from any previous link building and stuff like that. If I was taking on a new client it’s something I would look into proactively.

Steve: I want to like end with a friend contacted me, and he knew that I was talking to you today. I just want to ask one of his questions to you.

Glen: Sure.

Steve: He has this domain and no matter what he does, and there is no panel he is associated with it, he can’t get anything to rank. Is it fair to say that there are certain domains that are just dead to Google and that you should start with a brand new domain? Have you ever seen that happen?

Glen: I have seen that yeah. Actually funnily there was a period 2 years ago when all dot info domains were removed from Google. There were slip offs that Google can make where a domain just doesn’t get rankings. There was a case I’m trying to remember the name, I think it’s Slash Film, a very popular movie review website. All of a sudden they lost all their traffic overnight, and there was a lot of other movie review websites complaining on Twitter saying hey we’ve lost all that traffic.
Eventually one of Google Googlers got in touch with them on Twitter saying, hey we had a little mistake there, we are going to rectify it in a few days. It’s something that Google can do on their end and you may not get any warnings, you may not really know about it. It’s definitely possible that something’s happened to that particular domain and you should start new.

Before he does that I definitely rule out that he’s just … Make sure he is not ranking just because he doesn’t have links or it’s very, very competitive and so on. Yeah definitely rule all of the obvious stuff out before he does go and create a new website.

Steve: Okay, hey Glenn we’ve been chatting for quite a while, and I want to be respectful of your time. I learned a lot today. Where can people find you if they need either your services or they just want to check out what you have to put out, or if they have an hour to read one of your posts?

Glen: Steve, thank you so much for having me. Sure they can find me on Viperchill.com that’s V-I-P-E-R-C-H-I-L-L, that’s the same username for Facebook and Twitter. Yeah just pretty much ViperChill is the best place, we can go from there.

Steve: Okay and you guys should really sign up for his email list, because in my opinion you can correct me if I’m wrong, you put out stuff on your email list that does not go out on your blog or anything, right?

Glen: Yeah, actually the first email I send if you join my email list is more than 40 … more than 30,000 words of content that I don’t link to anywhere else, just in the first email.

Steve: Yeah, but his posts are really addictive, and you should just go checkout his blog first and if you like what he puts out then sign up for his list by all means.

Glen: Thank you very much Steve.

Steve: All right Glen, thanks a lot for coming to the show man, I really appreciate it.

Glen: Cheers man, have a good one.

Steve: All right take care. Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I love about Glen is that he’s not afraid to talk about this grey hat SEO techniques. He never hesitates to call out larger companies for their actions. He always tells it like it is and he knows a tone about SEO from practicing what he preaches.
For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode128, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, signup right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequiteherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

127: How Nathan Latka Created The 8 Figure Business Heyo.com By Age 24

127: How Nathan Latka Created Heyo, An 8 Figure Business By Age 24

Today, I’m thrilled to have Nathan Latka on the show. Nathan is the founder of Heyo.com which is a company that does social giveaways for Facebook and other social media platforms.

Now what’s amazing about Nathan is that he started this 8 figure company at age 24 and then recently sold it to his main competitor for a nice sum.

What’s also cool is that Nathan started his businesses knowing absolutely nothing at age 21 and actually made 70K worth of revenue before he ever started building his product.

His story is truly inspirational. Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nathan came up with the idea of starting Heyo
  • How Nathan pre-sold his first customers with nothing
  • How he found his partners
  • Nathan’s primary marketing channels
  • How Nathan grew Heyo exponentially

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email. Now on to the show.

Welcome to The My Wife Quite Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host, SteveChou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today, I’m thrilled to have Nathan Latka on the show. Nathan is the founder of heyo.com which is a company that does social giveaways for Facebook, and other social media platforms. What’s amazing about Nathan is that he started this eight figure company at age 24, and then recently sold it to his main competitor for a very nice sum.

Now what’s also cool is that Nathan started his business knowing absolutely nothing at age 21, and actually made $70,000 worth of sales before he even started building his product. Now his story is truly inspirational and with that welcome to the show Nathan, how are you doing today man?

Nathan: Steve, thank you for having me man. I’m excited to be here.

Steve: Dude you know what, when I was in college I wasn’t doing any of this stuff. I’m just curious, how did you come up with the idea of starting Heyo. What’s the backstory here?

Nathan: Well, there’s not, I’m not going to try and make this sound sexy or anything other than what it actually was which was insecurity. I mean I was an architecture as a freshman at Virginia Tech. This is 09, and I overheard fifth years complaining, whining, pitching, and mourning that they couldn’t get a job, because no one was hiring architects after financial crush. I said, “No way I’m going to put myself through 5 years of college and do not have a guaranteed job at the end.”

I got super insecure and Steve that night I’ll never forget it. I went back to my dorm room, 12 foot, by 10 foot white cinder block stacked on top of each other. I was wearing my ex-girlfriend’s red Christmas boxer she had bought me, and I just started cold calling people who had Facebook fan pages with the word executive in them. And I would convince them on the call that they needed an executive Facebook fan page which coincidently I had.

Steve: How did you think about that? I mean, it seems kind of random.

Nathan: I mean, part of it was, right. I just wanted a way to make money. I mean, I went back to my dorm room and said, “I don’t have to rely on college or a job, how do I make money.” I’m like, “Well I’m using Facebook already as a college student. Let me search how businesses are using it.”

I learned that businesses use these things called fan pages, and I said if I can call up some people who have big egos because they have executive on their fan page title, convince them and like take a shot at their ego and make them feel vulnerable, and then be able to feel that vulnerability with my product, boom baby, I got a business.

Steve: How did you decide on your first customer list? Did you cold call these people?

Nathan: Yeah, they were. I was just cold calling people. I literally even do it today. I just went to Facebook, in the search bar I typed executive and a bunch of fan pages will come up with kind of like [inaudible 00:03:21] or something there for executive, or other people that call themselves an executive. Then I would look in their about section on Facebook page and get their phone number and call them and go from there.

Steve: Interesting, so you mentioned barefoot executive. Was that your first victim, I mean customer?

Nathan: Yeah, she was my first customer. By the way, like the least egotistical person you’ll ever meet. Amazing, amazing lady, but yeah she was the first $700 sale.

Steve: Okay, so how did you come up with that number? Just all seems kind of random to me. So you just cold call her and said you wanted to create a Facebook page for her for $700, and she said yes?

Nathan: No, it way more psychological warfare than that. It was, “Hey Carrie. My name is Nathan Latka. I’m just calling because I see you call yourself the Barefoot executive, but I noticed you don’t have an executive fan page tab. Are you an executive?” And she’s going to do one of two things when I say that. She’s going to say screw you and hung up, or she’s going to go what’s an executive fan page tab?

Thankfully she did the latter and gave me an opportunity to explain what it was, which was a landing page kind of tab on Facebook, where she could capture emails and run contests and things. Eventually she agreed to purchase and I said great, here’s my PayPal button. You can deposit $700 and then I need 6 months to deliver you the quality of product that I want to deliver to you, and if I can’t, I will refund you. The rule is when I did because if I didn’t make enough sales, I would refund everybody because it wasn’t worth my time to learn how to code.

Steve: Sorry, so your initial thing was just a PayPal button. It wasn’t on a website or wasn’t on a Facebook page with the PayPal button.

Nathan: I setup my own Facebook page for free. I couldn’t afford to go daddy domain. So I just did my own Facebook page with a PayPal button built in.

Steve: Okay then you’d used this same strategy. Is that how you made that $70,000?

Nathan: Yeah, exactly. So I sold over the next 6 months from my dorm room. I sold hundreds of those at 700 bucks a pop and then started watching YouTube videos on how to code something called FBML Facebook markup language. And that’s how I started building pages.

Steve: So your delivery time was 6 months and that was acceptable for everybody?

Nathan: You are thinking about it the wrong way. They are thinking about, “Wow if it’s going to take him six months to deliver the quality that he wants, it’s going to be an amazing quality, right?” It’s all how you word it. It’s positioning.

Steve: Okay. It’s a Facebook page though right?

Nathan: Yeah, yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: I mean look you work with an agent and if you hire an agency, they are like, do like, social making and [inaudible 00:05:33] crazy stuff now or designs or logos, I mean some of those take many, many weeks. I mean it wasn’t crazy. You just have to understand, it’s all comes down to the positioning.

Yeah, sure anyone listening who was skeptical was going to go, “Why the hell do people give him 6 months?” It’s because you didn’t get my kung fu judo skills on [inaudible 00:05:49] where I say like, I have to– I am coding this in FBML. I want to make sure the graphics are exactly right. I want to make sure the hexadecimal codes match your website colors perfectly. I want to make sure we get your MailChimp form embedded perfectly. I want to make sure this works on mobile as well.

So I’m going to need 6 months to make sure I deliver you the quality of product that you would expect from yourself, all right. And if I don’t, and if I can’t deliver you that kind of quality, I will refund you after 6 months. And it was a no brainer.

Steve: Okay, so you are not a technical guy from what it sounds like.

Nathan: That’s correct. I was architecture.

Steve: Okay, so you get a hundred people to sign up, and you’ve got to deliver that within 6 months. So you are busy learning how to do this on YouTube. Did you start doing them by hand or what was the next step?

Nathan: Yeah, that’s right. I did them all by hand. So just on my own– like I would use templates and edit the templates for each customer, but I did them all by hand. Eventually what I learned was I brought on 2 technical cofounders, and realized I didn’t want to spend my time building every page.

That’s like what an agency would do. To really build a big business, I needed a software platform where they could pay me monthly just go build their own pages using drag and drop technology. So I gave up 40% of the business to two technical cofounders. We grew it…

Steve: How did you find your partners?

Nathan: I created the entrepreneur club at Virginia Tech specifically to undercover, recruit 2 technical people. And then on the second or third meeting that year, I just said, “Hey guys I’ve got 70 grand in presales. Here’s my PayPal account with a screen shot. I need two or one technical cofounder. I’m willing to give up 40% to one set.” These two guys raised their hands. They both wanted to do and I said fine. Both of you can join. I barely knew the guys. I said but you have to [inaudible 00:07:25] 40% and that was that.

Steve: Okay, so you didn’t vet them or anything? These are just random college students?

Nathan: Yeah, that is one of my biggest mistakes. I knew these guys for about 2 minutes before we were signing founder agreements.

Steve: Oh my goodness. Okay so this was the precursor to Heyo, or was this Heyo?

Nathan: This was the build, yeah– we launched it as Lujure and then we renamed it as Heyo. But yeah, this was the same business.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that a little bit. How did that work out and why was it your biggest mistake?

Nathan: Well, because I’m an action kind of guy. I like moving fast, but that was just a big mistake because like one of those guys ended up having a kid at year end, another one just didn’t align. So neither of them are with me anymore.

Ultimately, when I sold the business, there was a large chunk of equity that was on you know, I like to call it unallocated basically equity which is equity that is out of a business that’s not active. That’s never a good place to be. Thankfully we were able to buy some of the equity back, but you want to always keep equity active in your business.

Steve: So these guys actually invested a good portion of their stock?

Nathan: Yeah, I didn’t know what investing was. So everyone was vested from the outside which was like not good.

Steve: Oh okay, so they had 40% right off the butt.

Nathan: Yeah, you have to remember Steve, I’m like– like this is pre-puberty Nathan. I was like, I know nothing about business.

Steve: How old are you now Nathan, I’m just curious.

Nathan: 26.

Steve: Okay, so this is six years or five years ago.

Nathan: This all when I started when I was 19. That was when the presales came in, and when I started to get the thing going.

Steve: Okay so you have these customers, you do everything by hand, and then you start with this technical cofounders. What was your role at that point? Was it to get more business or?

Nathan: Yeah, yeah everything except coding. Sparking out new products docs to pass to them, you know, YO framing, new customers, webinar, support, all that stuff.

Steve: Let’s talk about some of these primary marketing channels. So early on when you had nothing, how did you get your first customers?

Nathan: Well me cold calling. So everyone who purchased the $700 one I did up-sale them a $30 a month plan to say, “Hey if you want to make edits on this instead of paying me 700 bucks every time, just pay us 30 bucks a month and you can edit whenever you want.” That’s why…

Steve: Okay, Nathan you are a really amazing sales guy, can you pretend I’m like one of your target customers. What would you say to me?

Nathan: Hey Steve. So you call yourself executive Steve on your Facebook page, but look I’ve done some research on this and I don’t– It doesn’t look like you have an executive Facebook fan page tab. Why don’t you have that upgrade yet?

Steve: Okay and I’ll ask, what is an executive Facebook fan page tab?

Nathan: See all executives on their Facebook page, they use it usually to capture emails to build their list so that they can sell more of their coaching or whatever they sell, but you are not doing any of that. Is there a reason why you are not doing that?

Steve: Because I didn’t know this existed.

Nathan: Yeah, here’s 3 examples from people that I just did this for. Here’s, Carrie Wilkerson. Do you want me to give you her phone number, so you can call her and ask what it’s like. Now, remember Steve, this is real Nathan speaking. I didn’t have any of these built yet, but what I would do is I would still use people that I’ve already purchased as referral.

Steve: Interesting. And did anyone ever contact these people?

Nathan: I always give out numbers, but I never heard of anyone actually following up and then and calling. They could have but they didn’t.

Steve: Interesting. So you delivered ultimately to this Carrie Wilkerson?

Nathan: Yeah I did.

Steve: And she was happy with everything and did she start endorsing you?

Nathan: Yeah, she was great. She would talk about us on stage when she spoke. It would drive tons of new customers.

Steve: In order to do that, you must have had a tremendous impact on her. What did– did you just deliver the page, or did you deliver anything else? How did that happen?

Nathan: I don’t have a good answer there. I mean I went above and beyond. For sure I want to blew her away, but ultimately it just comes down to kind of doing what you are saying you are going to do on time. I mean that was the key. I mean we over the span, once we got the software, the service business launch which is the monthly recurring model of this which we call the Lujure in the early days.

We grew it from nothing to about 35 grand in monthly recurring revenue in about 6 months. It went fast. When we sold it four years later which was February 2016 of this year, we sold it and had 10,000 monthly paying customers. They were paying between 30 and 300 bucks a month and raised 2.5 million bucks of venture capital, 20 team members. I mean it scaled fast.

Steve: So was that initial, was it $35,000 a month. Was that just through cold calling?

Nathan: No, a lot of that was– so once we got like an initial 10 or 12 or 15 people actually using the software, we also had a free plan. When people used the free plan, every fan page tab they published, they’d power by Heyo on it. A lot of our new customers would come in because they saw powered Heyo on another tab. It was product marketing.

Steve: Interesting. Can you comment a little bit about just offering a free option, and how much that cost and what are some of the pros and cons?

Nathan: In software that’s a marginal expense. You are looking– in a software world, after you build the initial prototype, unless you are really making changes or updates daily, you are going to be looking at gross margins in the 80 and 90% range, and that margins if you are controlling your marketing costs and your salary and rent and all that, your net margins could easily be passing 50, 60%. So it’s highly, highly profitable. So yeah, free users to us on average costs one or two cents per month.

Steve: Okay. Because what I found after talking to some other software guys is that when you go with that free model sometimes that takes up all of your resources in terms of just support, not necessarily just several resources.

Nathan: That’s the stupidest thing I’ve ever– that’s where most software founders eat their feet. It’s very difficult– especially if you are going out a no touch sales process on a mass market product, you know say more than a hundred or 200 customers, you can’t have support on a free plan. That’s the dumbest thing, because how it happens is the people that take most of your support time will be the free users, and a person paying you $300 a month you will never hear from.

Steve: Exactly. But in that respect, how many of your free users ended up becoming paying customers?

Nathan: We convert on average anywhere between like 11 and 13% of free users in a paid customer after the first 2 or 3 months.

Steve: Okay, and the reason you kept the free plan was because it was free marketing because of that Heyo link?

Nathan: That’s exactly right. It was our cheapest marketing avenue.

Steve: Interesting. So people would see these promotions, and I’m not that familiar with your product actually, so you do a giveaway and in the sign up form I guess, there’s a little powered by Heyo link?

Nathan: Yeah, it’s right on the Facebook tab. By the way, the folks that acquired the company they are keeping it live. It’s a key piece of their business. So it’s still live and Heyo.com so people can see it. But yeah, that’s exactly right to say, just like when you send an email from your phone and it says sent by phone? Same concept.

Steve: Okay and did you keep track of what the click throughs were like for those?

Nathan: Yeah this was– I mean– we started this, years ago. If I was going to say direct numbers for you now, I won’t be able to do it. But generally again generally about 30 to 40% of our new customers every month came from that powered by Heyo on free accounts.

Steve: That’s crazy. In terms of just people– did the people mostly start with the free account and then transition, or did a lot of people just start up by paying?

Nathan: That’s a tough question. I don’t really answer that.

Steve: Let me ask it in a different way then, what incentivized someone to actually come to you? How did you convince people to actually sign up and pay the money?

Nathan: They wanted to remove powered by Heyo.

Steve: That was the only reason?

Nathan: That wasn’t the only reason. It’s was a key reason. There were some other things like we unlock some additional options like you could do more. There were analytics if you paid, things like that.

Steve: I see, I see, so typical freemium stuff. So you get most of the features of the product and if you are more advanced user you want analytics, you pay the extra money and then you put your own branding on there.

Nathan: That’s right. I mean when you study some of the most powerful– on my podcast, when I have software and service entrepreneurs come on, I’ve had many that I’ve gotten over a billion, with a B, billion dollar valuations. The difference between people that have million dollar valuations or million dollars of revenue which is a billion dollars in revenue is they have, I don’t really know what to call it other than like product axis. Picture like– Steve you know what a Cartesian plane is? Like an X and Y axis?

Steve: Aha.

Nathan: You can then add in like a Z axis. Software folks that are listening who are broke, typically they only allow people to upgrade to get like more features or something like that. Where people make a lot of money is they have one axis that people upgrade on based off they unlock more features, they have another axis where maybe you unlock more seats for your company.

They have another axis where it’s like you– some other usage base metric, more storage space, or something. The more kind of pricing or usage based upgrade metrics you have, the stronger and usually more compelling it is for you to drive kind of up sale work revenue, and that’s rebuild really big businesses. We were trying to do that at Heyo. We had multiple pricing axes like this.

Steve: It was usage based increase in pricing, is what you are saying?

Nathan: It wasn’t just that. Again, we had multiple. One was you either you unlock more features, one was instead of just one fan page tab, they could launch 5 fan page tabs, and another pricing axis was instead of just using us on one Facebook page, you could use us on 10 Facebook pages, another one was if you want to invite your team members, you can have up to 10 seats. Again, that way, every time you get on a sales call you just figure out which pricing axis most directly aligns with the person you are talking to, and then sell them on that upgrade.

Steve: Interesting. I also noticed when I was on the page this morning that the way you were priced, it seems to be targeting like the individual consumer as opposed to businesses. It’s very low priced. Can you talk a little bit about your strategy for going after those people as opposed to some of the bigger customers who are going to be less maintenance?

Nathan: So I’m not involved anymore. I’ve been out of the business for about 6 months now, so I don’t know what they are doing with the pricing. What I can tell you is the main reason they acquired us was because– Votigo is the acquiring company. Their product is an enterprise focused product. That goes between 5 grand and 50 grand. They wanted something more downstream, because the downstream clients would eventually upgrade into higher priced plans. Their model is get as many people paying as little as possible as fast as possible, because it’s a great distribution channel to up-sale.

Steve: In terms of when you were starting, you mentioned that your freemium customers would have been, if you offered support, one of the most painy ass customers that you would have had. Just curious, why you stuck with going after those lower end customers as well?

Nathan: Because we didn’t have to support. We didn’t offer support.

Steve: At all for any of the plans?

Nathan: No, we didn’t offer them for free people.

Steve: Oh yeah, that’s what I meant though. Even the lower, like your lowest paid plans were in the order of like 20, 30 bucks, right?

Nathan: Well, sometimes we weren’t offering support on those either. That’s another pricing axis that you can say okay, one is a chat support. One is a phone and chat, one is phone, chat and email.

Steve: Okay. How lean was your company in the very beginning just curious? Like did you have a dedicated support person, developers?

Nathan: We would have between one and two dedicated support people depending on the time of the business, and our dev team would be between three and six depending on the day.

Steve: These are fulltime people or were they contractors?

Nathan: No, no, these were full time.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Yeah, full time.

Steve: And by the time you reached that $35,000 per month run rate, was your staff just like a handful of people still?

Nathan: Yeah. We were like five or six people. It was three founders, a support person, and one other kind ad man I think.

Steve: You mentioned, so you got a lot of business through that link through freemium. Did you also do anything else? Were you running ads, were you doing social media marketing, SEO, content marketing?

Nathan: Yeah, Steve, we tested all the paid stuff. I got to tell you is the quickest way to waste the most money possible. When I look at everything I’ve done in life business wise, I am the most dangerous when I have brainwashed myself to thinking that I’m broke, and I have no money because you get really creative. We tried paid stuff, it just did not work well, content marketing worked really great. We did a lot of webinars that drove a lot of new business. Those were our big channels.

Steve: Can we talk about some of your webinars since I’ve had a lot of luck with that with my business. How did you structure webinars? How did you get people on, and what was the content like?

Nathan: I’m just curious, how are you using those in your business?

Steve: Yes, so I sell a course on ecommerce, and so usually what I do is I get on and I teach a very detailed lesson on how to get started, and then at the end I mention that I run this class and if you want to join this there’s a limited time discount.

Nathan: Got it, got it. Yeah, we basically did the same thing. We would get the title would be, “10 Ways to Capture 6,000 emails From Your Facebook page.” We would feature 10 of our clients that are using us. At the end we would sell the annual $300, or the monthly $30 plan.

Steve: Interesting. So how did you get these people on? Were these just people from your email list, were you running ads to get people on or?

Nathan: It was almost all email list from our free user base. All the webinars are targeted at free users who had yet to upgrade to paid.

Steve: I see. What was the reason to getting the sign up right now?

Nathan: For the webinar or for a paid plan?

Steve: For a paid plan during the webinar.

Nathan: You’d always bonus, we’d had bonuses. I see a lot of people make this mistake. They discount to try and get people to take action. I think it’s one of the least intelligent things you can do because it devalues your brand. What we would do is we would add bonuses. So, “Hey guys, we love people that take action.” I’m in webinar pitch mode. We love people that take action. If you decide to purchase our $30 month plan right now, what we would do is we will send you a research report, take it from a 100 campaigns last month.

We’ll show you the three calls to action to use on your fan page that get the highest opt in rates. And we will show you how you should use the– what your image should be like in the upper right of your campaign to make sure you increase the conversion rate from fans to new email leads. If you sign up now, you’ll get those bonuses. Okay, there’s two left. Johnny thanks for signing up. There’s one left. Oh Karen got the last one. All right guys, thanks so much. Bye, bye.”

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory costs are easily the worse aspect of entrepreneurship hands down.

And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, Bigcommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Interesting. It sounds like content that you should already have on your site to encourage people to– that content helps them improve their campaigns, right?

Nathan: Yeah we do, yeah. Some of the content was on a blog, some of it wasn’t. But you have to create some incentive to get people to take action now, otherwise people are going to [inaudible 00:22:37] their hands the whole day.

Steve: Interesting. And what was your conversion rate like, I’m just curious?

Nathan: We would convert– of everyone who registered, we would get anywhere between– we actually pretty high tenants rates. We would get between 40 and 45% action.

Steve: Wow, that’s really high.

Nathan: It’s because we had an on boarding sequence for webinars. When you signed up, you’d get like a worksheet with fill in the blanks, so that would drive curiosity and encourage you to show up. Other people that showed up about 95% would stay to minute 47 which was when we gave the pitch. And usually between 7 and 17-ish percent would purchase a pay plan.

Steve: That is really high actually.

Nathan: Yeah, it was great. We were doing about two webinars kind of a week for many, many years.

Steve: Wow. And how many people would show up at these webinars?

Nathan: Anywhere between a 100 and 400.

Steve: Okay so that was– so that’s not a whole lot of people to drive a lot of business early on. What were some of your other marketing channels?

Nathan: What do you mean?

Steve: Meaning like you are getting like 17 per webinar. So that’s like 34–

Nathan: Yeah, new customers.

Steve: That obviously wasn’t like the main driver of customers, right?

Nathan: No, it was the main driver.

Steve: Oh it was the main driver.

Nathan: Early on, webinars was– the webinars plus the product marketing, powered by Heyo. Those were our two main drivers of new customers.

Steve: That’s amazing. And you had no luck with PPC at all, huh?

Nathan: No I just think it’s so– it’s just not intelligent. I mean look, maybe I’m just stupid, I don’t understand PPC. Look, if I can make money without spending money, I’d rather do that.

Steve: Absolutely. But if you are making money with your ads, it’s just another avenue to get more people to your site, right?

Nathan: Yeah, but the thing with ads, like, I just lie to you in my opinion. What happens is we have our ad guy. He goes, “Nathan we found a channel. It’s great. I can get one new customer for you, I can get one click for a $1.75. It takes a hundred clicks to get a new 3 on my paying customer and it’s great.” I’m like, “Okay great. Spend 5 grand next month on that.” Well the promise, like the number has changed. The keyword diminishes in our turn.

That part of gold is only 2 inches deep, so once you go through out inches then we have to find another channel. It’s actually a lot of work. What happens is like PPC plays emotional games with you. You find economics that work and you stick in the next sell sheet and project it over the next 7 years and you think wow, we are going to be a billion dollar company, because we found this channel. Nobody talks about, how to measure diminishing returns on PPC. And that’s really the key to understanding in my opinion PPC and paid ads.

Steve: Interesting. In my experience, the search ads have been pretty steady, meaning it is pretty predictable, but is the Facebook ads where you have to constantly be putting our new creatives, finding new audiences and that sort of thing. Did you find the same– did you have the same experience across all the different ad platforms?

Nathan: No, I don’t have a lot of experience on Google. A lot of our kind of pay per click stuff are cost per click that was on Facebook.

Steve: Okay. That makes sense. Facebook is a ton of maintenance in that respect.

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, so what about SEO and your content marketing? I would imagine most of your content was teaching people how to use your platform and how to get leads, right?

Nathan: Yeah, I was just pulling data from our back end and making it and publishing it infographics and things like that.

Steve: Okay, and so how did you scale then? Like how did you go from the 34 or whatever people that you would get per webinar. Was it just a gradual uptake, or was there a point in your business where it just hockey-sticked?

Nathan: No I mean look if it was 4-5 years of work to build it to where we got it. It’s a slow gradual add five, six grand in monthly recurring revenue per month. It was a gradual turn, so you got a net five grand-ish per month. Then you keep doing that for five years, and before you know it, you got a big company.

Steve: Okay. I’m just curious though. Why did you decide to take on funding? What did you do with the money and why did you need it?

Nathan: It was just– it was not a good decision, ego, to be honest with you. I mean when we first raised– when we hit about 33 grand in monthly recurring revenue, when I was sending– I would send email updates out to kind of just business people I respected about how the business was doing, and we started getting replies of people going, “Hey can we invest?” And I said, “What do you mean invest, I don’t even know what means.” And they would– I would say, “Can you teach me?”

They’d invest time to tell me what it was. I’m like, “Sure why not. It would be great to have more of that person’s mind thinking about Heyo,” because I assumed if they put money, they’d think about us more. We never actually kind of needed the money, but I used financing as a way to get more mind share of the investors which would help us grow. But we were never in a point where we needed capital.

Steve: Just curious though, did they help a lot in terms of introducing you to other contacts, what was their value add?

Nathan: Oh totally, I mean, I will not bring on an angel investor. I look at them almost like an employee. I have a full list of like tasks I’d want them to do if we accepted their money. They had like many of them helped with all those things. It was very helpful to think about it that way.

Steve: Interesting. Was most of your funding angels, or did you get VC funding?

Nathan: We got 550 grand from angels in pack in March 2011 I believe was the year. But those were like very smart, David Cohen invested, the founder of Techstars. Pat Condon the founder of RackSpace, Dave McClure 500 Startups. We had, many people would say the A list. I mean we had the A list angels in the business, and we were in like the mountains of southwest Virginia, not the valley, not New York.

It was– many people say it was very impressive. We raised 550 there on a convertible no with a 5 million dollar cap, and 8% interest rate and 25% discount. I can explain it if you want in a second. Then we raised, many years after that, 2 million dollars on 8.5 million dollar putting money evaluation which was, that was a typical VC kind of a deal.

Steve: Yeah, actually, can you explain the first deal with the angels? I’ve always been curious. What is the difference between taking money from an angel versus a VC, and what was your decision making process there?

Nathan: Let me not talk about the person you take it from, let me talk about the form of how you take it from different.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: The first deal that we did was called a convertible node. Convertible node is almost you can think of it like paying debt, but it’s very unlikely that it will ever get called. They put in 500 grand. Let’s just say 500 to make the number even. They put in 500 grand so that 500 grand will accumulate interest at 8%. And whenever we did do a price round meaning when someone else would come in and say Nathan your business is worth 8 million dollars, those angels that put in 500 grand would convert into equity.

They don’t have any equity when they put in the 550 or the 500, right? They convert into equity which is why it’s called a convertible node when we raised that first price round. A price round means there’s a evaluation on the business. They’d convert in at a discount. We were rewarding them for backing us early. They were our first backers. Then they got a 25% discount. That’s what a convertible node is, is that helpful?

Steve: Yes. It is very helpful, cool. You mentioned that taking money was a big mistake. Why do you say that?

Nathan: We just– less soon the angel side, more on the VC side. We just didn’t need the money. I would read TechCrunch and see all my friends raising capital. I’m competitive and I’m like, “Screw it. I can raise capital too.” Boom, boom, I took like two days. I mean it was super quick. It was nice for people to do that. But man oh man, we just got lazy. Once we raised capital, we just go lazy.

Steve: So you didn’t need the money and you didn’t have it allocated, but you have to spend it, right once you get it.

Nathan: Exactly. Every board meeting was this clash because investors want us to spend money faster, so we like have no money which means you have to– which means by the way you have to go cash flow negative. Because if you raise 2 million bucks and you have to spend it, and that 2 million is not coming from revenue, it’s going to put you in the red. I mean that makes sense to anybody. It puts you in the red which I hated.

I hated that because at some point, you are either going to have to cut back expenses to go back in the green or the black, or you keep spending and you have to go raise more money which means you have to go give up more equity to a VC which I don’t like that road either. It wasn’t good. It wasn’t good. I don’t think I’ll raise again unless it is very, very, very strategic money in the new business that I’m launching.

Steve: How did you spend that money?

Nathan: Well a lot of it we run ads which is like PPC.

Steve: Yeah.

Nathan: Yeah just horrible spend people, we had amazing, amazing people but we hired too fast. What else? We moved to a new bigger office. We went from paying a grand per month in rent to six grand per month in rent which was not a smart decision. Just things like that. We just got less creative because we had more money.

Steve: How did it work when your original two founding engineers left, because there was a lot of technical data at that point, right, when your founders leave? Did you just hire– did you rewrite the whole code base?

Nathan: No, no, I mean they had a team they were managing. So just the top person they were managing became the CTO.

Steve: I see. I see.

Nathan: So it was a team of five or six developers at that point.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about churn. What tactics do you use to kind of encourage people to stay?

Nathan: Well, so, [inaudible 00:31:29] invented a very cool term called PQL, Product Qualified Lead. What that means is, don’t look so much at revenue coming in per month or MLR or free to paid plan, but rather look at usage metrics. So you kind of know in the back of your mind when you sell someone Steve a course on ecommerce, but they don’t watch the first video or if they never log in, you know that person is way more likely to email you ask for a refund.

It’s much better to look at the actions that you want your audience to be taking that you know will help them not churn, and focus on getting those actions done, and then just trust that channel will take care of itself. Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah. So you probably walk them through the set up process which is probably one of your big huddles, right?

Nathan: Exactly, like we knew we had to first get the first email that went out, had to get them to log in. Then we had to get them to connect their Facebook fan page. Then we had to get them to launch their first campaign, capture their first email address through the campaign. Then once we got them to do these core metrics, it was then get them to a paid plan. Then once they were happy in a paid plan, it was getting them to invite their friends so we get more customers. There’s a whole life cycle that we built out.

Steve: So this is all done through email, or did you do some personal calling as well?

Nathan: No, most people done via kind of a no touch, so emails and kind of in product updates and tutorials.

Steve: Then those people who weren’t responding, I guess, even though they– do most of the people who were responding, were they free plans or were there any people who paid who actually didn’t use the product at all?

Nathan: Oh gosh, I mean have you ever ordered a coffee and then you throw it away when you eyes still have [fog 00:33:05] because it’s cold, same concept. We had people that paid that would never log in. It’s like, what the hell are you doing? Why did you buy the product? It happens all the time.

A lot of people lie to themselves. They’ll just go, “Oh look our MRL is great.” But that could be a very weak base of monthly recurring revenue if your usage metrics aren’t really high. That’s why private stocks like Twitter and Facebook, that’s why investors care so much about monthly active users and less about revenue.

Steve: Interesting, so if the people aren’t using the product, chances are they are not checking their emails either. I’m just curious, what did you do with that data? Once you figured out the people who weren’t using, what did you do with those people?

Nathan: We just would keep trying to reach out to them I mean via email. There wasn’t– we wouldn’t work really hard for people when we realized they weren’t even going to engage with the product.

Steve: In terms of your best customers, did you do anything special with those people?

Nathan: We’d feature them in blog posts, we would feature them on webinars, we’d invite them to guest post, things like that, let them know of upcoming features. We kind of had them in part of the inner circle.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of your target customers, it seems like all of your stuff was organic.

Nathan: Well a lot of it was. I mean the majority of it was. It was product marketing, created by Heyo and webinars. The free plan stuff is huge. I mean you capture a lot of emails with the free plan.

Steve: How did you get people to evangelize your service? You mentioned Carrie Wilkerson, was she one of the evangelist that helped you grow your business? Or did you have other methods of– I’m just curious how you grew to such a large company, and whether it was just an organic path, or were there certain tactics that you used to accelerate the process.

Nathan: It’s a combination of both. I mean, first asking the question when someone pays for your product, what are you expecting to get just in an email. That’s just a question and they reply to you and they say, well, I hope that you can launch a Facebook page. You are like, great. We are getting the right customers. If someone writes back and says, I was hoping you are going to help me launch a hot air balloon. Like where the hell did that lead come from. What did they read that made them pay for us and think we were going to help them launch a hot air balloon? That’s not what we do.

That’s a key thing. It’s first understand what they think they are getting, and then check in, in a weeks later and say did you get what you expected? A lot of people use MPS score for that. It’s just, again making sure you are getting people in your funnel that match what your product delivers, making you sure they get that and the rest will take care of itself in terms of people talking about it.

Steve: The reason why I’m really interested in what you are doing here is I plan on starting a SaaS company too since I just recently gave notice at my job.

Nathan: Nice Steve. That is a big deal man, congrats.

Steve: What I want–

Nathan: Wait hold on Steve. What did you give up? I want to know like how much you gave up. What was your salary you quit on?

Steve: I’m not going to reveal that.

Nathan: Come on Steve.

Steve: I can’t do it. I can’t do it.

Nathan: More or less than six figures?

Steve: More than six figures. I mean I was an engineering director.

Nathan: Oh gosh, you were making like yeah. Were you in the valley?

Steve: Yeah I’m in the valley.

Nathan: Oh gosh. You are like, you don’t have to [inaudible 00:36:07] but you are like two or three hundred easy. Was it a software startup or a company that’s established?

Steve: I was director of microprocessor design. So I designed microprocessors.

Nathan: Oh gosh yeah. I love that Steve. People have to understand that because there are so many people listening. I know at least on my show, I don’t know if it’s the case on your show, but people– the reason people never go and start their own thing is because they don’t hear stories of other people giving up big things. People might be listening going, but I have two kids and I have a hundred thousand dollar job. Why would I ever give that up to start my own thing? When people hear your own story, it gets them more excited, and the hey they can do it.

Steve: Well let me tell you this Nathan, I’m a real conservative guy, and I actually didn’t give up a whole lot. My salary is like a very small portion of my overall revenue. In that respect, I’m pretty conservative. I wasn’t giving up that much. I mean it sounds like a large sum to maybe some of the people who are listening, but in terms of just overall house hold income, it wasn’t that big of a deal, and which is why it allowed me to pull the trigger.

Nathan: Yeah, if everything fails in the startup you are telling me you probably have like 12 or 24 months of runaway easy of personal expenses covered.

Steve: I’m even more conservative than that. I’ve got like a decade probably.

Nathan: That’s great. How old are you?

Steve: I am 40.

Nathan: Okay, got it. So you’ve been saving for a while.

Steve: Yeah.

Nathan: Yeah, that’s great.

Steve: But unfortunately I didn’t start this until much later. If I started at 19, I’d be like all powerful right now.

Nathan: Yeah, I’m in that mode right now. When I sold Heyo, by the way I recorded the whole negotiation. The buyer’s on the phone with me, I put it on the podcast. There’s a point where I’m like, “I want this many millions,” and he’s like screw you basically, and hangs up right. God knows if it’s going to go through or not. But I record all that, and put it on the show and I mean people can listen if they want at nathanlatka.com/sold to hear that. But Steve what I will tell you is like the second I sold that business, I had offers all over the place, like great offers to go take jobs that I would say would be easy salary wise for someone who is 26 in the top 1%.

But dude it took so much to say no because those would have been so comfortable and I would have done that for like a decade, and sure I would have saved a lot of money blah, blah, blah. There’s something special about turning down something safe, and being kind of in the wild and then just trusting yourself they are going to be able to feel that empty space you created with something amazing.

Steve: Let me ask you this. What is your end game? What are you doing right now?

Nathan: Oh gosh, I saw a bunch of things. I plan to launch a best-selling book next year, I’m going to sell a million copies in the first two years. That will put it like one of the best all time. That’s the next thing I’m focused on. On 2036 I will be eligible age-wise to run for president, so I plan to run for president and win. I want to launch a ticket company public by the time I turn 34. That’s another goal, probably after the presidency or maybe before I don’t know, probably after.

I plan to launch the world’s largest hedge fund, and that’s because I see so much waste in a lot of these public companies that I’m studying. I just have a lot of companies that can talk a lot of these [inaudible 00:38:58] and just spit off cash flow. I have all kinds of little goals like that. People are listening going, “No Nathan is such a capitalist.” And yeah, you’re damn right, I’m a capitalist. I love that.

Steve: That is amazing. What’s your book going to be about?

Nathan: When is it going to be out?

Steve: No, what is it going to be about? Oh, you’ve already written it?

Nathan: What is it going to be about? Yeah, it’s a– the working title, okay the working title is New Rich. The reason I chose that title is because we are talking pretty costive about how I kind of break down my dollar of income. It’s basically how I think a lot. If you look at someone’s personal balance sheet right now, like they have car on it, the house on it, foreign insurance, dah, dah, dah. Like we are moving into a world where rich people are actually, they are buying experiences and they are owning less physical assets, because there’s these companies that hold these physical assets on their balance sheet.

For example Uber will own the car in 10 years and you will just use the car. That saves you an expense. Someone else, [inaudible 00:40:04] will own your house and you will just use the house. So there’s this concept of like new rich that I’m kind of thinking about, which I think is critical for people who are my age that comes to kind of compounding money saving money, keeping expenses low, and investing in unbelievable experiences for yourself that keep people happy, healthy and growing. So it’s going to be something along those lines.

Steve: That sounds great. Can we talk a little bit about your conference too, because we chatted about this before, and the way you are running it is pretty unique. Feel free to talk about it.

Nathan: Yeah, what do you think is unique about it?

Steve: I think you are pitting against– you are pitting different speakers together to actually show exactly their process, and you are putting them into a competition live. Did I interpret that correctly?

Nathan: That’s accurate. Yeah, so I go to a lot of these conferences and it’s like two days. It’s like everyone is out to drink at night, and then you just have to like “Get through the speakers.” You know the speakers are usually like you are watching them going, “I’m way smarter than these people. Why are they on stage?” It’s because these speakers are friends of the conference organizer or something like that. Usually they are this like boring and not fun. So what I’m doing, like I don’t care about my speakers to be quite honest with you. I care about the audience getting something that they’ve never gotten before.

So part of– some of my sessions I’m going to be interviewing like one is called– let me see. One is called king of content. I’m going to have people like Neil Patel and Joe Pulizzi [inaudible 00:41:25] on stage launching a blog post live. There will be kind of 2 screens on stage, you’ll get to see their desktops as they launch a piece of content, and whoever gets the most unique views to their piece of content over that 60 minutes segment, I will write you know a $10,000, $20,000 $30,000 check to their charity or something. But the point is each segment is a competition where the experts are performing instead of talking. The audience gets to watch and learn from the performance.

Steve: That’s sounds amazing.

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: For all of you guys out there.

Nathan: I tell you about the monkey Steve?

Steve: You did earlier, but feel free to talk about the monkeys.

Nathan: Was that– we didn’t record that.

Steve: We didn’t record that I know.

Nathan: I have these two capuchin monkeys. You want to talk about writing cold emails that get a reply, these two capuchin monkeys can sit at a computer, they can write email, and they can actually close deals better than most of you guys, the sales people. I mean it’s unbelievable how these monkeys work. You look at these monkeys and you go, “Oh brown fur, nice eyes, you know, bone structure looks normal.” But they are just not normal monkeys.

They are going to help me kick off the show, and yeah love that your people if they want to join me, they can check out more of the sessions which I think they’ll get a kick out at nathanlatka.com/austinlive. We’ll wrap it all up Steve with– we have a very cool Grammy award winner performer at the end of the show. Two of them will pit against each other. It’s going to be like American idol except two Grammy artists going each other.

Steve: Dude that’s awesome. Hey Nathan, where can people find you if they want to contact you?

Nathan: The best place to do it, I give out my personal phone number on my podcast which is called The Top Entrepreneurs. You can search that in iTunes or Stitcher now. It’s an orange logo with my kind of face black and white. You can find me there. They can also find me on Twitter at @nathanlatka. Or feel free to just shoot me a text directly. My number is 703-431-2709.

Steve: Amazing, you just gave out your phone number just like that.

Nathan: You know the sad thing is no one is going to text me.

Steve: No one is going to text you?

Nathan: That’s my challenge to the audience.

Steve: I texted you the other day, didn’t I?

Nathan: You did. I always give it out and only very few, it’s crazy– people mourn and groan, I can’t reach the person I want to reach. Well they probably gave their phone number somewhere. You just have to search hard enough, so there’s mine.

Steve: Sounds good Nathan. Thanks for coming on the show man.

Nathan: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right take care. Hope you enjoyed that episode. As you can probably tell from the interview, Nathan is a go-getter. It just goes to show that it doesn’t matter how old you are, it’s just a matter of going out and doing something.
For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode127, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person, or to share it on the web.
If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

126: How To Make 7 Figures Selling Wall Decals Online With Jason Weisenthal

How To Make 7 Figures Selling Wall Decals Online With Jason Weisenthal

Today I’m thrilled to have Jason Weisenthal on the show. Jason is someone who I met at a mastermind group meeting that I attended in San Francisco last year.

And what’s cool about Jason is that he has managed to combine tech and ecommerce together to form WallMonkeys.com, an online store that offers more than 20 million images that you can print and stick on your wall.

Not only is his business model ingenious but he can basically run his 7 figure ecommerce company with just a handful of employees because of all of the automation that he has developed.

What’s also cool is that he has encouraged and raised his son to be a seasoned entrepreneur as well which something that I plan on doing with my kids. In fact, I really wanted his son on the show today, but Jason told me that I had to interview him first. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Jason’s motivations were for starting his business.
  • What he was doing prior to Wall Monkeys.
  • The ingenious way Jason obtains the content for his stickers.
  • Why he chose the licensing route instead of creating his own images.
  • What a licensing deal looks like and how much it costs.
  • How to manage millions of images and products listings.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes. If you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Jason Weisenthal. Jason is someone who I met at a Mastermind group meeting that I attended in San Francisco last year. What’s cool about Jason is that he has managed to combine tech and ecommerce together to form Wallmonkeys.com, which is an online store that offers more than 20 million images that you can print and stick on your wall.

Not only is his business model ingenious, but he can basically run his seven figure ecommerce company with just a handful of employees, because of all the automation that he has developed. What’s also cool is that he has encouraged and raised his son to be a seasoned entrepreneur as well, which is something that I plan on doing with my kids.

In fact I really wanted his son on the show today, but Jason told me that I had to interview him first. Fine, I’ll guess I’ll settle for dad. Welcome to the show Jason. How are you doing today man?

Jason: I’m great Steve. Thanks for having me.

Steve: Give us a quick background story about Wall Monkeys and how you came up with the idea of selling wall decals online, and what you were doing beforehand also?

Jason: Before Wall Monkeys, I was in a completely different business. I owned a retail children shoe store for about 14 years in New Jersey. Business was good, grew the business, was kind of …

Steve: Was it brick and mortar? Sorry.

Jason: Yeah, brick and mortar. Everybody walked in the front door: Nikes, Air Force Ones, Jordans, Timberlands, all that good stuff. We really had a good business, solid crew of employees and was finding myself bored in my office too often. I started to look at other businesses. It’s right around when Fathead came around, and I’m sure you’re familiar with Fathead. They have all the professional athletes. I thought it would be really cool to put … My son was playing little league baseball and so was my daughter. I thought it would be really cool to put my kids on the wall instead of Derek Jeter, A. Rod or a football player.

I checked out, looked around online and no one was doing it. That was the extent of my market research. I knew nothing about it, I just bought a printer. I did my research and bought the proper printer, found someone to help me learn how to use it, had someone to build a custom website. I just found people to put the pieces together and just learned step by step on my own.

Steve: Wait, so just based on that, you decided to start a store where people can upload pictures of their kids.

Jason: Yeah. I pretty much bought the printer.

Steve: Lease or did you buy?

Jason: I bought it.

Steve: Oh wow!

Jason: My retail business was doing fine. The printer at that time I think it was about $25,000. I didn’t want a monthly payment. Again there really wasn’t too much research. Shopify wasn’t around. It was just at the very beginning. It actually turned out to be a good idea that was just too soon. Cell phones didn’t take high enough resolution images. Parents who wanted to order, they had a hard time uploading the proper file sizes. We really struggled at the beginning. It was a good thing that it was a hobby and not my source of income, because we would have failed for sure.

Steve: I can imagine that’d be a pain in the butt, right, because a lot of people don’t know about images, and what’s required for printing.

Jason: Yeah. At that time I think most cell phones had about like a 1.3 megapixel image, and then email programs were compressing images. People would send a picture of their kid was like a spec in the background. A lot of times the sales we did make we were refunding … We didn’t have content at that time, it was all custom. While it was a good idea, it was too soon. I was able to stick it out and keep trying different ideas until I found a better way to make money in that same business.

Steve: How do you get your content today actually?

Jason: The majority of our content comes from licensing deals with companies like National Geographic, and Corbis Images, and Stocktrek images and some other stock photography companies. I looked for over time just to fill in every possible niche for medical images or animals, or just whatever I thought we needed more of. I found a company and made a deal. Now we have access to … Oh God probably 60 million images if you wanted to look.

Steve: That’s crazy. Do you still let people upload their own images anymore or no?

Jason: We do. Custom is a big part of our business. Whether it’s professional photographers or companies uploading business logos, things for trade shows … One of our strong suits is we are really good at turning orders around quickly, and it’s made in the USA. Custom is actually growing quite nicely right now because our quality is great, and our turnaround time is faster than practically anyone. Maybe it might be faster than everyone.

Steve: I’m just curious though. Why did you choose the licensing route instead of creating your own images and your own artwork?

Jason: When I first stumbled upon the idea of some content, I started with basic silhouettes and I was literally in my basement by myself. Again I wasn’t a graphic artist or anything … Clipping images in Photoshop and Illustrator, and saving them, and file naming them. I noticed they were starting to sell and just like any good entrepreneur, you do 100, you do 200 and you say, “Of 100, 200 sells, it’s going to take me a while to get to a million. What’s the fastest way to get a lot of images?” That’s through a licensing deal. That’s what we did. We went from nothing to a few 100, to millions. When you offer millions, you sell more.

Steve: What does a licensing deal look like, I’m curious? How much does it cost you guys and how is the deal structured?

Jason: There is 2 ways. It depends on the company you’re dealing with and the amount of money that you’re maybe either guaranteeing them, or based on your relationship. You’re either paying them a percentage of the sale. If you make $100 sale you might pay as an example, 10% or you can pay a flat dollar fee.

Steve: 10% of the sale or 10% of some other number you agree to.

Jason: 10% of it. It’s a retail. Print on demand … That’s an example. Not every deal is that, that’s just an example number but yeah, it would be on the retail selling price. Then we do have a couple of deals that are just based on … Because we print a lot of images, a flat fee per image. That works out to be a better deal for us, but because the volume is high, it works for us and for our partners.

Steve: I see. Is there any upfront cost?

Jason: For the licensing deals?

Steve: Yeah.

Jason: Again if you are a new person coming into the business, it depends on the brand, the licensing. We don’t have Disney. If you wanted Disney … Even if you could even get it, there would be a huge upfront cost. Some of our deals, I can’t tell you the exact numbers, but because of either our history or because of the confidence and knowing we would sell, some companies, you have to make sure you pay them say $25,000 or $50,000 over the course of the year to get that. It’s a volume discount just like anything else, so either based on if you’re willing to agree to a guaranteed minimum, or if your purchase history proves that you’re worthy of a better rate you can … Just like calling up anyone else to renegotiate, you can work out a better deal.

Steve: For you though when you were starting out with nothing, how did you approach your first company?

Jason: Actually he’s a really great friend of mine now. There is stock photo company … No one was really doing this for print on demand like APIs for … All these stock images were relatively new. The industry was totally different. I had this idea to rather than buy the images upfront which is what people were doing, I wanted to offer all of a company’s images, let my customers browse them, and then only pay when a sale is made.

That really wasn’t how it was happening. I just pitched my idea. You probably know or you’ve read how people say it all the time, just ask, somebody might say, “Yes”. I made my sales pitch and said, “I think this will benefit your company and mine. This is what I want to do. This is my vision.” The person that was in-charge of North America pitched it to the CEO, and they trusted me, and we made it work.

Steve: This is when you had nothing and your friend was instrumental in opening up the doors for you so to speak.

Jason: He wasn’t a friend then. Its just this company is our longest standing partner. The company is Fotolia. They got bought by Adobe several months ago. Chad believed in what I said and pushed it through. Just because it’s been so many years and he’s such a great guy, now we are great friends. At the time he just believed in what I presented.

Steve: One thing that I’ve been wondering is our online store only has 480 skews. Here you are talking about 60 million. Does that imply that you have 60 million product pages or just a library of 60 million products on your sites?

Jason: We filter down and we’re about to … It’s going to look really good in probably about definitely less than 2 weeks. It might be ready in a few days. Our search is pretty complicated. We have a Solr database. If we have access to 60 million, we’re going to offer far less than that. There is a lot of filters we use to purposely eliminate many images. It probably ends up being about the top 10% is what you could search through my site.

Steve: How does it work? Did you have to develop your own search algorithm or you have a Google Box or something? How do you do that?

Jason: We use Solr which like MySQL. Solr is a search program. I don’t know how to explain it. I don’t know if your people would really care so much about that, but because we had so many images we needed to create a custom solution. We couldn’t use Google search tool. We couldn’t use some of the other elastic search.

There is companies out there that will handle your database and do things like predictive texts and making suggestions and learning from sales. We built ours from scratch because we are importing so much metadata and images that we just needed to build it ourselves.

Steve: I’m curious, how many people do you guys have now? The last we talked it sounded like you only had a handful of people, right?

Jason: The business is really … The simplest way is its 2 pieces. We have the office where it’s customer service, production, shipping. Everything that has to do with the customer placing the order to the order leaving. That all happens 5 minutes from house in Maryland. In the office we have about … Not about, we have exactly 6 people and then outside of that is where everything else is: IT, things to do with SEO, pay-per-click advertising.

Those people are all outsourced freelancers, but I have pretty good relationships with them now. Most of them are giving me more than half their time. I’m definitely primary source of income and there is 8 people that do that. They are all part time to some degree, but there is a lot of IT.

We are constantly working on something, whether it has do with how we send information to Amazon or something to do with … Right now we have 3 people that are working to finish improving search on our site and how navigation works completely, how you can go through the user experience. That project is going to end and those 3 guys are going to drop off. I’ll probably dream up something new 5 minutes after that.

Steve: Everything is project based, and they’re of … You just hire them on a consulting basis.

Jason: For that kind of project. My pay-per-click guy has been with me for over a year now. I did hire a woman who is operations manager. She’s really helped become a go between the developers and people in the office and just to really take away a lot of the tedious tasks from me so that I can focus on bigger things. That’s been very, very helpful.

Steve: Are you a technical guy at all?

Jason: I am not technical programming wise but I have … The only way I can explain it, I can think it and communicate it very clearly. I know what skills are needed. I can and then hire the right people. I also have one of my IT guys who used to do a lot of programming. He is pretty much oversees all of the IT projects. His role, he doesn’t program anymore. He just takes what I say that’s in English and communicates it to these guys to the final …

Steve: Sure. No that’s all you really need, yeah.

Jason: Yeah, I know what I’m good at. Then I found people that fill in those places where I need help.

Steve: One thing I was curious about, you mentioned in the very beginning that you purchased your printer right off the bat, did you ever consider just having a printing partner because I used to work for a printing company. I know those machines are finicky and they require maintenance. I was just curious why you went that route right away.

Jason: At the very beginning, I could have looked for a partner, a company to print but I feel very strongly that’s our core competency is printing and we do a lot of rush orders a lot of things that are time sensitive, a lot of things where errors are not acceptable. If it’s your core competency, you need to do that in-house.

There’s no way that I would outsource printing. That’s what we do. If I outsource that, most of what we say, and most of our advantage over other companies would vanish, they would be in the hands of someone else to do the job.

Steve: Okay, and so you do it yourself mainly for customer service reasons and deliverable reasons, why we do our own embroidery, right?

Jason: It’s quality control. It’s our processes, it’s our procedures. It’s our automation. It’s our … If we make a mistake we can learn from it. There’s just no other way in my mind.

Steve: How much did it cost you to start the company then? Actually how many partners do you have now, I’m just curious.

Jason: We have 4. We use different printers now. We also now have cutters so we have … There’s 6 pieces of equipment in the office that are either printing and cutting or printing or cutting. How much did it cost us to start the business? I guess the printer cost $25,000. I probably spent another, God I don’t know. I’ll say $50,000. By the time I learned how to print and made a bunch of mistakes, built a website, painfully because it wasn’t really that easy back then, probably about 50 grand.

Steve: What platform are you on now? It was custom before but did you change platforms over the years?

Jason: Yeah, we use Magento.

Steve: Magento okay. Enterprise or regular?

Jason: Regular but it’s very highly customized. We’ve spent a lot on customizing that platform.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about your process a little bit. Do you guys carry any inventory at all or is it all print-on-demand?

Jason: We ship some of our best sellers to Amazon now FBA. It is all print on demand. Orders come in and around 6 or 7 am every morning, we run an automation procedure that goes and pulls all the orders from the various sales channels, and then runs it through another automation that will identify and grab all the images that much the order and resizes them and renames them and puts them into the proper folders.

We print and ship over 95% of our orders within 24 hours. There’s no reason to hold inventory. We just print on demand and we get it right out.

Steve: As a tech guy, I’m really in awe of this automation that you have. Literally an order comes in, and then machines just automatically resize everything and then is it as simple as it being sent to the printer automatically and someone just needs to be there to pick it up and box it?

Jason: I wish. It’s not exactly but yeah, most of the steps it’s just, you just broke it down step by step so it’s not one big magical automation. We use … Our Amazon orders come in through ShipWorks. The program we wrote goes into ShipWorks and grabs the orders. The resizing, those are actions that we add written, scripts we had written that work in Photoshop and Illustrator and then we rename files with certain naming patterns. I had someone write a program that nests the orders to make the optimal use of space.

Once it gets through the whole process, the automatic part, the orders are nested. They are groups of orders that we just because of, just to make sure in case there’s a cancelled order or there’s a size change. If there’s something that needs to be addressed, that’s where the humans come in and will then take those orders and you are pretty much just dragging them into the rip software that’s going to print them.

Yeah, we print and we just have to cut the sheets off as they come and then they go to the back and the shipping labels are ready to go and the guys cut the orders down and march them up and put them into the shipping tubes, put the labels on. It’s still a process but we’ve just taken away a lot of the like the key stroke errors and a lot of the time wasting.

Steve: Sure, sure. No that’s incredible. You mentioned that you are selling on Amazon FBA as well. Given that most of your business on demand, how does it work for Amazon? I think I heard a rumor from someone. I can’t remember whether it was Jason or not who told me that you have a million skews on Amazon?

Jason: Yeah, we have more than a million. It’s a long tussle. We don’t have a million best sellers. We have a way to put a lot of listings up there and then the ones that are the best sellers, those are the ones that we’ll print in advance and send those to Amazon for FBA because they are going to show up as prime and the customer is going to get them faster. It’s important but it’s not that large of a percentage of our business because it’s such a long time. Everyday about 30% of our orders are images that are being ordered for the very first time.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory cost, are easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who will handle everything for you. So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced.

And the best part is that you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Okay, in terms of Amazon then, how does your process work? Do you just ship a bunch there, see what sells and then drop some of the ones that aren’t selling?

Jason: No. We are going from historical sales data. We didn’t start to use FBA until I’ll say maybe a year or so ago. We have been selling on Amazon for years already. We have whatever tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands of sales and we can look in. We know certain things where you see them print 10 or 12 times every single day or whatever the number is.

Those were the items that we sent to Amazon first because they are going to sell even more and also it’s going to save time on a day to day basis. It’s a lot easier to send a 100 or 200 of something to Amazon than it is to send 10, 10, 10, 10, 10 every day to 10 individual customers.

Steve: I was just thinking; when you have that many listings, how do you do, do you spend a lot of time on the listings then? Amazon search is very important and I’m just curios how you manage so many different skews and still put out an optimized listing on Amazon. Do you run ads?

Jason: Yes we run ads. We’ve been trying to ramp up the spending as much as we can. It’s a lot easier to spend money on Google than it is on Amazon. The Amazon ads have been the most efficient ads spending that we have. To create the listing you have to optimize them, they are not as optimized as if you did them by hand. We have an automated process that creates the listings for us and it uses a combination of I call it static and dynamic information. The static information to be the brand name. Every listing has to say Wall Monkeys, wall decals but then it will take a look at the … Then grab from the image the title for example and say Picasso whatever.

We know to create all the sizes it’s … Everything is automated where it makes the size, it knows our pricing, it adds the shipping weight. All these things are preprogrammed in so that if we have a new batch of say 50,000 images, we can create those listings. We have software that sits on Google cloud and we can create those listings completely and send those to Amazon within 24 hours including the images. If you have a picture of whatever it is, a dog, it needs to also go on a wall and looks like it’s a wall decal, we’ve got that part of the process automated also where most people are doing that manually and it’s really time consuming.

Steve: What about SEO on your own website? With so many different listings, is it the same procedure as Amazon essentially? You take the title and you create a page, with that as the title tag?

Jason: Yeah. It’s similar. We do pay attention to the differences and say, how many characters are allowed for the title or what are the subtle differences that we are aware of. We are indexing many, many pages. It’s similar but different. We are just trying to make the changes where we can. With the new site, with the new Solr search, there’s going to be much better improvements as far as landing pages for categories and sub categories and different artists and things which I think is going to help our SEO. That’s an area that we can definitely improve.

Steve: Just curious, where for your main website, where do you most of your customers come in. Is it through SEO or other means?

Jason: SEO and we disband a fair amount on pay-per-click. Then, ripping customers are, especially our business customers, come back more frequently.

Steve: Business customers. That implies … Is that a large part of your business the business customers as opposed to the consumers?

Jason: It’s growing. Amazon, about I would say 18 months or 2 years ago, it became a little bit scary that Amazon was such a large percentage of our sales. Just like everyone, you need to diversify. We started to put a lot more effort into just getting sales from anywhere else and business to business jumped out as a really good place to go after. That’s something that we are focusing on.

Steve: That’s totally what we did also because those guys they don’t want to order on Amazon. They want to talk to someone on the phone and they have consistent business. That’s been really good for us as well.

Jason: Yeah, and the concern it’s not a race to the bottom with pricing like Amazon is, different … Is a different beast completely. A lot of the business customers, what they want is really great service and if they need it on a certain day, they want to have confidence that it’s going to get there. They are not as price sensitive as they are professionalism and accuracy sensitive.

Steve: Just curious, do you price your products the same on Amazon as you do on your own site?

Jason: We do but most of the business sales are going to be custom. We are just working off of what our pricing is; per square foot versus how much does that picture of a pink puppy cost or something.

Steve: Do you guys do anything with your Amazon stuff to get them back on to your website or you just keep the Amazon channel completely separate?

Jason: If I’m answering this with Amazon listening. That’s what every man … We follow the rules. We follow the rules right closely. I do look at it as Amazon’s customers are, all those sales, those are Amazon’s customers, not Wall Monkeys’ customers but we definitely know that and we see sales from both places. We don’t actively try and break rules and divert people, but on Amazon we are Wall Monkeys wall decors. You probably don’t need a PhD to figure out that if you type in WallMonkeys.com you might be able to see our website and find other things.

Steve: Let’s talk about the early phase of your business when you first got started. How did you get your first sales?

Jason: We got really lucky. One of the biggest breaks even though we didn’t make much money at the beginning, something that helped a lot was about 3 weeks after I started the company, 3 weeks after I got the website up, the contact number on the website was my cell phone. I was running it from either printing from my basement or running it from my kitchen table.

Steve: That’s awesome.

Jason: My phone rings and it was Darren Rovell. He works at ESPN now but he was a sport supporter for CNBC. Says he’s Darren Rovell and I knew who he was. He said, “Hey I was just checking out your products. It looks really great. I was looking at Fathead and I just think this is such a great idea. How would you like to be highlighted as one of the best gifts, best Christmas gifts for dad for 2009?”

Steve: I’m sorry how did this happen?

Jason: He was just doing research on Fathead and bumped into my company because we were one of the first. He just called me on the phone and asked if I wanted Wall Monkeys to be highlighted on CNBC right before Christmas. That was just a huge break because that made sales, but then we also from that we ended up … Somebody, a guy wrote an article for ESPN, the magazine and a couple of other outlets reached out. We got a bunch of press which really helped with sales for months after that. We were making sales every day off of the momentum of Darren Rovell.

Steve: Was that before you had all these licensing deals in place?

Jason: We had nothing, we just had customers, we had 3 weeks. I didn’t even really know how to … Had to have a graphic designer setup the orders to print. I was … We knew nothing.

Steve: That’s amazing, okay they must have found you through search, then I guess…

Jason: Yeah Darren Rovell found me through search. I still talk to him once in a while. I have printed some stuff for him and now he works for ESPN. He is just a really great guy. He was like right time, right place and it was just really fortunate; it was like a nice break.

Steve: Can we talk about search strategy? Do you pump out a lot of blog post? What’s your content strategy to get ranked?

Jason: It could be a lot better. We were blogging a lot more, right now we are not. Right now we are focusing on social media more. We have a visual product so every day in the office where everyone is taking pictures and putting them into this Google cloud … I’m sorry Google drive folder and Instagram and Pinterest right now seem to be best for us as far as driving traffic.

Steve: Okay and in terms of pay-per-click, are you running Facebook ads, Instagram ads, Pinterest ads?

Jason: Almost all of our spending is Google and Amazon. Amazon we are trying to ramp it as much as possible they just don’t seem to use our whole ads spent. I’m not sure where the magic formula is there yet.

Steve: In terms of Google you have so many different images that I can’t even imagine running one of your campaigns. How do you structure these campaigns, or are you bidding on more general terms like wall decals?

Jason: We are not bidding on wall decals, those are general terms.

Steve: Yeah because that would be a really expensive …

Jason: We just have niches. Different business niches, maybe veterinarians or nail salons, hair salons. We know what images. Again we have … We know what sold. We know where we want to drive people and we … It’s taken a long time to build them out but we built out very specific campaigns to target very specific niches.

Steve: Are you using the display network or just search ads?

Jason: Just search ads. Again I pay … I have, I see all the reporting. We have a lot of reports that come to me as well as talking to my pay-per-click guy every once a week but we get … I get reports like crazy.

Steve: Okay.

Jason: We are constantly trying to spend more and refine it and he’s got metrics to hit and luckily we’ve actually we’ve really been hitting them which is nice. I think once, I got to keep saying but once that new searches works on our site, I think all of our numbers are going to get better.

Steve: Have you tried some of the other ad platforms like Facebook and Pinterest. I would imagine those would work pretty well for you guys?

Jason: Facebook we just haven’t … we need to build out … I still feel like we are a start up. I can make a huge list and tell you all the things that were either not doing well enough or not doing yet that I want to. Facebook we’ve … Facebook ads haven’t been great for us but we are also not employing the strategy that I would want to. We need to build out a lot more landing pages to send people to where we really want them to go. Like I said yeah I would say for right now Google and Amazon it’s … And Amazon in particular it’s just keep trying to spend more because it works the best.

Steve: Let’s talk about what’s working well for you guys in terms of getting business. What are some of the things that you are doing that’s generating a lot of business for you?

Jason: FBA definitely is where we’ve been adding more and Amazon’s is huge.

Steve: Have you run into any problems with Amazon?

Jason: We have problems all the time. Recently there has been a lot … We have Wall Monkeys as our brand, it’s trademarked, we are in Amazon’s brand registry. Recently we’ve been spending hours every week. People are getting onto our listings and we have to send cease and desist letters and it’s a real time suck.

Steve: Right.

Jason: Its seems to be more of a free fall than never which is another reason to focus on, to put some more energy on our ecommerce side and on business to business and other things. There is just more sellers than ever and I don’t know when they are going to lock it down or put a limit on it. It’s getting … I see it getting diluted.

Steve: Oh yeah totally I give it 1 or 2 more years until it becomes saturated with junk and then Amazon has to do something about it.

Jason: I think they need to do something now. They don’t protect … they don’t want to get involved fighting for us for us for the brand. They will only get involved if the customer isn’t getting the product as described. Otherwise they are just going to make the money and they are not going to get involved.

Steve: Yeah in that regard, when you guys are doing customer service for Amazon or your own site generally do you just … I imagine your costs are pretty low. It’s just the cost of the paper and the ink right? When you guys run customer service, whenever someone complains do you just essentially give away the product and give them refund or?

Jason: Pretty much.

Steve: Okay.

Jason: Yeah if we think someone is really trying to be deceitful we’ll address it but yeah it’s just kind of the … one of the prices you pay especially for doing business on Amazon.

Steve: Does it worry you at all. What are some of the things that you are doing to shift away from Amazon to your own site?

Jason: There is a couple of things. It doesn’t worry me. I think if you are entrepreneur lots of things worry you. If I wanted to worry all day long I could probably do that. One of the biggest things that we are doing is we do have a pretty good scale at creating these mass listings on Amazon, and how we do it on our website also. We just started helping a couple of other companies create listings for their print on demand products on Amazon.

Companies that don’t have … Again they are facing the challenges that most people face. They might have 1000 listings or 2000 but they have access to say 50000 images and they can’t create those listings. Other companies are now paying us which is really great. Let them enable them they make money and we don’t have to … we are not going to enter that category anyway.

Steve: Is this software that you are selling?

Jason: We are not selling them software. It is software but we are doing it ourselves, we are not putting it in the hands of the customer. We are … There are bigger relationships. We are managing them. We are working hand in hand to create the listings for them and make them live.

Steve: I see okay, a services based thing. Are they your competition though?

Jason: No never. If we sell wall decals there might be a company that sells picture frames and they want to put images in those frames. Picture frames, pictures … A framed picture isn’t going to compete with a wall decal. Putting those images on a coffee mug as an example but you could go on Zazzle and look at hundreds of products. Getting the images is no problem it’s creating listings and all the metadata that needs to be plugged in in the right places, that people have a hard time with.

Steve: Okay going forward, you’ve been doing wall decals for quite a while now. What is your focus right now? Is it to grow the company; is it to enjoy life, what is your end goal with it?

Jason: I don’t know about end goal but right now my focus has been on for a while and I have been spending a lot of energy on just efficiencies in the office, and having creating a better work environment and happy employees. Then personally the same thing. I guard my morning rituals and the way I want my day to go and how I spend my time.

I guard that and always work on that religiously. Now that those things are a lot more in line I think now we are going to be poised for a really big phase of growth for the Wall Monkeys business. I felt we needed to get these other pieces straight before we grew sales more.

Steve: Where is that growth going to be coming from you think?

Jason: I think it’s going to come from all over. I think the biggest drivers are going to be … I keep saying B2B but there is a lot of businesses out there that don’t know we exist, and we are going to let them know that we exist. We also …

Steve: How do you plan on doing that? What’s your strategy for reaching out to B2B?

Jason: I don’t think I want to share it.

Steve: Okay.

Jason: I’ve spent a lot of time thinking about how we go after businesses and …

Steve: Okay.

Jason: Yeah, that’s something I guess everybody doesn’t need to hear.

Steve: Yeah, okay sure. I was curious because we are doing the same thing, maybe after this.

Jason: Yeah, we could talk about it after we hang up the phone.

Steve: Okay, sorry you got B2B, are you, A, Amazon is just going to grow naturally on its own. Do you have any specific strategies for growing your Amazon business?

Jason: We are going to update our listings, there’s … When we update our listings it’s not like going in and updating one, it’s like a pretty big deal because we are … We might be making some pretty major changes across a few hundred thousand listings. You want to really think about it and test it and make sure that they are going through the right way.

I guess the best way say it is, I feel we can do … Aside from the way we process orders and how quickly and accurately we do that, that’s majority of the time, almost every other part of our business can be improved. Whether it’s the ecommerce site, the search, our listings on Amazon, the quality of the content on Amazon, I feel we can do everything better.

Steve: Yeah, but it’s … Maybe you have limited resources, I’m just curious, are you going to be focusing on other ad platforms like Facebook? You mentioned you didn’t feel like you have been giving it any justice, are you going to start blogging again …

Jason: Facebook ads, when the search is done, there is going to be many landing pages for categories, sub categories, artists, lots of different businesses and business niches and types of images. Targeted Facebook advertising is going to be a pretty big part as well as I think our Google advertising has been … Is going to become a lot more efficient because we can change the pages that we’re driving the traffic to.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of staff, do you plan on growing that or do you feel running really lean is one of your goals?

Jason: Running lean is definitely one of my goals. One of the biggest challenges is managing people, I’ve learnt … Again I ran a retail business for 14 years, I’ve been doing this for 8 years, and I feel I’m learning all the time. Running lean is key and paying for A players is something that I learned too late, whether it’s programmers or the people putting in the images.

With programmers especially with Upwork and things like that, you can hire … There’s such a range. You could hire a $15 an hour php guy or you can hire someone who makes $100 an hour or more and there’s times when it really makes sense to hire those guys that are … To search out who’s the best in the world and just pay for it.

Steve: Where do you find these people, are they referrals or are you using services like Upwork?

Jason: Yeah, I’ll ask my network or I’ll use Upwork. For our search right now for Solar I went into that, I knew it was complicated, and I knew it was a specialized skill, and I took the approach on that one. Where can I find who is the best in the world, and I’m going to pay him. I looked on LinkedIn, LinkedIn is a pretty good resource just to look in groups and find … Get leads that way.

But for Solar this project I found the guy on Upwork and you just have to really know what you are looking for very specifically and check their references and make sure you are getting what you pay for. Hiring IT, IT project especially custom work, those are very expensive mistakes to me, because you are starting over you are wasting time, the money and time loss there is it’s expensive and exhausting.

Steve: We are coming on 40 minutes now, I was just curious, do you have any advice for people out there who want to go and into ecommerce? I’m just curious would you if you were to start all over again today, would go be doing this again? Your particular nature, physical products?

Jason: I like what I do, we have a niche, I feel we are … There’s lot of opportunity in my niche; selling on Amazon in general I think is pretty full. I think there might be more opportunity in helping … If I was going to start all over again I would, or if I just close my business tomorrow, or something happened, I would probably focus on using the knowledge that I have to help other sellers sell more, or help companies that have a weak or no presence, establish a strong presence. I think there is more money, a better opportunity, a better freedom helping others than there is in trying to fight it out on your own.

Steve: Interesting. One thing I also forgot to ask you, are you guys using email marketing at all for Wall Monkeys?

Jason: Yeah, we use … We actually use Constant Contact.

Steve: Constant Contact, okay. Is that a large part of your business?

Jason: When we send a good one, it is.

Steve: Okay, these are one offs, do you have auto responder sequences or?

Jason: We do, we have auto responder sequences and things, but I … They are fine, I like to look at the effectiveness of the weekly emails that we send and see if we’re crafting those messages the right way.

Steve: All right Jason, well hey thanks a lot for coming on the show man, I’ve always been really … I admire your business mainly because to me you are not really an ecommerce company, you are like a tech company because of all these process that you’ve put in place. You just happen to sell wall decals but the whole process was well thought out, and the fact you are able to run such a large company with still few people is pretty amazing to me.

Jason: Thank you.

Steve: Does that mean that I can have your son on next?

Jason: Yeah, you could ask him all the questions about being as teen entrepreneur, the websites he built and all that good stuff.

Steve: All right, thanks J.

Jason: All right.

Steve: Take care man.

Jason: Thank you Steve.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I find especially cool about Jason is that he’s managed to turn his wall decal company into a tech company by automating most of the processes. I also find that his business model is pretty ingenious. There are a lot of wall decal companies out there, but Wall Monkeys stands out, because they have the largest selection.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode126, and if you enjoy this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

125: Shipping Logistics And How To Transport Your Goods From Overseas With Pam Cail

Shipping Logistics And How To Transport Your Goods From Overseas With Pam Cail

Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show Pam Cail. Pam is the VP of a company called HYCLogistics and she’s helped thousands of sellers get their goods to their warehouses from Asia.

They’ve been in business since 1948 and she knows shipping and logistics inside and out. The reason why I have her on the show today is because many people are intimidated by the importing process.

Plus, my wife and I import many times a year by sea and we’ve also been confused by all of the fees that we get nickle and dimed on. We pretty much accept these fees blindly but they do add up.

So I’ve invited Pam on the show to hopefully clear up the most scary questions that people have about importing.

What You’ll Learn

  • Pam’s motivations for starting her business.
  • The margins for a logistics company and how the fees are factored in.
  • The biggest mistakes that people make when importing from overseas
  • How to find the permits that are required.
  • The Pros/cons of EXW vs FOB
  • When you should use air courier vs air freight vs sea freight
  • When to use a stateside broker vs an international broker.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes. If you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show, Pam Cail. Pam is the VP of a company called HYC Logistics, and she’s helped thousands of sellers get their goods to their warehouses from Asia. They’ve been in business since 1948. She knows shipping and logistics inside and out.

The reason I’ve decided to have her on the show today is because many people are very intimidated by the importing process. Plus my wife and I import many times a year by sea, and I’ve been often confused by all the fees on my invoices where we kind of feel like we’re getting nickel and dimed on. We pretty much pay these blindly in a lot of cases, but they do add up.

I’ve invited Pam on the show to hopefully clear up the most scary questions that people have about importing. With that welcome to the show Pam, how are you doing today?

Pam: Hi. Thank you. I’m doing great. I am. I’m very excited to be here.

Steve: Very excited to have you. What I want to start out with was can you give us a quick background story and tell us how you ended up running HYC Logistics?

Pam: I have always pretty much had a transportation background in my family. My father was the vice president of a large trucking company, and my mother was a school teacher. Together we’ve always talked about helping, learning, and also the trucking and transportation world. With that, I got into the accounting side of international shipping through a large a freight forwarder.

I started at the bottom doing accounts for savable accounts payable and have worked my way up. When Harvey Yaffee Company asked me to join their team, I was thrilled and I actually started as an accounting manager here, went into exports, imports. Now I am very happy to say that I run the company, and I’ve got a great group of people.

Steve: I’ve often wondered how someone gets into the shipping and logistics business. It sounds like it was something that you’ve done with your family and then you were interested in the business and worked your way up.

Pam: That’s exactly right.

Steve: I’ve always been curious; from a business perspective what are the margins like in such a heavy service based business? How are your fees factored in the equation when you help someone?

Pam: They are very minimal. I do have to say my CFO many a times says, “Who started this business?” Because most people in the jewelry industry, in the furniture industry, 200% 500% mark-up, whatever … In the shipping industry and freight forwarding like we do with the brokerage service, these are very minimal. At certain times if we make $50 that’s a good day. Anyway it ends up being relative to everything that actually is done at the shipment level if you do just brokerage or warehousing or transportation or whatever.

You make a minimal on each one of them. This is not one of those companies that you’re going to find, going to have the 24 karat gold garbage can. It’s nothing. We chose poorly if that’s what we wanted to achieve. All in all it’s a very necessary part of shipping in our economy and I guess having the background that I do, it’s certainly rewarding. We have time and we have the education to share with everybody and that’s what drives us, not the money.

Steve: A lot of people probably come to you with importing help. What are the biggest mistakes that you see that people have when they are first starting to do their first shipments when they first come to you?

Pam: I think one of them is telling the supplier that they are a new person in this. Just being overly honest because you don’t really know how they are going to react to you. Are they going to tell you things that may not be true or they might be true to them only? For instance, I was told that by one person that they only import into New York. This person came to me and said, “I see that you could only import into the United States by way of New York?” I said, “Where did you hear that?” They said, “Well the supplier.” See the supplier only imported into New York.

Therefore it was honest of the supplier, but it was misleading and they didn’t even know to ask the question, “Well, what about the other ports or is there anything else?” When you are a new person, you don’t even know the questions to ask. That’s the damn fault of not having a representative on the USA side.

When everything is handled on the Asia side, the China side or anywhere else, they don’t know the US customs laws. They don’t know what ports are available, what’s best, what our weather is even like. Are the rail roads flooded or are they iced over in Chicago during the winter? Those types of things we try to say, “Okay. Everyone is good at their area. Find an expert at their area especially if you are not.”

Steve: What are some of the questions that you should be asking to the vendor?

Pam: It depends on the shipment. That is one of those that has the weight, the volume, where your freight, what port they use, where are they going to ship out of, if it’s FOB. There are differences: is it air or ocean and is it airline or air courier express?

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit actually. I know typically when I go with a vendor they sometimes give me 2 different quotes. One for EXW and one for FOB. Can you comment on the pros and cons of both incoterms terms? First of all, if you wouldn’t mind defining them and then talking about the pros and cons.

Pam: Incoterms are an international commercial term. It’s used in both the exporting country and the importing country. In layman’s terms it tells you where and how your freight is going to be routed. As you asked, the Ex Works and FOB … The responsibilities of the partners … Ex Works is when your … Which would be my customer would be responsible for providing the financial means of getting their freight from the factory to the ship, the port.

FOB means Free On Board which means that the supplier of my client is financially responsible to get the product to the port. Then my client’s financial responsibility starts at the port, at exportation. There is big difference on that. If your freight forwarder doesn’t have a way to get your export freight to the port that could be a problem. You always want to make sure that if you do have Ex-Works terms on your commercial invoice, that you also have the ways and means of getting it from the warehouse to the port.

Steve: I noticed that the Ex Works quote is always less than the FOB quote probably because of that fact. Is that something you recommend or do you always recommend going with FOB at first?

Pam: No. I don’t have a preference. I do suggest that you get 2 quotes for your product because a lot of times the FOB will be more expensive than the EX Works. You need to judge and you need to analyze and say, “If the FOB quote is $500 more, would it better for you to get an Ex Works quote and have your freight forwarder bring it for $200 to the dock?” If you have that time and you have the desire it’s good to analyze all these. If not the simplest way for my clients is to have FOB terms. They know that it will get there when it’s supposed to and they don’t have to worry about a trucker or anything else on the Asia side that they are not familiar with.

Steve: I’m thinking about some of my factories that we use. They are deep within rural China where it might hard to actually get a freight forwarder there to move the goods to the port. Is that something that you guys handle too?

Pam: Yes, we do. We handle that because we have an agent and a partner over in China. That’s where I use their connection. Sometimes if you’ve got an agent that is not very large, they won’t have the connection. Sometimes if you’ve got agent that’s very large, they don’t want to take the time to go to rural China. They want to just do the nice easy [inaudible 00:12:11] type.

Steve: It just comes down to price really then, EXW versus FOB?

Pam: It does.

Steve: You also mentioned a couple of things. You mentioned air courier, air freight, and sea freight. Would you mind telling us what the differences are first? What some of the guidelines are in using one versus the other?

Pam: The air courier is the most expensive. The sea freight is the least expensive. With the caveat being that sea freight deals with minimums. You don’t want to have the shipment too small to where your minimums end up being larger than your courier. Then the middle of the road is airline is the fastest, but it also is not the most expensive and you can send a few cartons by airline that necessarily might be the middle of the road.

We always look at the carton count and see what’s best for the customer. I would highly recommend that anyone who has a freight forwarder and a broker that they ask for these options because surprisingly enough it maybe that you need to increase your carton count by 10 to make sea freight be so much cheaper.

Then the reverse depending on your financial status and so forth, you may not be able to do that or your supplier may not be able to give you 10 more cartons. Then you end up having maybe the courier versus the airline. Sometimes the courier ends up being cheaper than the airline because of the time of year and also the quantity.

Steve: Interesting, can we talk about the cut offs? When is a good time to use air courier versus air freight for example?

Pam: There is not really a precise cut off on that air courier versus air freight because air courier can be very pricey at Christmas time. It could be $8 a kilo whereas an airline maybe $1.97 a kilo. The difference on the courier and the airline is that on an airline is going to have to go an airport. You are going to have terminal charges and they are going to put it on a pallet. You are going to have to pay for those individual fees, the security filing, all that type. That will add extra dollars to your shipment but it won’t add all the way up to $8 a kilo.

Steve: Okay, would say then that air freight is always cheaper than air courier regardless of the size of your shipment?

Pam: No, I would not say that. Be careful with the season. I’m getting very good air courier rights right now. In a month, when the big retail stores start bringing in their end of the year holiday stuff, courier is going to go up fly up out of the chart. Then it’s going to be better to do airline and also think too that some of these airlines only need a small few packages to fill up their body in their cargo part. You will be able to get an airline right for a little cheaper. Whereas say in express shipment, that’s usually booked for the retail stores and so forth as a whole body of a plane.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, it sounds over the holidays; air courier will tend to be a lot more expensive than air freight. Whereas during the non peak times of the year, courier might be the same price or even cheaper than air freight, does that …

Pam: Yes, that’s it.

Steve: The reason for … Air freight, can we walk through that process? How much more of a hustle is it in the air courier because in the air courier case, they deliver everything straight to your warehouse. You don’t have to worry about anything right?

Pam: Right and it is much simpler, easier, they let the … It’s like sending a FedEx envelope. It’s all right there. All pretty, all but a bow on it. Airline, it would be the same basic airport from wherever you are guest origin is. Then it would bring in to the terminal whereas the courier will come into a warehouse or your final destination or whatever. You’d have to find the airport closest to where it would be. You would then need to take the second step of getting it to the final destination which would be adding trucking to it.

Steve: Okay, could I physically go to the airport and pick the stuff up myself though?

Pam: Yes you can. Yes you can. Now, depending on and I always say depending on the area that you are picking it up, some ports are more friendly, some airports are more friendly to having people walk in and go to the CFS. It is truly your right to be able to do that. Some of the busier airports, you will have to stay in line and wait for hours and pick decent time. You have got to weigh out what your value of time is.

Steve: Okay, and then you also have to factor in the cost of trucking from the airport to your destination which can be expensive as well, right?

Pam: Exactly. Then also don’t forget, our US customs brokerage services on an airline. You do have to … You have to pay for a broker just like in ocean freight for airline.

Steve: I see, I see. Okay, it ends up being a lot more of a hustle whereas air courier handles all that stuff and in my experience you pay the customs after the fact.

Pam: Right.

Steve: Okay, air freight is like sea freight. You have to handle all the customs and everything. The only difference really is that things are shipped by airline instead of boat and there’s no minimum it seems.

Pam: Exactly, right on.

Steve: Got it, got it. All right, that middle of the road option is that … First of all is air freight as fast as air courier or is it going to be slower?

Pam: It’s going to be slower but just by a couple days.

Steve: Okay, because of customs? Is that why?

Pam: No, just that they don’t … Air courier is known for getting to the United States in 3 days, 5 days whatever, however long it is. They leave every night. That’s how the name of the game is get it on there and put it on the first airplane that leaves China. Whereas the airline is a scheduled appointment just like an ocean freight is a scheduled …

Steve: I see. I see. Okay, and let’s talk about sea freight then and when it makes sense to go by sea.

Pam: It makes sense to go by sea when you’re carton count and your CBMs are around 3 CBMs. Depending on the size or the weight volume that determines what’s going to happen on sea freight. You can … I can’t say, okay 73 cartons is the magic number because your port may be different. Let’s concentrate more on the CBMs because that’s how ocean freight is calculated. Everything is calculated based on CBMs.

Steve: Which stands for cubic meters, correct?

Pam: Yes, cubic meters. Whereas an air freight, it’s all calculated by kilos and chargeable weight. Well on ocean freight, there’s no chargeable weight. A CBM is a CBM. A cubic meter is a cubic meter. We’ve got a small typo around here. I always tell the people I say, “Okay pretend it’s a small round table with corners.” To get an idea of what a CBM looks like. That’s the visual of a CBM.

On ocean freight usually from China and Asia they actually come loose. All your cartons come loose. Then when it gets to the United States, it is palletized at the container freight station which is the CFS. You are not paying for the weight of the pallet. You are not paying for someone in China to handle it differently. You don’t have to worry about a pallet jack or a fork lift or anything like that. We do agree with the Asian way of sending it loose freight because of we do not want to pay for any extra weight than we have to.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory cost, are easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online bookkeeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses.

They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who will handle everything for you. So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced. And the best part is that you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: So just to summarize what you said. Sea freight is just by volume. It’s charged by volume whereas air freight is always charged by weight. It makes sense when you have stuff that’s super heavy that you go via sea freight because there’s no incremental cost to adding more stuff because it’s all calculated by a container load.

Pam: Exactly, exactly.

Steve: Okay, can we talk about less than a container load versus having your own container? How does LCL work?

Pam: A less than container load is LCL freight. What happens there is that say you’ve got your cartons and you only have 5 CBM, we are going to assume an FOP which means free on port. Your supplier is going to bring it to the port. The port has a container freight station where they put all these individual cartons together and they load a container. All right, I can arrange a container, my agent can arrange a container, the freight forwarder can arrange it, it could be any which way. We are going to say this is just a generic container.

Steve: Sure.

Pam: MSC has a generic container which is Mediterranean shipping line. Your 5 CBMs are part of this 20 foot container which unless you are sending water you really can’t go much more than 25, 28 CBMs in a 20 foot. Your 5 CBMs are part of we’ll say this 25 CBM container. Now, your freight is put with several other people’s freight. You don’t know them. You don’t know what it is, you don’t know their documentation status, you don’t know if they’re smuggling drugs, you don’t know if they are packaged right. The only thing you can know is that if it is HAZMAT it will not go into a normal container. It will go into a HAZMAT container. You are not going to be exploding … There’s not going to be your container blowing up because you got something next to you inside that container.

You’ve got all, we’ll call it all freight of all kinds and it’s on the container and now you get into the CFS. Your 5 CBMs are put together with this paper work, signed off, checked in, loaded in the container. When it gets to the United States, it is then taken off the vessel with a huge crane and it is taken back to a container freight station where it is actually divided up again. Your 5 CBMs and say your 70 cartons is put over here with this paper work and so forth. That container is divided out again.

The negative part of the LCL and sharing a container is that if your buddy, your new BFF that’s in that with you, if they get called for an exam, the whole container stays in an exam state until it is all cleared. US customs will not partially clear a container. Your paper work and your items might be perfect but if you are sharing it with somebody that’s not, that’s when it’s a negative. You might have a delay or a cost for sitting on the dock. That would be a downside of that even though you are an innocent party.

Steve: For example, let’s say I was sharing a container with someone who didn’t properly label their goods, customs goes in and they notice that the goods weren’t labeled properly, that would delay my shipment as well?

Pam: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay, I see. Is there any control over who your buddy is on a container?

Pam: I have made that control because I do my own containers. I know that we handle the paper work; I know the due diligence that goes into the products that are picked and put on the container. The control of that is and can be handled if you’ve got somebody like me that will basically hand pick who your new BFFs are.

Steve: I see. Okay since you guys do a lot of business, and often times it’s from the same originating port, you are able to put together different customers within the same container because you know what’s in there and you know that they’ve labeled everything properly and it will clear customs, is that accurate?

Pam: Exactly. They will all have their continuous bonds and we won’t have any hang ups as far as a single entry bond having to be signed off.

Steve: I see, okay. Given that you know who your buddies are on a container and everything clears, is there any other disadvantages to using LCL?

Pam: I don’t really know. It is more costly after it gets to probably about 7 to 10 CBMs. We always recommend if you are at the 10 CBM mark, it is actually going to be cheaper for you to get a full container and only fill it up half way or see if I can find somebody to marry with you because the port charges are so expensive. The core load of these are so expensive. Basically they want to deter having to unload 200 cartons on the CFAs.

They would rather say, “Okay we are dealing with union laborers; we are dealing with port charges that our government mandated so it’s more pricey.” They’ll put extra charges on there, extra fees for that, which is the extra labor and time that they are going to have to do that with. They are going to have to prioritize all those 200 cartons and they come every which way on those pallets. It’s not a nice neat like you would think in a warehouse type environment, palletizing. They’ll just throw along any each way to get them all together.

Then of course something like Amazon or someone that you would want to send it and have a good name for yourself. You would not want to send a pallet looking as though it was all mixed up and upside down yeah.

Steve: Interesting, when you have your full container it doesn’t need to be unloaded for inspection?

Pam: No it doesn’t it will … If it does need inspection and I say an exam inspection, they’ll take the whole container and run through the electronic ice. Then if that still fails then they will ask for it to be moved off of the site. Then they’ll unload it and that’s called an intensive exam. Those are really pricey.

Steve: Okay how often does that happen?

Pam: Not very often we rarely have intensive exams but that’s not to say that you don’t get them. The exams … We usually say about 30% of the US customs has to be examined, things that go through US customs about 30%. That’s where we get into this. Examined and intensive examined are 2 different things. Running it through a laser basically seeing if there is anything that flashes up is totally different and a lot cheaper because it can all stay in the container.

When you start unloading, now you’ve got union workers, government workers and you’ve got an offsite facility. You have to take it off site this that is bonded for an intensive. That’s why it’s so pricey as well.

Steve: Okay how does one decides on a good port of entry for a shipment; let’s say if you don’t live near water?

Pam: It depends your final destination, and how quickly you need it too. Now why we send so much to Long Beach is because it takes 13 to 15 days of sailing time to get it there. Well that’s pretty quick. If you’ve got your decks on a row and your supplier is actually done when they say, and you’ve got it all, everything paid documents everything perfect.

You could have your freight in 30 days if you did a container or whatever. You could have it easily at your warehouse in 30 days. It only takes we’ll say 15 for ground purposes, 15 days for sailing, a few days at the port on each side. It doesn’t … This is one that doesn’t get an exam and you are sitting here looking at 23 days.

Steve: If I’m in New York for example, would it pay to get it shipped to Long Beach and then trucked over. Would that be the fastest way versus sailing all the way around?

Pam: That would be the fastest way, it’s not the cheapest but it would be the fastest way.

Steve: Okay, I see and there is just tradeoffs that depend on how fast you need your goods. What would be cost differential for example for a container?

Pam: I don’t even know to be honest with you. I can tell you that we just, we looked at a trucking for … From LA to Tampa and it runs about $4500.

Steve: Okay for a container load?

Pam: For a container load.

Steve: Okay that’s significant.

Pam: Very significant. New York probably $5200 maybe, because there is a little diversion there.

Steve: Sailing to New York takes significantly longer right?

Pam: It does because it’s called all water A-W-S is all water. We’ve got all water to Houston, Miami, New York. The only one that we have that’s the most economical would be to LA or possibly Seattle to Cama getting into upstate up there. It does take even a couple of more days longer to get to Seattle to Cama than it does LA. Now the other choice is not to truck it. Bring it in to LA and to put it on a rail. A rail road and rail it to New York.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Pam: How it works is there is … We do it in degrees. The ocean freight, sea sailing is the cheapest. You want to keep it on there as long as you can if time doesn’t matter. [inaudible 00:35:55]. Then the rail … The rail road is cheaper, then truck it. You want to keep it on the rail as long as you can. Then the third is you track it the shortest distance you can.

Steve: Okay that makes sense. Can we talk a little bit about customs bonds, first of all what are they and why do you need one?

Pam: All right in order to import into the United States you have to have a customs bond. That gives basically permission for a responsible insurance policy for US customs to get their duty and taxes paid okay? We’ve got 2 types; we’ve got a continuous bond and a single entry bond. A single entry bond is based on 1 entry, 1 shipment and it’s paid every time. It is more costly and it is based on duty and value of your commercial invoice. In a matter of speaking you could easily pay more for a single entry bond than a customs bond, a continuous bond. A continuous bond is $500 for 12 consecutive months.

That means if you got it today this is June, it would expire on June 9th. It’s not a January to December, and you can’t partial you can’t pay for a half of the year. Its 12 months continuous and it starts where it is. In a matter of depending on your duty and your commercial value, you could easily pay for your continuous bond in 3 shipments. Sometimes 2 if you’ve got a high duty rate or a high commercial value right? Remember its $550 a thousand based on the duty and commercial revenue.

Steve: Okay and in general if you plan on doing at least 3 shipments it pays to get the continuous bond?

Pam: Yes, if there is several other caveats to the continuous bond that I personally like. I think it is good to be known by the US government as you support the economic and the retail market wherever you are selling if you are a wholesaler, retailer whatever. You want the government to know that you are not a fly by night. That you are not doing this one time. You are invested in the US economy.

With a continuous bond, that’s what its stating to somebody that just sees a log. It says, “Okay this guy’s really serious about making a difference in our retail or wholesale world.” Whereas a single entry bond it says, “Oh I’m going to give this a try, I’m going to put my toe in it just a little bit, and it may not happen.” Also you’ll have …

Steve: Would you say then you are less likely to get an in-depth exam if you have a continuous bond or?

Pam: I would because that is what we hear. There is nothing of course written that way but it does seem to be an issue on that. Why, if I could explain why. With the single entry bond, the physical paperwork, the documents, they hold your commercial invoice, your packing list, the 7501 which talks about the duty and your release. That is the paperwork, and it basically has to be taken to US customs and signed off. Then that paperwork has to be reviewed at the same time that they are reviewing your product.

You got US customs officer that is actually got your stack of papers in his hands, and he is also looking at your 70 cartons or whatever. He is, just in human sight. If you’re going to have to put your John Hancock on something, you are going to look twice because you know that your authorities know that you are standing right there by and if it doesn’t say that it is made in China or if something doesn’t look right then shame on you. You are just lying; you are leaving yourself wide open for an exam I think personally because of just human nature.

Steve: Interesting, okay that is really good to know. Couple of other things that I often get asked is how do you know what all the different permits that are required when you are importing something in?

Pam: US customs and the government, it stated that you as the importer have to know everything you need to import. You don’t have to do it but you have to know what you need. Let’s just be real, you don’t know everything you need because you don’t even know what to ask. You know that if you’ve got [inaudible 00:42:06] and so forth, you know that if you got a food article that you know food and drug is needed.

It is very important that your US customs broker is up to date and knows about this. If you need certificates, if it’s something that requires FDA or XCC trademark, but if you have a blue tick with the trademark, you’ve got to have permission and that’s got be part of your document packing. That is very important to get this done before it sits at the port, because remember the port is very expensive because it’s union labor and that port has got a lot of movement in it, and that space is very expensive if you are holding, if you are taking up a room.

Steve: Okay.

Pam: For the actual cost, do your due diligence ahead of time. Make sure your customs broker is familiar with the rulings and the filings that are associated with your [inaudible 00:43:21] code which is how deviant taxes are calculated.

Steve: Okay, I can’t imagine doing all these stuff on my own which is why I have always used a customs broker, but I’m just … Can we just go through the entire process from beginning to end, in terms of what’s necessary. I imagine when someone comes to you, you probably ask them very specific questions on how large their shipment is, exactly what they are importing. Can you just walk me through the process as if I was coming to you as a client.

Pam: Sure, the very first thing is we ask a group of 13-17 questions, and that makes it much easier for you to get a qualified quote. We are strong and your quote needs to be your invoice. How can you run a company if you keep getting bills that come through after the facts? We ask very detailed questions. Where is your supplier, what is your incoterms, is it FOP or Ex-Works, do you even have a picture of it so that my compliance manager can look at it and make sure that we are suggesting the correct [inaudible 00:44:44] code.

We go through your carton count, volume pieces, how the value is done. We make sure everything is fair including the commodity, the origin destination. We even go in to; do you need a lift gate at the final destination? Does your warehouse have the access for a regular truck to come in or do you need a lift gate? If you have, do you live in a rural area if you are going to have it be delivered to your house? Will you have someone there to unload because you only have 2 hours free time. Then you start getting charges for holding up the truck driver, and the container or their truck.

We try to get as much information as we can on this, and then that is the generic first of, and then we start getting nitty gritty. We start taking you through the ocean freight? This is your cost. Do you want marine insurance? That’s insurance that covers you while you are at sea. Do you want additional insurance? Do you want warehousing? Do you want trucking? That’s talked about.

Now we have to talk about the Asia side. Does your China supplier have an export license if it’s going to be FOB terms because remember FOB means they get it all the way, and it’s to the ship. Your supplier has to clear it through China customs. Your supplier has to make sure the documents are correct, and in China they have to be licensed just like we have to be licensed in the United States. If not then we need to find somebody who is, that can offer that service.

Steve: Incidentally if you go Ex-Works, the responsibility then is on you to clear China customs, is that correct?

Pam: Yes, that is correct. We need to find out a little more, and then sometimes people don’t know. We will interact with the supplier at this point in time, and we will ask these questions, and keep the client in copy. Sometimes they get too in depth with the answers, and they get confused as far as what are we really trying to say or something especially if you’ve got a language barrier. Then we bring it on, and we go through and we take care of everything, make sure everything is taken care of even if we are not responsible for it.

We make sure that you are taken care of with the terms in China. We get it on the water, we bring it to the port, after the port we break it down. If it’s LCL, if it’s not LCL which is less than container load. If it is a full container, we will get a tractor; we will bring the container to our warehouse. We will take it apart at that point in time, unload it and then we can store it, or we send it on to the final destination.

Steve: Do you have warehouses at each port?

Pam: Not at each port, we have a warehouse in California, and we have a warehouse in Tampa. We are looking into a warehouse in Miami at this point in time. At this point our warehouse in California is more the storage and the traditional warehouse. The Tampa warehouse is more for bundling, shrink wrapping, maybe making something, putting a bow on it.

It’s a little more, what should I say, detailed, and whereas, I was thinking the traditional warehouse is your fork cleft, and you’ve got a bunch of boxes moving around. They can do, is it broken, is it damaged, but can that fork cleft driver really put some shrink wrap round a perfume bottle or a lotion and make it look as good as if it was on a Macy’s shelf, probably thinking not. That’s why we ended up with our Tampa warehouse.

Steve: Doe that imply then that people can ship their goods from China directly to you for some processing and then have you forwarded directly to Amazon’s warehouse?

Pam: Yes, most definitely.

Steve: Okay, I didn’t realize that was a service that you guys offered.

Pam: We do, when I say we are full service we are full service. We can pick it up. The only thing that I can’t do is I can’t pick your product, but everything else I can take care of it, and we can take what you want. We’ve actually improved some people’s product that has got into Amazon. Somebody used to put their product in like a little baggy, for lack of a better word. He folded it over and put a sticker on it, and that was his label, the danger warning and all that. Well when we took it to our Tampa warehouse because he just wasn’t getting the dollar value that he felt like he needed.

We took it our Tampa warehouse and said, “What can we do?” Rather than the 3 labels, and they weren’t always even, we made up an insert that bagged the product, so you could see it, and then we shrink wrapped it to where it did the like the image. Where it all sucks around the product, so that it was nice and neat rather than this zip lock bag. He is very happy; he has gotten his price up because it looks like it is an expensive product that it is. The product was being devalued based on the packaging, and our Tampa warehouse came up with that idea, and he is very happy.

Steve: Interesting, hey Pam, where can people reach you if they need to contact you? If they have any questions about the import process or anything like that?

Pam: You could reach me at, pam@hyclogistics.com, and then copy please my A team that will go to several people incase I’m out of town or away from my desk or helping someone else, and that would be ateam@hyclogistics.com.

Steve: Thanks a lot for your time today Pam. I learnt a lot especially about the air freight versus sea freight. I have actually never used air freight before; I didn’t even realize that that was an option actually.

Pam: Good, it’s a bright new world out there.

Steve: Yeah, and the disadvantages of LCL versus full container, I was not aware of those either, so I learnt a lot today.

Pam: Wonderful, wonderful well I would be happy to help you anytime.

Steve: Awesome, well thanks for your time Pam. Take care.

Pam: Thank you, bye bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Importing your goods from overseas for the first time can be quite intimidating, and hopefully today’s interview with Pam gave you some insights on what’s involved. If you have any questions you can always contact pam@hyclogistics.com and tell her I sent you.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode125. If you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Got to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Autro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

124: How To Prevent Your Amazon Account From Getting Suspended With Cynthia Stine

How To Prevent Your Amazon Account From Getting Suspended With Cynthia Stine

Today I’m thrilled to have Cynthia Stine on the show. Cynthia is someone I met at the Import Summit last year and she runs a site called OnlineSalesStepByStep.com where she offers a variety of very unique services related to Amazon.

She’s has worked with hundreds of Amazon sellers over the years and she specializes in helping companies get out of the Amazon penalty box.

If you’re ever suspended, Cynthia will help you get unsuspended.

If a dirty seller is purposely trying to sabotage you, Cynthia can help.

If want to know all of the tips and tricks on how to keep your Amazon account clean, Cynthia is your woman.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • The most common reason why a seller gets banned
  • Some things to watch out to prevent getting banned
  • Evil things sellers are doing and what can you do about it
  • What you have to do to get reinstated
  • The primary thing that private label sellers selling FBA have to worry about

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Cynthia Stine on the show. Cynthia is someone I met at the Import Summer last year, and she runs a site called onlinesalesstepbystep.com, where she offers a variety of very unique services related to Amazon. She’s worked with hundreds of Amazon sellers over the years, and she specializes in helping companies get out of the Amazon penalty box.

If you are ever suspended, Cynthia will help you get unsuspended. If a dirty seller purposely try to sabotage you Cynthia can help, and if you want to know all the tips and tricks on how to keep your Amazon account clean, Cynthia is your woman as well. She also has a book out called Suspension Prevention: Get Reinstated and Protect your Amazon Seller Account, of which I own a coveted and personally signed copy. With that welcome to the show Cynthia, how are you doing today?

Cynthia: Hi, good morning?

Steve: Good morning. Helping people’s accounts get reinstated is very niche, and very random in my mind, so can you give us a quick background story on how you got started helping people get their accounts reinstated.

Cynthia: Sure, I’ve been an Amazon seller since 2010, and before that I was a business consultant. I’ve been doing crisis work, turnaround work, all kinds of communications work for over 25 years, and then I got to selling on Amazon and I wrote my first book about how to get started selling on Amazon, and as a offshoot to that I would do some consulting on the side. That was fun and few hours a months whatever, and in 2014 some of my clients started coming to me who had been suspended, and they said can you help us. I thought well I’ll do my best.

I started helping them get reinstated, and I saw a lot of different situations, and so in February of 2015 I put up my little e-shingle as it were, and I said hey I do this as well, I do reinstatements and I wrote a couple of blog post about it, and I mean wow, the doors just blew off. I had no idea that there was such a huge demand. I was by myself, in March of 2015, by this time last year I had brought out a business partner, and now at this time that I’m talking to you we have 7 people in the US, and 14 in the Philippines, and we are all working very hard to help our customers, our sellers keep their accounts clean.

I have sort of a maintenance and a preventative aspect of what I do. Then for those who are suspended, of course we get them reinstated, and so that’s and then somehow in, I don’t know I had no sleep last summer, somehow in the dead of night last summer I also wrote that book Suspension Prevention, and I did that because there were so many sellers who just had no clue what was going on, and why Amazon was doing this, because Amazon didn’t tell anyone. They didn’t put out a memo, they didn’t say here’s we are about to tweak the algorithm, and here’s what it means.

They didn’t do any of that, and they didn’t put anything on the dashboard for us to look at either. Most split sellers and most of my clients are very good sellers, they religiously check their dashboards everyday to make sure their metrics are in line with Amazon expectations. They would have these great metrics, green, green, 100, 100, and they were getting suspended, and they were bewildered and of course upset.

That’s what my book was about, was just trying to get people to see what was going on and help them be aware, so they didn’t have to be suspended to find out what was going on, and so that’s also why I’ve been speaking and out there is not to sell my book, because that’s not where I make my money. It is to help people get ahead of what could be a potential problem in their account. That’s the gospel according to Cynthia, and that’s what my team is all about, and we all feel the same way about it I guess, which is we’re all focused on helping sellers and 4 of us, consultants are sellers ourselves.

Steve: Okay, that was my next question; you are still selling physical products today?

Cynthia: Yes. Now, obviously I have automated my business 100%, and it’s much smaller than it was, because I just can’t give it – I mean Timothy Ferriss talks about the 4 hour work week. When it comes to selling on Amazon it’s more like a 1 hour work month, I just have not given it the time that I can, but it’s still very important to me to sell on Amazon, because as someone who has run several consulting companies over the years I know there’s a life cycle to them, and I want to be able to sell again one day when maybe this tuff dies out.

Steve: Have you ever been suspended yourself?

Cynthia: No. Luckily and honestly it would be a horror if I ever was, because everything that I teach my clients to do I make sure that my team is doing on my account as well. So we are very– We keep a really close eye on my tiny account.

Steve: Okay, I was just thinking it from the perspective of like in order to know it works you should get suspended yourself and then get reinstated, but…

Cynthia: No, no, no I don’t– all that we do is just give me even greater empathy for my clients, but I actually have seen hundreds of different ways to get suspended, which is I put them in my book and I talk about them, and I write about things in my blog. What happens is Amazon will, they had a huge tweak to the algorithm last spring, but since then they’ve had little tweaks every couple of weeks, and I know they have done something new, because we’ll get a rush of sellers who all look the same.

Like there was one week where we had like 5 sellers who sold pearl jewelry. [inaudible 00:07:41] we hadn’t had any jewelry in quite a while, and then all of a sudden we get 5, all for the same reason. I’m like oh tweaked the algorithm I see, and that’s how it goes, so like we had a whole bunch of people suspended for improper product review programs.

Steve: Okay, I want to touch in all this stuff eventually yeah.

Cynthia: Okay yeah. Again, it was like oh, oh Amazon has tweaked the algorithm, and so well we had had sellers all along who were getting suspended for product reviews, but when you get a bunch in a row you know that there’s something going on. So the tweaking of the algorithm as I call it is something that goes on constantly at Amazon.

Steve: One of my biggest fears is waking up one day to my Amazon account dead in the water, and so you mention a bunch of reasons so far about how you can get suspended. What are some of the things that have been happening recently on why people have been getting suspended, and I also want to touch on how you can prevent all that stuff from happening.

Cynthia: Okay, well so basically some of the things that we’ve seen just in the last few weeks is we’ve seen people getting suspended for their product review programs.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about that.

Cynthia: Yeah, so let’s start with that. What happened a few weeks ago was that sellers were getting suspended for their product review programs, and they were actually naming names in the suspension, which I have never seen before. They named AMZ Trader Tracker, anyway they named them, and the reason for the suspension. I was just shocked because I have never seen that before. Then basically what they are coming down on sellers for in this case was excessive giveaways, there was too many giveaways, and then…

Steve: What does excessive mean?

Cynthia: Well wouldn’t it be nice if they would tell us that, because here’s what we’ve discovered by trial and error, it’s less than 20%. If you are selling 100 units a day for example, you can’t give away 20 or more products a day, so this is what we’ve just learnt by trial and error. So I have my clients experimenting with between 15% and 20% to see if we can find the magic number in the algorithm, but anyway so you have to give away less than 20% of your volume of sales, and that’s…

Steve: What does that mean if you are first starting out, then you have no sales, no sales history at all?

Cynthia: Right, and that’s a different case, so what we’ve seen– we haven’t seen anybody shut down for excessive sales who is just launching a product. These are guys who have been selling this product day in and day out, months, years and they just constantly do product review giveaways, right just the concept part of the marketing campaign. Amazon knows you are going to do a big [inaudible 00:10:40] to launch a product. I don’t know where the cut off is where it stops being a launch, and starts being a pattern, do you know what I mean?

Steve: Yeah sure.

Cynthia: But I would say from what I’ve seen anyway, I think most people can feel pretty comfortable having a big push in the first month of a new product, that Amazon is not going to– as long as they see that this starts converting to real sales, they will understand what you are doing. If most of the so called sales of your product are all giveaways and it doesn’t start to shift to real sales, then they are going to say that something is wrong, like maybe your product is crappy.

I do tell people if you are going to run a product review program, make sure that it’s a comprehensive plan, don’t just rely on getting reviews on the platform, you should be trying to promote and support your product on Facebook, on Pinterest if it’s a visual product, on everything you can think of Reddit, LinkedIn. Maybe not LinkedIn but you should really look at trying to get people to write blogs about it, and just do a sort of a traditional marketing campaign around that product, and build a fun base.

I think that’s just smart anyway, because anytime you can capture someone’s email off the Amazon platform, well they are yours for life, so you can the next time you launch a product why you can market to them. This just makes sense on every level, but it is hard work and people don’t want to do it, and so some of them they just focus on, okay I’m going to save all this money into a product review program. The other reason that they get…

Steve: Would you say that these large scale review programs are pretty much dead then?

Cynthia: No, what’s happening is they are changing, so AMZ Review Tracker, for example coincidentally after that week when so many sellers were suspended changed their policy. One of the policies that they– one of the things that they were doing that Amazon came down on was what we call super URLs.

Steve: Okay right.

Cynthia: Manipulation of the platform is another reason that people were getting suspended, and that’s again where you try to force the browser experience by putting in the keywords into the URL, so they are not naturally going out to the platform and looking for your product, they are they are using specific keywords. Basically a lot of review programs have cut that out, because I think Amazon has spoken pretty clearly on that being against policy. That’s what they call manipulation of the platform.

There are other ways that people manipulate the platform, and one of them is to try to hide that the products were given away for free or for a dollar. If they don’t put the disclaimer that says, “Hey I got this product for – I did this count in exchange for an honest review,” they are not only violating Amazon’s policy, but they are violating FCC policy, and Amazon has a zero tolerance policy for this. What happens with my clients who were suspended is they have to do what I call confess and repent, and so they have to admit what they did wrong, and then they have to provide Amazon the list of the reviews that violated policy.

Steve: My goodness, okay.

Cynthia: Another violation that I see is people who do like a lot of these reviews, Facebook groups, or review programs, and I’m talking about the reviewers now. A lot of times they’ll go out and put a review up before they even receive the product, like the review will appear the next day, and that’s because they are obligated to write a review.

They are getting this product for cheap, and they are obligated to write reviews, so some of them are just highly efficient, and they just get it out there because they don’t give a crap about what they are saying. Amazon of course doesn’t like that either. I had a client recently where we had the spreadsheet, and it was just hundreds and hundreds of lines long of reviews that violate policy. Either because they were written too close to the purchase, or they didn’t use the disclaimer. And literally all those reviews are — I mean I’m talking hundreds maybe a thousand are wiped out. Because when Amazon gets that spreadsheet, they are going to remove all of them from my client’s products.

And they will most likely shut down the reviewer as well, which means they will remove all the reviews by that reviewer throughout the platform. So that means that I may wake up one day and suddenly a bunch of reviews are gone from my site. No, I’m not in trouble, but it’s because these reviewers were violating policy on somebody else’s account. So…

Steve: So what’s your policy on using review groups? Because I imagine a lot of review groups have people like this person who got banned, right? Like the reviewer I mean.

Cynthia: Yes, well and that’s the thing, so what — here is the thing. People think oh I’ll just do a group and it will be efficient and cheap and easy and all this stuff. But what you really need to do is keep track of the reviews that are written. You need to keep track of when they bought the product, when they wrote the review, if they complied with Amazon’s rules. So you still need to keep a track of it.

And I would say this for people who are doing large scale campaigns this is going to be a daily event. Where you are literally going to have to review your reviews, and then for violators go after them nicely, but immediately. And say, “Oh maybe you are thinking of a different product, because you reviewed our product and you haven’t even received it yet.” Or you have to say, “Oh I noticed that you didn’t include the disclaimer, could you please include the disclaimer.” So it becomes the seller’s job to police their own reviews. So you can’t abdicate that.

Steve: At any event that they don’t do what you are asking at least you have the record that you tried right, is that the idea?

Cynthia: Yes, and this is where it gets a little effie, because I haven’t quite figured out like what the seller should do. So let’s say that the problem is — I mean here is my belief that the seller should turn in the reviewer if they don’t comply. So if you send them a friendly email or write them a note, and they don’t comply within a couple of days, you are obligated to turn them in to Amazon.

Steve: How do you do that?

Cynthia: Basically I would either — this is another thing I haven’t quite figured out. I would probably just send them email to seller performance.

Steve: Okay that’s interesting. So you are having your clients do all these things now, like review all the reviews and proactively…

Cynthia: Well we are starting to. Right now there is nothing that makes it really easy right now. I know Seller Labs has a product that’s coming out, but they are launching very soon, which I think will really help automate this process. It will work a lot like their Feedback Genius where you will be notified when you get a product review. And you can filter it if you just want to see the negative reviews, right? Most of my clients who are running review programs; they are going to want to see all of their reviews, because again they have to check them for compliance.

This is a service that we are starting to offer our clients where we do the TDS checking everyday part, and it’s I guess in beta if you want to put it that way. But yeah it changes because now Amazon has clearly said the seller is responsible. So if the reviewer doesn’t follow the rules the seller is the one who can lose their account.

Steve: Interesting, so let’s switch gears a little bit, like so we talked about review groups and reviews. But let’s say you are not participating in review groups and you are getting your reviews kind of organically. What are some — and let’s say you are not doing anything black hat, like you are just a typical Amazon seller following the rules. What are some of the reasons that you’ve seen those types of people get banned?

Cynthia: For their review programs?

Steve: Not for review, let’s say they are not participating in review programs, they are doing everything by the book, but then one day they get banned. What are some of the common reasons for that happening?

Cynthia: Oh sure okay, so a lot of reasons why sellers have been getting suspended since last spring relate to product quality. This is the hidden metric that I talk about because there is nothing on your dashboard that measures your product quality metrics. There is nothing that says here is the acceptable number you sold as new or not as described, or not as advertised that you are allowed to have before we shut you down. So it’s really tough and that’s why we created our get clean stay clean services was to help our clients stay ahead. And we are very, very conservative because honestly it doesn’t take very many some of these for them to shut you down.

Steve: How many does it take actually; can you give me an idea?

Cynthia: I wish I could do that, because it does seem to vary, again it’s an algorithm. So it is based somewhat on how things are going in your account, and what type of claim it is. Like inauthentic, they’ll pretty much check any counterfeit, they’ll shut down your listing every complaint pretty much.

Steve: Really, so one complaint will do it?

Cynthia: For a listing yes. So for the account, for as new as we can tell it looks like you are allowed to have maybe three or four before your account goes down. So yeah there is like a zero tolerance policy about this, which is why I tell people if you get a warning from Amazon or they shut down a listing, you need to respond immediately. Even if you have no intention of selling anymore of that product, you have to respond to it as if it were a suspension, because otherwise these are going to account against you.

So a lot of my clients who were suspended for these product quality reasons, part of their problem was they just sort of let them go, right? They would look at them and they would either just stop selling that product or whatever, but they didn’t realize that this wasn’t the only warning they were going to get. And they didn’t realize that how serious Amazon takes it right.

Then here is the thing, a lot of them don’t know what it means. So if I say to you, you sold as new and you buy wholesale, they are like what you are you talking about, all my stuff is new, right? The thing is Amazon knows that, they know your stuff is new, but what they are telling you is that when the buyer opened their happy Amazon box, and looked at the product they thought it looked worn, used, abused, dirty, to one maybe the corners were crushed in.

I mean it’s hard to say, but they looked at it and it looked like something that had been sitting in garage sale somewhere versus a brand new product, right? In Amazon you can’t do like eBay where you say your new inbox, right? You can’t do that, you either is perfectly sparkly, brand new and beautiful, or its not and that’s it. Like there is no, yeah it’s all green on the outside, but it’s still new, no. You would have to say that that was used good, right? So that’s where…

Steve: So is that usually a packaging problem then for these people?

Cynthia: Yeah, it’s usually a packaging problem, it might be a shipping problem, it might be something like that. It may be weared at getting in the inventory. So I have a lot of clients who buy from liquidators, right? So obviously these products that they are buying have been sitting on various shelves for a long time. Then they get thrown into a big truck, someone buys the track load. So by the time that box gets up to Amazon it does look like it’s been around.

And it maybe still [inaudible 00:23:30] and all of that, but it doesn’t look nice. So one of the things I tell my sellers is you have to make sure that what you are sending out is pristine. You can’t just throw anyhow thing up there on Amazon and think it’s going to sell. Now if you have some mumpy bumpy dirty dusty boxes, and it’s in a category where you can sell used, then sell it as used and you will be fine.

But the other thing that’s taking down a lot of sellers, so besides the physical quality of the box, yes things like inauthentic. And well that’s really more of a policy violation than a product quality issue; they tend to go hand in hand. And a lot of times people will again open their box, and they’ll think this is a piece of crap. And they’ll think maybe it’s brutally either fake or it’s not real. So they’ll make a claim to Amazon that they are returning it, because it’s not real right, or it’s fake or whatever. And that gets sellers in trouble.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running all of my online businesses, but do you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports. So no more data entry, no more number crunching and no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. And the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Does that apply to people selling other people’s products, or does that apply to private label as well?

Cynthia: Well yeah any product. So I often have private label clients who were shocked that they are getting inauthentic claims or even counterfeit. Because they are like wait a minute, I manufacture my own, I am the manufacturer, right? How can they think this, I am the only one selling this on Amazon. But that tells them that they have a product quality problem. Like for some reason why somebody gets the box or the bottle or whatever and they think this isn’t the real thing.

And sometimes there really is a product defect. I mean I think about people who private label shampoo for example. If the formulation isn’t just right, or sometimes if the bottle isn’t sealed properly, then people are thinking, hey this is like — this has been previously opened right, because it doesn’t have the seal on the top. And technically the rule says, Amazon rule says we have to have that seal on the top of the bottle, right? It can either be around the outside, a little plastic [inaudible 00:26:45] crappy thing. Or it can be the actual cap under the cap, but we are supposed to have that.

I can’t tell you how many clients of mine have gotten in trouble with inauthentic claims or counterfeit claims. Because or even used sold as new because they didn’t have that seal. Or they were trying to just sort of seal it themselves with a piece of tape. And I thought are you insane or whatever. So again if you are going to manufacture your own, make sure that it’s properly packaged.

Steve: Does that mean that you have your clients monitor their refund reason, like if there is a refund request?

Cynthia: Yes, so these are the hidden matrix. What I tell my clients to do and what we do for them if they hire us to do this work, is we go and the first thing we look at is the imperfect orders report, which is right under the perfect orders on the dashboard basically. So if you open that page under performance, the one that has all the greens and stuff, and you go to the right hand side and go most of the way down the page, as I’m saying this is the most hidden report I have ever seen. There you’ll see this imperfect orders report.

And the reason it’s important is because this is the roadmap. I always sort if by acing so that I can understand which acings are building up problems, right? And Amazon considers imperfect anything that the client or the buyer has to contact you for. So if they email you, if they got to return/refund, if they file A to Z claim.

If they do any of those stuff it’s an imperfect order right? Because in Amazon’s world perfect is, they buy the product, they love it, you never hear from them again, right? We are all happy, and as a bonus if they leave you positive feedback or write a product review that even better, right? You get bonus points for that. So that’s where I start because that chart where you put down into a spreadsheet, it tells you where the problems are.

Like they say well okay so for this acing where I have 10 issues, I see three people left me negative feedback. Two people sent me an email, I had all these returns, and I had an A to Z claim, I’m just making that up. But then I know where to go work, because I’ll say what’s happening with this acing, why am I getting all these returns? So you really need to try to read what’s happening, right? Oh wow it looks like it’s getting torn up on its way to the buyer, right? They are getting torn packages or this or that.

Once you know what’s happening you can fix it and that’s what Amazon wants you to do, which is why I have my clients look at these reports every week. Because that way you can catch things before they get big, and before they get to Amazon’s level of attention. Now the other reports are the returns report, FBA merchant fulfilled, and of course negative feedback.

And now for my clients who are doing product review programs, they should be reviewing their product reviews if not every day at least once a week. Because again if somebody is violating policy you can let it sit up there for very long, you need to take proactive action quickly. So that’s the thing, you can’t wait and do it once a month. And by that time you will be suspended for excessive reviews, or manipulating the platform or whatever. So that’s a lot of work like…

Steve: Yeah it sounds like a lot of work.

Cynthia: Yeah, and so we try it to make it easier for our clients, but that’s what we do for a lot of our clients, and we are monitoring this for them. We are taking care of the issues. If we see a lot of a particular kind of claim on the account, we’ll tell our clients. And then one of the things that we do is we also email all of our negative returns. So everybody who returns a product for a negative reason, not a typical changed my mind, didn’t like the color. But you sell this new, inauthentic, or one of those negative reasons, we send them an email and we do this for our clients every week.

We send them an email and say, oh we are really sorry this didn’t work out for you, can you tell us what we could have done to make this a better experience. So it’s like very open ended, but and what we’ve been trying to do of course is to get real feedback that we can maybe act on and figure out why are they returning this.

Like I had a client yesterday where when we were examining why they were getting so many returns on a particular product, it was a pair of tights. And everyone was saying it was not as described, and you’re like shit, it’s pair of tights. I mean but when we looked at the listing we could see where the confusion was coming from. And it was literally a color switch on the listing.

So I said to them, you need to fix those listing before you sell anymore of these tights. And they are like, well we sell thousands of these, and we’ve only got X percentage of returns, and I said I understand that. I said if these were normal sort of defective returns, change my mind returns, I wouldn’t care. I said but they are not, these are negative returns, you have to fix these. So we had them close down their listing, and now we are working with the [inaudible 00:32:10] department to fix the listings, and then they can turn it back on again.

So that’s why I’m saying it becomes an ongoing like sloping task to try and figure out what’s really going on. I told them if you — if we can’t figure it out, you are going to need to call these guys, some of these returns. Like even though we email them, only a few will respond, you know what I mean. So I’m like you have to be more aggressive, because this is a problem and you are going to lose your ability to sell this product that you are selling thousands of every month. So like you get to smile with them my friend.

Steve: What’s the usual progression, will that listing get suspended first, or will the account get suspended?

Cynthia: Again it depends on the status of the account to begin with. So if they don’t have much going on, and this is just kind of a one off, the listing will get suspended. But here is the thing, with this particular client they already had other listings suspended for similar reasons. So I’m like you can’t afford to get anymore of these, because that’s the thing. When Amazon sees that you have several listings suspended for similar reasons, they think you are not paying attention.

And the other thing that’s hard for my clients to grasp right away, especially my high volume sellers is, if they find a problem. Like in this case it was a listing problem, and I think we should be able to get it cleaned up pretty quickly. But if they find a problem and they fix it, they have to fix it for every product they sell. Like you can’t just keep building up not as described on your products, you can’t.

Amazon is like, hey you haven’t learned anything, right? You just can’t do it as it comes up, you need to have a plan in place that you are constantly looking at your listings and making sure your products match. And then when something shows up on your report, like oh my gosh we’ve had three returns in the last 60 days for not as described. Then you can of course drill down real hard on that one, because something is going on there. But you don’t want to have — you don’t want to keep having the same problem over and over again and having get to a level where Amazon pays attention.

Steve: Will the imperfect orders report disclose most of this stuff, like you should know like way ahead of time when something wrong is potentially going to happen, right?

Cynthia: Yes, what the imperfect orders report will show you is the acings that are building up problems. So again if you see 10 imperfect orders, it doesn’t mean that they are all negative returns, it just that they are imperfect. But then it’s like a roadmap like I said then you go look at why are these product being returned. And again if they are just saying oh it wasn’t quite the shade of blue I needed, or stuff like that.

Then you are like don’t worry about it. But if you start to see — so that’s why you have to go look at your returns as well. The two reports work together, and you have to look at your negative feedback of course, we should anyway. But again there is valuable clues in there. And what people don’t realize is that Amazon, when they are searching your store or whatever for trigger words; this is what the algorithm does. It searches all your buyer messages, it searches negative feedback, it searches returns, A to Z claims, everything.

So I had a client who had a listing shut down where the buyer literally said, I know this isn’t fake, but it seems really dirty, right? I know it isn’t fake; he got shut down for counterfeit. Because the word fake was in there, in that case it was just the listing, we got it back. And we pointed out the obvious. Because again the algorithm is that’s a robot, right? It’s trained to do certain things; it’s not trained to think thoughtfully about it, like oh he said not fake.

Steve: Great, so let’s talk about that a little bit. Because I know there is a lot of – it’s a very competitive world out there, and a lot of people are doing this maliciously. So what are the things that you can do when people are purposely trying to sabotage you?

Cynthia: Dirty seller tricks? Oh my God I hate dirty seller tricks. The latest story dirty seller trick, and they do seem to go kind of into charts or waves. I don’t know if people are just picking up on these on Facebook or what. But they try to do; you do see this in waves. So the latest wave of dirty seller tricks that we’ve seen has been claims of copyright infringement, okay? So we are all familiar with the occasion of getting the Cs into Cs letter through the platform. And you always have to sit and wonder are they serious, are they real, or is this just bullshit, right? But the dirty seller trick that I am talking about is where they will actually file the claim with Amazon, which by the way means that they are singing under oath and apparently a perjury that this is true.

So I can’t believe the balls on some of these guys, but they will file this claim saying these sellers are violating my whatever. My pattern, my copyright whatever, and then of course everybody gets shut down on that listing. Or they say this guy is the only one selling on that listing right, because he is the rights holder. So then what happens is the sellers are like trying to resolve the issue with the rights holder, and the rights holder just ignores them, right? Because they know that these guys are not going to get back on the listing unless the rights holder sends an email to Amazon saying this issue has been resolved.

So this is the latest one that I have seen, it’s caused a lot of heartache. And we have been able and I’ll just say this for anyone listening out there who thinks this might be a good idea. That what we do is we get that, we reverse the tables on them. So for my clients who are willing to fight, we reverse the tables and I have got a number of sellers suspended for pulling this particular dirty seller trick. It’s against the Amazon policy, if you lie on that forum, they take it very seriously. But anyway I have just seen it over and over again over the past couple of months. And then I can say it will tie up a very lucrative acing for a long period of time.

And sometimes you have to hire a lawyer to get it, and even with a lawyer it doesn’t necessarily get resolved. Because here is the thing, if you say to Amazon oh Amazon I have tried and tried and tried to reach this guy, and he is not returning my calls and my emails. They’ll be like, oh too bad, resolve it with them, they just stay out of it, right? They are not going to get involved. So we’ve sometimes had to — our clients have had to hire attorneys and things like that to get that listing back.

So it’s worth it to them, but even my clients who just perpetuate like they are like oh, well I didn’t mean violate trademark or whatever, or I don’t want to deal with it, like I’m not making enough sales off of this to– I’ll just walk away. But again, if that company does not send the notice to Amazon saying this issue is resolved, then this black mark stays on my client’s record. It shows that he’s not resolving this issue. I have to help them somehow get Amazon to undertake their account that they did everything in their power to resolve this, and that they are no long selling the product.

You would think that an email would be enough, but it’s not. That’s where I get really angry at this particular dirty seller trick, because it costs my clients money even when they are more than willing just to walk away.

Steve: I see. When you say suspended like what is the typical reinstatement time when you are successful?

Cynthia: Okay, from the– you have 17 days once you are suspended to turn in your plan of action. I usually very much, I mean depending on when our clients come to us, it’s much faster than that. But you have 17 days. The first time you turn in something, sometimes they reinstate you right away, and you are done. It’s great. I’ve had clients reinstated in 20 minutes.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Cynthia: They are very happy. By the way this does not include last summer which was a night mare. Amazon was taking 3 weeks to get back to people. I’m talking about today. Today, ever since I would say like December, we can generally get a response within a day or two. What they’ve been doing lately is what we call the plan or the store. What happens is these guys in India, that’s what seller performance is, they have metrics as well. They have to go through 17 of these an hour, if they fall back with one every 3 minutes.

If they fall behind, what happens is they’ll start to cheat, right? Because it so fast to simply send an email back saying, it’s a form letter. Thank you very much, but we still need more information about X even though you just send them a plan of action for X. And so we recognized what this was last December, and it’s still going on.

Our clients would get frustrated. They will wonder if we knew what we were doing. I’m like, “Yes, yes it’s just the plan. Nobody has read your plan yet?” I mean, literally they have not read it. They are just cheating. They are like thanks, send them back up, thanks, send them back up. We’ll usually play that game a few times, and we’ll send it back in. We might tweak it a little bit, but we just basically keep sending it back in, and if that doesn’t work then we’ll escalate it.

Steve: What does escalation mean?

Cynthia: Well, we have other email addresses inside Amazon that kind of go above seller performance.

Steve: Interesting, and these are Amazon employees or?

Cynthia: Yeah, yeah, these are the– there is an escalation team.

Steve: Okay.

Cynthia: That’s when you are not getting satisfaction from seller support, or seller central or seller performance, seller performance. Yeah, they have bosses too. Then there’s always the ultimate last resort which is writing a Jeff Bezos letter. I always caution people that that’s a last resort, because his people can take weeks to get back to you. You don’t want that. I mean that is a last resort.

What you want is to get a faster response by working within the system, and usually if we just escalate it that usually takes care of it. My clients are like, “How do you know they are not reading it?” I say, “You will know when they read it.” It’s true, because as soon as they read it, they reinstate them. That’s the thing. Or even if they do legitimately have an additional question or something, the email you get back is very different. It’s not the [inaudible 00:44:06]. The answer to your question, this process can take anywhere from 20 minutes to a couple of weeks.

Steve: Couple of weeks? Wow, okay.

Cynthia: Depending on Amazon. That’s the thing, we’ve seen some weeks where we’ll have 10 punts going on at a time. It’s driving us crazy, our clients are going crazy, we are just like sending it back and sending it back in with an escalating and blah, blah, blah. Our process, in terms of punt escalation, Jeff letter is about a business week four, five days, five, you know again getting the answers back from them that all that can add some additional time.

All I can say to my clients who are very frustrated by this is it’s still so much better than last summer where we wouldn’t even get the first answer for three weeks. Like I said, so usually I can get people reinstated quicker in a week or two, and sometimes the same day, sometimes the same day.

Steve: I’m curious what happens to the dirty sellers that file these false claims, because Amazon usually will just ban you first right, before getting your testimony. I still really hope that these malicious sellers are getting punished. Do you have any insight into that?

Cynthia: Yes, they are if they work with me, because first we get our clients reinstated. Then, we go after the dirty seller and we file a policy violation against them. That’s the thing, and I’m really good at writing policy violations.

Steve: What does that entail exactly?

Cynthia: If you go into seller central help, and you go to that page where it’s like why are you contacting us basically? There’s like another and under there you can file a policy violation against another seller. And so what I usually do is I keep it very factual. I ask Amazon to look into it, and to help us and…

Steve: Will you say that this seller purposely did this or like– I’m just kind of curious like how you word it in such a way even if you don’t have like all the evidence, right?

Cynthia: Right. A lot of times we won’t. That’s exactly what we say is that we don’t have the ability to investigate this, but you do, because Amazon knows everything that happens on their platform. So what we will just do is we’ll put the case before them, and will say it is our suspicion or our belief that this seller never intended to respond, or never intended to work with us to resolve this issue, and that it was in fact a tactic to kick competition off this listing.

Then you always have to put it in terms of the buyer experience, which diminishes the buyer experience by limiting choice and also raises the price and– I’ve said different things like that. But basically you’re always going to put it out there why this impacts the buyer.

Steve: Got it.

Cynthia: Not, “Those guys we hate them. They are mean.” You can’t do that. You have to really focus on why this is against Amazon policy, and why it affects the buyer. Another dirty seller trick that I see a lot is someone will buy a bunch of your product, and you are like, “Yeey, I’m in the money.” Then they will return all of them on the same day, and they will have a negative reason for returning them. And so because the part of what the algorithm looks at is velocity.

If they suddenly– if you’re one person who bought 10 units, but if they see 10 units coming back on the same day, they go into danger mode. Like, the algorithm freaks out, and you can get suspended just because there’s velocity on that acing. Like that acing might get immediately suspended. That’s a dirty seller trick that they do. So you can explain to them, no, it’s just one order.

Again, when– you know one order, 10 items. This is a trick. If you see it once, you know. If you see it a couple of times, two or three times, and it starts to look like a pattern, that’s a dirty seller trick, and that’s where you need to go and report it to Amazon, and you can say, “It is our belief that they never intended to keep this purchase, but it was bought specifically for the purpose of damaging our metrics. Because they straw our purchase,” and things like that. That works really well.

Steve: It does, interesting.

Cynthia: Oh yeah.

Steve: Even if they just wrote to– like if I was doing this intelligently I will just have different people do this, right?

Cynthia: Yes, and that’s why it gets harder to detect. But again, if you haven’t gone along selling, selling, selling, and then all of a sudden you get a bunch of attacks. I have a client this has happened to where his competitor thought they were very clever, because they were having people buy from all across the country and do this. Now you may think, how did he know that they were working together? Well because in this case they were really stupid. All of them used the exact same language, I mean exact.

It was honestly cut and paste including typos, and they used the exact same picture. That never happens. You know what I’m saying? Like they didn’t even take their own picture of the product. And then the picture that they took of the product wasn’t even of the product that they purchased. It was a related product. This was just a bungled job. In that case it was pretty easy to prove, but again, if you see a pattern, you can say to Amazon who loves patterns. “We’ve seen this pattern and we’re wondering if perhaps this might be going on. Could you please look into it?” What Amazon will do is if it’s a really strong case, they’ll take you down. But maybe it’s not very strong, maybe it’s a [inaudible 00:50:29], and then they’ll send you a warning.

You may wonder how do I know this? I have had clients who’ve had this warning in their performance notifications. I said, “What the hell! You want me to represent you and you do dirty seller tricks.” We had to have a little conversation first. That’s– anyway, I know that Amazon does this. They even punish buyers by the way. People don’t realize this, but we saw a rush of buyers losing their buying accounts. And when you lose your buyer account, if you are also a seller, you lose that as well.

Steve: Nice.

Cynthia: This is for all the people who abuse Amazon’s returns policy, and they have too many returns. In case you are wondering how many returns you are allowed, by the way these are free returns. If you are paying for the returns, you can have as many as you like. But if you are claiming a reason always just so you can get the free return, beware because it’s a very limited amount. Again when Amazon sees velocity, they see that it’s a habit.

I mean if you have one free return a year, you are going to be fine. But if you are having one every month, you are out of there. And they are not going to wait for you to use up all your free returns. Basically what I heard which is only hearsay, but I heard that you get like 26 in a lifetime, 26 free returns. After that, that’s it. You don’t get anymore.

Like I said though, if you were getting one a year, and you were buying lots of other products and not returning it or paying for the return, then they are not going to like kick you off once you have 26 years from now. But if they see there’s a pattern that is theft.

Steve: Is it a violation to leave a review without a disclaimer as a buyer? Or is that the seller’s responsibility?

Cynthia: The seller is held responsible. The buyer is also responsible. And so again what will usually happen is you will get the warning from Amazon saying, “Okay now look, you need to do this disclaimer as an FCC regulation blah, blah, blah. You get one chance, and that’s it.” That’s why with all these most review programs, they are very good about telling their people that they have to do the disclaimer. But what they are not good at is policing it. They may say, don’t forget the disclaimer, but they are not out there really checking these reviews to make sure that they are.

Steve: Well, that takes a lot of work.

Cynthia: Yeah. And I’m saying most of these programs, because some of them actually do. Some of them, so if you are looking at a product review program, that would be one thing to look for to see if they actually police the reviews, and make sure that they do leave the disclaimer.

Steve: Okay, hey Cynthia, we’ve been chatting for a while, and I have to be honest with you, after talking with you, I don’t feel as comfortable selling on Amazon.

Cynthia: Well, that’s because I showed you a bunch of stuff you didn’t know. And so it’s scary, because now you are asking yourself what else don’t I know.

Steve: That’s correct. Yes absolutely.

Cynthia: Yeah, actually you know a lot, and that’s why I want to tell you and anybody listening to this is you now know a lot that you can do to protect yourself. My hope is now that you’ve been forewarned, you are forewarned, and you will never have to hire me professionally.

Steve: Incidentally, a lot of what we have talked about today is actually in Cynthia’s book and she covers all this stuff in a lot more depth in her suspension prevention book. Cynthia, I learned a lot just from talking to you today. Where can people find you should they need these services that you offer?

Cynthia: I have 2 websites. One is very simply suspensionprevention.com. That’s focused on obviously my reinstatement services. Then I have a blog onlinesalesstepbystep.com. And by the way in my blog, a couple of times a month I’m writing on this topic constantly. It’s a good place to just sort of check out what’s new and what’s going on. Those are my two websites and both of those sites which I’m in the process of sort of merging. In both those sites is you can find our services there. You can sign up online to get started with us.

Steve: Okay, and then if you end up finding that your account is suspended at like 5:30 am, I will be posting Cynthia’s cell phone number in case you are desperate.

Cynthia: No. I was telling Steve earlier, I had to buy, not buy; I got an app for my phone that turns off all the sounds between certain hours just so I wouldn’t hear all the middle of the night texts and phone calls coming in from my clients and prospects, because I need my sleep.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. I can imagine that the people calling you are probably quite desperate and in great need of help.

Cynthia: Yes definitely.

Steve: All right Cynthia. Thanks a lot for coming on the show. This was great. I’m sure everyone is going to love it, thank you.

Cynthia: Thanks for having me. Bye.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Amazon is getting more and more cut throat every year. With other people trying to sabotage your listings and Amazon constantly changing the rules, you really have to monitor your account in order to make sure you are obeying their terms of service. If you ever get suspended, make sure you call Cynthia Stine.

For more information about this episode, go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode124. If you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show. Please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course immediately via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

123: How To Raise 9.1 Million Dollars On KickStarter With Zach Smith Of Funded Today

123: How To Raise 9.1 Million Dollars On KickStarter With Zach Smith Of Funded Today

Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show, Zach Smith. Zach is the founder of a company called Funded Today and he’s helped hundreds of startups achieve success with their crowd funding campaigns.

For example, he helped raise over 9.1 million to launch the popular travel jacket from Baubax. And chances are if you are on Facebook, you probably saw an ad for it because it was a pretty cool product.

In fact, this jacket became the most funded clothing project in the history of crowdfunding and one of the top 5 most successful Kickstarters of all time.

Zach is a real down to earth and easy going guy and today he’s going to teach us the secret to launching a successful crowdfunding campaign.

What You’ll Learn

  • Zach’s motivations for starting his business.
  • How much impact an agency like Funded Today can have on a campaign versus doing it yourself.
  • How to launch a successful Kickstarter
  • How to generate buzz for a kickstarter.
  • Why Zach is able to scale a campaign so incredibly well.
  • How to develop a large audience and reach many people.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes. And if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show, Zack Smith. Now, Zack is the founder of a company called Funded Today and he’s helped hundreds of startups achieve success with their crowdfunding campaigns. For example he’s helped raise over $9.1M to launch the popular travel jacket from Baubax. Chances are if you are on Facebook you probably saw an ad for this jacket because it was a pretty cool product. In fact this jacket became the most funded clothing project in the history of crowdfunding and one of the top 5 most successful Kickstarters of all time.

Anyway, I met Zack at the import summit last year as we were both speakers. He’s a real down to earth and easy going guy. Today he’s going to teach us the secrets to launching a successful crowdfunding campaign. And with that, welcome to the show Zack. How are you doing today man?

Zack: I’m doing very well Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, give us a quick background story about how you started Funded Today and how you came up with the idea in the first place.

Zack: Yeah, I came home from serving in an LDS church mission and a guy that I knew had been very successful during that time. He was working in the investment industry and I said, “Hey can I come and mess around with you and just see what you are doing.” He said, “Sure.” And he took me under his wings. This was about a decade ago.

I started seeing what he did. He got excited about some of the stuff that I was able to do, because I was like a go getter hustling type of entrepreneur. He said let’s start a side business together and we did. That business became very successful, and we ultimately sold it a few years later. I took what I learnt from that and applied it as a business consultant.

As a business consultant I basically was doing internet marketing related strategies for all kinds of different clients all over the world. Well, one particular client who happened to live where I am from in [inaudible 00:03:02] in Utah area, said, “We can’t afford your rates but there’s thing called crowdfunding, Kickstarter.” Then he goes, “Have you heard of it?” Now at the time I actually hadn’t. They said, “Well how about we do this, we’ll pay you a percentage of all the money you raise and we’ll launch our new project,” it was called the RooSport 2.0, if you want to look it up, “We’ll launch our new project on Kickstarter and we’ll give you a percentage on it.” I said, “All right.” I was in a pretty good financial position at the time. I said, “Let’s try it out.” I did.

In the next 30 days, we raised $115,000 for a project that wasn’t even raising $2,000 a month on their website before hand. It changed these people’s lives. Now they have a multimillion dollar business that’s done really well. That story spread because everybody saw this little RooSport running wallet take off and raise six figures in 30 days on a crowdfunding site and a lot of people wanted to know how they did it. From there, Funded Today was born. We suddenly had 10, 20, 30 people and we selectively picked those clients out and we continued to raise that money. Then as you mentioned in the introduction, we raised money for the Baubax travel jacket, contributing nearly $5M of his $9.1M raise. The rest is history.

Now everybody’s heard about Funded Today. If they are crowdfunding a project, chances are they probably have heard of Funded Today or are working with Funded Today. We had a joke last year that if you had a project that raised more than a million dollars on Kickstarter chances are Funded Today was the company behind it. It was almost true, like literally 90% of the campaigns that did really were on Kickstarter; Funded Today was the driving force behind that success.

Steve: Dude that’s awesome. That first project, did you front the money yourself for all of the promotion?

Zack: That’s right, and we continue to do that for the most part. If your campaign meets our marketing success criteria we front all of the costs. We act as a mini-bank or a mini-lender. In fact I was speaking at the Utah Crowdfunding Conference yesterday and a lot of people talked about how they don’t have money and that’s why they go to crowdfunding.

If you don’t have money in your campaign successful meaning it’s raising money as a good positive ROI, you need to spend money. You should raise as much money as possible on your Kickstarter or Indiegogo campaign is live but if you only have ten grand, or 20 grand in your name, you might spend that in a couple days and you might raise $40,000 $50,000 $60,000 $100,000 $200,000 on that spend but now you have no money to spend and you have a successful campaign. That’s where Funded Today comes in. We can front millions of dollars with our essentially unlimited lines of credit for clients to raise them as much money as possible during that crucial window of crowdfunding.

Steve: So can you comment on some of the impacts you’ve had on some of your campaigns of them doing it themselves versus when you stepped in.

Zack: Yeah, I would say, and it’s becoming less and less likely probably 60% of the campaigns Funded Today works with have already started to raise money. Baubax travel jacket is a great example. He’d raised $4.5M or so when he hired Funded Today. But he was stalling, he was slowing down and he wasn’t making any money on the money he was spending.

He was making money on PR, on media and things like that but when he was actually spending money to make money on channels like twitter and Pinterest and Instagram and Facebook, he was losing money. He told me actually in a text message a couple … Because I’ve always been telling people it was $60,000. He’s like, “No I actually spent $150,000 to raise $150,000.” Basically he’d spend a dollar and make a dollar and that’s not profitable at all because you’ve got your cost to get sold and Kickstarter fees and other fees.

He hired us and obviously the rest is history. We were able to turn it profitable for him and for our company. I’d say a lot of people raise money and then they reach a trough, they reach a value. It’s peak and troughs. It’s a huge spike at the first and then a plateau or deadness. We come on and we revive those campaigns or amplify efforts from existing successful campaigns. That being said, we’ve had a lot of success with prelaunch now meaning we work with people right from the beginning. We’ve had even success where we had a campaign called Freewaves out of Orlando Florida.

Another one of our very first campaigns we run, they hired us with only 100 hours left and we were able to save that campaign. With a $300,000 goal we raised them closed to $200,000 in the remaining hours of their campaign because Kickstarter’s all or nothing funding mean if you don’t raise all the money that you set your goal for you don’t get any of it and they had only raised a $100,000 or $200,000 and they had a $300,000 goal.

They had to raise 100,000 more in the just the last 4, 5 days of their campaign. We took a risk on that one and we were able to be successful because they had moderate success before us. I mean a $100,000 is nothing to be ashamed of. Crowdfunding, they just didn’t have the right marketing in place to match the great product that they had and that’s where Funded Today came in to save the day.

Steve: That implies that a Kickstarter, a successful Kickstarter, is a lot to do with your own personal marketing as opposed to just kind of relying on Kickstarter’s exposure. Is that accurate?

Zack: That’s so true. I’d say 5 years ago, and this is an anecdotal story. I had a friend named Ryan Crabtree, everybody’s probably heard of the crabby wallet if you are a Kickstarter or a crowdfunding guru. One of the first campaigns that did really, really well for wallets, raised $325,000. To this day, if you talk to Ryan and I’ve got this because he came over to my home and chatted for a couple of hours. Literally he said he did nothing to raise that $325,000 and he showed me his dashboard. I’ve seen all the traffic and referral resources. Literally, it’s all just Kickstarter.

That was 5 years ago, 4 years ago, I forget how long but several years ago. Nowadays if you put your campaign on Kickstarter even if it’s a Baubax travel jacket quality, you probably won’t raise very much money if any if you don’t have the right marketing to match the great product. It’s just not that way anymore.

Steve: Okay, that’s interesting then. If you go just based on that, and it’s all your own personal stuff, why even bother going with the Kickstarter, why not just set up your own landing page and get leads and pre-orders that way?

Zack: Another great question because the power of the crowd is actually still there. The key is, Kickstarter is a paradoxical vehicle in the sense that you might set a goal of $10,000 but until you hit that goal of $10,000, the crowd doesn’t necessarily consider it successful. By leveraging your friends and family, we call the triple F, friends, family and fools. People who back your project before you launch, you’ll get a little bit of a kick from Kickstarter organically. If your project resonates with that it will stay in the top. Kickstarter has an algorithm for popularity and based upon the total number of pledges you have, and the duration those pledges came in, and the intensity propensity those pledges have, your campaign will stay popular.

The number is getting higher but I’d say, 200 or 250 backers, if you can get those backers within the first 8 hours of your campaign, you might be one of the most popular projects on all of Kickstarter. One of the most popular projects in all of Kickstarter that’s suddenly put your project in front of millions of people. Those millions of people you are not going to be getting anywhere else. That’s the power the Kickstarter still has and that’s the power of crowdfunding.

Steve: Okay, you just had to reach that certain threshold until it goes viral essentially.

Zack: Correct. Now if your project is one of those projects that doesn’t last or maybe it lasts a little bit but keeps bouncing around and maybe it doesn’t stay top 50 on Kickstarter, that’s where you need to create a sort of consistency. Consistency is best achieved through paid media. Paid media means spending money to make money. That way you can generate the consistency necessary to stay in the top of Kickstarter and then harvest those people organically who are visiting Kickstarter every single day.

Steve: Okay, I read some articles about Funded Today and how you are able to reach billions of people to get the word out on campaigns, and I was just curious what percentage of that is paid ads versus like your own audience and versus your own list?

Zach: It’s becoming more and more our own internal list because at Funded Today we believe it’s best to own everything you possibly can. I’d say 2 years ago, it was more spending money to make money. Now we have a cash back program that’s really cool, that we have thousands of people a part of. We have audiences that are segmented and audiences, perhaps in our emailing list.

We have audiences that are segmented in terms of a wallet, in terms of a watch, in terms of travel, in terms of luggage, in terms of shoes, socks, clothes, boots, pretty much you name it. With the exception being video gaming, board games which are a huge part on Kickstarter and crowdfunding. We have access to more people interested in those sorts of products than any other company in the world. Probably than anybody in the whole world.

Steve: Okay, this is just something you developed over time, right?

Zach: Yap, that’s right.

Steve: Okay, and do you have remarketing pixels segmentation also?

Zach: Oh yeah.

Steve: Okay, so is it mainly Facebook or do you use AdWords and some of the other advertising platforms as well?

Zach: AdWords, the short answer is anywhere we spend money, we … Anywhere we spend money and it’s generating a positive ROI or at least break even for us but making money for the clients, then we spend money. That depends on every single campaign; we’ve had a lot of success on Pinterest believe it or not, for campaigns that are really visual.

We’ve had a lot of success on Instagram. In fact we just got done raising money for a guy named Joseph May for a Breton backpack, and his Breton briefcase backpack raised $250,000. A lot of that was actually from Instagram. It really resonated well with that crowd, but yeah we absolutely spent a lot of money on Facebook as well.

Steve: Was that on Instagram ads or do you just have a very strong Instagram account?

Zach: We have Instagram ads and then we have an influencer network. Meaning famous people, A B C D list celebrities, a lot of B and C meaning their borderline becoming mainstream famous but they are really internet famous. They’ll post for campaigns in exchange for either cash, the product, et cetera, and they’re part of Funded Today’s Cashback Network. They post for our campaigns, the campaigns that resonate with their brand, in exchange for some kickbacks.

Steve: Okay. Let’s say I’m just a regular Joe schmo. I want to do a Kickstarter; can you walk me through the process and best practices on how to raise the most money?

Zach: Yeah. The first thing you want to do is have a long-term vision in mind. I believe you can launch really quickly and that’s what I love about Kickstarter but I’d say you want to give yourself 90 to 120 days. You have the idea in your head, okay. Now what do I do? Hopefully we’re talking about you already have a product, is that what we bare assuming, you already have something you want to launch?

Steve: Yeah, is it necessary to have a prototype first of all?

Zach: Kickstarter, I feel like validates you more and wants to give you more love when they know you have something. That being said and again I don’t know if the rules have changed recently because I do feel like they’re gaining more and more strict in terms of prototypes and for good reason. Look at Coolest Cooler, they haven’t shipped still, but if you don’t have a prototype you can likely launch it, if not on Kickstarter, for sure on Indiegogo.

I personally like to see most of my clients with prototypes, and here’s why, you can ship those prototypes back and forth to all the different media and journalists and do PR tours before for prelaunch. Getting all these people excited about it and then they’ll post for you through embargo press the day you launch.

Steve: Okay, let’s assume we have a prototype then.

Zach: Okay, you have a prototype. Let’s say you are 120 days out. The first thing you want to do is you want to go on a media tour, and a media tour, you can do this by yourself or you can do this with an agency. We like to do a little bit internal and a little bit that we outsource, but the thing is about press it’s very political, it’s very much about who you know, and it’s very much about diversifying. A lot of people are like, “I love PRmediaNow or I love Proper Propaganda.”

Those are both pretty good firms, the issue is they may or may not work for you. Press has hit a mess and that’s why Funded Today doesn’t rely on press but if you’re going prelaunch, it make sense to get as many press people involved because they might know somebody at The Wall Street Journal and he might know somebody at the New York Times, and someone might know somebody at TechCrunch. If you have all these people helping on your campaign between then all, you actually might land a lot of press, but if you just …

Steve: If you know nobody then is there a particular strategy? Would you recommend hiring someone or what would you do?

Zach: If you know nobody and you have 120 days before your launch, why not spend the first month trying to figure out how to get press for yourself. Journalists love somebody that’s really passionate about their brand. It’s like the entrepreneur story; we even talked about with our paid media advertising. A lot of our advertisements we call them hero shots or founder shots or product shots and it’s basically if you invented a watch, it would be you wearing the watch, smiling looking at the camera or something. We find those do really well because people are like, “Oh look, this guy invented the watch and here’s a picture and here’s him.”

The same philosophy or behavioral psychology works with press as well. If they see that you are the one passionate about your product and you are then one literally emailing and trying to win a press, I think they resonate with that better sometimes than even having an agency. That being said, agencies sometimes have relationships, they don’t care about the, “Oh he’s the founder, he’s whatever.” They won’t necessarily give that more press events, they might just be like, “Oh yeah I know this guy, I’m going to post for this guy because we have such and such a relationship.”

Steve: Okay, in the very beginning, did you just go through and find names of editors who write about this stuff and just cold contact them?

Zach: That’s right yeah. I developed templates, I developed follow up. One of the best tricks and I teach this to every single person that works for our company is, “Hey just following up” I send them an email, a really good pitch on whatever the product might be, and then I wait 24 hours and if they haven’t said anything, “Hey John, hey Steve, hey Bill.” Whatever the name is, “Just following up.” That’s all I say.

You’d be surprised what the just following up email does, “Oh hey sorry I missed that, now I got to [inaudible 00:15:52]. It makes you look like a real person, it makes you look genuine, it makes you look like you are passionate about your product, and it makes it look like you weren’t just sending millions of people a pitch email. That you are actually passionate about following up and getting in touch with somebody who can help to write about your product.

Steve: Okay, sounds good, sounds good. Do you use any software to do this or is it just use a calendar?

Zach: We originally had Cision, we originally had Meltwater and these are big. I think they are the best types of PR media software you can have. It basically keeps an updated database of everything, but once you use those for a while, you have all the contacts and it doesn’t make sense to continue. At this point we have thousands and thousands of names, emails, phone numbers of pretty much anybody who’s ever written about crowdfunding. Our database is very extensive in the sense of who we know and our relationships are a lot better too with a lot of the journals and press that we work with.

Steve: Okay, let’s you’ve gone around; you’ve got a couple of press people on your side, what’s the next step?

Zach: The next step is to be very clear about your launch date. You want to make sure the press know to write about you on … Let’s say you are launching on today, today at 5 o’clock PM. I would like you to drop an article anytime within the first 24 hours after Friday April 29th at 5 o’clock PM Mountain Standard Time. Can I embargo you to do that for me Steve?

Steve: Okay.

Zach: Yes great, okay great. Here’s a couple of things, here’s a couple of images, here’s our media kit, here’s a few things I think you should see. Make sure your use this link, make sure you give them a link to your Kickstarter page because you’d be surprised how many times you get big press and they don’t include a link. It’s just devastating if they don’t link out to your project because now you get all these press and exposure from a huge site, even like The Wall Street journal and they don’t link to it. You get 500 clicks and you are like, “Oh my Gosh, I have only 500 clicks form The Wall Street journal. Well, it’s because they didn’t put a link into your article.

That’s the most important thing you can do with the press, is make sure you coach them, because for some reason it seems like either they know not to do that or they don’t like linking traffic. Whatever their strategy is, they don’t like to include a link and make sure you get that in writing that they’re going to put a link in it. Give them a link to write.

If your campaign hasn’t launched yet, one thing people don’t know and this is just a little bit of inside information, you can use the preview link on Kickstarter and that will transition into the real link. You’re like, “What’s my link, what link should I give them?” Just give them your preview link, and then that preview link will transition into the full link once your campaign goes live so you won’t have to be scrambling last minute to give all your press and journalists a link.

Steve: You mentioned media kit, what goes in that?

Zach: Media kit is your hero shots, your images of your product, a media PR, a press release, a contact information, you’re …

Steve: Okay, that includes videos of the product and stuff … ?

Zach: For sure.

Steve: Okay.

Zach: Whatever you want to say and I can give some example of some media kits as well if you want those after.

Steve: Yeah absolutely I will link to those. Cool, we got that set up, we’ve launched our campaign, we got some initial press, then what?

Zach: The other thing I would do if you haven’t and we’re still talking maybe, 90 days out now. You’ve got your press embargo, you got all that lined up. Start networking with other people that ran Kickstarter campaigns. Let’s say I’m running a boot campaign for some really nice high-end fashionable boots. Let’s say you are a person who launched a sock campaign that had 5000 backers a year ago.

“Hey Steve, I’m launching this boot campaign and I fell like your socks are their perfect compliment, would you mind if I linked out to your socks, like a week or 2 in? I’ve already got X and X and X lined up for press, I’m probably going to have thousands of backers here within a week or 2. So 2 or 3 weeks into my campaign, I promise I’m going to tell all my backers about your boots which will give you all kinds of traffic to your website since you probably are not making as much money anymore on your boots because you are not on Kickstarter anymore.

In exchange for that I’m launching on at 5 o’clock PM on April 29th, wondering if you might tell your 5000 backers about these awesome boots I’m making. Do you think that’ll be a good compliment?” “Yeah, I’d love that” “Okay great. I agree to post for you on May 17th at 8 AM to my list of X number of backers at that time.” Do that with 100 people …

Steve: Just good old standard legwork marketing.

Zach: Yap, You’ll be surprised what that does and to give you a hint what those does, I raised $126,000 in less than 48 hours for the Perch. Which is now called the UVO laptop stand. We did this also with The Greatest Pants, McMacular, that’s on right now, raised them quite a bit of money. We did this with the Edge Desk. The guy that was the main marketer behind Furby and Cabbage Patch dolls, and that campaign raised hundreds of thousands of dollars as well. Those are just three examples. We do this every single time we have a good product launch lined up. One of the ones that comes to mind…

Steve: Just as an example since I actually know the McMacular guys. For their pants, who did you reach out to complement their Kickstarter?

Zack: That’s the advantage of Funded Today again not tooting my own horn so much here. We have literally probably 1000 people now that have thousands and thousands of backers that are part of Funded Today’s Network. Basically they are contractually incentivized to post for projects because that’s how they got their initial kick. “Hey, to pay it forward. We helped you raise money 5 months ago. Now it’s your turn to help this person raise money.”

We have lots of people that do that. You can see the spike on McMacular if you look at the graph. Some of the better spikes are Edge Desk or UVO, the purchased laptop stands. It just depends on how much pre-launch is in place. Plug Phones is another good example that’s live on Kickstarter right now that Funded Today started with from the beginning.

Steve: If you don’t have your network, it’s just that your ability to cold call and convince these people, incentivize them to just help, right?

Zack: Exactly. It’s about good old fashion hustle.

Steve: Got it.

Zack: It works really well so you should always do that because otherwise, how are you going to build your email list? You don’t have money to build an email list. You don’t have any connections. It’s just about building those connections and helping people see the value of your product and leveraging as much as you possibly can to get people excited to help you out down the road because you might not have much to offer until then.

Steve: At this time, are you also reaching out to bloggers and influencers as well?

Zack: Yeah. That would be the same part of media tour. I was talking bigger names like Wall Street Journal, TechCrunch, Mashable, but absolutely reach out to smaller sized blogs. Even a blog like yours which is a great size blog might be a good person to reach out to for a particular type of crowdfunding campaign.

Steve: Do you have to give away the product typically do you find?

Zack: It just depends on what the person wants. I’m all about trying to find the right angle and right pitch to make people want to do it for the good of the person or the good of the entrepreneur just because they love the product. Sometimes the initial pitch will be more philanthropical, but then they’ll come back with, “Yeah. I’d love to do that, but can I get the wallet too?” “Yeah, sure I can give you.” You know what I mean? That kind of thing.

Steve: Sure.

Zack: Then you are getting a lot of value for somebody posting for you or write an article about you for very little cost to yourself.

Steve: I was just wondering if you could share some techniques to get a person’s attention in the first place, because I get pitches all the time and most of them are bad.

Zack: What pitch has resonated with you? Do you ever have somebody where you are like, “You know what, that’s actually good. That resonated with me.”

Steve: Usually it’s much more personal where they actually know a lot about me.

Zack: I love that.

Steve: To start with. Then they’ll quote something that they like and what not. It’s just very subtle.

Zack: You are so true. We definitely have a formula for exactly what you described. When I was on Andrew Warner’s Mixergy, I talked about that as well where basically, how to resonate with someone? It really is getting to know what they write about, what they’ve said. Show something that you’ve read from theirs a year ago and then quote something that they wrote a week or two ago.

Maybe in that first pitch you’ll say, “Hey. I just wanted to hi. Let me know if there is anything I can do to help.” Then maybe wait another week and say, “Hey. I just want to follow up. Loved the article you wrote this week. By the way, my name is Zach Smith. I’m launching this product called the Edge Desk and so and so about it. I think it might be a good fit, but I’m not quite sure. Wonder if we might chat about it for two or three minutes? You got a second.”

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously, keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory costs are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down. Here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, Big Commerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is signup and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you got to Bench.co/Mywifequiteherjob. Once again that’s Bench.co/Mywifequiteherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve : You know actually, come to think of it now the people that have resonated with me the most don’t go for the kill in the first email. It’s a gradual thing over several weeks so to speak.

Zack: Exactly. It really is about … Maybe they’ll even know that you’re trying to get something, but you got to just be patient. In life you can get everything you want, but you got to realize it doesn’t all come immediately even though we are kind of more entitlement, gratuitous generation. If you’re just a little more patient, you’ll find that you resonate with somebody way more than everybody else because like, “Yeah. This guy emails me every single week, but I can’t see what he is up to. Who is he? I kind of know what he’s doing here, but man, why doesn’t he ask me?”

Steve: “It’s this dude in Utah, he won’t stop emailing me.”

Zack: We joke about it at Funded Today. If you ever want to get hired at our company, persistence is key. We’ll literally ignore your first 4, 5 emails if you’re trying to get a job with us because we want to see how much you’ll hustle because we know how hard it is to get press. We know how hard it is to get outreach. We know how hard it is to lineup people to do things. If you can’t stay persistence with us, we don’t want you working with us.

Steve: That’s why you did not answer me at first.

Zack: I’m sorry. It just shows, Steve … This shows how persistence he is.

Steve: Who’s that annoying Chinese guy who keeps … We got press. We’re doing some legwork here to get some people to help promote. What else do you guys do?

Zack: Once you have all of that lined up, now it comes time for product validation. Product validation happens whether or not your meet our marketing success criteria. That’s essentially the first 1 to 7 days of your campaign where we are running paid media, testing, using statistical significance and P values to figure out what audience is going to resonate? What demographic is good for your product? How much we can project that we’ll make across the life of the campaign. Essentially we’ll stop all efforts and we’ll walk away from a campaign if we can’t achieve a statically significant long term projection for a campaign meaning it is not all the way positive for our company.

We’ll walk away from a campaign and say, “This is probably a product you should abandon. This is a product you should pivot upon and here are the reasons we think and here are the things that we are finding from everybody based upon the feedback and surveys and all the stuff that we are doing, or this is a product you need to walk away from. This isn’t a good idea and the market place has spoken.”

Steve: It’d be nice to figure out before the price campaign and all that stuff, right?

Zack: A lot of campaigns … Like I said, with 60% of our campaigns, we are not doing all the stuff I talked about. If we were to do the pre-launch for your campaign. This isn’t something we would do for everybody. You’re going through a 21 point checklist to see if you qualify based upon everything we’ve learned. We might still be wronger. If we are wronger, it sucks. We’ve only been wrong once where we picked something pre-launch and it wasn’t successful. Everything else we picked pre-launch has raised 6 figures or more, most of the time high multiple 6 figures.

If we are wrong on a pre-launch value, you’re absolutely right. That’s why we love the product validation so much, but we have to take plans on pre-launch now because some of them have really good ideas that are based upon the successes that we have had on past campaigns. We can leverage a lot of the data and information that we know that work for another campaign and reasonably project that it will do well as well.

Steve: Walk me through this validation process.

Zack: Again, are you a pre-launch campaign? Are you a campaign that’s already launched?

Steve: Let’s do a pre-launch. Let’s do it as if you were doing it from scratch yourself?

Zack: Let’s say you’ve got something like Baubax travel jackets since we used that an example. The differencing point with yours its features are different. It’s the same kind of thing, but it’s a Baubax travel jacket, but it’s got different features. We’d immediately probably say that’s successful for us. Here is why. We have all the information and everything we did to raise the $9.1M for the Baubax travel jacket. That’s a gimme. You have something like that, we’ll probably …

Steve: Let’s get something that’s not necessary gimme. I just want to know how you run your Facebook ads to get these metrics.

Zack: Because we have more information and more Intel on nearly every single segment that’s ever been ran on Kickstarter so whether it’s pants, shoes, luggage, wallets, watches. I’m just trying to think of some random things … 3D printers. What else have we raised money for on Kickstarter?

Steve: You know what I’m getting at. Let’s say its fully different thing that you’d never had of like some random gadget and you want to get an idea if whether it’s going to work or not. You mention you run Facebook campaigns and based on those metrics you can determine and project what you think it’s going to make. I just want you to walk me through that process.

Zack: This is a person with no assets of their own.

Steve: With no assets of their own. Let’s say they have enough money to run Facebook campaigns. I want you to do it as if you were you with unlimited resources.

Zack: Let’s see.

Steve: Would you put together like a Facebook ad campaign and just target a whole bunch of different interest groups?

Zach: If I don’t have any resources at first, I’m going to struggle. The first thing you want to do is you want to contact a campaign that is somehow similar. Let’s just use the boots and soccer analogy again. Even though it might be something completely different, but I’m sure if it’s completely different, there is something similar that has been crowdfunded before that you can reference. That’s what you want to do. In fact a great example right now is our client Bryce Fisher. He has a company called Raveon, and Raveon raised millions of dollars for their heated jacket.

Right now they are running a second campaign, they have already fulfilled on the first one, and he’s done really well. In fact he got it funded within the first 24 hours. This is all him too. We are not even working on the second campaign yet. We will be working on it in a few more weeks, but he did exactly what I’m going to describe. He looked at his existing list of Raveon backers, and that’s how he began to run, targeting on Reddit, Instagram, Pinterest and Facebook.

He actually, because he thought, and this is an outdoor product, this is a sleeping bag, a heated sleeping bag. It’s similar but is different enough. He found that his list of Raveon backers. All the, they called it a lookalike audience on Facebook, if you want to talk about Facebook specifically. He found that actually, his Raveon backers were more fashionistas, more fashionable people, more not outdoorsy type, and they didn’t convert well.

His strategy is exactly what you want to do. Let’s say you are not Bryce, let’s say you don’t have a past campaign. You reach out to someone like Bryce, and you say, “Hey Bryce, I got this heated sleeping bag thing, I don’t think it’d going to compete with you, but I think your list of people would be the ideal fit. Would you mind letting me create a pixel, or create an audience.

I mean you don’t have to give me the names; you don’t have to do anything like that. I promise I will never email, I will never sell, I will never do anything.” And make sure where you live up to your word there because you’re getting into some crazy stuff there. “If you do that for me, I will do whatever.” You know, whatever you want me to do for me, buy him lunch, give him money, whatever works.

Then you use that list of people to start your initial targeting, that’s how I do it. Otherwise if you are just trying to randomly figure out what’s going to work, I don’t really think you are going to be able to make Facebook or Instagram or Pinterest. I know you won’t because we have never been able to make it work very well. You have to have an existing list of people that have backed something similar in order to be successful on paid media.

Steve: Okay, did you have a chicken and egg problem for some of your first campaigns in that respect?

Zach: That’s a great question. I had an advantage because of my 10 years of business consulting. I had access for the real sport. I had access to email list, lookalikes and audiences that I could start with to build out additional audiences, in skill and find similar audiences, so that I could grow my reach and my potential to scale.

Steve: Okay, what it sounds like here then is that you guys actually don’t do that much audience research or random exploring on Facebook actually to get the audiences, is that accurate?

Zach: Well it’s accurate in the sense we are not just randomly going crazy on Facebook with no data. That being said, we are taking existing things that we have, based upon all the 100s of things that we’ve run, and we are finding more segments that match up and pair nicely with what we have.

Steve: It always starts with the basis of something.

Zach: Exactly, I just don’t … You might be able to, but I have never been able to be extremely successful going with nothing.

Steve: Okay and when you are creating your Facebook campaigns, you will start with a lookalike audience and it will branch out to known interest and audiences that you are fairly confident will work right off the back.

Zach: That’s right.

Steve: Okay, when you are running these campaigns, and you mentioned that you front all the money, right? You have to make this work, and during that first 7 days, what are your metrics determine whether something is going to work or not?

Zach: The most important thing we look at is something called earnings per visitor, or earnings per view, and every single Indiegogo Kickstarter campaign allows Google analytics to be hooked up to it now, and it’s a very simple metric. It’s for every single person coming to my site, how much money I’m I making. We like to see that number greater than $2.

Steve: Greater than $2, what is so special about that $2 number?

Zach: Not anything necessarily special, it’s just that’s what we’ve seen as we’ve grabbed the medium from the thousands of campaigns that we’ve worked with. That’s what we have seen the majority of campaigns have a greater than $2 number to be successful.

Steve: Okay and one thing I forgot to ask you in the beginning is you guys take a percentage of the money that’s generated right?

Zach: That’s right, from wherever we come on.

Steve: Is that typically on the order of; you said 35% I think before we started recording here. Okay and based on that number, $2 is something that you will determine that would be profitable?

Zach: Exactly, $2 are cases to either be break even or profitable. Obviously we want to make money, if we’re break even and raise money for the client, sometime we will take on a campaign we are not even making any money, but it’s raising a lot of money for the client, and it’s making Funded Today look really good. Another campaign, not another campaign, 10, 20, 30 more campaigns might approach us after hearing about Funded Today working with that campaign, and we might be profitable for those campaigns. It’s about customer life time value in that sense.

Steve: For your own business, do you make any of these clients sign anything that they’ll help you; you are allowed to share their results after the fact.

Zach: Yeah, every single client agrees to give us a testimonial for if we are successful. They agree to give us a video testimony, and every single client we work with that were successful for. Successful means passes the 1 to 7 days of due diligence and product validation. If they are successful they put a badge on their site. These campaigns like Baubax travel jacket, I looked at the Google analytics 2 days ago, because I was talking with [inaudible 00:36:00], and he still had a thousand five hundred people sitting on his site, and it’s like 5, 6, 7 months ago that that happened.

Just imagine the amount of visitors and eye balls that come, and see that Funded Today was the reason that Baubax travel jacket raised so much money. We get a lot of traffic and visitors, and then coupled out with 500 campaigns that all Funded Today badges, it gets to be a lot of traffic coming to your site hearing about what you did.

Steve: Your business has grown based on word of mouth essentially, is that accurate?

Zach: Yeah, that’s exactly right, word of mouth in the sense of the internet, the viral spread of information.

Steve: Okay and you are running these Facebook campaigns, and can I just get an idea of how much you would start with your bids, and how you scale it up?

Zach: It’s always to test for statistical significance. How much we spend, how much we scale, I literally base everything on statistical significance, and we always have. Statistical significance is just about looking at your end, your big population and then your little end, your sample population, and finding the right number of visitors you need, and the right number of conversions you need, and once you have that right, math doesn’t lie, it’s a pretty amazing thing because …

Steve: Walk me through an example if you can with some numbers.

Zach: Let’s say, to break it all down, let’s just use $1000 as an example maybe. Let’s say you spend $1000 and let’s say it raises $10,000 okay? $10000.35, and let’s say on that $1000, I don’t know. What are you getting clicks for?

Steve: Under a buck.

Zach: Under a buck okay, let’s say they are a buck each to make it easier. You spend $1000 that’s a thousand clicks, a thousand clicks raise you $10000, and let’s say the deal is 35% and so in that sense Funded Today would have made $2500. That’s a pretty good return; we look at the earnings per visitor. Earnings per visitor is really simple. You send 1000 clicks, you raise $10000, so what is your earnings per view, $10, that’s 5 times better than the two. In terms of statistically significant, you wouldn’t have to spend $1000 and get 1000 clicks, and raise $10000 to achieve statistical significance.

Statistical significance could be achieved spending much less in this example because it was … This example you gave it so profitable, you could probably have achieved hat on a $250 spend, and this particular example. From that point we would tell the client, “Okay, looks like you passed the test, everything is statistically significant.” They’d see the results because their campaign would have been raising a lot of money, and then it’s just scaling from there.

How do we scale it from there? We simply look at the audience size that we were targeting for that particular group, and we look at how many days left on the campaign to make sure that we are maximizing that reach and making sure every single person within that audience is going to be targeted within the 30-60 days, or however long what we have left on the campaign, and then we just scale according to time left on the campaign.

Steve: Do you create multiple creative’s; do you test headlines creative’s and all that sort of thing?

Zach: Yeah, every single thing like that is being tested, we start with, it just depends. I usually start with 10-20 different creative, images adcopy. Then we look at how all those perform across smaller segment sizes. We pick the best one and we scale that one exponentially.

Steve: Okay and in terms of frequency, are you aiming for everyone in that particular audience to try see that ad once?

Zach: At least yeah, generally we don’t like to go more than 2.

Steve: Okay, not more than 2. You make your calculations on what to bid so that you cover what you think you are going to cover within that certain time period.

Zach: That’s right.

Steve: Okay and one question I did have, and this is a little bit unrelated …

Zach: Oh sorry, and just to throw in that, that’s just one audience. Now we’ve got that working. The entire length of the campaign, we are testing out new things. We might only have 5 additional campaigns but we are testing out new audiences that we haven’t yet tested out just because we’ve been testing out hundreds of other audience along the way. The idea is to eventually have hundreds if not thousands of audiences turned on that are all converting profitably and that’s how the scaling works.

Again following that same principle though of testing … Just because you passed the product validation for that 1 to 7 days doesn’t mean we are not validating more and more audiences. We just want to make sure we validate our biggest, strongest audiences first and scale more audiences throughout the rest of the campaign.

Steve: The following question for that was, is Facebook like your primary advertising campaign or do you find equal success with Google and Pinterest, Instagram?

Zach: I would say…

Steve: Is it just all depends?

Zach: Yeah. It all depends. Again it’s a bad answer, but wherever we can spend money to make money, we’re going to pretty crazy. On [inaudible 00:40:48] Facebook did horribly, Instagram did extremely well. Weird, I don’t know why.

Steve: Interesting, the same company and very similar.

Zach: [inaudible 00:40:57] watches Pintrest did really, really well.

Steve: Pintrest ads. What is the different … I’ve always been curious about this. There is a whole bunch of different crowdfunding sites like Kickstarter, Indiegogo, GoFundMe. What are the differences?

Zach: The biggest difference … GoFundMe I would say is more for social or personal kind of causes. I get I’m not on GoFundMe a ton. We’ve never actually raised money on the site, but GoFundMe is more for, “Hey. I’ve got cancer or my dad just died or I need to pay for a funeral or I’ve got to go on this trip or whatever it is.” It’s just like the name sounds, GoFundMe. Give me money for this, give me money for that. I’d say it’s more social philanthropical kind of thing.

Indiegogo, Kickstarter are definitely competitors. The stuff you see on those 2 sites are pretty similar. Kickstarter has a better audience in the sense that if you are on Kickstarter and you are successful, you are going to see that Kickstarter helped you out quite a bit. For one reason or another, the way Kickstarter’s website is set up, the way it converts; the way people understand the site. If you’re successful on Kickstarter, you are going to see multiple success: success upon, success upon success. It’s that snow ball effect. On Indiegogo, it’s going to require much more of your own work.

That being said Indiegogo is like awesome. They’re nice. They’re kind. They take care of you. I love Kickstarter, don’t get me wrong, but Kickstarter’s model is more like, “Hey. Don’t touch this. We’re good. We’re great, but we don’t really want to be bugged or talked to.” It’s kind of their strategy. Again this will probably get me in trouble but I don’t even know if should I say it, but I’m going to. I didn’t come up with analogy so with that disclaimer.

We love Indiegogo too and we love Kickstarter. We love both the sites. Indiegogo, they have something where if you are really successful they’ll put you on their newsletter. We get a lot of newsletter features because we generate a lot of pledges. That increases the go-go factor which is a factor that Indiegogo uses to keep track of how well campaigns are doing. It’s a combination of pledges, traffic visitors, how quickly all those pledges came, et cetera and the length of time. Indiegogo is like the ugly girl who always watching, who’ll do anything for you, but you are always like, “I don’t know.” Kickstarter is like the beautiful, sexy, supermodel who you’re never going to have, but you keep trying because she never completely turns you down.

Steve: Let me know if you want to cut that out before this goes live.

Zach: I don’t know. Again, I didn’t make up that analogy. That analogy is from … I forget who it’s from, but I’ve always remembered it. To be honest, it’s true.

Steve: There is no reason not to launch on both. Is there?

Zach: You don’t want to launch on both the platforms at the same times. What I like doing it and we find like 60, 70% of our business comes Kickstarter just because that’s where we started I think. We are starting to get a lot more on Indiegogo because now we are their number one partner, and they have this cool little partner page that features all the partners. Because we are number one I think a lot of people see us and come and try to hire us. That being said, 60% of our clients are in Kickstarter.

If we are successful on Kickstarter, Indiegogo has this awesome thing that Kickstarter doesn’t have and I don’t know if they ever will or they are not wanting to do it. It’s called In Demand Funding. After you campaign ends, you can continue to raise money and just extend the shipping or manufacturing date on Indiegogo. Let’s say you plan on delivering in three months on Kickstarter, you might say, “Hey. You missed us on Kickstarter, but you still want to get the product. Well we’re going to be delivering in 6 months if you want to still get it here.

We allow pre-orders on Indiegogo in demand. We have a lot of success going in demand. We have clients we work called Meater which is a smart thermometer. We’ve raised them I think probably more than a million dollars more in demand. UsBidi, a really good campaign that’s raised way more than it raised on Kickstarter in demand. The BetterBack, Katherine Krug, she’s raised quite a bit of money in demand. She’s one of our clients.

Steve: That’s interesting. I wonder … Because there is a sense of urgency with the Kickstarter. Doesn’t that get lost with in demand?

Zach: You know what, that’s what interesting. I think there is still some kind of social element. You get to bring that big number that you raised on Kickstarter or Indiegogo. You get to have that big number in front. People are like, “This must be successful. It raised a million dollars. It raised 3 million dollars. It raised 5 million dollars.” Maybe all that numbers and all the metrics and the social elements, either you lose a bit of the scarcity perhaps. Maybe that creates the sense of people wanting to buy. We’ve found convergence to be okay in demand as well.

Steve: What is like a typical conversion rate for a good campaign?

Zach: Typical good conversion rate for a good campaign … I got Curtis here with me. Curtis, what do you think?

Curtis: From direct, online 3 to 5.

Zach: 3 to 5 percent he says from direct traffic.

Steve: That’s pretty good. Then we just say the average is somewhere around 2.

Zach: Average is like 1 to 2. What about from paid media? Paid media is about 1 to 2, but average for a good campaign is going to be 3 to 5. It does depend on price point as well.

Steve: You mentioned a whole bunch of successes that you’ve had in the past. Some of these were like a year or 2 years ago. How has the crowfunding landscape changed over time?

Zach: The biggest thing that’s changed is you can’t just put a project on Kickstarter or Indiegogo and expect to make money. You definitely have to do a lot of leg work, a lot of stuff upfront. That being said, by doing all that good stuff up front, you have a chance to raise way more money than you ever did in the past. That’s the biggest thing. I think it requires a lot of work upfront.

Steve: It sounds like a lot of your tactics are just social engineering in a way, just good old fashioned leg work.

Zach: That’s right. All we’ve done is taken that good old fashioned leg work and scaled it.

Steve: Then also kept these contacts in place so that you have a base for everything that you’ve launched now.

Zach: Absolutely.

Steve: Zach, I learned a lot today. Where can people find you and pitch their ideas? I understand you don’t get that many pitches on a regular basis. If someone wants to contact you or your company, where can they find you?

Zach: Best place to get us is on Funded.today. It’s not .com. it’s Funded.today because we get your project funded today, so Funded.today. Then on Funded.today, you can click on the Do I Qualify. Let me see what it’s called now. I think it’s Do I Qualify. Learn more … It’s Learn More now. If you click the big green Learn More About on top fold, click and then it will take you to a page. You can watch that short two or three minute video. Then click, Finally Do I Qualify?

We go through a list of questions that we want to know about you, how did you hear about us? Generally within 48 hours we put you in touch with a client specialist. Client specialist … You are probably smarter than me in terms of the daily grind. I just talked to Curtis about a few numbers because he is on the scene so much more than me. They are basically crowdfunding consultants who talk to you about your campaign, talk over what the process is going to look like, answer any of your questions, and determine if what we do is going to be a good fit for your campaign or not.

Steve: Are there any obvious signs that you might not be a good fit?

Zach: I think if you come to us and if you have raised … We have this a lot, believe or not. If you have like 1 to 5 pledges and you’ve been on the crowdfunding site for 2, 3 weeks, you might not have a good idea. We see that a lot. You’d be surprised how many people are like, “I just need good marketing.” I just don’t necessarily know if I’d buy that. That being said, even on cases like that before where we’ve actually turned a campaign that had hardly any backers into 100,000 plus campaign.

If you believe in your idea enough, we should absolutely chat.

Steve: See that’s the thing. I tend to think that a lot of it does have to do with marketing because a lot of people they are good at inventing but then they suck at doing the legwork.

Zach: You are so right. Sometimes when you see 1 to 5 people, you know they didn’t even talk to their friends and family. Its like, “You didn’t have like 5 friends who wanted to throw you money.” That being said, you are exactly right. We talked to inventors all the time that are scared of the internet or have no idea how to even do anything or how they got their Kickstarter page put together in the first place. There absolutely is that. That’s not bad.

We love those kinds of people because as crazy as it sounds, I’ve basically invented 2 things my entire life. I pitched everyday, 60, 70 times. You’d think I’d more inventive, but sadly the creative juices don’t necessarily flow from me at least in the sense of products. I think I’m more creative in the sense of marketing and how to figure out new ways to raise money for people.

Steve: And social engineering. Yeah totally.

Zach: I wish I was more creative because I love the things we’ve brought to life. It’s so fun like right now I’m wearing an original reign watch. I have silver socks on. I’m wearing Wolcox boots. I’ve got McMacular pants. I’m wearing a silver shirt. I’ve got premium underwear from Miguel. It’s like literally everything I have on is from something that Funded Today helped to bring life. It’s exciting. I love to tell those stories and I love to see that we’ve created all these jobs and helped all these entrepreneurs live the life of their dreams. That’s what makes Funded Today so amazing.

Steve: I just want to add a little tit bit since … Is that when I first met you it was just very easy to talk to you. I can kind of see how you are able to reach out and establish great relationships with people. It’s just a talent I guess.

Zach: Thank you. You are very kind. I could say the same thing about you, but you do it 10 times better than me.

Steve: There you go with the praise. It’s not going to work this time buddy.

Zach: I mean it.

Steve: All right man. Hey, thanks a lot for coming on the show man.

Zach: I appreciate it Steve. Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right. Take care

Zach: Bye-bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now crowdfunding wasn’t around when I first started my online store, but today it’s definitely a viable way to validate your product or fund your first production run. If you do decide to crowdfund a campaign, there is no one else I would ask except for Zach.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode123. If you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show. Please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course immediately via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

122: How To Make 600K Selling T-Shirts On TeeSpring With Derek Pankaew

How To Make 600K Selling T-Shirts On TeeSpring With Derek Pankaew

Today I’m happy to have Derek Pankaew on the show. Derek is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel Live conference and it was pretty random how we started talking.

I was sitting directly behind him during a session and I couldn’t help but peek at his screen. And I found that the screen saver on his computer was a running count of his age. I took notice and we started chatting.

And as luck would have it, Derek was selling t-shirts at the time and making a killing doing it. Now if you’ve followed my blog for a while, an example that I use of what not to sell is t-shirts because it’s way too saturated.

But Derek has made over 600K with a gross profit of 335K selling t-shirts online in a pretty short period of time and in this interview he shares how he did it. Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Derek came up with selling tshirts online
  • What was special about Derek’s tshirts that made them sell online.
  • His motivations for starting his business.
  • How and where Derek advertises his t-shirts.
  • Which sales channels worked for his business and which did not.
  • His primary source of customers
  • The challenges of selling t-shirts as a sustainable business

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.
Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Derek Pankaew on the show. Now Derek is actually someone who I met at the eCommerceFuel Live Conference, and it was actually pretty random how we started talking. Behind one of the sessions I was sitting directly behind him, and I couldn’t help but peek at his screen because it was like right in my face.

I found out that the screen saver on his computer was like a running count of his age, and I took notice of that and we just started chatting. As luck would have it Derek was selling t-shirts at the time and making a killing doing it. Now if you’ve followed my blog for a while, an example that I use of what not to sell are t-shirts because it’s a really saturated industry.

Now Derek has actually made over 600K with a gross profit of 335K selling t-shirts online in a pretty short period of time which is pretty crazy to me. Anyway Derek is working on a lot of different projects right now, but I kind of want to dig deep on how he managed to make such large profit selling t-shirts online. With that welcome to the show Derek how are you doing today man?

Derek: I’m doing great, how are you doing Steve?

Steve: Still have that screen saver or has it changed?

Derek: Let me check how … It’s turned off at the moment, but I liked it. I’ve already turned it back on now that you reminded me.

Steve: I think it was in seconds or something like that, so I had to calculate like what your age was, I don’t know…

Derek: Yeah it’s a really good reminder for me of my … The short time I have on this planet and most of it.

Steve: I’m curious here, how did you come up with selling t-shirts and what was your secret sauce that allowed you to sell so many online?

Derek: How I came up with selling t-shirts, I was living in Vietnam at the time. I met someone else who was doing this business pretty successfully. He actually got out of the business, and we were just chatting and I was like, “Yeah, what do you do?” He told me what he does and he said he just finished selling t-shirts. I was like,” Selling t-shirts? How is that going?” He was like,” Yeah it was good. I made maybe like 20K, 25K a month.”

And I was like,” What? What were you doing?” So then he told me about the business model. I had done some Google AdWords in the past, and I figured Facebook ads couldn’t be that much different. After talking to him for a bit I went home. I started researching this business model, bought some courses around Facebook ads and taught myself Facebook ads and then took him out to dinner again.

I had more specific questions this time, and then after having a couple of conversations with this guy who has done it before and then spending sometimes studying on my own, I just started launching campaigns. What was the second question?

Steve: So let’s back up a little bit because a lot of people aren’t really familiar. I mean we’ve chatted for a while but … so first off how did you obtain these t-shirts, how did you get the designs, and that sort of thing?

Derek: Okay great, so I was selling mostly on a platform called Teespring, which allows you to upload designs to this platform, and they will print the shirts and send it to your customers for you. I don’t have to deal with customer service; I don’t have to deal with fulfillment. All I do, there is basically I have 2 jobs, one is to get the designs up, and the other is to market the designs.

So the marketing is almost 100% Facebook ads, basically it is 100% Facebook ads. I tested some other things like Pinterest ads, but for the most part the whole business was basically built off of Facebook ads. As for where the designs come from, they actually come from a ton of different places. So some of it is through competitive research, so I’ll use tools like TeeGrasp is probably the number one tool in the t-shirt …

Steve: What does that tool do?

Derek: It scrapes all of the different t-shirt websites. It scrapes Teespring, it scrapes Teechip, it scrapes Gearbubble for all the t-shirts that are launched on those different platforms. It lets you see what markets people are in, what kinds of designs are selling well. Using that tool I’m able to come off with offshoots. If a design that said beware of the crazy chicken lady is selling well for chickens, then I might think of beware of the crazy goat lady for women who have goats. Using offshoots of existing designs by using spy tools this one method, once…

Steve: Oh backup, on Teespring do you get all the revenue numbers for everyone who is selling t-shirts?

Derek: No, you see the sales numbers for everyone who is selling t-shirts and you can extrapolate to the revenue numbers from that.

Steve: Okay, because the t-shirts are like 20 bucks probably, is that…

Derek: Yeah, typically really simple designs are about 20 bucks, and then if there is multi colored front and back print and you are looking like 23, 24.

Steve: So you really know how much someone is making, right?

Derek: On Teespring yes you can have a pretty good guess. The numbers do change because if you are selling hoodies … You are usually able to sell a few different kinds of shirts at once. If they are selling hoodies the margins are a lot higher on hoodies, and you can’t really tell what the split is between the t-shirts and the things they are selling. In other platforms such as Teechip will actually let you hide the amount of sales you are getting. On Teespring you can figure out the revenue approximately, but on some of the other platforms you can’t.

Steve: Okay, and then some of these research tools that you are mentioning would you mind talking about what they are and what they do exactly?

Derek: Sure yeah, the 2 most common ones that I’m aware of are Teegrasp which this tool is like a Google spider. This tool will go to all these different websites and just see these t-shirts and it will take a screenshot of the front and a screenshot of the back. If the number of sales is publicly available, it will grab that data as well and then compile all of it in the spreadsheet.

If I wanted to go in the market for example we use chickens. I could go into Teegrasp and just type in chickens, and it will show me all the shirts that had been launched in that market before. What percentage of the campaigns have hit, meaning it had at least enough to print. How many shirts…

Steve: And what is that number?

Derek: I believe it’s 3.

Steve: Oh that’s it, okay.

Derek: I have actually been out of the Teespring business for a little while now, so I don’t actually know if they updated that. They were talking about making it one, but last time I was in the business it was 3.

Steve: Okay, and so these tools, are they free or do you have to pay for them?

Derek: So Teegrasp is not free, I think it’s 50 … somewhere between $50 and $100 a month. Another tool that I use was just Pinterest. Pineterst.com/source/Teespring.com, and they’ll give you a really, really good live feed of what’s being shared the most on Pinterest from Teespring. That has a really close correlation to what’s selling really well.

You can just replace Teespring.com with all the other sites that run it, so Teechip.com is another big website that sells t-shirts. Gearbubble.com, so you can just replace that and spy on a lot of different websites that are currently selling t-shirts, so Pinterest is free obviously.

Steve: You go through and you find out what the best selling shirts are, and then you make little offshoots of them. Are there any copyright issues with doing that?

Derek: That’s only one of the sources that we use. I’d be really careful about the copyrights so I wouldn’t copy the design, I’d only copy partial quotes. Often times the way I would use these tools is to identify markets. If we use chicken again as the example, if I see that chicken people who have chickens in their backyards and are really passionate about raising chickens are buying t-shirts, then I might … Once I figure that out using these kind of competitive intelligence tools, I would just go to Google images and type in like funny quotes about chicken. Chicken means, funny chicken weird or whatever just start looking for weird quotes.

Often times we’d actually … This wouldn’t work for the first or second t-shirt that we do in a market. By the time we are on our third, fourth, fifth t-shirt to the same market we start to build a Facebook page that has some following. We are able to just start posting these images, the memes that we see on Google images. Or we also look on Reddit and a couple of other places. We just post these to our existing audience and we see which ones get the most likes and the most comments and we turn those quotes into t-shirts. We use a live feedback mechanism as well.

Steve: Just curious, how many t-shirts sales would actually interest you to go into a certain market?

Derek: I probably want to see a campaign with at least probably at least a 100.

Steve: Oh okay, so not that many really?

Derek: Yeah.

Steve: Okay so if you see like a t-shirt that sold more than a 100 units, that would be something you would consider going into?

Derek: Yeah absolutely. One thing too, one really important thing to realize with Teespring is that it’s a really, really high volume game in terms of the number of designs you need to put out to do this well. On a weekly basis we are launching 40 to 50 different designs.

Steve: Holy crap okay, so we are talking like … oh my God that’s a lot of designs every day.

Derek: Yeah totally, and most of them will fail. Like 9 out of 10 will not just make any money, and 9 out of 10 will lose money. The 1 out of 10 that makes money will more than make up for the ones that lose money. When I say that if I see that a shirt has done 100 sales in that market that’s really … That’s good enough for me to spend 1 out of 50 of my experiments on a weekly basis on that market to see if it sells.

Steve: So is your team like all graphic designers?

Derek: The team was 3 graphic designers, 1 assistant who was helping with Facebook ads and 1 assistant who was helping with all the other menial stuff, answering comments, creating Facebook pages etcetera.

Steve: Okay, and so you were creating designs from scratch then. You’d come up with an idea and a quote, and you’d have your graphic designer pout together some sort of graphic and integrate that quote in?

Derek: Yeah, so a lot of these quotes were very were scalable or tempertized. The quote I mentioned earlier beware of the crazy chicken lady. You could replace that with literally 30 different animals, right. Often times off of the 40 or 50 designs we were doing a week there were actually maybe only like 3 or 4 unique designs, and we are just scaling them out to different markets at the same time, does that makes sense?

Steve: Yeah totally, okay and so this Facebook page that you were talking about. That Facebook page obviously only caters to a very specific niche, right?

Derek: Correct.

Steve: So did you start that Facebook page right from the start and start posting to it?

Derek: So in the beginning I ran everything out of one Facebook page, so I was running 50 different markets out of one Facebook page. Until someone told me that if you do that, any other Teespring marketer can just come to this page and see all the markets you are in. After that point, the practice really is, the best practice in Teespring is to have one page for every market you are in.

Once I started doing that, yes, we would create a Facebook page for every single market we are in from the very beginning, even if we didn’t know if we would sell anything. Then, but we wouldn’t post any content to it until we are starting to make sales. Once it’s clear that this market is going to be profitable for us that’s when I started putting content on the page.

Steve: How often would you post to this page? You just had this blank page until you knew that the t-shirt was going to sell and then you started posting to it.

Derek: Yeah, actually we only built … There were only 4 pages out of maybe; we probably tested like 300 different markets. We only built 4 pages where we were posting regularly, because it is a lot of effort to find a bunch of post. We can’t just post images. We have to actually write a couple of sentences with each post. It’s actually quite a bit of effort to run these Facebook pages.

We were posting about 5 times a day, so about 35 posts a week because most of the audience … The Facebook formula for reach is, you will reach 4% of your audience for a post or something like that. Even though we were posting 35 times a week, people were probably only going to see our posts twice a week anyway.

Steve: Did you buy likes in the beginning or was it all organic?

Derek: Yes, for the pages that we are actively building, we did buy likes and for the rest we didn’t. In retrospect I don’t think it’s really worth it.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Derek: Yeah, I don’t think it was really worth it.

Steve: How do you jump start the page then?

Derek: A lot of people actually like the page, just from … If we run a t-shirt campaign and we spend $5,000, $8,000, $10,000 on the Facebook ad campaign, and that ad is seen by 100,000 people or whatever. A pretty good portion of them will just like the page from the ad itself. If we are, after we spent a few thousand dollars on ads, we’ll probably have a thousand likes, couple of two thousand likes just from people who like t-shirts and want to have … If you are a big fun of chickens and you are really passionate about it, and you see this t-shirt that’s hilarious.

It’s an inside joke for you and your people, then you might just like the page and like see what other t-shirts they come up with in the future.

Steve: Okay, and then with this page then, did people kind of engage with the page later on? How did you use this page later on once you got a little bit of traction? Actually first of all how many fans did you for your highest page, how many fans did you get?

Derek: About 38,000.

Steve: Okay, that’s a pretty good number of chicken lovers there. How did you use this page once you had it established?

Derek: A lot of it was posting, so posting these images, these memes, these quotes and seeing what people respond to. The best campaign I ever did sold about $33,000 in gross revenue and about $22,000 in net profit. That came from just a quote that got insane engagement. We were just posting it and for me I would never have guessed this quote would do so well. This quote got like 10 times more engagement than anything else we posted.
Then I took that quote and went to 99 designs and paid a lot more than I normally pay for design. Usually I’m paying like $15, but I paid $250 for this design. That just … It was a really good design. It just took off. It was the highest seller I ever seen. Yeah, just posting quotes to the page …

Steve: Are you going to tell me what the quote is or what? Or is that a secret?

Derek: I’d rather not share that in particular.

Steve: Okay, that’s fine.

Derek: Let’s see, where were we? Oh yeah how to engage. Just posting quotes and getting responses from people, using that to gauge what kinds of quotes to put on t-shirts in the future. Actually I think, I don’t have any way to quantify this, but I think in the markets where we are actively posting because we are showing up in people’s newsfeeds more often, it actually increases our conversion rate. There’s like a branding effect to it. I can’t really quantify that in any casual way.

Steve: Sure, were these shirts branded even though they were sold on Teespring, or there’s no branding at all?

Derek: Not really. The brand is just our Facebook page, I think people just get used to seeing it.

Steve: Okay. Let’s shift gears a little bit and talk about the bread and butter of this business which is the marketing side. You bought, you obviously spent a lot of money on Facebook ads, and I was hoping you could just kind of walk me through the strategy that you used to market these t-shirts.

Derek: Sure yeah. The goal with this, there’s kind of a 2 problem goal. There is, first you want to cast your net wide while keeping it to the most passionate people possible, and I will explain what that means in a second. Second, you want to use a very data driven approach to eliminate all the places where you are wasting money.

Coming back to the chicken example, typically I would separate everything. I would start with anywhere between 3 to 5 ad sets. An ad set for anyone who doesn’t know it’s just a grouping in Facebook ads of different keywords, different interests that you can target. I would put similar interests into the same ad set. I might target at magazines. Magazines is one that tends to convert really well, and I would just list off a few different groupings that I frequently target. Magazines is one, websites is one, suppliers, manufactures and tools is another one, organizations is another one. Those are …

Steve: What about celebrities, do you target celebrities?

Derek: Celebrities? So if there are authors, or speakers, those could do really well. If they are like if I was in the golfing market, I definitely wouldn’t target like Tiger Woods. If I was to target a celebrity I would make sure it’s like a number 8, like b-list celebrity. Not the top 10 golfers, but like the 33rd golfer so that only people who are super passionate about golf would be liking this person. Even that said, in my experience celebrities don’t, those interests don’t convert that well. Typically I wouldn’t test that until I was like scaling a campaign that’s proving to convert.

Steve: Okay. One question I did want to ask, when you are writing these Facebook ads, you get conversion data from Teespring, right that directly correlated?

Derek: Yeah.

Steve: Okay. Can we just take your chicken example for example and then just tell the audience how you would put together an ad set for it.

Derek: Sure. First I go to Google and I type in chicken magazines. It will pull up I think backyard chicken is the name of a magazine. Chicken farmer I think, I don’t know if that one’s actually a real one. There’s usually maybe 3 or 4 magazines in a market. If it’s a really big market there might be like 5 to 10 magazines.

I would just put all those in one ad set. Next I would look up the most common tools you would need. With chickens it might be bird feed, chicken coops, cages like whatever those supplies are. I look up the names of those suppliers and I would click that into a Facebook ads. I look for the most high trafficked or the most engaged websites. I don’t remember actually what those websites are in the chicken market.

Steve: It’s okay.

Derek: Whatever they are, the websites that the people tend to frequent, and then organizations. Chickens might not have it, but for cattle for example, you have a Cattle Farmers Association, the American Beef Association. Whatever the associations that people who are in that market would tend to join, just put those all in one category. Typically I would have … Hold on, give me one moment. I’m just going to look up if there’s any other ones I missed. Typically I would start with 3 to 5 different ad sets. Each of those I would further cut those in half, and half the traffic would go to mobile and half the traffic would go to desktop.

Steve: Okay, and do you factor by age also or segment by age?

Derek: I don’t segment by age in the beginning. I will do that later on, but in the beginning I would just … I usually start at about 30 years old and go to 65 plus. I found that for t-shirts, people between 18 and 30 don’t really buy. They buy but I usually end losing money. I think my guess is that they just have less money so they are not as …

Steve: Do you ever use any of the ones who are you only want to target people who make over a certain amount?

Derek: No. I think that data in general isn’t very good because most of the data that Facebook gets is given to Facebook by the user. You type something in your status and Facebook knows you’re into chickens because you are posting photos of your chickens or talking about your chickens. The financial data they are buying it from third party sources and then trying to correlate it to your Facebook account. I think in general that data is not all that good.

Steve: Okay. Your first ad really is just interests … The categories that you are talking about for your ad sets and then just half mobile, half desktop, that’s your first campaign.

Derek: Yeah, interest 30-65 plus half mobile, half desktop. We are still targeting people who are really passionate about this topic but we are casting a wide net.

Steve: What about how many creatives do you make and how many headlines and that sort of thing also in your first iteration.

Derek: Just 1 and usually actually throughout the whole campaign, we typically just have 1 ad. Remember we are launching 50 campaigns a week. In each ad is an image that has to be made in Photoshop. If we are doing multiple ads it would just add a ton of time to our process. Just to keep things scalable and running smoothly. We just did 1ad basically.

Steve: What is your image? Is it just a picture of the t-shirt?

Derek: Yeah, it’s a picture of the t-shirt blown up as large as the image will allow which is like color on the background. Sometimes like a border around the shirt, like a stroke to make it stand out from the newsfeed a little bit more.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. I love running my ecommerce store but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts expenses and especially inventory cost, are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here’s where Bench Accounting comes in, Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with the team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches plus it’s reasonable priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Okay, any text on the image at all?

Derek: Nope.

Steve: What would your headline look like then?

Derek: There is no headline. The format of the post that we were doing was … It’s a little bit different than … The normal Facebook ad is 1200 pixels by 628 pixels. It’s kind of like a horizontal rectangle and if you click on it goes to a website. Most of the stuff that we were doing with TeeSpring we were actually doing 1200 by 1200 so it’s a much larger ad. We posted on our Facebook page and then we used that creative as the ad.

There’s actually no, there’s no headline on it. It’s like if you see a friend’s post with an image on it, there’s no headline on it. It looks exactly like that except it’s Facebook ad. It’s a slightly different format that we were using.

Steve: Okay. Cool. You found through experimentation I would gather.

Derek: Yeah, it was kind of industry standard too.

Steve: Oh it was, okay.

Derek: Because it’s a t-shirt just having more screen real estate from the bigger size of the image, tends to work better for … At least I found when I did it tended to work better than having the half the size.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. It’s just literally like a picture with no headline underneath the image and then just some text above it.

Derek: Yeah, exactly and the text above it would say like limited run, campaign ends in ten days, new shirt for chicken, new shirt for chicken farmers available in 5 different colors. Just kind of hypie time’s running out kind of text.

Steve: Then how much money would you put on each of these ad sets in the beginning?

Derek: In each of these ad sets, Facebook has changed the policy around this a little bit. We used to be able to put any amount of money we want on it. Now there’s a $5 per ad set minimum generally unless you tweak things. When I was doing it, I was basically dividing $15 among all the ad sets. If we were doing 3 ad sets and then split those in half, so that there’ is 3 desktop and 3 mobile, then I would just divide $15 amongst the 6 ad sets.

It would be $250 a day for the initially test. Basically what I was willing to do, I would be willing to spend $15-20 dollars on a Facebook ad set to see if it would make a sale or not. Usually what I find is that by the time I campaign, I spend $15-20, if it hasn’t made one sale, it’s probably dead. If it’s made 1 or 2 sales, it’s in limbo. I have no idea if that’s going to make money or not. If it has made 3-5 sales then it’s probably a winner.

Steve: Okay so a couple of clarifications here, all these ads go straight to the TeeSpring page of that t-shirt where they can checkout directly. There is no landing page or anything it just goes straight to the checkout page.

Derek: Yeah, that’s right.

Steve: How much traffic can you possibly get of $15 worth divided amongst 6 ad sets?

Derek: Like how many clicks, or what do you mean?

Steve: Yeah, how many clicks and what is a good conversion rate?

Derek: The conversion rate is anywhere between 8-13%

Steve: Wow, that’s crazy high

Derek: Yeah, it is pretty high, but again we are only hitting 1 out of 10 designs. The ones that hit, yeah they really resonate with the market. I actually don’t know how many clicks I get; I don’t think that’s something I looked at on a regular basis. I just looked up the ad span versus revenue.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious, I mean it’s probably somewhere in the order of 20 cents to a dollar maybe per click, I don’t know. That’s sounds too high actually for, to get there.

Derek: I think I was generally paying a little bit over a dollar per click actually.

Steve: Really? Okay

Derek: On an account wide basis, but that, actually now that I think about it, on an account wide basis that would include the shirts that were losing money as well. I actually don’t know how much per click I was paying for the ones that were making money.

Steve: On your bidding, did you just let Facebook bid by purchase? Yeah got it. Okay, so you get some data, and certain ones are dud, certain ones are in limbo and certain ones are kicking butt hopefully right?

Derek: Yeah exactly. I’d spend, usually if I spend $15 or $20 in day 1 I would scale that up to say $50 in day 2 and $100 in day 3, and then $150 $200 on day 4. I know that’s a lot faster scaling than a lot of people in Facebook ads advocate. I think standard in Facebook ads is to raise your budgets by 50% every 3-5 days. TeeSpring is a little bit different, I think because you are literally in a race against other people.

If you have design that is selling well using the tools that we talked about earlier, people can see what is selling well, and you will literally have 4 knock offs within 2 days. It really is, like once an idea is in the sphere of t-shirt marketers, you are just in a race to spend the money and get it in front of every single person in that market, and capture all the sales before somebody else knocks you off.

Steve: That sounds really like cut throat to me. All right, what do you do with the limbo designs; do you scale those as well?

Derek: Yeah, I spend a little bit more money. I will just let it keep running at $20 a day. Yeah basically I will just …

Steve: You mentioned segmenting by mobile and desktop, can you share some of your experiences with that. Like are most of the sales on mobile or back when you were doing it?

Derek: It’s completely market dependent. Some designs will sell on both, some designs will not sell on desktop, and some designs will not sell on mobile. I haven’t found any coloration, I can’t guess. I can’t say older people tend to buy on desktop, artistic people on mobile. Literally I cannot guess what it is, but some markets bind it on different devices and I don’t know why.

Steve: Okay that’s very interesting. In a typical test like the chicken one that you described, do you have this 6 ad sets, you ever have cases where all of them are bad and you just go back to the drawing board, or is that the common case?

Derek: That’s really a common case. I won’t try and revive things that are making money, if it doesn’t make money after … if I spend $20, like one sale I’m usually making $8-$12 so if I spend $20 even if I made 1 sale I’m actually still losing money. If I spend $20 and I make no sales, I just dump it.

Steve: Let’s say you have a couple of mediocre ones; walk me through that process. Let’s say you’ve made one sale in your $15 experiment?

Derek: Probably I will just let spend another $15-30, and just check it daily. Sometimes what will happen is it will make 1 sale and after I spend another $20 it will suddenly jump to let’s say 6 sales, if that is the case, then great. I will keep running it; often times what happens it will just break even or lose money. By the time I spend $50 and it’s not making money then I will probably kill it off.

Steve: Sound like your threshold is 2 per day, is that 2 per $15 is that accurate?

Derek: I didn’t understand the question can you …

Steve: Meaning like you need to sell at least 2 to be profitable, from what you were saying?

Derek: Yes, that’s right.

Steve: At a $15 per day clip. As long you are making at least 2 per $15 spent you will just scale it right?

Derek: The important thing, the reason I do it this way is because it’s actually more costlier to miss a winner than it is to spend money on the losers. If I spend $15 on it and it makes 1 sale, I’m losing a bit of money. If I spend another $15, I might lose another additional $15, but if that was actually a winner. A winner can make anywhere between $500-$20000. If it was actually just a statistical fluke that it didn’t make a bunch of sales off the first $15 and I killed it too early I could literally have just lost $10000. That’s why I let myself bleed out a little bit more money just to make sure I’m not missing out on the winner, does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, it totally does, just curios, how big are these audiences and do you ever burn them out quickly?

Derek: All the time. How big are the audiences? Anywhere between, the smallest market I ever did, I’m happy to share what this market is. The smallest market I ever did was female space ship engineers.

Steve: Wow that is a really, okay, that’s like nothing.

Derek: Yeah, that market I think only had about 2000 people I could target on Facebook. I spent $3000 and I made $4000 back. It was a super high return on ad spend, but I burnt out the audience within a week or 2. The largest audience I think I targeted was 650000 people. I’d say anywhere between low thousands to high hundreds of thousands. I don’t think I have ever gone larger than a million.

Steve: Okay, It sounds like these t-shirts don’t really have lime a long life span, is that accurate?

Derek: That is probably accurate. I have heard of people, and I’m probably leaving money on the table by not doing this, but a lot of people will, once they burn out a design, by burn out I mean that the ad had a frequency of 2 and usually that’s when it stops working. When everyone in your industry has seen that t-shirt twice and hasn’t bought, that’s usually when you start losing money.

By what I have heard a lot of people doing is they would run the shirt and then 3 or 4 months afterwards they would run it again, and it would be profitable for them. Yeah, typically one t-shirt campaign will last anywhere between 1 week to 2 and a half weeks. That’s probably pretty standard.
Steve: Sounds like there is a ton of maintenance. You have to pump up out new creatives all the time and it sounds like you’re constantly turning these out every single couple of weeks. It’s not like you have a winner and you can ride it for a year longer, is that accurate?

Derek: Yeah, that’s accurate. You definitely can’t ride a winner for a year. That would be amazing but yeah.

Steve: Are you allowed to re-target. Does TeeSpring let you put pixels on the landing pages and stuff or …

Derek: Yeah, you can retarget.

Steve: Okay, so do you do that?

Derek: Yes, we are targeting otherwise really high, definitely recommended.

Steve: Did they let you gather emails?

Derek: No, but you can send emails to their customers through their systems. I do know other people who they put a landing page in front of the TeeSpring page. It will just be the image of the design and then put your email here to receive a $5 discount or whatever. Yeah if you want emails you’ll have to collect them yourself. There are other platforms. Teechip for example if you sell through their platform they will let you export all the emails from customers.

Steve: Did you go that route as well?

Derek: I didn’t, I just never … My impression of Teechip is that, they have worse printing and worse customer service, and for me the interface as the marketer was worse as well. I just didn’t want to do it.

Steve: I was just thinking that, if you had that landing page like you said that people do and what you gathered a list of like crazy female space ship engineers, you can continually pump out designs, and just email them to them, right?

Derek: Yeah, an actually I think a lot of the TeeSpring people are moving that way, and actually moving off of TeeSpring and starting their own Shopify stores. Selling t-shirts still, but in specific markets, building their own audiences and building more of a brand.

Steve: Everything is Facebook then. Google doesn’t sound like it would work that well, because people aren’t really searching for female space ship engineer t-shirts right?

Derek: Yeah, I haven’t heard of anyone doing this, but I think that Google display network could actually work. I never tested it. I did test Pinterest ads which actually converted pretty well but the volume was really low compared to Facebook ads. I was just, you couldn’t spend any money, but the money you could spend would return pretty well.

Steve: In terms of lookalike audiences, were you doing that as well?

Derek: Yeah, I found out look alike audiences off of clicks didn’t really help that much. Once we have enough buyers, which is usually about … Technically you need 200 buyers that show up in the Facebook pixel which means probably about 300 actual buyers. Once you have enough buyers to make a customer audience, and to create a lookalike audience, I found that does converts pretty well.

What worked best for me was using that lookalike audience and then just putting a broad keyword on top of it. Let’s say I was targeting fencing for example, people who fence, I would probably not just target fencing if I didn’t have a look alike audience, but if I had a look alike audience, I would just lay a really broad key word on top of it and that would work pretty well. I have heard of people just using them naked lookalike audience. Just look alike audience with no interest. That never tested well for me personally, but I have heard that can work pretty well as well.

Steve: When you start incorporating this stuff into your ads, you stared out with your 5 or 6 ad sets, when did you incorporate lookalikes into the mix?

Derek: That’s pretty late actually. The next step, once I have tested the campaign and it’s converting well, I’m starting to scale up, I will start checking on a day to day basis the breakdowns which is are male or females buying, what devices, what countries are they from, what regions of the country are they from, what age range etcetera.

This I’ll start checking by the time I’ve spent, probably by the time I’ve spent $50 because often times you will see it really early. You will see that I spent 50 bucks, I have made 9 sales, and literally all 9 of them are from women. That stuff, sometimes you see it early, sometimes it takes a few hundred dollars. For me to start using look alike audiences, I’m probably looking at least $1000 in ad spend before that really comes in play.

Steve: Okay, that’s like half the life cycle of your entire campaign right?

Derek: No, there are some campaigns that can get pretty high in spending.

Steve: Okay, let’s back up a little bit, when did you start refining your interest, at what point do you start doing that? Or the demographics I
should say.

Derek: I’d say by $40-$50 in spending. I won’t always be able to make any decisions at that point, but I’ll at least start looking at that point.

Steve: Okay, of the campaigns that have been successful, do you create a new ad set or do you just change the existing one?

Derek: I turn off the ones that are not making any money, and the ones that are making money, I will do 2 things. Often times I will break them out. Let’s say I have 6 magazines all on 1 ad set, I might turn off the magazines ad set or I might leave it running, and just break all the 6 of them into their individual ad sets, so I can see which magazine specifically are converting.

I will go look for more stuff as well like magazines. I’ll usually find all the magazines but if their websites for example. I might only have found the top 3 or 4 websites in the industry, but if I’m finding that websites are converting well, I might just go look for all 20 of them, and maybe only 9 of them will show up in Facebook ads as targetable. I will just go look for more of the same stuff that’s converting, if that makes sense.

Steve: In the case where it’s only females that are buying will you lay that on top of these existing ad sets?

Derek: Yeah

Steve: Interesting, and then, let’s say there was like 3 males and 7 females, would you still run the males like a lower spend?

Derek: If it’s profitable, yeah, just like if otherwise positive I will let it run, why not.

Steve: It sounds like a lot maintenance here. Are you using any tools, or are you using any tools to help maintain your Facebook ads, or was it all just power editor?

Derek: It’s power editor and Google spreadsheets.

Steve: Google spreadsheets wow, okay. I had this question written down here, what are the challenges with this model, and it seems pretty clear to me that it’s just really cut throat and you constantly have to be churning out stuff, because there’s not anything that is going to last a long time.

Derek: Yeah, I think that’s true, and I think if I were to do it again, I would definitely be building a store, I’d be collecting an email list. I would break off of TeeSpring. TeeSpring actually does fulfillment now. You can have a Shopify store and they’ll print for you. I would still probably have started with TeeSpring because I wouldn’t have known what markets were converting well for me, but by the time I knew what markets were converting I would have definitely moved away from selling on someone else’s platform and built my own.

Steve: Earlier you weren’t willing to reveal like that coach, or that really popular shit, does that imply that it’s still selling?

Derek: I thought about, I haven’t turned it back on, but I imagine that if I just re-ran the same design it would actually make few thousand dollars.

Steve: Okay, and there is hope, right? Once your 2 week campaign or whatever is over, you can just run it again at some future time, like during Christmas time, actually how much does seasonality play in this business?

Derek: I think it actually plays quite a lot. I don’t think, I think year round there is decency as always, but around Christmas is just ridiculous. We did over 100K in sales in a 30 day period, and people are just buying during that month. I think TeeSpring’s still are really a good business not around Christmas, but yeah there is definitely a huge bump around Christmas.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of just copying, do people just copy you over verbatim sometimes?

Derek: Yes.

Steve: Is there anything you can do about it?

Derek: On TeeSpring, yes. TeeSpring, email them and say, “Hey this is copyright infringement.” but there is so many platforms. There is, like I mentioned Teechip, Gearbubble. There is literally a dozen out there. The biggest 3 or 4 care about copyright, but the little ones, they don’t care. If you get knocked off and it’s on some random website with, not a strong legal team, I don’t think there is much you can do about it.

Steve: Okay, Derek, you mentioned that you stopped doing this a little under a year ago, what caused you to get out of this business, and what are you working on now?

Derek: What caused me to get out of the business was I don’t think I built my team in a stable and scalable way where I could not be doing a lot of the Facebook ads work. Basically I hired people around where I was living in Thailand, and a lot of them were travelers, a lot of them were entrepreneurs working on their own stuff. After a few months they would naturally leave and it was just really unstable, the team I built, and I decided to try and rebuild the team using Filipino virtual assistance.

I flew to the Philippines, I hired a couple of BAs and I trained them on how to use the system I was building, and it turned out that as soon as anything changed in Facebook ads or on TeeSpring, they have to be retrained over again because weren’t actually … They didn’t have a deep understanding of Facebook ads. Basically I made some mistakes in hiring and building the team.

The reason I closed it down, as we were talking about, to do this well we have to launch a ton of designs, it’s a ton of work. I was probably working 50-60 hours a week. I think by the time it was clear to me that the second team wouldn’t work out; I just didn’t have the energy to do it over again.

At the same time I had Amazon via supplements business that was starting to do pretty well, and I was working on another physical product. Design it from scratch and just, I had a lot of other things, some of them were starting to take off, and taking my attention, and I just decided, “You know what, it’s been a good run, but I don’t think I want to continue with the TeeSpring thing, and so dispose it.”

Steve: Have you found that FBA has been a lot less work for a greater return?

Derek: It’s so much less work, yeah. It’s literally the most passive income I have ever seen in my life.

Steve: Well, there is an endorsement for anyone out there listening. Private label stuff white label stuff on Amazon using FBA. Although supplements is pretty competitive, right?

Derek: Yeah, it is pretty competitive.

Steve: We don’t have that much time left, but is your strategy similar? Do you run Facebook ads for your stuff or are you … Is it just giveaways, how do you market your supplements?

Derek: Yeah it’s giveaways and Amazon PPC. Typically I do a little bit of over 20K a month. I’m not the biggest seller in the world. I’m actually, hopefully a lot of my products are ranked somewhere on the bottom of page 1, top of page 2. I’m not in crazy bidding wars for the top spot. I just launched products and I’m happy to be in the middle, if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah, you are like under the radar, so to speak. Making a pretty good income, especially since you like to travel to Asia all the time where the cost of living is really low.

Derek: For sure.

Steve: Cool man, hey Derek I learnt a lot about the t-shirt business today. I had no idea that so many people were making money selling t-shirts online. I thank you for that. If anyone has any questions for you, I don’t know if you have a blog or anything, but where can people find you?

Derek: I don’t have a blog, they could email me. I’m pretty open to email in general. My email is DerekPankaew@gmail.com.

Steve: Yeah, I’ll link that up, and hey Derek thanks a lot for your time, I really appreciate it.

Derek: Your welcome, it was my pleasure.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. In general when anyone comes up to me wanting to sell t-shirts online, I’m almost always 100% skeptical, but Derek clearly made it work, and it’s really interesting how you can leverage and base an entire business off of Facebook advertising.
For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode122. If you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.
And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.myifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

121: How To Start A Successful Ecommerce Conference On Your First Try With Steve Chou And Toni Anderson

121: How To Start A Successful Ecommerce Conference On Your First Try With Steve Chou And Toni Anderson

Today’s episode is a little different in that I’m not interviewing anyone on the show. Instead, I brought in my partner Toni Anderson to talk about how we launched The Sellers Summit, our ecommerce learning conference!

This was my first event ever and I discuss all of the little things that were involved in planning and running the event. If you plan on launching your own conference someday, our mistakes and successes may help you out!

I really loved every minute and I met so many new awesome people as well.

Right now, we are selling virtual passes to the conference for a limited time. Because our event sold out so quickly, many of you did not have the opportunity to attend.

So I’m doing my best to bring the event directly to you.

If you purchase a virtual pass by July 18, you will be invited to a live Q&A webinar where some of the speakers of the Sellers Summit will be present to answer your questions. It’s the closest thing to attending that I could think of without actually going.

Click Here To Grab Your Virtual Pass

What You’ll Learn

  • Our motivations for starting the Sellers Summit
  • How we sold out so quickly
  • Our strategy for making the attendees ecstatic
  • How we chose our speakers
  • What we did right and what we did wrong
  • How we chose the venue

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today is going to be a special episode because I’m not interviewing anyone on the show today. Instead, I brought my partner Toni Anderson on the podcast to talk about the Seller’s Summit, which was a conference that we both threw last month in Miami, Florida. It was my very first conference. I thought it would be interesting to talk about the planning, the preparations, the attention to detail and all of the ups and down involved in planning the event. First off, how are you doing today Toni? Thanks for taking the time to come on.

Toni: Thanks for having me again.

Steve: Yeah, and I wanted to talk about the motivation for the conference, because it was kind of funny. I did not want to do it in the beginning, because if you think about the conference in terms of just upfront risk and monetary reward, you got to put a lot of money upfront to do the conference and you don’t do a conference to make any money.

People have to travel, you got to sell tickets, you got to get sponsors, you got to book a venue, deal with logistics. It’s like planning a wedding all over again, not that I planned my wedding or anything, but still how did you convince me to do it? I knew I wanted to do it, but I can’t even remember what you said to me.

Toni: I think it was a consistent wearing down, wasn’t it? Through multiple meetings, over the fall of 2015?

Steve: Yeah, because there was a stretch when we were seeing each other. We saw each other for like a full week, right? Straight was it?

Toni: Yes. I think we saw each other in September at a conference, and then we saw each other again in October at 2 different conferences, and I think we just kept having that conversation over and over again about is it really worth it? Is it worth it for your brand; is it worth it for my time? What are the benefits truly at bottom-line for us to do this, because it was definitely a huge risk?

Steve: Just for listeners out there, Toni does wear on you and after a while you just want to give up and go commit suicide. Anyway sorry, so what were your motivations actually? I think I asked you this before, but I don’t even remember your answer because at the time you had just started getting into ecommerce, right?

Toni: Right. I had been– I started selling in May. When we were talking about this, I’d only been selling for 4 or 5 months. I think what appealed to me was being able to be on the planning team, or ownership team of an event, in a field that I didn’t have a lot connections in. I have a lot of connections in the marketing and social media world, but in the ecommerce world, I don’t really anybody but you, not anymore.

For me it was very appealing to be able to be a part of something where it would give me access to the thought leaders and people that are really making a big impact in that community, and it was a way to jump to the top pretty quickly. For me that was a huge appeal to be on that side of things.

Steve: If you consider me the top, that’s very sad.

Toni: Right, I have low standards though. Don’t worry.

Steve: Okay, all right. Good because you had been running conferences for the past 7 years, is that right?

Toni: Yeah, so I’ve been running blog, primarily blog conferences, marketing events for bloggers. This was a little bit different, and we were really trying to reach a totally different audience.

Steve: Just for my knowledge, why are you shifting away from the blogging crowd to ecommerce?

Toni: I really like ecommerce a lot better than I like blogging. I love blogging, it will always be something that I do, but the ecommerce was a way to step back a little bit I think if anybody out there is a blogger or has been in that world. You really have to put a lot of your personal life out there on a blog.

My kids are getting older and it was time to do something where they didn’t have to be front and centre all the time. My personal life didn’t have to be exposed. Ecommerce has got a lot of anonymity to it. That really appealed to me.

Steve: Yeah, I know for me, my motivations were I actually wanted to go and meet some of the people that were reading my blog or taking my class. I know for me, going to conferences had such a huge impact on my businesses, and in fact both my blog and my ecommerce store did not really start taking off until I started meeting other likeminded entrepreneurs.

I know my students were asking for this for such a long time. Thankfully Toni was there just nagging and nagging at me to do this, maybe nagging is not the right word Toni, I apologize. Pleasantly whispering in my ear that I should do this, and she actually gave me the courage to take the plunge because she had the experience of running these conferences for the past 7 years. You still there Toni?

Toni: I am.

Steve: Okay, not pissed, okay good. The first thing that we did, and I was really squeamish about this entire idea from the start actually. First thing that Toni suggested was, “Hey, why not just send out an email and have people sign up for a list just to confirm that the idea is a viable one.” What I did was I just put together a very quick and dirty landing page saying, “Hey, I’m thinking about putting on an event next year, and it’s going to be called,”– actually we didn’t even have a name.

It was basically ecommerce based conference. I just said, “Hey, sign up for this email list if you are interested.” I think that list just immediately got like a thousand people. From there I was like okay, maybe some people are interested in this, and maybe we can actually pull this off. Is there anything else that you said to me, I can’t remember to kind of convince me that was going to work?

Toni: I think we said whenever you agree to put up that landing page, I think we said, if we can get a thousand people to sign up, we can move forward. I think that was our number because we felt like, we wanted the conference to be really small. I know we are going to talk about that later. We felt like a thousand people when you think about who’s actually going to commit and do it, that was a good number. Then I think we got a thousand really quickly. I think that sort of for you was enough to push you, push you to actually doing it.

Steve: Yeah. How does that usually translate though just curious? Like what percentage of people who go on an interest list actually end up signing up in your experience?

Toni: I mean, I would say probably 5% or less. It shows the interest I think is the big thing. Is there people even willing to like give us that information of, “Yeah we are interested in getting marketed to for the event?” I thought a thousand, because that doesn’t include actually marketing it, right or doing advertising, or getting speakers involved, getting them marketing it for us as well, or word of mouth kind of thing. I think that’s why we picked that thousand number.

Steve: Okay, then, I forgot to mention some of my other motivations for doing the conference. I actually really like interacting with other entrepreneurs, and so having a conference was also an excuse for me to invite other more successful entrepreneurs to actually come and speak, and then we could actually hangout for a weekend and really get to know these people. In fact, that was how I met Toni. We met at World Domination Summit. I want to say it was at 2013 or through 2012.

Toni: I think it was 13.

Steve: 2013. When I first met Toni, like never in a million years would I have thought that I would be working with her, not because of anything negative or anything, but it was just like a random meeting. You were in the blogging space, mainly catering to mums, would you say?

Toni: Yeah.

Steve: Here I was running about entrepreneurship. It’s just really random. All these connections and the people that you meet over the years, just somewhat randomly may become your business partner some day. That was another motivation that I forgot to mention.

Toni: Right, and I think 2, it helped that we had just come off this conference circuit last fall where we had been to conference after conference after conference. I think when we were at the final conference; we met Daniel Solid who ended up speaking at Seller’s Summit. I think having that fresh in our minds of just thinking like,” Wow, we’ve been in this thing for 4 days or 3 days.” However long it was and we’ve already made all these connections with people that we probably would have never crossed paths with outside of being at the event. I think that was a huge motivator. Two, just being right in that experience and then making the decision soon after that.

Steve: Here’s actually a little known fact about me. I have never really worked with anyone in a partnership capacity before, because I like to do things myself. I use contractors to do different things. This was actually the first time that I ever partnered with anyone on anything. The reason why I felt comfortable with Toni was because if she could hang out with me for multiple days like 24/7 and not go crazy then I figured that it might work.

Toni: I think that’s a compliment, I’m not sure.

Steve: It means you have a high tolerance.

Toni: I have a high tolerance.

Steve: One of the top questions actually that people kept asking me even during the ticket sales and everything was why we actually chose the venue that we did. The Seller Summit was held in Miami, Florida. The way this worked was, I went up to Toni and said,” Hey, can you just do some research on different venues, and then get back to me with a short list.” I relied on Toni to steer me in the right direction. Really this is a question for you Toni. How did we narrow down the venue list?

Toni: A city or the hotel or both.

Steve: Both. Let’s start with the city actually.

Toni: Yeah, I think we had a conversation and we had some cities in mind. Unfortunately, or fortunately, with the conference, you’ve got to keep in mind what does that city bring as far as the hotel pricing, airport proximity to hotels, things like that. I mean, we had some great locations that were 45 minutes from the airport.

People that are flying and don’t want to pay for a 45 minute cab drive or rent-a-car. You’ve got to think about the attendees and what they are willing to pay, and obviously being conscious of their budgets. Miami came to the top because the rooms were affordable, and their proximity to the airport was under 20 dollar cab ride which was kind of the goal for the location.

I think we had it narrowed down to 3 or 4 cities at the end, but Miami just worked the best with the international airport, the walk-ability of the location, the hotel that we were at. This year you could walk to just about any restaurant you wanted to go to. Once you flew in, you didn’t need a car which was really nice. We did have a majority of the people attend from outside of the Miami area.

I think that that plays a big part of making those decisions, because you know people are going to spend money on a ticket and a flight and a hotel. You are trying to minimize their cost once they get there by giving them restaurant options, and not having to do the car thing and things like that. It’s Miami, it’s a fun city. I think for people that don’t live in Florida, it’s a tourist … It’s a place where it’s like, “Hey I can combine this, maybe I’ll bring my spouse. We can add an extra day, go to the beach something like that.” That was appealing too I think about the Miami location.

Steve: The other thing that we forgot to mention also is that we pretty much decided we were going to launch this conference in November, which didn’t give a whole lot of time. Initially, we were actually even planning on having a conference in April. We actually launched over Thanksgiving which is, from what you told me, it sounds like a really bad time to launch, right, over Thanksgiving?

Toni: I think when we are trying to get ecommerce folks to pay attention to us, we launch black Friday. That’s probably not the best, probably not the best time to get anybody’s attention, because I wasn’t paying attention myself and I’m running the thing. Yeah, I think we launched at a tough time just because I know for me I was focused on maxing my sales out for that month. I know you were super busy and you guys were running out of stock too.

I think for a lot of– it was a tough time, but it was also good because people were bringing a lot of income at that time too. They did have some extra money and thinking maybe end of year expenses type of thing. Deciding how to, it’s pros and cons, but it was definitely tough just to get people’s attention during that last quarter of the year.

Steve: Yeah, I think what were the other venues we were considering? I think Denver, Austin …

Toni: I think those were the 3. Miami, Denver and Austin. Austin is just with South by Southwest, it’s just too expensive. It’s not affordable for attendees to basically get rooms. Denver I think the weekends that we could find availability were still maybe in their winter season, I mean Denver can get a snowfall in May.

Steve: Yeah, there was a conference like a week before ours and there were snowfalls the entire time.

Toni: Right. I think that for us was a pretty big risk. I know that I did a conferencing in Colorado Springs in July, and we had people straying on the runway in Denver with the freak weather issue. I think it’s tough. Denver is a tough spot with weather, but obviously it’s a great location too. I think had we been able to work out the dates that would have been a definite contender.

Steve: I know for me, I wanted to go to a place that I had never been to in the past. I really like hot weather and beach kind of atmosphere. Miami kind of stood out to me because right near the water, it was very walk-able from the hotel through all the restaurants. There are some really good restaurants there including that Italian place we went to. Then people could just head over the beach if they wanted to afterwards. A lot of people actually took their spouses.

Toni: Which I think was great because we did offer like a networking spouse pass. The spouse could explore [inaudible 00:14:37] during the day, and then attend the networking event at night which I know people appreciated being able to introduce their spouse to other people at their meeting. There was multiple connections going on there too.

Steve: But outside the venue, really the goals for the conference for me at least, and I go to like maybe 5 or 6 conferences every year, and a lot of times when I go to a conference I hear people get up there like the speakers and they talk about their success stories. A lot of times their stories are very inspiring, but what ends up happening is I’ll head home super inspired to take action. Then that inspiration just wears off after a couple of weeks.

My vision for the conference is that I wanted to cut down on the inspirational stuff, and then focus more on the actionable items. I didn’t want all the speakers to come to my conference and talk about their success stories. I wanted to make it very small and intimate and have kind of like a teaching environment. You were completely on the same page right Toni, because your previous conferences were the same way?

Toni: Absolutely and I just … I know we met at World Domination Summit which is a very fun event, but every talk at World Domination is inspirational, which …

Steve: Yeah, actually the World Domination Summit was like the anti Seller Summit I would say, right?

Toni: Yeah, which it’s a great event, but it’s absolutely the opposite of what I think we both thought would be best in the ecommerce world. Because I think the people that we wanted to attend already were inspired to start something. Or at least begin the research process whether they were researching a product or … They needed those practical like,” Hey I’m stuck in the importing process. Or I’m stuck with the … Okay I have the Amazon sales, but I don’t know how to do that to my own website.” We really wanted to help people get unstuck from whatever step they were in the process.

Steve: Yes, a lot of the speakers including my speech that I gave was a step by step that walked you through certain things. That was the information that I wanted to be given at the event. It’s funny and I went actually back and watched some of the recordings of some of the speakers. Part of the beginning of their speeches they said,” Hey Steve told me to cut down on the inspirational stuff and focus more on the actionable stuff. So I’m just going to … this is the only slide that I’m giving that’s going to talk about my background. Let’s jump into the good stuff now.”

Toni: Yeah I saw that too in editing, most people spend very little time talking about these things.

Steve: Which sounds terrible, but …

Toni: I think and actually sometimes now I think I have watched almost every talk for a second time. It’s amazing what I missed even just sitting in there because there was so much information given in some of those talks. Most of the talks where I didn’t have a baseline knowledge. It was really helpful to be able to sit in front of my computer and have my notebook out, and be able to freeze the frame. I’m going to implement this right this minute because now I’m basically sitting in a college lecture kind of thing.

Steve: Yeah, and that’s actually one of the main reasons why I insisted on getting everything recorded. Now not every conference would do this, but I think in a teaching sort of conference it’s important to get the recordings so that everyone can watch a lecture over and over again to get all the finer points of what was pointed out. I remember actually when we were talking about this, we were planning. I asked you, “Hey how much would it cost to just record everything and have an AV person in every room?” Then I think you quoted some insane costs, right?

Toni: I did. I think I said a lot that was probably my …

Steve: Yes and I was like, “Well how much is a lot? Like we have to have this, and then yeah.” Ultimately it was important to me. We ate the cost on that. I think it is important for any conference especially a content focused sort of conference to have video recording. That was another thing that we wanted to make sure that we invested in.

Toni: I agree and I think going back and looking through even the slide decks of our speakers those slides were so content rich, that to be able to have those and go back through them because while they were speaking obviously you were getting a great overview and you were understanding the principles behind what they were talking about. Being able to go back and actually read those slides and see the detail on a lot of them. A lot of them were screenshots of different parts of the process, which for me I’m a visual learner, so it’s very helpful to go back and be able to look at those.

Steve: I mean the other goal too is we sent out a couple of surveys once people bought tickets. We noticed that some people were beginners, and then some people were experienced sellers. I don’t know … Do you remember the breakdown actually ultimately of what the experience versus the beginners were?

Toni: I think we had about 25% of the attendees were full time sellers. Like this was their primary job. About 50% were either selling or … Selling but not to the point where they felt they had a viable business. It was … There was another 25% they were in the middle like maybe they never planned on quitting their full time job, and this was going to be a side thing. We were probably 50, 25-25 at the end of the day.

Steve: Yeah, and so that compelled … Originally we were just going to do a single track which meant everybody would watch every single lecture like the same way. Once we got the survey results, and we realized that we needed to divide it up into 2 distinct tracks. One catering specifically to beginners, and then another tracks catering to the more advanced people.

Toni: Right, I think when we started we thought we would get all beginners.

Steve: Yeah, actually that was the case and that was just kind of this misconception I had about my list. I didn’t realize that there were so many experienced guys who were coming to the conference.

Toni: Yeah, which I thought it was fun. I thought it was fun to have a nice mix of people, because it was fun to see them make the connections at the event. Even people that weren’t speakers, but the people who were there that were experienced sellers were able to mentor some of the less experienced. I know Ryan Gourmande, am I saying his name correctly? He met up with I can’t think of that guy’s name that sold the trigger kits.

Steve: Oh yes I don’t remember his name either, but there was 2 guys on trigger kits actually yeah.

Toni: I noticed like their connection. They really hit it off throughout the event and were able to pass knowledge back and forth to each other. I saw a lot of that. They just happen to be sitting in the front row on most of the talks. I noticed them but yeah I noticed that a lot which was cool to see everybody that was there I think was really valuable. Even if they were a new seller they maybe had a background in something else that was able to provide benefit in a different topic for other attendees.

Steve: So what I really liked about the conference was from working with you was there was a lot of attention to detail. For me at least my only request was that one of my pet peeves for going to your conference is I always lose the conference schedule. After fumbling through my bag pack and looking for the schedule. I know I wanted the schedule on the name tag. That was my only requirement, but you actually thought of a whole bunch of other things that were really detailed oriented that I probably wouldn’t have thought of. You want to mention some of those things?

Toni: Yes, so I think the schedule, the schedule and the name tag is something I have done at previous events. It’s always met with like, “Oh thank you so much, I never can keep track of a schedule.” I can’t keep track of a room key. I mean I love having the schedule on the back of the name tag, I think it makes it easy to figure out where you are going.

I think another thing that was good is that we gave a detailed account of what the talks were going to be about before the talks. So that people didn’t just show up and then feel panicky. They had 12 hours to make a decision about what session they were going to that they had the ability to plan out their event before they got there. I think another thing that I really liked and I don’t know if this is much attention to detail but is all of our speakers were very available to our attendees.

Which to me I have been to events where the speaker shows up, gives the talk and leaves. To me that was one of the most important things about this conference was that we needed to make sure that our speakers were going to be very available for the attendees and willing to sit down. One of the things that we did that was helpful for that was that we all ate lunch together every day. The lunch was in the hotel. People didn’t have to leave which meant you had more time to eat and talk to people, because you weren’t rushing out to try to find a place to eat. Then people were able to make those connections at lunch. I think the tables sat 8 or 10 people, but it allowed … By the end of the first day you could already see friendships form.

That was really nice that we gave people a lot of opportunities to hang out with each other. We did the networking events every night. That was really another opportunity. They met at lunch and then they could meet up again at night or you could talk to new people. Our speakers for the most part attended all of that with the attendees. Our sponsors did too which was really important for us as well.

We wanted them to be a part of this too because it’s great for the sponsors to have a table and they can go up and talk to them. It’s really nice to just be able to sit down and have a conversation at lunch and not have this pressured sales pitch. Or just like, “Hey I’m just going to meet you and talk about my family or we are going to talk about what I do.” Then you develop this relationship with somebody as opposed to this shake hands, pass a business card out and then never talk to them again.

Steve: Here is what I noticed. The first day everyone was … At the first mix everyone was super stiff. Like, “Hi, my name is whatever.” But the second day like everyone was a lot looser and by like the third day everyone was like hugging each other. Like they knew each other for years, which was really fun to actually see.

One thing that you forgot to mention that I actually noticed was I liked how you structured the conference in such a way that we had like our own little private nook of the hotel. I have been to conferences where you have to actually walk 5 minutes to get to the next room if you want to attend a session. Everything was just really close to each other. There was no way to avoid the other attendees. We had our own little private nook together.

Toni: Yeah and I think that was another factor in why we picked that hotel, was that not every hotel is set up to be able to do that. And you are right that made it really nice, because one it cut down on the time people had to spend trying to get where they needed to go. Then two they really weren’t able to leave each other, which I think is a good thing for them unless you are a total introvert, then I apologize.

Steve: Well see that’s where open bar comes in. I insisted on open bar every single night, because in my experience when I go to conferences that’s where the good stuff comes out. You start to … You are having a couple of beers with someone that you just met, and you talk about your businesses. Then before you know it a lot of sensitive information gets leaked out there, and so that’s why I insisted on it.

Toni: Your next job will be with the CIA.

Steve: Of course I don’t drink anything during these events, I just pry for information. The other thing that was important also was we wanted to keep it small, right? Because I have gotten lost at big events where I just end up hanging out with the people that I already know. When you keep it small that kind of fosters networking and encourages people to reach out to new people.

Toni: Well I think too when you have it small is that you can’t avoid people. Well not that you would want to avoid people, but you see the same people over and over again all day. At some point you have to introduce yourself, because it gets awkward that you haven’t because you are bumping into them getting coffee, or you are sitting next to them in 2 sessions or then you’re at lunch. I think the smallness, when you are at a conference … World Domination was what? 3,000 people the year we were there.

Steve: Yeah, that’s a lot of people.

Toni: As soon as I met you and the people I was with I was like I’ll never meet anybody else. I have my people, I don’t have to meet anybody else because I have them and I never saw the same people again. That’s really how … That’s what tends to happen at those bigger events and the smaller events, you can’t avoid people, once again sorry to the introverts.

Steve: I thought the introverts did pretty well at the conference to be honest with you.

Toni: I did too and you know why? We got feedback about this from several attendees is that we had that Facebook group, that pre-event Facebook group that allowed people to introduce them. We had … I think we even had an introduce yourself thread and I think Scott Volker came in and said, “Hey tell me about your business.”

We had a lot of speakers in there saying,” Hey give me some feedback about, this is what I’m talking about what do you want to learn?” I think that was really valuable especially for people that aren’t … I mean I am a mastered extrovert, but I still think it’s hard to just walk up to somebody I don’t know at all and introduce myself, so …

Steve: Well that’s what I did with you at the World Domination Summit if I recall.

Toni: Yeah it is, yeah but I think having that Facebook group you had a face with a name. You had already interacted with them online. If some of the people shared rides from the airport … By the time they got to Miami and to the hotel it didn’t feel like you were talking to strangers. It felt like you already had some sort of relationship with these people even if it was online, it didn’t feel as awkward.

Steve: Yeah and speaking of the speakers, I was very careful in choosing the people who were going to speak at the conference. I basically only wanted to get specialists. People who were focused on a very specific topic and knew it inside and out, for example I had Spencer Hawes talk about SEO. That’s pretty much what he is done in his internet career.

Scott Volker from the Amazing Seller really focused on Amazon selling, launching products and that sort of thing. Greg Mercer he runs Jungle Scout. He’s got this tool that helps people do research and that’s like all he does. He is also a very successful Amazon seller as well. Every single person was hand selected to actually cover a very specific topic in deep depth, and so yeah.

Toni: I think that was a positive, but conference logistic wise it makes it tough.

Steve: Why is that?

Toni: Well because if you have a talk, let’s think Erick. Erick did a talk on Gmail ads, right? That was his talk. So you are devoting 50 minutes to Gmail ads. That’s a lot of time. If you get a generalist up there they are going to talk about 7 things in 15 minutes and you can check all these boxes. The problem is you don’t get any real information on any of those 7 things, you get very cursory.

I think to me I love when everyone is a specialist, because then … I walked out of Curt’s Google analytics talk with my mind blown. I have already re-watched his talk 3 times. There was so much information in there for me in that one talk, super valuable. It’s almost like taking a course in Google analytics just to go to the one talk. It’s tough because you are then trying to cram in all this really great information in 48 hours which is basically what you have for the event.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely I mean I was ending up taking notes myself on a lot of these talks. Jeff Cowen … Amazon changes all the time, and Jeff gave an awesome talk on how to rank your products on Amazon, which kind of blew me away. Daniel Sarlad’s talk about how he runs his Amazon business blew me away. There was like 2 or 3 points on there that I didn’t even know people were doing out there. It was just nice that all the speakers were so open in revealing some of the secrets to their success.

Toni: Yeah, I was surprised at them. I was surprised that they were more willing to share the fact that they shared, but I thought it was awesome that they did.

Steve: Yeah totally, and then Lars with the whole sourcing thing. Lars is like my go to guy for product sourcing, and then Dru is just an amazing person when it comes to email and just marketing because he’s worked with so many different companies. It was incredible how everyone was willing to share so much stuff, and we’ve got it all on recording now, which is pretty cool.

Okay, so one thing I was also wanted to mention was– that worked really well for us was the VIP passes that we offered. For people who were willing to pay a little bit extra, we had a couple of special events just for VIP people. The thing that worked the best for the VIP customers were, we offered these 30 minutes one on one consults.

I knew in my experience at least teaching my class is that even though you might have all the information from the sessions and that sort of thing, there is always going to be questions that you have that are very specific towards your business. Perhaps you might have a question that is very specific to a certain thing that you might be selling, and by offering these consults, it allowed the attendees to ask very specific questions about their businesses that we could help them out with.

Toni: Yeah, and I think we got a lot of feedback from them telling us how valuable that was to their business. On top of that I think you are right, being able to … Because the reality is you don’t have time, Scott Walker doesn’t have time, Greg Mercer, all these guys that did our one on ones for the VIPs, they can’t be taking one on one consults on a regular basis. It’s obviously not scalable.

Steve: Yes, it is not.

Toni: I think for them to be able … I think and you did this in your office hours sometimes where it was just to ask me anything. I think those are so valuable because sometimes you get to a point, you and I had this conversation in a day where I was trying to set up a listing, and I was having issues, and I said I would pay so much money for someone to just tell me how to do this right now.

Steve: I recall asking for a 1,000 bucks, but you didn’t pay me anything.

Toni: Oh sorry, you also didn’t tell me how to do it.

Steve: Well, you didn’t pay me.

Toni: I think for some people, just being able to have that face time with someone who’s seen a lot of success in a certain area, and I think one of the things with the VIPs is we had them doing this survey and said, “Hey what is your biggest pain point?” Then we really tried to be purposeful in who we paired them up with. If someone had a problem with SEO, they were getting with Spencer, I mean that was just a done deal. If someone wants to do Amazon they are getting Greg or Scott or Jeff.

We tried to be really get … Treg was trying to do more with drop shipping and so we paired him up with Andrew. I think that that was really helpful that we tried to get them what the person is going to give them the most bank for their buck during that time. I think just having that ability to ask, ask Scott anything you want to ask him, most people don’t have that opportunity.

Steve: Yeah, and all the speakers, they were just so generous with their time. Some of these sessions went over 30 minutes, and it didn’t really matter. I’m just very grateful for everyone who took part in that.

Toni: Absolutely, and I know we had Michael Jackness, who wasn’t even a speaker at the event, although easily could have been a speaker. He was connecting with these people before the events. I think there was so much of that with the speaker just really investing in those VIP people, and they were investing in everybody at the conference, but they take that extra time, and a lot of them had to move their travel schedule, or they weren’t going out to dinner because they were with somebody. I think that was really valuable, and I’m very appreciative that they were able to take the time and do that.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. What’s funny is that, what ended up happening is that we ended up selling out our tickets over the holidays pretty much, and demand ended up being just so high for these tickets, but we wanted to keep it small, and so we ended up with a the sold out conference way ahead of time. I want to switch gears a little bit now and just talk about what worked well at the conference from both of our perspectives, and what did not work so well. We already talked a lot about the good stuff already, what needed work in your opinion?

Toni: Well I think one of the things, and we heard this from some attendees too was that, I think we gave a people a ton of networking time, but the evening networking was really loud, and part of it was the room size … We had planned to have it outside and then the weather wasn’t cooperating with us every night. Part of it was that I think maybe at an outside space the noise would have disappeared a little bit more, but people were definitely yelling to have a conversation, and that’s not ideal. I mean it’s like that awkward when you are yelling and then the music stops and you are still yelling.

Steve: Well it’s funny; we didn’t have any music either. It was just pure talking noise.

Toni: Yeah, so there wasn’t really … There was no background sound just people, which you know part of me is like when I walk into a room and it’s really loud, I’m happy because it means everyone is talking, but then you feel bad because that, I think you and I both stopped on this second, the first real morning our boys were already going from talking so much. One of them was just coming out that you don’t normally talk that much in real life, but then also just having to talk at this other volume to be heard.

I think the amount of networking we gave people was awesome. Could it have been … Is there a way you do where people don’t feel like they are yelling? Maybe it’s different spacing, maybe it’s … Who knows, but I think that that would be something we can definitely do a better job of next year.

Steve: Yeah, and then I was thinking also that maybe we can do something for maybe the introverts. A little bit more just to maybe like pair them up ahead of time with other people who they can hang out with at the conference. I don’t know, I’m not an introvert, so it’s a little hard to relate, but I don’t know, what do you think?

Toni: I do, I’m not– but I asked on Facebook after the conference, I said, “Hey introverted friends.” Because I apparently have a lot of them. What makes you feel more comfortable? For us, I think you are willing to walk up to me in the middle of Portland square, you don’t know who I am and just interrupt me and to meet me, and I’m willing to do the same too, but for most people that would be terrifying if you are not an extrovert.

A lot of things we did and I think we did accidently, like did the Facebook group. We didn’t do the Facebook group because we thought we have a bunch of introverts. We just did the Facebook group because we thought it would be fun people to connect, but it helped a lot of people in the end to connect.

I think be more purposeful in that. Trying to really think about like, “Hey if I may be talking to some of our attendees from this past year, how can we make it more comfortable, how do we get you connected earlier.” I think there is a lot of things we can do to help people feel like they are coming in already a part of something.

Steve: That’s a good segway into what I wanted to talk about next which was kind of tips on getting the most out of the time in the conference. There are some conference super stars, and I just wanted to give a shout out to Barry real quick. Barry, like pretty much documented the entire conference on the Facebook group, and he immediately stood out for at least me, because there was no way I was leaving that conference without knowing Barry.

Toni: Yeah, for sure, I think he did a really good job of just connecting with just about everybody. It’s just like every night in the Facebook group after the conference was over, I would see a post from Barry saying, “Hey, I’m at the pool, on my computer, who want to join me?” My room overlooked the pool, so I’m like opening my curtain and there was like 15 people at the pool and they were with Barry. He did a really good job of making the effort to meet people and get out there and definitely, I think everybody knew Barry by the end of the conference which is awesome.

Steve: I also want to give a special thanks to William who took so many wonderful photos of the conference, and he stood out to me also because he was just so selfless. I want to say that, he was taking shots and not paying attention to some of the sessions. So big thanks.

Toni: I think, and we had several attendees, I know Cindy. One of our attendees was just very, “Do you need any help? Is everything good? Is there anything I can get for you? Do you need coffee? Do you need water?” There were several attendees like her that just came with another one, “Hey, how is it going? How are you doing?” Not just, you know can we turn the air conditioning up or down although we should have been able to do that more often in some of those rooms.

I think that’s another way to set yourself out, and just offer help. I don’t think, obviously people are buying a ticket and paying to attend, so I’m not saying you need to go and work, but it definitely appear if you say, “Hey, can I send you the photos I took?” “Sure, I’d love it even if they are in your iPhone; we would love to have as much.” You and I have time to take the photos.”

Another thing too and you stressed this a lot in your keynote, and I think we pushed it in some of the emails, but introduce yourself to the speakers. I mean people get a little star struck sometimes at conferences, and they don’t want. I think if someone even came up to you and was like, “I can’t believe I’m meeting you.” And it’s like as someone who …

Steve: I think I turned around I was like, “Are you talking to me?”

Toni: I’m like I know him; it’s not that big of a deal. I get that way with certain people, so I know that it’s just common to– because these are people you’ve probably followed online or listened to their podcasts, or read their blog or whatever space that they’re in, so to meet them it’s kind of, “Oh, I’m meeting one of my idol or someone I look up to.” They are all just really just normal gootsy people.

I think when you go, introduce yourself to definitely the speakers, but it’s really as many people as you can, and I think the connecting in the Facebook group a lot of people, got in there and shared their story. Then when you get there, you have a connection with someone else who is there, like “Oh, I like to rescue pets too, or I live in the Pacific North West.” Or whatever the connection is, you’ve got this immediate … I’m with the person we were there, we were there at the … The little unofficial event, we were at the bar.

Steve: The warrior’s game, yes.

Toni: Yes, and I was taught … Nick was there talking and all of a sudden I heard him say something about sports center, and I was like, okay we have a connection, we can talk about sports. I think you look for those ways to have …

Steve: I think he regretted that decision, but yeah.

Toni: He did, I’m sorry …

Steve: He probably talked to zero off.

Toni: I think you got to look for those commonalities because it might not be, you might think to look at somebody and think we got nothing in common, but then once you start talking to them, you realize that there’s a lot more, and yeah there is probably some ways you can partner. I think we had people talking about partnerships.

Steve: Actually, it did happen. I just can’t remember the names off head, but oh I think I know what happened. There was a product, and I think it was Nick’s product, but Daniel was thinking about selling the same thing, so now they are partners.

Toni: Okay, yeah but you don’t know that until you have that initial,” Hey I listened to Mike and Mike too.”

Steve: Yeah, I just want to give a special thanks to Mike Jackness also, so technically he wasn’t a speaker, he was just an attendee, but man, he was dropping knowledge bombs left and right, and there was swaves of attendees just hurdled around him like soaking in all his knowledge, so that was pretty awesome.

Toni: I think that was really helpful to have people like Mike that weren’t there as a speaker, but were really willing to mentor other attendees.

Steve: Yeah, totally. Yes, because the tickets sold out so fast over the holidays. I think they sold out in like the middle or end of February, that left like a good 3 months of people who were just hammering us for tickets, and unfortunately we didn’t have any left to sell because we wanted to keep the events so small, and so I thought about this for a long time and what I ended up thinking about was offering all the sessions out as a virtual pass with a little bonus.

Instead of you guys having to come to Florida to attend the conference, I thought that I would try to bring the conference to you, and so an as an added value, we are going to start releasing these virtual passes where you can get access to all the recordings, but I have actually talked with some of the other speakers who spoke at the Seller’s Summit, and we are going to go ahead and do a live Q&A webinar for anyone who decides to purchase a virtual pass.

Toni: Yeah, along with the live Q&A that we going to have with some off our Seller’s Summit speakers, we also have a Facebook group dedicated to virtual pass holders, so that way you can connect and network with other virtual pass holders, and hopefully learn something in that group, build relationships, be able to network, possibly find a partnership. That’s a huge value add to be able to have those conversations in a meaningful way with people that are all trying to do the same thing which is sell online. We have that; we also have MP3 recordings, right Steve?

Steve: Yes, that’s correct. A lot of times people want to, thanks to this whole podcast boom, a lot of people like to listen to their stuff on the go, and that’s why we are offering high definition videos in addition to the MP3, so you can consume the content in any way that you want. Here is a couple of things I just want to share. All of the sessions at the conference are just very practical and actionable tips. I just want to mention Ryan Gomidy. He actually came to my Google shopping session, and he said that one session paid for itself, because I went into such detail on how I run my profitable campaigns online.

Toni: We are including all of these Seller Summit sessions in 2016 will be in this virtual pass along with the MP3s which Steve mentioned as well as all of the slide decks from the speakers. That will give you the opportunity to go to those decks, grab the information from the slide decks, and really help you take a deep dive into some of the session topics that we presented there.

Steve: After you’ve gotten the chance to go through all the videos, we will go ahead and schedule that live Q&A session with the speakers, to answer any questions that you might have had on any of the given sessions.

Toni: Who is going to be there? Who is doing the Q&A?

Steve: So right now we have Greg Mercer, we have Scott Walker and we have Mike Jackness. Depending on– what I’m going to do is I’m going to actually survey everyone who purchases, and ask them which questions they have, and depending on the questions, I might go ahead and invite the appropriate people to come in and answer those questions.

Toni: Awesome.

Steve: It’s not set in stone, but the virtual pass is going to be offered at sellersummit.com/virtualpass. If you’re interested in getting access to the sessions and the live Q&A session, go to that URL and go ahead and sign up. Once again that’s sellerssummit.com/virtualpass all one word. All right Toni thanks a lot for coming on. I know that the running a conference has been just a tremendous experience for me, and I’m very thankful that I met you, and you nagged and pounded me into submission to actually start this thing, and we are definitely going to have another Seller’s Summit next year for sure.

Toni: Yes, I think I have a contract on your desk, don’t I?

Steve: Yes, you do and we are probably going to discuss it right now because there is a large upfront cost, and I always get nervous about all this stuff, but I think I’m a little more confident this year that we will be able to have another successful event.

Toni: I think so.

Steve: All right, take care Toni.

Toni: Bye.

Steve: There you have it, a behind the scenes look at how Toni and I started my very first conference the Seller’s Summit, which ended up being a huge success. And if you are interested in getting access to the session videos, please go to sellerssummit.com/virtualpass. Once again we will be offering that live Q&A session with some of the other speakers to answer all of your questions live and in person.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode121. If you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.myifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

120: How To Rank In Amazon And The Right Way To Solicit Reviews With Jeff Cohen of Seller Labs

How To Rank In Amazon And Get Legit Reviews With Jeff Cohen of Seller Labs

Today I’m thrilled to have Jeff Cohen on the show. Jeff is someone I met at the Import Summit last year and he’s the director of business management over at Seller Labs.

Chances are if you are selling on Amazon, you’re probably using one of their awesome tools. For example, Feedback Genius which is a tool I use heavily, is a must have tool that automates the acquisition of customer reviews.

And they have other awesome tools like Snag Shout which help you gather additional reviews and discover profitable products to sell on Amazon. All of these tools have tens if not hundreds of thousands of users and they are awesome.

Anyway, I wanted Jeff on the show today because he has access to a lot of Amazon data and works deeply with a wide variety of Amazon sellers. In other words, he follows the industry closely and knows a ton about what’s going on.

What You’ll Learn

  • How they come up with the idea for their software.
  • The current review landscape on Amazon. Are paid reviews ok to have?
  • The strategies that used to work on Amazon but should be avoided today.
  • What successful sellers are doing to launch their products.
  • The best practice for feedback emails and what’s working today

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Jeff Cohen on the show. Now Jeff is someone who I met at the import summit last year, and he is the director of business management over at Seller Labs. Now chances are if you were selling on Amazon you were probably using one of their awesome tools. So for example Feedback Genius is a tool that I use heavily, and it’s a must have tool that automates the acquisition of customer reviews. And they have other awesome tools like Snagshout and Scope which help you gather additional reviews and discover profitable products to sell on Amazon.

Now all these tools have tens if not hundreds of thousands of users and they are awesome. But anyway I wanted Jeff on the show today, because he has access to a lot of Amazon data, and he works deeply with a wide variety of Amazon sellers. In other words he follows the industry very closely, and he knows a ton of what’s going on. And with that welcome to the show Jeff, how are you doing today man?

Jeff: Great Steve, thanks for having me, thanks for setting me up. I guess I have a lot to live up to now; I’m going to try to deliver.

Steve: Yes, so before we begin give us the quick background story and tell us how Seller Labs got started, and kind of how you guys all came with the idea of Amazon automation software.

Jeff: Yeah, so if you go back into the history of Seller Labs our two co-founders were working on a physical product business. So they were buying books at retail auction, so all the books and products that literally fall off of the truck and never get delivered to you by USPS ended up in a warehouse outside of Atlanta Georgia. And they would do auctions on a weekly basis, and Brandon and Paul kind of got started in the industry doing some online arbitrage with books, and then got into buying physical books from the USPS auction.

And I think when they started it was out of the basement of their house which quickly grew into about 3000 or 4000 square foot storage locker, which within about six months grew into a 10,000 square foot warehouse. And from auction they were really buying everything from books to batteries, to lagos [ph], to precious metals, right? So you…

Steve: These aren’t textbooks right, these are book books?

Jeff: No, they weren’t — so we — they kind of got started in the textbooks space, but it was also regular dollar books. Text books obviously have a higher profit margin.

Steve: Sure.

Jeff: Yeah, but it was everything from that to precious medals. And the USPS auction was really fun and people that kind of were involved in the internet back in those days, they didn’t knew how this worked, but you walked into a huge warehouse right. And everything was in gaylords [ph] and for those that don’t know what a Gaylord is imagine like a wood skid with like a four foot wall all around it, and then inside that wall is just piled with stuff right?

And you walked around and everything was in lots, and so you couldn’t see anything beyond the top layer of that box. So you had to like make this educated guess as to the retail, or online value of the box that you were going to buy and then you bid on it. And the more boxes you bought the better you got it estimating their cost and such like that.

And Brandon is a programmer by nature, and so he was programming all of our inventory and shelving, and deciding what went into FBA and what stayed at our warehouse. And we had this problem, and the problem was that we would properly describe books, but we would still get negative seller feedback. And so Brandon was trying to solve a problem of how do I get seller feedback on my good books, because I only seem to get negative feedback on my bad books.

And that was really the initial build of Feedback Genius was solving that problem, so that we could target messages specifically based on condition type at that time. Or length of delivery so people that got their books they were in good condition and got them first. We were asking them for feedback to combat the people who got books with water stains and couldn’t read, then it had water stains and then wanted to complain about it.

Steve: I see so this is for seller feedback or product feedback or both?

Jeff: So the system was really built– if you go back into like 2011, 2012, seller feedback was what everybody needed. And the concept of product reviews didn’t really exist in the way that it does today.

Steve: Okay, and so are those guys still selling any physical products, or is it just all software now at this point?

Jeff: Yeah, so in 2013 we attended a conference looking for software to build our business and we realized that we had better software than the software that was out there. So we transitioned at that point in time and started shuttering our warehouse, and moved to a full blown software company. So in 2014, a little over two years ago or almost two years ago we left the physical product space, and now we are just a fully fledged software company with over 30 employees out of Athens, Georgia.

Steve: So you actually developed the tool out of your own needs, and then just kind of adapted it for the masses?

Jeff: Yeah, and I think what most people find in most of the tools that are in the market especially the Amazon market, that’s how they were designed. They were somebody’s spreadsheet, or they were somebody’s internal tool to help them with their problem. And then they were kind of who were built out to scale. And that is one of the tricks of the Amazon world is building a tool that can scale properly to thousands of customers.

Steve: So was that the same thing with Snagshout and Scope?

Jeff: Yeah, so Snagshout was actually a funny story. So Paul’s wife was starting to get involved with buying discounted products online, and writing reviews for them. And she was mad because whenever she would go to get a product they had already given away their 20 or 25 of them.

So Paul really kind of designed Snagshout as a way for his wife to be able to get access to more products to test and write reviews on, and because he was like, well I could just build one of those, and we could have people list products on it and you could get access to those products, and we could build a better system.

Because back in those days, this was in like October of 2015 you had to post your item up for review, and then you had to collect all of this information back from your reviewer to understand who the reviewer was. And there was nothing automated about the process. So we really seeked at that point to automate the process, but typically good software is designed to solve an internal problem that you have, that you feel the market is having as well.

Steve: So interesting Snagshout was developed for his wife, and then they later decided to prioritize it, or was that the intention all along?

Jeff: That was the intention all along. It was — we saw the growth of the Amazon reviewer market growing obviously with everything we have within Feedback Genius. We saw the number of sellers requesting product reviews increasing significantly, the number of sellers moving to the private label industry increasing significantly.

And as we were making changes to the Seller Lab — the Feedback Genius platform to be more product review oriented, we built out Snagshout. So we kind of looked at Feedback Genius as your way of developing organic reviews. And then Snagshout is your version of Amazon lightening deals, or Amazon vine, so it’s your way to kind of jump start your campaigns.

Steve: Okay and so both of your top products Snagshout and Feedback Genius involve helping an Amazon seller get more feedback for their products. But recently in the past few months I would say Amazon has been cracking down on artificial reviews, and kind of degrading the value of giveaway types of reviews. So can you give us some insight on what the current review landscape is like?

Jeff: Yeah, so I’ll take a little bit of – Let’s go back, I’m going to first say there’s nothing artificial about the reviews, and I’ll explain the difference between artificial and fake reviews, and the review landscape as it exist today, so let’s hit that up first. Amazon had a law suit that was in probably about a year ago in 2015, where they sued a company that was selling Amazon reviews. And flat out if you went to their site, it said buy an Amazon review, I think it was like $50 or something like that.

One of the courses that sells in the market place, or was sold in the marketplace was telling people the value of the review was $50, and then magically this company started charging $50 for a review. But what they did they became highly illegal besides charging for a review, is they never actually physically shipped the product to the end user.

So the end user would go online and they would buy the product using the coupon code, but the product would never be shipped, they would ship actually just an envelope with nothing in it, so that Amazon believed that a shipment took place, and so the seller was never having to actually give up the physical product, so that was totally fake reviews.

The second totally fake reviews that Amazon cracked down on were the Fiverr websites where you could pay somebody on Fiverr to just go on and write reviews. And Amazon explicitly states in their terms of service, that you should not and cannot write reviews for products for which you have not used. So you can’t ask your best friend to go write a review for your product if they’ve never used your product.
And so obviously that’s hard for them to crack down on, because there’s no way for them to know that’s the idea of the verified review, but when there’s people just flat out selling reviews, they can trace it and track it in that way.

In August of 2015, I’m trying to keep my calendar straight in my head, Amazon made an update to their terms of service, and it really sent the whole industry into a bit of a teasy, and within that update of their terms of service, they made a couple very slight wording changes that really made everybody unsure of what was happening, and so they added a terminology that said that you cannot provide excessive couponing, and that you cannot intent to manipulate the sales algorithm.

Those two things really sent everybody into this world of trying to understand what does Amazon mean, and everybody from that point forward has been looking for Amazon to say can I do this, can I not do that, can I use a super URL, can I not use a super URL. We in the Amazon world as sellers are looking for this black or white, tell us what we can do, tell us what we can’t do.

Prior to the update in 2015, any purchase, whether the purchase was free or full price, they got a review qualified as what we call the verified review. One of the things that was noticed immediately after that update was that if you gave a product away for free, the verified review badge disappeared from the listing, and Amazon has gone back within their algorithm and cleaned up some things.

Essentially what Amazon was saying was you need to really purchase this if you got it for free, and a lot of people get hanged up on the disclaimer, but understand that the disclaimer that Amazon requires you to leave, you have to leave a disclaimer that says you received the product for free or just counter exchange for your honest opinion. Well there is an Amazon rule that’s also a federal trade commission rule.

Steve you probably know this from your blogging days, if you go back in the history what happen was we would send products to bloggers, and we would ask them to write about it, you might even pay a blogger to write about your product.

Steve: Right, and it has to be fully disclosed.

Jeff: Right, and that’s all federal trade commission, and that’s the same thing that Amazon is trying to implement within their reviews.

Steve: Okay.

Jeff: Now it’s August of 2015, the whole world is kind of turned upside down, and everyone is trying to figure out what the terms of service changes mean, and we made a couple of changes at Snagshout in the intent to protect our customers. So we stopped using super URLs and for people who don’t know…

Steve: What if you decide – Yeah, I was going to say please just define that for the listeners.

Jess: A super URL is a link that sends you to Amazon, and it is adding information to the link so that Amazon believes that a search has occurred on their sites. So I just gave you the really basic version of it, but I could share a link to a blog post.

Steve: That’s good enough.

Jeff: It gives you a very technical explanation of it.

Steve: Okay, I’ll link that up in the show notes.

Jeff: What Amazon was saying, was hey we know you are doing this, and you are doing this with the intent to manipulate, so we are going to say there’s no more intentional manipulation of the algorithm. Our personal interpretation of that was that that’s what a super URL was. We subsequently had a meeting with Amazon in Seattle, and we flat out asked them and they said we do not recommend you use super URLs.
Now we all know Amazon and they cannot, they will not come out and publically state anything like that, but we feel very confident that super URLs are bad, and that whether they are negative to the seller today or will be in the future, we are positive that they are bad and they will negatively affect the seller either today or in the future. It might not lead to an account suspension, but it could lead to a downgrading of your search results or some other type of penalty like we’ve seen in the Google…

Steve: I see Amazon walking in Google’s footsteps really. Google went through all this before in like 2013 I think, and Amazon is just catching up with their own internal product search stuff.

Jeff: Exactly, I mean Panda, Penguin, Kangaroo, all the animals that utilize the sites who were doing it bad, but weren’t breaking the rules, found out that in the long run they were breaking the rules, and went into a purgatory that was realty hard to get out of.

Steve: Okay, so no super URLs. Can you comment a little bit on just like the weight of these give away type of review now.

Jeff: Yeah, so nobody knows the answer, and that’s the one thing I always like to state from the beginning. I love websites that say we are 100% Amazon compliant. Understand that what that means when a site says that is that they believe they are 100% Amazon compliant because they didn’t get a stamp from Amazon telling them that they are compliant. The weight of the reviews, they are different thoughts and strategies in the market as to what now constitutes a verified review.

We have seen products given away at an 80% discount that still get a verified review, and we’ve seen ones that don’t. And so I think it’s very – Our believe, just our general believe is that products given away for a discount of 50 or 60% off are in the realm that will most likely still get a verified review. Now there is no way to know whether that number is 52 or 48 or 61, but that’s our general belief is that that is a discount that is not excessive, and that is not raising red flags with Amazon, like the people who are giving their products away for a penny at 99% off.

Steve: Do you still have to reveal that you received it for a significant discount if it’s let’s say at a 30% discount?

Jeff: That is a great question, and one that I have argued that you don’t, but technically per Amazon’s rules, any discount that you receive you are supposed to state, because it’s not like a deep discount. It’s just I received this product at a discount, but my argument Steve if you just kind of play with me here is, if you get a coupon to try a pizza company, you are not required to go on Yelp and say I only tried this pizza company because I got a coupon.

Steve: Yeah, exactly which is why I asked you this question, was there was like a grey area here, right.

Jeff: I think there is, I mean there clearly is because Amazon hasn’t defined, and what I like to tell people is understand Amazon’s intent, right? And Amazon’s intent is to maintain the validity of their review system, because that’s a cornerstone and a backbone of their whole ecosystem. And so if you are giving away – Because the other thing is the word excessive, how many products can you give away, and I also think it matters who you are giving the products away to.

So I’ll give you an example if you are giving the products away to somebody like my wife. My wife buys and shops on Amazon, and reviews products on a regular basis, so if you look at her review profile, 70 or 80% of the products that she buys are full price products without a coupon, and then she picks up some items from Snagshout every once in a while to try as well. And if you put that in comparison to a heavy reviewer who is picking up 95% of their products from review sites at discounts that are 90 to 95% off, and everyone of them is a 5 star review, there’s ways in the algorithm to detect and validate it or add a weight to that. How the algorithm works I have no clue.

Steve: That brings me on my next question, how do you seek out the real reviewers, and does Snagshout do anything about that?

Jeff: Yeah, I would say that it depends what you are trying to do and how fast you are trying to do it. So if you have a broad use product, a flashlight, a garlic press right, isn’t that the one everyone likes to use? If you’ve got a general use product, because what’s at our disclaimer just because we mention a product doesn’t mean you should go source it, I got to do that right because that’s what people do. If you got a general use product, then I feel you are okay using a site like Snagshout because you are talking about general use products, and most people are general use people and are using them.

If you have a very niche product, you have a product geared towards camping, or you have a product geared towards having a baby, then if the person who is reviewing your product hasn’t had a baby, and isn’t buying other baby products they are probably not the best person to be reviewing your product. So it’s almost using common sense and I think it’s using pricing right?

So as an example we had somebody on Snagshout who had a baby product, it was a $40 retail value. I like to talk about perceived value, meaning what can you buy that product for on average on Amazon, and the perceived value of this product was around $35, meaning that if you went to page 1, most every product on that page was in the $35 range, and they gave that away on Snagshout for $15.
Somebody who doesn’t have a baby isn’t going to spend $15 just to get a product for review. That is a great way for you to protect yourself and the people who really want to be using your products that will give you real reviews for your products.

Steve: Let me ask you this follow up question then, so do you still recommend giving products for free in return for a review, or is everything leaning more towards like heavily discounting an item today?

Jeff: I think you have to look at – One of the things we’ve learnt from Amazon by watching the– So Amazon has a group called the product review suspension team, and that team is – I normally get their title wrong, but their job is to look through the reviews, and look for inconsistent behavior, so what’s inconsistent behavior? If you are selling a vitamin supplement, and you are giving 5 of your products away every day for free, you are excessive and trying to manipulate the system.

If you are doing a new product launch and you give away 50 of your products for free, because you are trying to get people out there and talking about your products, there are people who could argue that’s manipulation, but that’s also marketing. And that’s how you launch a product, right that’s what you would do if you were launching that product locally.

And if you have a product that has a – If you continue to do that for a long period of time, then you might be manipulating and being excessive, but if you are doing it because it’s a new product and you are trying to get some attention to that product, I don’t believe you are violating the system, I believe that’s exactly what the system is there for.

Steve: If I can interpret your answer, what you are suggesting, and it’s like a grey area, is you want to just think about what Amazon’s interest are in preserving their review algorithm when you are taking action.

Jeff: I think you really want to do that, and you want to look it like what’s the– How do you really need to market your product. So what we recommend is you first start with optimizing your listing, okay so you got to have a rock solid listing, you got to have photos, bullet points, and everything needs to be feature benefit, right? What’s in it for the consumer?

Then after that, you need to get your baseline reviews, so you need to have 10 to 15 reviews so that when somebody lands on your site, on your product, they actually can understand that that product has value to them, and that other people have agreed with that. And so that’s a great way to use Snagshout is get those initial reviews.

Steve: Are these free reviews like complete give away reviews or?

Jeff: I believe you should sell your product for as much as you can get for your product, and so it comes down to if you have a garlic press, you probably need to give it away for next to nothing, but if you have a high perceived value product you should try to get money back for your product and sell it. I know that’s a very vague answer, but I think there’s millions of products on Amazon, there’s 60 million search terms on Amazon or something crazy like that, so it’s hard to say there’s one path that you should do.

Steve: What is your feeling on doing a really mass give away in the begging to launch your product?

Jeff: I would try to use – Mass meaning? Do you have a number in mind?

Steve: Hundreds of thousands, I guess hundreds, let’s do hundreds.

Jeff: I would use external sources for driving that traffic.

Steve: Can you be more specific.

Jeff: Facebook campaign, right so let’s go back to the baby product. Run on a Facebook campaign that’s targeting people who have recently had a baby or have a child under a certain age. I think you are going to be better off to get that kind of volume coming from outside sources than trying to give that many products away. I also believe you should stair step it, so you’ve got your product optimized, you got your initial reviews, the next thing you should do is optimize your sponsored ads, because sponsored ads are essentially legal super URLs.

Because somebody types in the word garlic press, your ad shows up, they buy it, Amazon is connecting the word garlic press to your garlic press, and you just created a super URL. You could run sponsored ads at a loss or at a break even, but you should maximize those. Then you’ll have a deficit, so you’ll know that you are looking for 50 sales a day, you are able to generate 20 sales a day from sponsored ads. Now you can use a tool like Facebook or a tool like Snagshout to generate the missing 30 sales that you have, using coupon and discounting.

Steve: Okay, so what I want, and I don’t know if you can give me a straight answer here, but in an ideal launch, let’s say you had a product that you wanted to launch, what would be your step by step strategy just to get that thing launched?

Jeff: Okay, so let me give you an example that we have documented on our website, so and please don’t go source about – It’s an apple slicer, don’t go source the apple slicer.

Steve: Okay, I think no one is going to do that, but okay – Actually, yeah.

Jeff: It’s kind of funny because one of the things we should have tracked was we should have tracked how many people were selling apple slicers before we started documenting the process, and how do people sell them today, because it clearly has increased. After Amazon made their algorithm updates, we worked with a guy on a product to get it launched with the intent of demonstrating how Snagshout still works without super URLs.

And so we did an apple slicer, and the apple slicer is a very competitive product, it’s a very competitive space; there’s over almost 3,000 people who have a product that ranges for the word apple slicer, according to Scope and other tools. You are looking at estimated sales of 30 to 50 units a day of the product if you are ranking high on page 1, so fairly descent opportunities selling an apple slicer.
We launched our product and when we initially launched our product we gave away 182 products on Snagshout over a 10 day period. So we didn’t go for 30 which is what you mathematically need to rank up at the top, we went for the bottom of page 1, and we gave away 18 a day for 10 days.

Steve: Just for free, right?

Jeff: I think we sold them for a dollar.

Steve: Dollar, okay got it.

Jeff: We were able to generate out of 182 we were able to generate 161 reviews out of 182 giveaways.

Steve: Okay and did those turn out to be verified purchase reviews?

Jeff: Yeah, but obviously things have changed since August, and so we are actually about to run another test to do the exact same thing to kind of see, we constantly are testing the system to see how it works. We have looked at everything within Snapshot to see what percentage are verified and which are not. How many people lose verified reviews and they change to non verified?

Unfortunately there is no primary reason, you will find people with 50% discounts that are not getting verified reviews, and you will find people with 70 or 80% discounts who are getting verified reviews. The only thing that I can think of, and Steve you will probably agree with me, the only thing I can think of is the Amazon algorithm very similar to Google is influx, and so it’s going to take it a while to get through and clean up everything.

Steve: Sure, and I’m sure things are changing everyday over there as well.

Jeff: Right, and like we saw with Panda and Penguin on Google, it went in waves right?

Steve: Yeah.

Jeff: It didn’t just all happen at one time.

Steve: Right, those are very painful waves, if I remember.

Jeff: They were and more painfully than that was if you got put it in the purgatory from one of the waves, it could to take you a year just to be re-indexed to get back out of it.

Steve: Exactly yeah, okay sorry keep going.

Jeff: We gave away the 182 products, and we ranked I think, we got up to number 7 ranking. We then stopped for about a month primarily because our velocity picked up so fast that we needed to get our inventory to catch up, right? Because the last thing you want is to get your velocity moving faster than your inventory turnaround time. Because pulling out of stock is one of the worst thing you can do for your ranking.

Then about 2 months later we started writing more sponsored ad campaigns, and we did another small giveaway on Snapshot. I think we give away 50 units the second time, and that boosted us from the 7th position to the 4th position. We got as high as I think the number 1, we were as high as the number 1 position, I think right now I’m looking and we are in number, spot number 3.

Steve: Okay, so it’s held even though you stopped doing the giveaways?

Jeff: Yeah, and once you get into your spot, you really have to start messing, not messing with, playing with your price and optimizing for velocity and profit. We found that if you lower your price a little bit, you can increase your sales and off to where the profitability still makes sense. And then again once you get into a strong position, you can actually your raise your price and maintain that position while making a higher profit margin.

Steve: Okay, and since we are kind of on the topic, so can you comment a little bit about all the different factors that affect search on Amazon, with respect to this experiment actually.

Jeff: I will caveat this and I’ve said it a couple of times that this is just our opinion, but I think it’s pretty widely accepted amongst most people in the space. Your title, your bullets, your keywords probably have a small piece of it. Your price, your inventory, both your quantity of inventory, your history of inventory and your location of inventory. Let’s kind of break that down, so your quantity of inventory is how much you have on hand, and how long Amazon believes that inventory remains in stock, your history is your demonstration on Amazon that you replenish your products and you replenish them on time.

Amazon, we believe actually gives you– the more inventory you have Amazon gives you credit for that. That kind of makes sense, they don’t want to support somebody who is going to run out of stock, and then there is not more to sell. They want brands that are going to be around for some period of time. Then your location meaning are you doing merchant fulfilled, or are you doing FBA.

Steve: Right.

Jeff: Your photos have a significant value in the search and even more than that they have a significant value in the conversion of those search pages to your listing page, that’s what is going to catch somebody’s attention, and your price. We call those your direct factors, those are all things you can control.

Steve: I’m just curious, have you done the experience where you’ve increased the amount of inventory and saw your rankings rise?

Jeff: What we have seen is that it’s not necessarily about increasing your inventory, right? I don’t want to make a blanket statement and have everybody go out there and just order more products.

Steve: Well you have to have the sales velocity to support the increase in inventory, right?

Jeff: Right, Amazon wants to see– so if you know that your replenishment time, they don’t want to see your inventory dwindling low for a long period of time. So if you are restocking at the right intervals, you are getting credit from Amazon by showing your history. This is not an experiment I have done, but I do know somebody who has done this experiment, and what they do is they maintain their own warehouse where they hold larger supplies of their inventory, and they are constantly shipping to Amazon to replenish inventory based on 30, 60, and 90 days sales projections.

Steve: I was just wondering if this is like a chicken and egg thing. You could be artificially limiting your sales by shipping in less stuff. You see what I’m saying?

Jeff: Yeah, like if you are doing kind of an intro to private label where you are ordering in 100 products, and your reorder is going to be 12 weeks. Yeah, it’s a chicken or egg thing. I do believe the people who bring in larger inventories from the get go to support, can move up the velocity faster, because Amazon doesn’t want to sell your products faster than you have on the inventory.
Steve: Right, exactly.

Jeff: If you have 100 items in inventory and your product on page 1 is going to sell 25 units a day, Amazon is going to just by logic,
Amazon is going to slow you from getting it back because you are going to be on page 1 for 4 days, and then you are gone.

Steve: Yeah, and so that makes total sense. That implies that if you are going to launch something you should have sufficient inventory to not artificially limit yourself. In case it takes off, right?

Jeff: It’s definitely a challenge and part of the risk of building a brand on Amazon. One of the strategies I have seen … I know a seller who projected his inventory and thought that he was ordering 3 months worth of inventory, and then once he started selling he realized he had 9 months of inventory. And obviously there is the opposite side where you thought you ordered 3 months worth of inventory and you ended up with 3 week worth of inventory.

It is a guessing game, but if you are projecting your inventory based on a 3 month approach, I think you are starting okay. Especially if you are importing your products from overseas where it’s going to take you 16 weeks or 12 week to get that turn around, you don’t want to be bringing in a product in and only have 3 week worth of inventory unless you are planning to airship more products in. You are just going to spend all this effort to get ranked, and then you are going to fall off the face of the earth when your product goes out of stock.

Steve: Right, plus doing air shipment is not economical there.

Jeff: No, one strategy I know that a lot of sellers do is though if they see their stock starting to dwindle they might place the order and send 3 weeks’ worth of inventory air, and send the rest via sea. There’s a lot of strategies that can be employed, it’s really a matter of you having a comfort level and it comes down to– in a lot of cases it comes down to the amount of cash that a seller has available for making the investment.

Steve: Sure, right. Hey Jeff I wanted to talk a little bit, just a about reviewing. There is a whole bunch of these private Facebook groups that do reviews. I know that Amazon has been cracking down on these things, and they know who your friends are and they know whether you have any relationships with them, so what is your take on them?

Jeff: It is scary huh?

Steve: Yeah, it is scary, so is your take these days generally to avoid, and how does Snagshout kind of get around this?
Jeff: Yeah, Snagshout has 130,000 reviewers on our platform, so just by the nature of how we release products on our site it kind of spreads them out across more shoppers. We also limit shoppers so that they can’t have– Some of the other review clubs, one shopper might have 25 items at one time, and so by limiting the number of items that a shopper can have, you create an environment where it is shared and is fair across the board.

I think that, I guess ultimately the answer is I don’t know what one is good and what one is bad. The problem that you have with review clubs in general is I think going back to the idea that the same reviewer is potentially reviewing all of the products, and it just
doesn’t look as natural as if you had a larger pull of people who have the potential to do it. If the review club is required– so there are some review clubs out there that are there [inaudible 00:40:24]. We personally believe that is a bad user experience from the aspect that how many merchants are going to pick somebody who’s given a 3 star review to try their product, right?

Steve: Right.

Jeff: We believe Amazon is watching that, we have seen that in suspension letters around product reviews. Amazon has named some of these clubs, I’m not going to speak to that, but as you Google it you can probable figure it out, and a lot of these clubs have changed their policies because of that. We tend to air on the side of our shopper.

The attitude that we take with Snagshout is very simple whenever we develop any products or feature to the site. If Jeff Bezos was to use our site, would he feel we are trying to manipulate the system or violate Amazon’s terms of service. And if we can honestly answer that question that he will not feel that way, then we continue forward and if we honestly answer that question and we are not sure, then we stop.

Steve: It seems like any review club needs some checks and balances to kind of go over the listing, make sure it’s a sound listing, and maybe a solid product to kind of improve the integrity of both parties to prevent any problems from happening, right?

Jeff: Well, I mean what we tell anyone that signs up for Snagshout, the first thing I tell them is if you are not using Feedback Genius you are wasting your money. Why would you not set up a system to automate review solicitation from organic sales, before you start worrying about generating sales and reviews?

Steve: Well plus it’s free to start; it’s like a no brainer right?
Jeff: It’s free to start and it scales economically based on your orders, but it’s the idea that those are the reviews you should be focusing on, and then you should be using a system like Snagshout to help to kind of spur your sales along the way. And I think where sellers start to get themselves on trouble is where they became reliant on a system like Snagshout to generate all of their velocity. And so the success of your products is going to come from your listing, and your ability to convert people from your listing to sales. A tool like Snagshout should be a jumping off point; it should not be a necessity for continued product success.

Steve: Let me ask you …

Jeff: Your product has to stand on its own.

Steve: Sure, and so is getting the initial birthday [ph] reviews, is that just like a onetime thing, or is there something that you should continue to do at certain intervals?

Jeff: Yeah, I mean I think you have to constantly you know, products have life cycles and you have to understand your product’s life cycle, and you have to understand when your product is and is not being used right? So the apple slicer for instance is probably going to be used a lot more in the fall when it’s apple season. I know that sounds silly, but that’s when people are thinking about apples, right?
Think about like is your product a Mother’s day, a Father’s day, a St. Patrick’s day, like what would spur sales for your product, and if you are using Snagshout to boost your sales during a time when your dales are naturally boosted, because the search for that product is there, it makes sense if you are … That is something we recommend.

So you can use us for your initial launch, and then like let’s say for instance for whether to use the apple slicer maybe like 2 or 3 weeks before apple season, I might want to do an extra little bump because I know there is going to be an increase in search volumes on my terms.

Steve: Sure, okay.

Jeff: I think where people get hang up is they are not watching the right data, and so they are trying to use reviews, and review clubs and couponing to make up for other mistakes within their product. And so if you have people coming to your listing, then you have what is called a session within the Amazon data, right?

Then your sales are your conversions, and so what you actually should be looking for is your problem that your sessions aren’t increasing, or that your conversions aren’t increasing. Because you might be increasing your rank on keywords, but you are not converting them into sales. Then your problem is your listing right? Your problem isn’t reviews, you got enough people coming, you are just not getting enough people to convert.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. I mean you have to take care of all different factors in order to be successful. Jeff, I want to touch on one thing before you go, and this is the notion of sending out the feedback emails like on Feedback Genius. What are your recommendations these days for the number of emails to actually send, because I have heard anecdotes that certain buyers are kind of getting annoyed with the amount of email that’s getting sent to them these days.

Jeff: Yeah, so the way I answer that is every product is different, but if you don’t have a purpose in sending the email, don’t send it. So 2 is probably the number you should shoot for unless you have a good use case for sending more than 2.

Steve: Okay and these 2 are for what purpose?

Jeff: Typically all of your messages should be to enhance the customer’s experience, so it should be part of your product’s life cycle to the customer. It should not be repeating the message that Amazon is already sending, so you don’t need to tell them that their order has been confirmed, they already know that. Let’s say the apple slicer for instance, I can enhance the customer’s experience by delivering a message based on the product being delivered, and I can include a recipe book for my favorite apple, my grandma’s famous apple pie.
I have now given them something, and haven’t really asked for anything in return, and then I can back to them another day or 2 later and say, “How is the apple slicer working for you? Did you have a chance to try my grandma’s pie recipe? If you wouldn’t mind can you leave a review?”

Steve: That’s borderline email marketing, is that a grey area in terms of what you can send a customer through Amazon’s email?

Jeff: Okay, so it’s not, it’s part of the– if it’s part of the product that they are purchasing, it’s not considered email marketing. So if I was to say, “Try my grandma’s recipe, and buy her baking dish.” Now I’m in email marketing, and I have violated Amazon’s terms of service. As long as I’m not talking about anything about buying other products, I’m just talking about the use of my product, it could be.
I always make recommendations, how to clean your product, how to use your product, best recipes for your product, shopping list for you know how to make those recipes. Those are all good, anything that’s saying that if you have this product you should buy this product, though or come check out, you know here is a coupon to try something else that I sell. Those are all violations of Amazon’s terms of service.

Steve: So it sounds like your recommended flow right now is to give some sort of thing in your first email, and then ask for the feedback in a subsequent email.

Jeff: Yeah, so there is a couple of different flows that can work. Again, you got to know your product. So I’ll give you an example, we had a guy who was selling a product, it was a powder, and what happened with his product was his powder settled during shipping, so when you opened up the bag, the top like 30% of the bag was filled with air. A lot of sellers started to think, I’m sorry a lot of shoppers started to think they were getting ripped off.

And so he used Feedback Genius to send a message when the product was being shipped before delivery that just said, “Hey, when you open up your product it settles during shipping, and it’s going to seem like there is a lot of air, but understand the weight is still the weight that you bought.” That reduced his customer service complaints significantly, and then he came back and he followed up with an ask for a review.

If you having a customer service issue, you can use Feedback Genius to actually address the customer service issue. We had somebody else who sold a product that was based on size, and it was not returnable once you opened it. So she sent actually 3 emails, she sent one based on the product being shipped saying, “Don’t forget, here is how to measure properly to know that you got the right one. And if you open it, it is non returnable. She did that same message again based on delivery. And then she wrote a few days after delivery to see how the product was being used.

So how can you improve your customer’s experience through messaging, and that’s a great example. If you have a food product or a kitchen product or a camping product, be a brand to these people. Talk about your product in the lifestyle, and in the framework of how they are going to use it, right? And by giving them information you now create a dialogue and a relationship with them, so that when you are asking for the next piece of it, it’s a natural. I’ll give you one more example, I recently bought a product on Amazon, it was a magic product.
And when I got the email from the guy, it was all about like extra tips. Like if you are having trouble doing the trick do this or try this or — so he was trying to help me understand how to use his product better, which made me not only want to give him a good review, but if I’m going to buy another magic trick I’m going to buy it from this guy, because I know that he is going to help me succeed in trying to do magic.

Steve: So it sounds like what you want to avoid is like repeated feedback request messages, right? I mean you want to always to be giving value to your customer with every send?

Jeff: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Jeff: Yeah.

Steve: Jeff man we’ve been talking for quite a while, and everything that you’ve provided has been very helpful. Where can people find you if they have questions or want to check out your products?

Jeff: Yes, so I’m sure we’ll have a link in the show notes to get to a special offer on Feedback Genius, but we are at feedbackgenius.com, or sellerlabs.com. And I would be happy to — you can always find me on Facebook or as you mentioned I attend a lot of conferences. You are welcome to come up, and say hi and ask questions. I love talking Amazon.

Steve: Yeah, and for all of you listening who are going to be at the Seller’s Summit, Jeff is going to be there also and he is going to be talking as well.

Jeff: Yeah, we are going to get into some of the concepts we talked about in here a little bit more in depth with some examples, and some survey data that we have from real shoppers on what gets them to buy.

Steve: Cool man, well Jeff hey thanks for coming on the show.

Jeff: Great I appreciate it, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Jeff is incredibly knowledgeable about Amazon, and he is got tons of user data to back it up. Not only that, but the tools that Jeff’s company Seller Labs offers are must haves if you plan on selling on Amazon. For example I have been using Feedback Genius for quite a while now, and Snagshout is a great tool for giving your listings a boost with reviews.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode120. If you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

119: How To Create A 7 Figure Ecommerce Store In Just 4 Months Selling Coloring Books Online

119: How To Create A 7 Figure Ecommerce Store In Just 4 Months Selling Coloring Books Online

Today, I’m thrilled to have Michael Jackness on the show. Mike is someone who I met on a recent ecommerce mastermind trip and after hearing about his successes, I knew that I had to have him on the show.

Mike runs a bunch of ecommerce websites which include Icewraps.com, CuttingBoard.com, ColorIt.com. And he also runs his own business blog at EcomCrew.com

Anyway Mike is a gold mine of information and what I like about him is that he’s constantly trying new strategies to boost sales. For example, his most recent store ColorIt.com is only 4 months old and is on track for a 7 figure year.

What You’ll Learn

  • The importance of having a premium domain in terms of ranking in the search engines
  • Mike’s strategy for ecommerce SEO.
  • Why dropshipping sucks as a business model
  • How Mike has seamlessly interleaved email marketing with his strategies.
  • How Mike has scaled his business so quickly with Facebook ads

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the mywifequitherjob podcast, we will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Michael Jackness on the show. Now Mike is someone who I met on a recent ecommerce mastermind trip, and after hearing about his success, I knew that I had to have him on the show. Now Mike runs a bunch of ecommerce websites, which includes icewraps.com, cuttingboard.com, and colorit.com, and he also runs his own business blog at ecomcrew.com.

Anyway Mike is a goldmine of information about ecommerce, and what I like about him is that he’s constantly trying new strategies to boost sales. So for example his most recent store colorit.com is only 4 months old and is on track for a 7 figure a year already, and with that welcome to the show Mike, how you doing today man?

Jackness: I’m doing great, thank you.

Steve: Give us the quick background for those of us who don’t know who you are or your background about how you got into ecommerce in the first place.

Jackness: It’s an interesting road, and we weren’t really focusing on ecommerce to begin with. We were affiliate marketers and had domains like treadmill.com and cuttingboard.com, and one day just decide that we don’t want to do affiliate marketing anymore, and it’s going by the way of the dodo bird …

Steve: Why was that by the way?

Jackness: Well, I think that if you have an affiliate site like yours, there’s definitely still room for affiliate marketing, sorry. What I’m I saying …

Steve: We shouldn’t have talked so much on the pre interview.

Jackness: I had just eaten strawberry before we got started, and the seed like when I started talking went down … Sorry hold on just for a second.

Steve: Okay.

Jackness: Sorry about that, you probably need to start over the meeting, but or I can just start…

Steve: Just start talking about the affiliate marketing or why not affiliate marketing?

Jackness: Yeah, sorry, let me get started right there. So why not affiliate marketing? We were doing affiliate marketing for years; our background actually was in online poker affiliate marketing. That’s how we got started, and we made a lot of money during online poker affiliate marketing. In 2010, I decided to get out of that business, there was a lot of back story behind that, but just really sick of the industry and wanted to get into more “mainstream affiliate marketing.”

I started doing keyword domain investing, things like treadmill.com was one of the domains we got, but we also got things like graphicdesign.com, onlinedegree.com, and a couple of other, wordpressthemes.com, a couple other really high powered affiliate marketing type related domains or things that we decided we want to do affiliate marketing with.

In 2011, 2012, Penguin and Panda started coming out. The writing was really on the wall that affiliate marketing sites were going to have a very difficult time. Non-affiliate marketing sites like My Wife Quit Her Job I think that there is still a really good place for educational sites and even review sites, but these major head terms, Google is going out of their way to make sure that affiliate sites can no longer rank for things like WordPress themes for instance.

When we bought wordpressthemes.com something like 6 out of the top 10 listings were affiliate marketing sites. Now if you were to do that search, we are on the 3rd page and I think that we’re the highest ranked affiliate marketing site. My favorite book is Who Moved my Cheese. I don’t know if you’ve ever read that book, but it’s basically talks about people hemming and howling and not embracing change.

In our opinion, affiliate marketing was going to start struggling quite merely and our prediction was right. Fast forward 4 years later, and we made a decision, a bold decision of just basically transform all of our sites into a product or service that we can offer directly to the end user, and that’s actually how we got into ecommerce. It wasn’t really by design, it was okay well we have this domain treadmill.com, we have this domain cuttingboard.com, and we think that we can develop that into an ecommerce site, and the first one that we did was treadmill.com.

Steve: Would you say that the domain itself has very little bearing on ranking these days?

Jackness: No, it’s interesting, I get asked that question quite a bit, and I’m of the opinion that it actually makes a big difference. If you have a keyword domain, a premium keyword domain, I think it makes a very big difference. For instance cuttingboard.com ranks number 1 for cutting board and ranks number 1 for cutting boards, and bamboo cutting board and all these different things. We’ve been doing SEO for 12, 13 years now, and I know very well how many links it takes to get to number 1 for related searches, and I can say definitively that we have a fraction of the back links to curttingboard.com than we would have needed to rank number 1 if we had something like mike’s-best-cutting-board.info, or something like that.

We’ve definitely seen that this premium keyword domains are still doing quite well, because Google wants to let brands rank, and if your brand is cutting board, you’re really ranking for your brand and the keyword at the same time. We’ve noticed that also with icewraps.com. Now with colorit.com obviously we went a different direction, we didn’t get adultcoloringbooks.com or coloringbooks.com, and the main reason is because I don’t think that’s a good brand name for coloring books.

You would never want to brand your adult coloring books adult coloring books, it doesn’t make sense, so I thought that colorit is a nice short and easy to remember domain, so that was the reason behind that.

Steve: That’s the main reason for that is because you were trying to establish your own brand where as with Ice Wraps and Cutting Board, are they your own products or other people’s products?

Jackness: So I mean they started out as other people’s products, that’s how Treadmill got its start, and when we bought icewraps.com from another company, they were all other people’s products, and when we developed Cutting Board it was other people’s products, but we’ve gone through an evolution of okay we’re going to start doing ecommerce, and we’ll just … We’ll have a site like treadmill.com and because we’re treadmill.com and pounding on my chest like a gorilla here we’ll rank and we’ll sell a lot off product and we’ll do well.

What we discovered that drop shipping sucks. It’s an awful business to be in. You are relying on others all the time to make you successful, which I don’t like. I like being in control, and then on top of it, we were shipping heavy equipment that doesn’t end up at the end user on time or it ends up damaged or whatever, so that you guys assume less control. So our next step in the evolution of ecommerce was to do icewraps.com and cuttingboard.com with other people’s products that we could at least ship ourselves, and that was great.

We got a lot of control for that and we loved it, but then you start realizing there’s things like pricing issues and you are not really differentiating yourself from the market place, and PPC is really tough and if you are doing any type of advertising campaign for yourself, you are helping your vendors more than you are helping yourself, and your interests just don’t align with … Your business interests are aligned with your partners.

So we started developing our own products for all those brands, and we discovered that just we really like having the control, end to end control of the channel, almost like Apple does with its products.

Steve: Sure. Would you say that … Are you still selling other people’s products today, or is it mostly your on stuff on Ice Wraps and Cutting Board?

Jackness: On Ice Wraps and Cutting Board the majority are still other people’s products. I don’t know that that’s going to change. It may be over time, we’re slowly starting to introduce more and more of other people’s products to our … I’m sorry, our own products to that, to those sites, but I don’t really see us stopping selling other people’s products on those domains. They’re just too valuable as a reseller, but we can definitely get our house brand in there and do quite well.

Steve: Do you run special promotions for your own stuff, or do you favor your own stuff over some of the other brands or is it …

Jackness: We have … We’ve been walking a thin line because we don’t want to take off our manufacturers that we’re working with. We are making good money off those selling other people’s products. We treat it like a CVS does or a Walgreens, you walk in there and they have … They’re bringing the contact solution or whatever. We don’t ever disparage any of the other products that are on there, or even really try to say that ours is better, but we do have at a lower price and the reviews are good and we let people make up their own mind.

Steve: Okay, there’s a number of things I want to talk to you about today. First off as you mentioned you are raking number 1 on the front page for a lot of tough keyword terms like cutting board and ice wraps is a pretty hard to rank for. I want to talk a little bit about your strategy for SEO, and you already mentioned that your domain helps, but obviously that’s not the entire story right?

Jackness: Definitely not the entire story, and if you want to talk about SEO, one thing I want to really make clear here is that we do the [inaudible 00:10:31] these days. To the point where we’re paranoid and probably leave behind opportunity that is still considered white hat, but when you wake up one morning and you find your site delisted or penalized, it’s an awful feeling, and when you have a …

Steve: Did that happen to you?

Jackness: It did, it happened a couple of different times actually, and basically at this point really leant my lesson. The first time like yeah I learnt my lesson I’d do this again, and then you slowly but surely you’re nibbling around the edges of doing grey hat stuff, and then next you are really in the grey hat area. We never really did any black hat stuff, but we were definitely aggressive about getting links or writing thing content, or just writing stuff just to get content up on the internet that would rank.

The stuff worked for quite a while, but now I take the approach of, okay if I was in the Goggle board room, you were with Matt Cutts, the Google spam team, what is it that they are really trying to look for here? What are they really trying to have rank, and at the end of the day, they want to be legitimately the best search engine. When you type in something in the Google the number 1 result, the number 2 result should be the answer to your question.

If they don’t do that, their product ends up being Yahoo or Bing. It’s crappy results, that’s the reason why I don’t use Bing or Yahoo. It’s just the results are awful, so why not be that site, why not do everything that you can to legitimately be that site versus trying to cut corners and get there artificially, so that’s the approach that we take.

Steve: It’s interesting; I’ve recently rewritten some articles on my blog to make them more comprehensive. They were already on the front page, and I was just trying to raise their rankings, and by making their article more comprehensive, it’s actually jumped up about 4 spots for this article that I’m thinking about. I don’t know if that was just a fluke, or whether Google is actually really paying attention.

Jackness: I don’t think it’s a fluke at all, I think that there’s 2 things that you probably noticed. There’s one thing called a freshness update. Google has been pushing articles down that have been stagnant for years, so if it was something that hadn’t been touched in a long time, it could have been a freshness update, but the only thing is Google was like really giving preference to articles that are or what I call skyscraper posts which are basically 3, 4, 5000 words long, and you mentioned ecomcrew off the top of those.

If you are on there, we do that type of thing there. I mean every post we write is a minimum of 2000 words. It’s not a bunch of filler crap, just to get the 2000 words, it’s legitimate content and the idea is that you write something that’s so profound, just answers questions or blows people away in a way that they want to share it with their friends, that’s kind of litmus test that I use.

There’s so many pieces of content that I’ve consumed on the internet that I’ve done in 25 or 50% way through it and been like back, this is awful. That’s not what you want, you want people to read the content, scroll down to the end of it and then want more. They’ll be like, “Wow that was the most amazing thing I ever read.” That’s obviously a high bar to get to, and it’s hard to generate that type of content on a weekly or daily basis, but we end up putting something like that up about every 2 to 4 weeks, and it’s a lot of work, but everything we put up get’s a lot of attention.

We do that same thing on Cutting Board, on Ice Wraps and we’re doing it on ColorIt. For instance on ColorIt, we just wrote several thousand word piece about the benefits of coloring. We have a fulltime copywriter here and she spent about a week writing this article, and doing research and linking out to resources that are like hospitals and researchers and things like that.

The article really answers the question versus just some BS basically. We’ve done the same thing on Ice Wraps, for instance we wrote an article about little league and pitchers and why it’s important to ice your shoulder and your elbow, and it really gets into the technical reasons of why that’s important, and isn’t just a 300 word piece that doesn’t even answer the question. It just says shoulder icewraps are great, you really should buy a shoulder icewrap, we sell lots of shoulder icewraps, you can get a shoulder icewrap, and it just has a keyword stuffed in there a zillion times and doesn’t actually answer anything, and we stay away from that.

Steve: So it’s one thing to put out good content, but then you have to get people to link to you too, so do you have any strategies for that?

Jackness: We do. With the content itself, I mean we actually take … We have lots of strategies. And the first off every industry is different. So anything I’m going to mention here isn’t going to work for everyone. For instance with Treadmill that was one of our biggest challenges ever because that’s not a very interesting business. I mean you are not going to write about treadmills and get people to link to that content. It’s hard to write a fitness article and get people to link to it because it’s just so saturated.

So we did some interesting thing. First off we reached out to a lot of influential people in the industry. We were like okay, what does that actually mean. Who can we get to write for us, who can we actually get to participate in something like this. So what we ended up doing was going to fitness bloggers, because that’s a close enough industry or topic if you will that’s relevant and that’s how Google looks at it its relevancy. It’s relevant to Treadmill because you can train for a marathon on a treadmill and actually quite a few marathon runners train on treadmills in inclement weather, especially if the live in a place like Chicago or something where it’s cold and snowy.

In the winter time they’ll do their training indoors in the winter. So we actually contacted lots of fitness and running blogs and got them to start writing for us on our site. We never sent that spammy email that just basically says like, we are the greatest thing, we’ll pay you, or we’ll trade content with him. We’ve all gotten these awful emails or just immediately go on the spam box.

We basically approached them and say, we are interested in having you write content for our site and we are going to pay you, and make it clear that we don’t want it for free; we are just going to pay you. We start the relationship typically off like that and that way we are not asking for a link, and we are not asking them to do anything except give us content and we’ll pay you. And we were able to get about 10 or 12 influential people in this industry to write for us, and we put their content on our blog.

So we had a benefit of getting good content written on our site that we hoped that they would share for us. That’s basically you are doing it on a hope and a prayer. Obviously it’s going to be pretty high percentage of people that are going to be willing to do it, because if you paid someone you have a relationship with them, then you had an opportunity to talk to them, you’ve actually given them some money after you put the article up and you send it to them and say, “Hey look your article is up, feel free to share it with your community if you want to.” That type of angle.

80% of people are probably going to do that and that gives you more exposure. Then you get them to write a second article if they assume that they are going to work with you, then it’s okay well let’s take it a step further. Let’s get them to write again and then again. Then after like the third article we would say, “Hey look, we want to give you this badge to put on your website that says that you are a post contributor … That was the name of our blog because we call it treadmill post.

Then we got them to put our badge on their site and we would link it to their profile page. So it was very not spammy and every one of those was going to a different place. And that was kind of one of the strategies we took with Treadmill. Then I’m sorry were you going to say something there?

Steve: Yeah, I was going to ask, so what is the incentive of the blogger to write for your site? I mean were you paying them a lot of money?

Jackness: We were paying between like $100 and $150 per article. A fair price basically. They were writing 1500 to 2000 word article that was good content. They were either talking about their training routines, or they were talking about a race that they ran or something like that. It was good content that was on our blog. I mean not something that was going to necessarily directly convert into a transaction for us, but it was getting us links and getting us attention.

Steve: Okay, and then these people, I guess they weren’t thinking about getting traffic from this, right? It was purely for the money?

Jackness: Purely for the money yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Jackness: Another thing that we do when we did this is we had a profile on the article that they wrote about them, and link back to their site. So they felt like that they were getting the attention they deserved. I think that’s really important, and we talked about that in our preposition when we were offering to hire them.

Steve: Okay and then how many of those ended up linking back to you of the people that you guys paid?

Jackness: So about 80%.

Steve: Oh wow.

Jackness: Yeah. We would know usually within the first article if it was going to work or not. We didn’t really ask for a link until about the third or fourth article, but you could tell off the first one, like if you asked them to share it with their social media, and they would be like no we are not going to do that. We are okay thanks for the article, and you just never talk to them again.

Steve: Okay, yes so this is kind of like a long term strategy, right? This probably happens over the course of like weeks or months?

Jackness: Yes to … Even more specifically as far as the SEO strategy goes it’s an 18 to 24 month preposition that we are looking at. We are trying to really get like 1 or 2 quality links per month, and that’s all we really look for. We definitely are and the quality over quantity space and it just slow consistent pressure of getting more links and that really makes a difference. In the beginning you see no results. Your organic traffic like with ColorIt right now for instance it’s only been up for a few months. There is no organic traffic. I’m not spastic about it, because I know that it’s going to take 12 to 24 months to start seeing any results at all. Yeah, I mean it’s a long-term strategy.

Steve: Is this the similar strategy that you’ve taken with Cutting Board and ColorIt as well?

Jackness: It’s not, because it’s a little bit easier industry. Let me tell you just a few more things that we did with Treadmill real quick. Or actually one more specifically because I think this is really important for industries that are hard to SEO for. One of the other things that we did with Treadmill is we came up with this promotion to give people up to a $1000 cash back if they bought a treadmill. If they lost weight after they bought our units. The idea here was like for multi prone approach kind of thing.

So the idea was okay, well first off we are being held a MAP pricing here. We can’t sell this treadmill for less than the next guy. So what’s our value preposition? It was, okay well if you buy our treadmill most likely you are buying it because you want to lose weight. If you lose 100 pounds with our treadmill within x amount of time, we are going to send you 1000 bucks. If you lose I think it was 20 pounds, we’ll send you … I forgot the exact amounts, and I think it was $100 if you lost 20 pounds and if it was 50 it was $500 or something. I forget the exact numbers but it was something along those lines.

It became first of a great ad campaign because it did help convert some of our traffic and people were like okay well I need to lose 20 pounds. If I buy this $1000 treadmill from the treadmill.com versus walmart.com or sportsauthority, treadmill.com is offering a $100 rebate if I lose 20 pounds. We knew that very few people were going to actually fall through with that, these were New Year’s resolutions, or I want to get a beach body.

The reality is that most of our equipment unfortunately became the most expensive clothes hanger they ever bought, but it did help convert traffic but the SEO angle of it was, okay well now we have this really unique promotion that no one had ever done before in the industry at least that we knew off. We had to run it through legal and it cost us a few thousand dollars in legal fees to get the terms and conditions written in a way that complied with all states.

Which is really difficult because there is about 5 states out there that are notorious for coming after you for things like this. So we made sure we had all the bases covered. Once we did that then we contacted more fitness bloggers or newspapers and other media outlets, and this guy created a few links for us. It was just basically like treadmill.com is going to pay you to lose weight. It made for a compelling story, so that was another SEO angle that we took.

Steve: Interesting, so you mentioned earlier that you know exactly how many links it takes to get on the front page, so for something like a cutting board or an ice wraps or a treadmill, what would be your estimate?

Jackness: So for those keyword domains it’s been like 30 to 40, I mean very few. Again it’s just been getting 2 per month for a couple of years is basically what it takes. Now if we had a less keyword domain I think that it would probably take four times that many.

Steve: Four times that many? Wow, okay.

Jackness: That’s just basically what we’ve seen. Now your mileage might vary kind of thing, but we’ve seen … I think it’s going to be about four times harder for us to rank for adult coloring book for instance with colorit.com, than if we had adult coloringbooks.com as our brand, and that’s a long brand name and that’s not really like an actual brand name. So it’s not like a great example, maybe if it was more like mikesicepacks.com versus having icewraps.com, all right it definitely makes it more difficult.

Steve: Interesting, even if it’s just a little word like Mike in front of it, like Mikestreadmills it would make it that much harder, okay.

Jackness: For sure yeah I mean that’s what we’ve seen. Now again there is a lot of controversy about this you get … it’s kind of like talking religion with people, everyone kind of has a different opinion. For sure I can say definitively is what we’ve seen is that ranking for that specific word, whatever your keyword as in the plural doesn’t matter there. So cutting board versus cutting boards we see equal results, but we for sure we are definitely going to weigh less links that we would take if we had less keyword of a domain.

Steve: Okay, so let’s switch gears a little bit because I know that you’ve had a lot of success with ColorIt. I mean you are not getting any search traffic right now you said, right? So the way you’ve been getting traffic to ColorIt has been through Facebook ads, right?

Jackness: Yeah so I mean mostly Facebook ads and social media in general. I mean the only organic traffic we get to ColorIt, is for our brand name, which is actually getting to be higher and higher which makes me feel good that people are typing in our brand name. We are not ranking for any other organic terms.

Steve: Yeah, I mean at the same time the brand’s only like four months old at this point too, right? So I was hoping you could break down some of your Facebook ad strategies specifically for ecommerce, and what you’ve been doing with colorit.com. So what would you say is your best performing Facebook ad camping to date?

Jackness: So by far in a way our best campaigns have been video ads. We first started out with a bunch of static images and they were doing well, but the video ads by far in a way have done the best. We have two different angles that we take with video ads. The first one is my cousin Ericka who is my partner in the business, and we’ve made her the face of the brand, because women are our audience.

We’ve split test this on Facebook and we can’t get a single male to convert on our site. So I mean we know definitively that it’s a female audience. So it doesn’t make sense to have me as the brand on the site. So we’ve used her to do the videos. The first video that we have that’s done really is basically it’s a two minute long video of her just talking into the camera with like our brand name behind it.

I’ll give you a link so you can put this on the show notes; we have it up on YouTube. It’s just basically her talking about the brand, just genuinely sitting down and talking about why ColorIt came to be. There’s a lot of imagery in the video about the hard back covers and the spiral binding, and the artist quality paper and all that type of stuff.

That video has done incredibly well for us, I mean just absolutely incredibly well. It’s the one that sustains having a CPA that makes sense. It started to lose some of its performance, and then we changed the landing page, and then we were just talking about that page before we started recording here today. That’s actually kind of boosted our conversion rate back up again and got our CPA down which is great. That video has done really well for us.

Steve: Can you give us some metrics on like what your click through rate is and … Well I want to talk about targeting a little bit also?

Jackness: Yeah, unfortunately I don’t have it like up in front of me, but I do know that like our CPAE that’s the one number that I’m always looking at the most. Our CPA on that video right now is running about 12 bucks which is right about the level where it makes sense for us to run it. We are always like throttling up our budget to kind of be right there, we are looking to get as many conversions a day as we can.

Steve: And your average order size is a multiple of that or?

Jackness: Yeah, so our average order size was $41, and this is something else we were talking about before the call, but that’s dropped quite a bit right now because we are out of stock on our highest ticket item on the site. So our average order volume … Our value has dropped it has hit the performance of our Facebook ads, and kind of thrown things out of lack for the time being until we get those back in stock.

Steve: Okay, so in terms of targeting now what is your best target? Obviously there is a lot of iteration involved, but in terms of your best targeting group what has that been?

Jackness: Yeah, so the best targeting group is just basically been an audience on Facebook that likes coloring books. Surprisingly enough there is an interest on Facebook that’s called coloring book whatever reason without the ‘S’. It’s like 2.2 million people in the US, and we’ve filtered it out to just females, again because we know that females are our audience, so it’s about 1.8 million people. We’ve been just going through that audience as much as we can right now and we haven’t fully exhausted it yet.

The great thing about that is that we are getting so many customers from these Facebook ads that we’ve now been able to build a look-a-like audience; it’s starting to actually perform fairly well, too. I found … Excuse me, that you need to have probably about 3000 or 4000 people in your converted customer list to use a look-a-like audience to base that off of, because you don’t get real good data off of like 100 people obviously or 500 people.

Yeah that audience has done really well for us, and we split test everything to the nth degree. When we launched a new ad campaign, like the video I was just talking about with Ericka the intro video, we used … We probably have had 50 different iterations of that video up at this point. Where we are using different headlines, different ad copy, actually just found out the other day that you can add images into your little icons or emoticons into your ad copy.

We’ve been testing that stuff now and we just are constantly testing. Split testing landing pages, split testing stacking audiences on top of people that like coloring books. For instance people that like coloring books and Prisma color pencils, which is like the number one pencil company in the industry. Or people that like coloring books and Ellen Degeneres, or one of the ones that we’ve done that’s done really well is that people like coloring books and wine relaxation and meditation, that’s done really well because these are people that have seen like our books.

Steve: So what’s interesting is you’ve said your best converting audience right now is literary just everyone in the US that likes coloring books, right?

Jackness: Yeah, exactly yeah.

Steve: So and then you probably sort by gender and age I would imagine right, because younger people probably don’t like coloring books?

Jackness: Yeah, I mean it’s interesting. I think there’s a lot of people … Younger people that like coloring books, because we can see that by just typing into the box like it really is age empty. For instance it’s like 1.8 million women, but if we filter by 35 to 65 plus it goes down to like 1.2 or something like that.

That’s actually the audience that we target because we found that the really young crowd either isn’t able to afford a $16 coloring book, or they don’t really care about quality and they think it’s something that you kind of discover as you get older. You get more into higher end stuff; you have the money to pay for it.

Steve: Do you ever target based on income level?

Jackness: We did do that and interestingly enough actually, we’ve used Facebook insights. I thought the higher income people would convert better, and it just naturally seemed like the obvious thing. It did awful, and I was like man this doesn’t make any sense. When our look alike audience got big enough that Facebook started showing the income groups, it actually turned out that our bread and butter was actually lower income people, which I still don’t quite get.

What we discovered about our audience is and again because our look alike audiences got big enough for Facebook to share this data. For anyone that’s listening, you can go to Facebook insights, and pick a custom audience and it will tell you all this data about your audience. It will tell you their gender, their age, their income levels, whether they drive a van or a sports car.

It’s pretty crazy the data that you will get on them. One of the things that we discovered is that it’s basically home owners. It’s people that have grand kids, and there’s a couple of other things that are really interesting, but the income level one what I thought was really interesting is people basically in that like 30-75,000 thousand dollar bracket, and not the 75-150,000 dollar bracket which is what I would have guessed.

Steve: Interesting. Let me ask you this. If you were to start, or if you were to teach someone how to start their own Facebook campaign from scratch, how would you have them begin?

Jackness: Yeah, first off it’s important to not give up. Really before you … Obviously it’s not how you begin, but you got to sit yourself down and say, “Look, I’m not going to run one ad and have it under perform and then just give up.” That’s what most people end up doing because your first ads are going to be awful. It’s just the way it’s going to be. You got to get some initial data.

We set up … Basically what we are doing now is we set up at least 4 different images, and we try to have them be very different and we also use four headlines and four ad copies. And we are using a product called AdEspresso to help with that. Basically we were doing it on manually through the Facebook ads editor before, and it just would take a half a day to set all that up and with AdEspresso you can do it in like 20 minutes.

That creates … It will let you do up to 50 variations of an ad, and we typically will push it to its limits. Then we set a budget of at least $10 per day per ad. If it’s 48 ads, we’ll run $480 a day which is obviously quite high. We’ve gotten the confidence to be able to do that. I certainly wouldn’t recommend it to someone getting started to go right for that type of level. I mean maybe you do 12 combinations and you do $120 a day. The reason it’s important to do at least $10 a day per ad is that Facebook just can’t give you good data on $3 a day or $2 a day. You got to get good data. Basically run those ads and give them at least 3 days to run.

Steve: Are you bidding by impressions at this point or conversions?

Jackness: That’s actually a really great question and very important. We optimize for website conversions which for us is a purchase. Obviously if you are trying to get leads you would optimize for getting a lead. Let Facebook do its thing. Every time I try to outsmart Facebook by doing bids and things like this, or trying to just optimize for website clicks, I lost. Facebook just has too much data and they are too good with what they do.

So we optimize for website conversions. I set a $10 a day budget to start with, and I use automatic bidding and let them do their thing. I notice that to start with, the performance is poor and then over the first couple of days magically it’s just improves. It’s been really interesting. We let those ads run and then through either AdEspresso or through ADS Magic if you don’t do use AdEspresso; you can then look at all your demographics.

For instance I was just helping someone today before this call that was doing a legen [ph] campaign. They had hired an agency to help them and they were paying $6 per lead. I was just like, “You are crazy dude. You got to pause that thing and let me just do a test and see what I can do with this.”

Steve: You will only charge him $5 lead, right?

Jackness: I was like I will do it for half. I will go out of the corner and get leads for 3 bucks. [inaudible 00:34:52] take me to your email address, I give you some pizza. Anyway, we ran that for just a couple days, and what we found by letting that data run is that, and again I don’t know this is just interesting because it’s … He’s in a pet space. I don’t want to talk too much about it and break his confidence, but he’s in a pet space. What we found is that immediately within the first 2 days that males were greatly underperforming females by a lot.

What I do then is I set up what I call a refined campaign. I take the images that were performing the best, the ad copy that’s performing the best, and the headline that perform the best, and then stack that on top of the genders that are doing the best if that is an issue. The age groups that are doing the best and interests that are doing the best, and do a refined ad. Now we’ve gotten him down to under a dollar per lead which is still high. I mean we are generating leads for some of the things that we are doing for 17 cents now.

Steve: That’s ridiculously cheap actually.

Jackness: It is. I mean I made a post about this that we were doing 22 cents everyone was flipping out, and we’ve actually cut down up to 17 cents, but it’s all on refinement. We continue to refine our landing page, do AB testing, we use lead pages.net. We’ve actually done 4 different lead pages. The first one bombed. I was like let me try another one. That one did a little better.

You kind of learn about what’s working and what’s not. We do AB testing on every single one of them on the copy, on the button text, on everything until we find what’s working the best, and the one that we have now performs exceedingly well. I’m happy to share that with you as well Steve. We can put that in the show notes so people can see that landing page. It’s done well for us.

Steve: Okay cool.

Jackness: It’s not just the landing page, but it’s also the ad copy. We ran a bunch of different ads and different imagery and different headlines and stuff until we found the one that worked. What seems to work the best is the tip for your audience is always that scarcity. The headline I believe that’s running right now, that’s doing the best is something along the lines of this week only. Get 4 free drawings, or this month only or something along those lines, and that’s the one that’s by far in a way done the best. Wherever you say this is going to end, you got to click on this now otherwise you are going to lose it, that seems to do the best. Yeah we are paying 17 cents a lead.

Steve: Are your best offers tend to be the ones where you are kind of giving something away as opposed to content?

Jackness: Yeah, either way I would say that what we are giving away with the free drawings is content as well. You could argue that. We are doing things like an icewraps for … We are working on getting stuff refined and doing better, but we are doing things like advertising the little leagues or parents that have an interest in little league and say we’ll give you a free report on pitching on ice.

We’ll advertise to tennis fans, to people that like tennis and talk about like how to prevent tennis elbow, and give them a free report. The key here is you just want to get their email address. Off of those, like off the 4 free drawing for instance is the one that we refined the most now. It’s a 13 part series that goes out over 5 weeks.

Steve: Can we just kind of breakdown what goes in some of these sequences like a main gist of your 13 part sequence?

Jackness: Yeah, for sure. The first thing that we’ve done that’s helped the most to get us the most value out of it is it’s 4 free drawings. We’ve actually instead of giving them all four drawings at once; we broke it out over a month. So we send them 1 drawing now per week. The reason that that’s important, there’s, with email marketing, the number one thing that you have to strive for is a high open rate.

You want to also train people to open your emails, because if you just email them once and they get it and they just kind of forget about you, that’s not going to generate sales for you.
Our target is to get a high open rate, because high open rate means a high delivery rate across all email service providers. If your open rate is 5% or 10%, Google and hotmail and outlook and all these different online email service providers will just stick your stuff right into spam. It will never get into anyone’s email box. They’ll go in promotions, they will never get there.

We break it out over a month, and basically we are trying to train people to open our emails. It’s like they want to open and then they look forward to this free thing every week.
The first email we send out actually when they sign up for this 4 free drawing promotion and again I will share the link and anybody wants to sign up for it they can get the whole 13 part series if they’re patient enough and wait for 5 weeks.

The first email actually doesn’t give them anything. It’s an email that says, “Hey, like starting tomorrow we are going to start sending you 1 free drawing a week. Look out for the email tomorrow.” The reason we do that is we know they are going to open up the first email. We are going to have a very high open rate on the first email, incredibly important.

We use it as an opportunity to be like, “Okay here are some frequently asked questions about this promotion.” Why are you giving these drawings away for free, how do I print them? Do they work on windows or Mac? We answer a few FAQs in the email. We just, like I said, we say, “Starting tomorrow, you are going to start getting these free drawings once a week.” That way, the second email has a high open rate as well. Then what we do is we alternate each email … First off we, if they don’t open, the first drawing we send them a reminder. That’s part of the 13 part email series.

The email with the drawing goes out and if they don’t click on it and open it or actually click on the button to download the drawing, they will get another email that says, “Hey don’t forget your drawing,” which is really important. That email gets a high open rate as well because people dismiss emails. We do that as well and Klaviyo allows you to do that. Then what we do is we basically alternate between sending them a free drawing, and then in the middle of the week we send them some promotional thing about our brand, just trying to soften them up a little bit for a sale.

Steve: What’s the frequency that these emails go out?

Jackness: It’s every third or fourth day depending, because there are seven days in a week. You can’t quite do it equally apart, but it’s every 3 or 4 days depending on … So we send them and we just like I said we alternate. It’s a free drawing about the color brand. Another free drawing to check out whether our customers have been doing with our stuff like the social proofs stuff, another free drawing, then they get another about the color brand type email, and it just goes back and forth like that for a month.

Then what we do is if they haven’t purchased by this point. By the way, we get a lot of purchases throughout this funnel. We see the biggest conversion when the free drawings go out. We are lucky. We are in an industry where there’s a direct correlation of, okay I get this drawing, I print it out, I like coloring, I want to go by more of those. Not everyone can do that. You can for instance can’t send someone a free handkerchief or whatever. Get more creative and use content …

Steve: We can send them a craft that uses handkerchiefs and then tell them to go, right?

Jackness: Yeah. Then the last thing that we do is we give them a coupon. If they are at the end of the phase and they haven’t … At the end of that series I should say and they haven’t purchased and we filter it out by that by the way. We don’t send a coupon to people that have purchased. We actually use like a gift card on this promotion. We say, “We hope you enjoyed the 4 free drawings. ColorIt is full of surprises. Something along these lines, we want to give you another surprise. Here’s a five dollar gift card.”

People, I think treat that differently than a five dollar off coupon. In their mind, they now have $5 in cash that they can go spend in our store, and they don’t really think about the fact that there’s nothing for $5 in our store. They got to go spend at least 16 bucks, and then hopefully once we get them to buy something, they become a customer for life. That’s basically the gist of that series.

Steve: Okay, and then once they actually make a purchase; you have another series, right?

Jackness: Yes, and that’s actually, that’s a series that we just … On ColorIt, it just got in place because we were spending all this time on pre-purchase series and trying to get people to become customers, but now that we have a lot of customers and a lot of orders coming through, we put together, I think it’s a ten part series, post purchase. The first email that goes out is basically just a thank you for your order. It’s a personal note from Erica. Then we actually send another email while the package is in transit, and that’s actually done quite well for us as well.

We basically say, “It’s time to get excited.” We want to get people … Again we are training them to open up our emails. Anytime you can send an email out and have a high open rate, we are going to take advantage of that. Anytime we can get our brand in front of them, we want to do that. Surprisingly enough, that email has actually generated quite a bit of business for us. I don’t quite get that one, because people don’t have the product in their hands yet, but for whatever reason it’s still converting traffic for us.

Steve: I’m sorry, what does this email do?

Jackness: It’s just a tiny … The title of the email is time to get excited, and it’s basically … It goes out I think 2 days after the package ships. Maybe it’s one day after the package ships. It’s basically just letting people know the package is on the way. It’s going to be delivered in a few days and it’s time to get excited about the product you are about to receive.

Steve: Interesting, and then there’s a link back to the site and then they go back and buy some more stuff?

Jackness: Yeah, I don’t quite get it. No coupon, or actual offer but yeah, they are going back and buying stuff from that email.

Steve: Okay, and then what about the remaining emails?

Jackness: The next one that we send out is once the item arrives, we use something called after ship. That has a web hook with Klaviyo. We know when the package has been delivered. We actually send out an email the following day, because we don’t want to send out the email until we know that they actually have it in their hands, because it could be sitting on their door steps. We wait until the following day.

We just basically send out an email that says, “How’s your package been delivered, we want to make sure that you are happy,” that type of an email. That email actually has the highest conversion rate of all the emails that we send out in the post purchase row. People once they get the product in their hand and if it’s their first time ordering from us they are like, “Wow, this is really amazing, I want to order more.” It does quite well for us, and I’m actually pulling up Klaviyo just so I can remember here in my head what the next email is, so just give me 1 second to pull that up.

Steve: Sure.

Mike: You can cut out the dead space I guess. Okay, the next email that we send out on the series is a referral program email, and we actually just instituted a referral program for ColorIt. We get all these amazing testimonials coming in. It was like all right well we might as well get them to become ambassadors for us, and give them some motivation monetarily to want to do that. We actually pay referrers 5$ for every customer they send to us which is a lot of money, but it’s significantly less.

I mentioned earlier that we are paying about $12 CPA for some of these Facebook ads. So I find our referral fee is actually quite good for us, and we only pay it once. It’s up for any new customer. We hope that our average life time value of a customer is going to be way higher than what they you order, so paying 5 bucks is really nothing for the lifetime of that customer.

Steve: Do you use a plug-in to do that?

Mike: We do, we use a … It is a Shopify thing called like referrally or something like that. It is doing pretty well. We just launched it. We have got in several hundred affiliates already, and we have got in quite a few orders off of it, and it was something we just launched actually this week or last week, it was like a Monday of this week. It is doing pretty well for a new program.

We have that referral program email, be early in the sequence because we want people while it’s still fresh in their minds and are loving our products to be more up to want to tell others about ColorIt. That goes out 2 days after the purchase, and then on the 4th day we send out an email about social media submissions, so we basically say, “Hey, if you love ColorIt and you are enjoying the product, post at the social media with the hashtag #mycolorit.”

That’s the hashtag that we developed, and basically share your submission or your drawings with the world. This email is generating a bunch of revenue too, and the insulate benefit of that is that we are getting a ton of submissions to that hashtag and we built a landing page around, just to having all these different submissions and they are really pretty.

I’m not really in the coloring myself, but you look at some of these, things that people have done and they are really pretty. They have done a really great job with our artwork. It makes us really proud to see what they have done, and basically we just take that stuff and make it social proof for our future customers that are people that are just landing on our site for the first time. Having that as a part of your conversion re-optimization tactic is really important.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: The next one we send out is 7 days after purchase, now we ask for a testimonial from the customer. This email says basically we will give you a $10 gift card if you send in a testimonial. We just ask … It only needs to be a couple sentences; you take a picture with yourself with 1 of our products and allow us to use it on our website if we want to, and we will send you a $10 gift card.

Overtime we have gotten quite a bit of testimonials from those, and we are also generating more money in sales off of these emails as well. What we really have learned is that just keep sending more email. Never stop sending email, and every one of them is making money and that’s really what we have been doing.

Steve: Is this only for 1st time purchasers?

Mike: Yes, we have only set up for 1st time purchasers right now. Actually the way we have it set up and I’m actually looking at the rules right now, is that if they haven’t made a purchase … If they made a purchase before, but it’s been more than 120 days and this will go back out again. If they are buying for a 2nd time within 4 months then this will not go out a 2nd time.

Because we are new, we haven’t set up … We are going to have emails sequences for frequent buyers, so anyone that has spot more than 3 times or 5 times we will send them a special sequence that says, “Thank you so much for being in our valued customer client,” kind of email, because we are still new, we just haven’t had a chance to set that up yet. We haven’t had enough people that are falling in that bucket.

Steve: Cool.

Mike: Moving on with this email sequence is a few more that we send out. At this point now we go to every week, we don’t want to keep the frequency up to every 3 days, and we don’t want to annoy people. So we send out an email after 14, 21, 28 and 35 days and to quickly review those without spending a bunch of time here. The one that goes out of the 14 days is more about the ColorIt brand, exploring the brand. We tell people we also offer journals and sketch pads, pencils. We are going to have jelly pens soon. People who aren’t aware that we have these other things, then this reminds them.

This email again, just likes every other one in the chain is generating money. The next one is now we go to reminders. A lot of these next emails are reminders, so we do a social media submission reminder. Then we do a referral program reminder, because these are things that are really important to us. Now that we are at the 35 day mark, which is about 5 weeks I should say. We do a monthly special email, and we are constantly running a monthly special and we can have a link in this email to our monthly special page.

We don’t know what the monthly special is going to be because this is a part of the flow, but we know that there will be a monthly special there when they run there, and legitimately those special is different every month. We sit down, a few days before the end of the month and dream up what combination of products we want to give away or sell I should say at a discounted price, and we direct them there. Basically our hope is now that it has been 5 weeks maybe they are now ready to go buy something else again, or be gently reminded about the special, and that’s doing pretty well.

From there we have actually started developing this; we haven’t even implemented it yet. Basically starting at the 2 month mark we have a 4 sequence email trying to go out, and I don’t have the results for this yet, but basically it’s just a discount ladder. If they haven’t purchased in that time frame, let’s give them a coupon, maybe it’s 5% off, if it’s after 3 months it’s 10% off and maybe after 4 or 5 months, if it’s been a lot, so it’s like what do we need to do to get you back, here is a 20% off coupon or whatever it might be. Then if they just don’t buy at that point, we probably remove them from our list.

Steve: Okay, cool. It sounds like you got a lot in place, and there is a lot to be put in place as well.

Mike: Yeah, it can be overwhelming, at first I’m sure I have been rattling off a lot of stuff here, I apologize for being long winded, but there’s obviously quite a bit to it. You just have to start somewhere, right? Write that first email, then write the second email. We basically, we are trying to add at least 2 emails per week, that’s kind of our internal policy here whenever we’ve sat down and set a goal of getting at least 2 more emails written per week as a part of some chain.

We are just slowly adding on to it and the great thing is all the emails that we wrote 3 months ago, they are still going out. This is all automated, so every month we are building the number of emails that we have sent and we are building the revenue that we’ve received from email, every month, month over month it is increasing.

Steve: That’s awesome. I like that slow and steady approach where you just have a goal and overtime you going to have a ton of … Getting a lot of stuff done overtime.

Mike: Yeah, definitely.

Steve: Cool Mike, we have been chatting for quite a while, and I want to be respectful of your time. Where can people find you if they have any questions about what you are doing?

Mike: Like you mentioned before we have an e-commerce specific website called ecomcrew.com. You can hit us up over there on the contact form, or you can contact me directly if you wanted to at mike@terran.com, Terrence or LLC Holding Company doesn’t really mean much of anything. It’s just a site that we have, but either ecomcrew or mike@terran is the best way to get me.

Steve: Awesome, hey Mike thanks for coming on the show. I’m sure the readers, the listeners learned a lot today.

Mike: Yeah, thank you so much, it’s been a pleasure.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Mike is a good friend of mine who really knows his stuff, and what I like about him is that he is willing to try every marketing tactic very thoroughly and he has an open mind. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode119, and if you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

118: How To Transition From Amazon To Your Own Ecommerce Store With Kurt Elster

How To Transition From Amazon To Your Own Ecommerce Store With Kurt Elster

Today, I’m thrilled to have Kurt Elster on the show. Kurt was introduced to me by my good friend Nick Loper who I had back on episode 80 of the podcast. Kurt runs EtherCycle.com where he helps private label sellers launch their own ecommerce websites.

Specifically, he’s a Shopify platform expert who helps Shopify users uncover hotspots in their designs to improve their conversion rate. Anyway, I’m a firm believer you really need to own your own platform in addition to Amazon which is why I brought Kurt on the show today to discuss the transition.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get traffic to your site.
  • How to create a high converting website
  • The biggest mistake that new store owners make
  • How to transition from Amazon to your own site
  • Kurt’s recommendation on shopping cart platform
  • Whether Kurt recommends working with the spouse.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Kurt Elster on the show. Now Kurt was introduced to me by my good friend Nick Lopa who I had back on episode 80 of the podcast. And Kurt runs ethercycle.com, where he helps private label sellers launch their own ecommerce websites. Now specifically he is a Shopify platform expert who helps Shopify users uncover hotspots in their designs to improve their conversion rate.

And incidentally I’m a firm believer that you really need to own your own platform in addition to selling on Amazon, which is why I brought Kurt on the show today to kind of discuss the transition from Amazon to your own branded website. And with that welcome to the Kurt, how are you doing today man?

Kurt: I’m doing great thank you for having me, it’s my honor and pleasure.

Steve: So Kurt how did you kind of get into ecommerce, and why did you decide to start a consultancy and specifically a Shopify based on?

Kurt: Sure I mean so — I mean I have been involved in ecommerce in one way or the other over the last decade. I was selling counterfeit t-shirts on eBay in college. I didn’t know enough to know that there was like intellectual property was a thing, and then from there I was product manager for a drop shipper, and then started my own web design agency. And that was its own business learning curve going from generalist web design back to my roots as ecommerce, and then finally niching down to just the Shopify platform.

So I’m biased, I have got a horse in the game, but I really, really love the Shopify platform, because they do so much to foster a community. There is always someone available be it an expert or other store owner who can help you whenever you have a road blocker problem, plus all the great apps and services that integrate with it.

Steve: So just curious, did you start out supporting a whole bunch of different carts?

Kurt: Yeah we actually — so overtime we narrowed down. Originally we were doing like — no we went from like generalist to doing work for creative agency. So I have worked with huge brands like [inaudible 00:03:15]. But at the same time we were part of the Shopify experts program, and we were getting traction there.

So I said well maybe I foolishly said let’s expand by doing other platforms, but none of them were as satisfying as Shopify. And finally about two years ago I said wait why are we doing anything other than the thing we love. And niche down to just Shopify. So even though like as a service person having a niche is great just as an ecommerce having a niche is great.

Steve: Interesting, so was there demand? I’m just trying to get an idea of like the landscape right now. Was there demand for some of the other platforms, or you did you just choose one just for the sake of niching down?

Kurt: I chose it because we were authentically happy with Shopify. Like every time we finished any project we kind of reflect, and we were a small team at the time. We’ve always been three people, five people now, but we kind of reflect on like what — was that project good or bad, how do we feel about it? And it was Shopify was like 99% of the time we are like wow that just felt easy.

And that was what we were, why we chose to stick with it. But no we had worked with BigCommerce of course, LemonStand, Magento; I think are the other ecommerce platforms we used. And they’re good. Yeah there is really no bad one, they have slightly different features. But again with Shopify I think the huge advantage we are getting is that community.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of open source is that still popular at all just based on your experiences?

Kurt: I don’t think nearly as many people are rolling their own anymore just because you get in into such — no it’s probably — its technical that as soon as you — if I’m on Shopify I worry about ecommerce. Versus if I’m on — if I have got an open source thing, now suddenly I’m in the IT business as well, so I need to worry about like setting up my server and keeping things secure and there is all these new problems that get introduced when you go open source. Not that open source is bad.

Steve: So would you say that you can do everything that you want to with a fully hosted platform that you could probably do with open source even though you own like all the code?

Kurt: At this point through all the extensions and services and apps that are out there, that used to be the critic as well. Oh you are limited, I don’t think it’s the case anymore and especially it’s never been the case design wise.

Steve: Sure, of course.

Kurt: Shopify has always said hey you can access to everything design wise, don’t worry about it. And there was kind of a misunderstanding where people were like, oh you can do responsive, what are you talking about. But no, the limitations seem to have worked themselves out.

Steve: Let me ask you that question in a different way. Is there anything that you wish that Shopify for example could do where you felt that you would need more control?

Kurt: That’s a great question. So one of the — well a couple of common feature request, there is no native wholesale solution for Shopify that maybe other more enterprise focused platforms might have. That often is a common request that tying its people, and there is ways around it. I mean my answer is run two stores and one is a sub domain like wholesale dot whatever .com.

So that’s a common request and for people who have a ton of products Shopify doesn’t necessarily do nested categories the way you might like typically think of an ecommerce set up. It’s all individual collections and that could trip people up.

Steve: Any complains on the check out?

Kurt: Well so the number one issue is in the check out that’s the one template you are not allowed of total control over, you are not allowed to mess with. There is a number of workarounds for it, so you can use translations to change labels to whatever you want. And you now could style it to match your form. But I think it’s a very clean checkout, I think it’s whether they say sort of now, I think its inspired by Amazon because you get transitioned from store into this very clean white easy to use check out. I like it a lot, and with qualified traffic it converts very well.

Steve: Okay, and so it just sounds like in general you can do most of what you want with Shopify with the exemption of maybe some major things that owning the code might actually help.

Kurt: Yeah, once until you are out like extreme some kind of like extreme Enterprise level thing with either like a million products or crazy features like, oh I want to build a market place. And there is still waste too, there is always some clever walk around like it never seizes to surprise me the stuff that people manage to come up with. So even if a feature is not native there is some clever guy out there who can do it.

Steve: Okay, and so what I was going to today Kurt was a lot of people are selling on Amazon right now. And it’s really easy to kind of get addicted to Amazon because the money just comes and you don’t have to worry about anything. But in the long run you really need to have your own platform, so from the perspective of an Amazon seller who only sells on Amazon I would like you to kind of walk me through the process. Like let’s say I came to you as a pure Amazon seller, how would you kind of guide to the right way to design my ecommerce store?

Kurt: Sure, well and so if we back up the — I get a lot of people who are — they have established businesses on Amazon. And Amazon is great because it’s a market place, they are delivering the traffic to you. But you don’t own the customers and you are at the whim of Amazon, so when people come to me and they are on Amazon and they want to move to Shopify. Often I’ll say, “Well what’s the impetus for this, why do you want to do it?”

It’s something like well I want to own my own audience, I want to build this relationship and I can’t do it with Amazon. And I have got this single point of failure, like for some reason you upset the Amazon gods. Now you’ve got this single point of failure, this single channel versus if you are on multiple channels Shopify being one of them, you are much more in control and you don’t — like it’s diversification.

Steve: Sure, sure.

Kurt: So I think that’s the reason most people want to make that switch. And it’s not that they want to switch, they run both concurrently, and it works well. But probably the biggest thing that people run into is when they switch to Shopify or rather add that as a channel to their business, is they are not used to getting traffic. Like that’s never had to — with Amazon you are paying this big percentage to them, but they are delivering the traffic to your door. Versus Shopify is like okay now you are on your own, and that’s a hard transition for a lot of people.

Steve: Plus you have to worry about conversion optimization, getting the website looking trustworthy, and all those things as well.

Kurt: Yeah, and I think, probably the biggest problem you run into with setting up an Amazon store on Shopify is that they don’t have that collateral that adds that trust, that adds that confidence, because it’s very much like I have optimized my product title. Amazon people always have great photos, I’ve got a good product description, and I can pick it from some reviews.

Beyond that there is rarely content marketing that’s come along with it for me to use. There is rarely an about page. There is all these other trust indicator pieces of a business that when you are coming purely from Amazon are often missing.

Steve: Let’s start from the beginning then. Let’s say I’m coming to you for the first time, what are some of the thing that you will kind of walk me through, or questions that you might ask me?

Kurt: Number one is I want to know who your audience is. What kind of people are buying your product? Who is it for and why are they buying it? An Amazon seller may or may not know this, but what is fantastic about Amazon are the reviews. I will go through, like when I see a product that has got 1300 reviews, I get excited, because I will start going through those reviews. First thing I could do is I get a great sense of who’s buying it, why they are buying it, because on the reviews they reveal it.

You now know the pain and the problem that you are solving in people’s lives which automatically … I want to start with; my first step is what’s your positioning, so it’s who you sell, like what are you selling to who and why? Ideally is there a unique selling proposition there, some kind of competitive advantage. Often what the Amazon seller tells me is different than what the reviews tell me. I have discovered like people don’t necessarily know what they don’t know, so going through those reviews is enlightening.

Steve: Can you give me an example of when they will be a disconnect there?

Kurt: Sure, I will use, well this isn’t the best example because they work purely on Amazon, but I have a client who sells replacement rubber straps for Rolex watch bands. We thought it was people who wanted to customize their watch, they have got a fancy, “I spend $8,000 on a watch, why not have like 6 straps, and then I can change it out depending on my mood.”

That was our thinking and that makes sense, and then when we started asking people, and we started going … They started selling on Amazon, and I started looking through the reviews. We discovered it was actually a little bit of the opposite. People, yeah they wanted to custom like customize their watch sounded cool, but what really was going on was they spent $8,000 on a watch, and they wanted to wear it all the time without scratching it up. They were saying things like, “Now I can …”

One review was really enlightening, it was a launch, she was, “Yeah, my husband bought me a Rolex, I wear it to work, I’m a nurse, and I have to run my watch through an auto-clave and I got sick of scratching up or messing up the bracelet, so I just use my evers [ph] band.”

It was this incredible thing where it’s like, “Oh my gosh, you have a literal blue collar worker using the straps so they can wear this watch every single day.” That wildly changed how we saw the product. We took the language from those reviews, and then suddenly like you get an SEO benefit and these better selling propositions when you use the language your customers are using in those reviews.

Steve: Interesting, I would imagine there were some people who wanted it just for the fashion as well, right? How did you decide to do that versus people who didn’t want to damage their watch? Did you have two separate pages addressing both audiences, or did you focus on the protective aspects?
Kurt: That’s a good question, and no because the reviews were so overwhelmingly saying things like. “Yeah, now I can go swimming, now I can ride my bike with my Rolex.” It was always about doing some, usually some kind of active sport.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: We ended up like reshooting customer action photos to include, and reusing that language and saying, “You are protecting your investment.” And using this entirely different language we hadn’t even thought of that was revealed once we had those reviews coming in and we were able to read that.

Steve: I see, let’s say you didn’t have access to these reviews, were there any other ways that you would find to get an idea who your target customer was?

Kurt: Yeah, so a couple of ways. One is, so with Amazon, let’s say you are starting with Amazon, you don’t have your customers email addresses which is a pain, but you do have their phone numbers, so you could drop, if you have had enough of them, you could drop all those phone numbers into a custom audience in Facebook. Facebook will look them up and then using a tool called Audience, to sort of match those phone numbers to actual accounts.
Then using a tool called Audience Insights, it will give you demographic information about the person. It gives you the basic stuff like age and gender, location, but then it gives you all these really fun behavioral data segments, well kind of give you an idea of what the person is like. That can be very helpful.

Steve: Just curious, did you run this process on the watch band company?

Kurt: Yeah, that one was … It wasn’t detailed enough where we got info that didn’t surprise us at all, it was like it’s men and excuse older, like that made sense.

Steve: Sure.

Kurt: But then within the demographic, you have some cute names for some of these demographics, and I think the one that we overwhelmingly have for [inaudible 00:15:35] was, I think it’s called skyboxes and suburbans, that’s their cute name for Yappy.

Steve: Okay, so there is nothing surprising there, and so it sounds like you took all that information and used that in your unique value propositions on the site.

Kurt: Yeah, you want to use … You want to tweak all your language around that. Essentially when you are talking to someone, like your website needs to be talking about the customer and not you. All the language needs to be you not I focused, and then really we want to hold up the mirror, we want to show someone a better version of themselves through our product.

And we could do that when we leverage that language from the reviews where people are saying that these are the phrases people use to describe what they like about it, what they got out of it. When you add that to headlines, taglines, titles, descriptions, all of that, it adds up into a very compelling experience where people will often want to buy.

Steve: A common question I get asked is like for people in Amazon often times they are only selling one product or a bunch of despair products. In this case was it just watch bands, or did they have a huge variety of watch bands?

Kurt: They had both, and what we ended up doing was, you want to separate not by product but by audience. So they were selling like low end replacement straps for whatever watch, and then they had this high end line for Rolexes, so we separated those into two separate brands.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: It comes down to what the audience says, so if I’m selling, you know for all my products are sporting goods, okay I could probably put that into one Shopify store, but if it’s like, one is yoga mats, and the other thing is a gun cleaner, I’d probably want those, it’s different audiences. You probably want to run those as two separate stores. At the end of the day relevancy is absolutely critical, so that’s what you want to focus on is keeping it as relevant as possible.

If you are in a situation, you are in a tunnel, like you’re kind of shoot, I got 10 products and they are all totally different, well exploit the 80/20 rule, take the two best performing products and make a store for those. If that works out then go to the next one.

Steve: Using this watch band example again, let’s say we have a store selling the high end ones, but let’s say we have only like 4 or 5, do you kind of structure the website differently depending on the number of products that you offer?

Kurt: Yeah, I actually prefer … Stores with fewer products are easier, and not just from a stand point of oh I have to copy and paste these product descriptions, but from the customer stand point. The fewer products you have, you are really presenting the person with fewer decisions, you’ve got a tighter sales funnel, you are really making life easier on the customer and thereby making it easier on yourself to sell.

Steve: In the case of these watch bands, was the website pretty much like a single sales page like format?

Kurt: No, so what we did, the issue we had was rather to increase, the same strap actually fits every Rolex, or like a majority of them, except for some oddballs, but we didn’t tell people that. We instead walked them through this process where we made them pick their watch first, so we said, “Okay, choose which watch you have.” Then it would show you that strap, because buying all these Rolexes would be prohibitively expensive. There was just a mark up in photo-shop.

But we chose the strap on your specific model of watch, so in doing this again that concept of holding up the mirror, like we wildly increased the relevancy of this to the customer and they are able to visualize it on their own watch, and then they are willing to spend 2, $300 on a watch strap.

Steve: Let me ask you this question, let’s say this particular company sold a bunch of different Rolex accessories, how would that change how you would structure the site?

Kurt: I want to make sure, if I’m adding new products to my product mix, I just don’t want to do it because it fits the audience, I want to do it because it fits the audience and compliments what they are already buying. Ideally I would look for stuff that’s up-sales, like this incredibly successful up-sale they had was one day … Everyone who buys the strap obviously has to put it on the watch. You can take it to a jeweler, but you probably you are going to do it yourself.

What they ended up doing was selling private labeling, a very nice little tool kit and it’s offered as an up-sell, and it’s probably like 90% of orders, the person will buy the strap, and the tool to change the strap.

Steve: Interesting.

Kurt: You sort of want to work backwards and look for up-sales to your existing product mix.

Steve: I’m just trying to think right now like if this person, let’s say he specializes in watch accessories of which Rolex brands are only one, and let’s say they sell replacement parts, I’m just trying to get an idea, sometimes it’s a pain in the butt to just open another store, right?

I’m just trying to get an idea of how you would integrate display of products onto a site. Would you choose one of your main sellers, and then target the whole site towards selling that one product, or if you had like let’s say two or three best sellers that were somewhat despaired, but all fall under the umbrella of selling watch accessories, just trying to get an idea of how you would structure the site in that case.

Kurt: That’s a good question. Probably I would look by use case, where at the start I want to present them like here is the pain I’m solving, so let’s say we did, it wasn’t just watch straps, it was like watch straps, watch tools and cases, so then we could sell them like watch winders, watch boxes and watch rolls, like a tool. We’d say, I’d probably present that as like 3 featured images on the home page that say store your watches, maintain your watches, and customize your watches.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: I’m always doing it by what pain they have.

Steve: Sure, okay and then you would probably just have 3 choices where they could just jump to the category page, and on the category page, you would probably focus on the value proposition message.

Kurt: Yeah, once I’m in there and I would strip away everything else, like they have already self selected, they’ve told me what they are there for, so I don’t want anything else getting in the way. I want to really increase that signal to noise ratio, and then after they’ve made the decision to buy, then maybe I might offer an up-sell, or I might offer a bundle, something like that.

Steve: You’re talking about the category page; you would remove the navigation to the other categories at that point.

Kurt: Well what I see is like, okay so let’s say the collection page or the category page, so from the homepage, we try to ask them what their problem is, so if they say, “Oh, I need to store my watches.” When they click on that, we send them to a collection page deliberately, a paragraph or two about the proposition, about the description, and then our selection of watch boxes or whatever.

Then in Shopify actually I would sort them by bestselling, as one of the nice options. So essentially you have self optimizing category collection pages, because you can always list. It will automatically take the thing that sells the most and push it first in the list.

Steve: Right, okay. In terms of just SEO and content, do you try to include content on all these collection pages? Is that important?

Kurt: Ideally yeah. I mean, is it going to make or break to you? No. Does it going to absolutely increase the chance that someone finds it in a Google organic search or someone links directly to this? Essentially if you add description to a collection or category page, its going from, here is a grid of products to landing page, and that’s how like let’s take everything like a landing page, and really that’s just a content issue.

Steve: I’m just trying to … I’m just wondering how you rationalize having content versus pushing the products further below the fold.

Kurt: I’m still out on how the fold really matters. If I have really compelling relevant content above the fold, I think that’s going to get people to scroll and really that’s kind of a design question. But ideally I’ve never shied away from long sales pages, from more content. It’s never been a problem.

Steve: Do you typically work with people who have just a handful of products versus someone who has like a library of hundreds of products?

Kurt: If someone came to me and said, “I have got hundreds of products and I want to move those to– I want to go from Amazon to Shopify I would say. All right, which 10 do you want to work with? What’s your best seller? Building a store, I mean you are setting yourself up for failure to begin with, like if you are building a store with hundreds of products. It’s really hard definitely moving from, especially moving from a market place to Shopify, I wouldn’t recommend it.

Steve: I mean if they are all related products, would you still try break them apart? Like you know watch example …

Kurt: It really comes down to how, again it’s like if they all fit the same audience, and they solve similar problems then you could make it work.

Steve: Okay, so let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about traffic. I understand you help some of the folks with traffic, so what are some of the first things that you tell these people who are just completely not used to driving their own traffic? What do you recommend?

Kurt: Well so number one is first recognize that. I mean the thing the you’ve been paying for Amazon, the whole time whether you knew it or not is they’re delivering these wallet out ready to buy people to you? Fundamentally if I am on Amazon, I’m probably not even in research mode. I already trust Amazon, I’m there looking for a product, I’m going to add it to a wish list or buy it.

Not only do you already have the traffic, but it’s really qualified traffic, and making that mindset shift to your own store. Well it’s like okay you’ve got to get the traffic and then you have to make them trust you, and then you have to get them to buy you. You’re really moving into this concept of a sales funnel, and that’s something people aren’t used to. The first realization is someone will probably have to visit your store maybe 5 times before they buy, and they don’t know you. They have to trust you.

If I walk to a physical retail store right now, I know fundamentally like there is payroll, and business licenses and leases were signed, there is implicit trust versus your random Shopify store in the interne. If I have never heard of you it’s like the equivalent of a guy in a parking lot, popping his truck and saying you want to buy some t-shirts?

Steve: Right.

Kurt: It’s totally different, so adding those trust indicators.

Steve: Let’s talk about some of the trust indicators, let’s be specific. What are some of the things that you recommend?

Kurt: I think number one is, two things. I think there are really two parts to these trust indicators. Number one is availability, if you have got a toll free number, if you make yourself as available as possible, so a live chat with an actual person manning it, a toll free number, a public address. Those things whether or not people actually choose to reach out to you, we don’t care if they reach out to you or not, just the fact that you’ve made yourself available and professional makes you look trustworthy.

Steve: Do you think a toll free number matters anymore these days?

Kurt: It’s kind of funny; I mean you are right to ask because who pays by the minute anymore? It doesn’t matter, but I think we are still ingrained with this idea that, “Oh toll free numbers means it’s a real business.” And they are so inexpensive with services like Grasshopper, and I’m sure there is half a dozen others. I still recommend it. I think you look better with a toll free number than a local number.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: I mean the image you are fighting against is you have to assume that when the person comes to your website and hasn’t heard of you, they assume that you are some guy in your mum’s basement, and you have to prove otherwise. I think a toll free number is one of the ways to do that. That availability, that trust is really it’s about risk reversal, spelling out a clear guarantees return policies, that sort of thing helps a lot.

Steve: Okay.

Kurt: I think the big advantage you have that a lot of people pass on, and it’s frustrating for me is be a person not a brand. People relate to people not brands, and when you leave Amazon, that’s one of the great things you get to do now, is you get to be yourself, you get to be an authentic person with an authentic voice. I always recommend people at the very least have an about page that tells your story, has your pictures, says who you are and people can relate to that.

Steve: Okay, what about getting actual traffic. These are all great I guess conversion things that you’ve been mentioning.

Kurt: Yeah, I put all that stuff, everything we’ve talked about probably it falls under conversion for sure.

Steve: Yeah, what about getting the actual people to the website, what are some of your recommendations there?

Kurt: Let’s say, the only guaranteed thing is PPC, is pay per click, and there is no one winner, but I would say absolutely for sure do remarketing. Earlier on I said that someone might have to visit a store 5 times before they buy. Well remarketing is going to help you make that happen. When someone visits the site, they get cookied, and then they’ll see ads for let’s say 30 days about the product they viewed.

Steve: Do you actually run these campaigns for your clients or no?

Kurt: Yes I do.

Steve: Oh you do? Okay, so what has been more like, so do you use Facebook and Google for this?

Kurt: I no longer … I recommend both, but I personally have focused on being a Facebook ads expert. Google is too fast a landscape, I think for anyone to really master Google you have to be doing it full time. I recommend someone else to tackle it. Google product listing ads I think is a phenomenal place to start.

Steve: Can you explain those by the way, just in case some of the listeners don’t know what that is?

Kurt: Okay, so let’s say you search for something on Google, we search for men’s wallet, and then you’ve got the first thing at the top of your search results are those text ads. That’s just a regular traditional Google ad, this text ad, they are really expensive now, they are hard to get to convert. And then, below that are the organic results, which that’s what we think as traditional SEO, and then in the upper right, you’ve got like a picture of the product with the title and the price. Those are Google product listing adds, and that’s just a data feed that your Shopify store provides to Google, and then it will just automatically run ads against it.

They are actually significantly cheaper than running the text ads, and once you’ve got the product listing ad going, really what you’ve done is Google understands your product catalogue which means you can now do what are called dynamic remarketing ads. So let’s say someone goes to your site, looks at a pair of shoes and leaves, well Google knows that’s the last product they looked at, and now an ad with that specific product title price will follow them around the web like a lost dog.

Steve: Just curious, why have you moved away from using Google remarketing?

Kurt: I still recommend it, I just don’t manage it myself anymore.

Steve: You don’t manage it. Okay.

Kurt: Just because it’s tough, I mean it’s genuinely– there are so– when you log in at the Google Ad Words dashboard, there are so many knobs, dials and switches, and it’s updating all the time that it’s tough to get it going, and say like…

Steve: That’s correct; it is quite intimidating for a new user.

Kurt: Yeah, I think it’s intimidating and then for me it was frustrating there like I had set something up and then a month later something breaks. I’m like I got to go fix this, and if you are not absolutely on top of it and I think really like sleeping breathing AdWords every day, that’s just bound to happen.

Steve: You know it’s curious that you said that like, so I run all my own campaigns, and Google like what you haven’t set up it’s a lot more hands off than Facebook in my opinion. I was just curious what your opinions were on that, because Facebook you constantly have to be rotating your creatives and testing new things, whereas AdWords which is like search based, you can pretty much set it and then check up on it every couple of months.

Kurt: That’s a solid point. Yes, I think especially when dealing with Google product listing ads, that’s absolutely true. You set it and then you are good, until it breaks, and ideally usually it shouldn’t for months if it’s set up once correctly. Verses Facebook ads, you get into this problem of ad fatigue, but I think it comes down to having highly relevant customer audiences, and then really reducing the length of time they can run.

So if I set, I could set a window where I say all right I’m only going to show people, assuming I have enough traffic to pull this off, you could build the sales funnel where like a person sees an ad only within 24 hours of visiting your site, and then from 24 to 48 they see a different ad. You could run that out to a week, where you have– they see a different ad everyday for a week, and then if they haven’t bought after that, we can assume they probably weren’t going to begin with, and stop showing them ads.

Steve: Let’s talk about your Facebook ads strategy actually since you seem to run those for clients. Let’s take this watch band example again; can we just talk about how you would structure the campaign?

Kurt: Yeah, absolutely. I think the more segmented you can make it obviously you are going to increase relevancy, but with, and that really comes down it’s like a function of how much traffic you have. But the basic, the most basic sales funnel in Facebook that I would recommend people setting up, has four steps in it. The first is we want to bring people who’ve never heard, we’ll call them anonymous people, people who have never heard of the brand before, and we could do that using a look alike audience.

A look alike audience being we give Facebook, let’s say we have 1000 customer email addresses, and they’ve opted in to our email list. So we give that to Facebook and we could show Facebook will find those people and we could show ads to them if we’d like, or Facebook based on that amazing and kind of creepy behavioral data will target up to let’s say like a million to 2 million people in the same country that look like your customers.

And they buy mailing list form big box retailers and credit card companies, they know everything about you, like if you bought a pregnancy test, they assume okay here’s like parents who are trying to get pregnant, like everything they know it, it’s creepy. But it means we can have very relevant ads, and we can do it on autopilot. So the first one would be ads just introducing people to the what we are doing, to the brand, to the product, to the problem, and getting them to the website.

Steve: What would the creative look like in that case?

Kurt: That’s a good question. We want, generally I’ll try and pick something that’s like an action shot that shows someone using the product, so really hold up the mirror and have that customer avatar out there. And especially because we’ve got it in their news feed, it’s less disruptive and fits into their news feed, and that’s actually they are more likely to check it out and read that headline, read whatever our tagline is.

We just– all we want for them to click through and visit the site, because then we’re going to cookie them, and once they are cookied, we’ll exclude them from that prospect list where they are seeing their first ad, and instead show them ideally probably like a carousel ad, so our 5 they got these sliding carousel ads, they are wonderful. So we show them say our 5…

Steve: Can we back up a little bit, sorry so that first initial ad, like what would be an example of a headline for watches let’s say just off the cuff, to get them to click?

Kurt: Good question, since I’m assuming you are editing this later, let me look it up.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Kurt: I would literally do like for that and say something like, we may say something as simple as Customize Your Rolex, and then show a photo of a watch on someone’s wrist. What’s nice about Facebook it’s especially organized with Shopify, it does conversation tracking, and it tracks value of sales, you could figure your cost per acquisition.

Let’s say you give it 5 images for 1 ad, it will know which ones are converting, and then start showing that the most. So after a week of running the ad, I will just go back through, turn off the 4 that didn’t convert well or the 4 post converting, keep the top one and then like try like 4 variations on that, and you just keep going like that in a cycle.

Steve: The reason why I asked that question is do you entice them with some useful piece of content for that first ad, like what is the landing page of the carousel?

Kurt: Good question, so it depends on the product. You often will use, will take the product page and make like a really long form version of it. Much like Amazon we’re trying to bust every objection, so I’ll have kind of like a more narrative product description, ideally a video, customer reviews, just like a very, a longer sales pages is going to work better here, or even advertorial content. Maybe like a blog post, an article, something talking about the problem and walking through like this story of the narrative, like here’s how the inventor came up with this problem, and then had a successful kick starter, and you get them involved in the story.

Steve: Okay. You absolutely don’t want to send them like just straight to a product page, right?

Kurt: I think the worst thing you could do is just drop them on the home page or drop them on a traditional product page. You could make it like a very long form sales page will work well, or sometimes collection pages that have a really long description. Like we’ve made 10 collection pages and 2 decent landing pages, but no you are right, I mean just dropping someone on a whatever page and crossing your figures isn’t going to be the best.

Steve: Just curious, do you use incentives to get them to buy right then and there, or is the whole purpose of that first ad just to get them aware of your products?
Kurt: I assume, well I mean if they buy that’s fantastic, but I will generally, I just want to build that awareness. At first it’s worth it just to have I think a longer sales funnel and then I’ll be pushing, I try not to push especially discounts at first. I want to save those to later and not leave money on the table.

Ideally though if you have a lead magnet, like in an ideal world we could do, we introduce them to product via an article, so we’ve got like a 1500 word article with an interesting original story, and then that also probably includes the inventory, really makes it very personal. And then in there at the end we’re still not necessarily going to try and sell them anything, but if we can get them to opt in to a newsletter, now we can show them our Facebook ads, plus get them on an email list, and really rump up those numbers at touch points.

Steve: How do you calculate conversions and the effectiveness of the ad, given that like that first ad really isn’t meant to convert a sale, so do you measure the effectiveness of that ad based on like email opt-ins, how do you do the measurements?

Kurt: Well, in this case you can do it based on page views, you could do it based on opt-ins, but what Facebook does, you could define the attribution window. So if they view that ad, let’s say they click the ad and bought within 7 days, we would count it as a conversion like an assisted conversion, but a conversion nonetheless because the first ad was involved. And ideally like I had put one funnel into a single campaign, so that way I can track the whole thing holistically.

Steve: Okay. We’ve got them to our site, let’s say they haven’t bought yet, but we have cookied them, and then you mentioned the second ad is more of like a carousel ad displaying different versions of the product?

Kurt: Yeah, so let’s say for the second ad I love to do carousel ads, I just they are a little more engaging, and a carousel essentially it’s like 5 tiles, and each one can have a different link and it’s a different photo. And Facebook will reorganize them based on conversation. In there what we do — so if you had like, we could put your top five selling products in that category, or we could do the same product but have each of the tiles be one of the benefits of owning the product. Or we could do it go even broader and do it by category.

We are like all right here is the three categories of products we are selling, something where we just want to sell — we want the person to segment themselves. But if we are only selling one product yeah you just do five benefits of the products and a carousel ad, and that’s where we might — at this point we would send them to the product page, or an extended version of the product page.

Steve: Okay, and then still any incentives to buy at this point or?

Kurt: Not yet, no at this point we probably want to talk about a lot of times like the content or using those ads, or the landing page both are reviews. I always go, at this point once they are aware of it I just need to convince them with social proof; I think it’s the best way to go about it. We’ll do a lot of like quotes from customers and testimonials and reviews. And if we’ve got like big blogs or magazines that have reviewed the product, we want to include those logos and quotes as trust indicators in the ads or in the landing page. At that point…

Steve: So once gain this is like a separate landing page again, right?

Kurt: Yes, yeah we can either do — usually what it is, is a product template that we’ve made, that’s in an ideal world. I think you could get away — we’ve absolutely done this with a regular product page so long as it’s got a lot of content on it. And at that point we just — our goal then, so in our first our intent was get them interested. And now with this our intent is just get them to add it to the cart, and if they buy that’s fantastic, but if they don’t and they’ve add it to the cart we can actually segment them again.

At this point I’m just going to show them an ad that links them back to slash cart, and say something like your cart’s waiting for you, we saved it. And then we want to get into a risk reversal where we will talk about return policies and satisfaction guarantees. And this is the first time that I might introduce, if it makes sense for the brand that I would introduce a discount code.

Steve: Okay, and just curious how often do you rotate these ads, like what do you let the frequency get up to?

Kurt: So on Facebook we’ll do — like for that first ad we would set it to daily — we wanted to go for daily impressions for reach. And the worst it’s going to do is show them each one person one ad per day, supposedly what Facebook should do for us. And if I have got five ads in there, then I could show them essentially five different — I could show them five different ads for one business week which is that should be more than enough.

Steve: So that first add really you’re not even doing anything for conversation, it’s really just straight impressions, then maybe clicks?

Kurt: No, the first ad is just straight up like I don’t want that hard sale, I just want these people to opt-in to my funnel is how I look at it.

Steve: Okay, and for your best converting campaigns like what is like a typical cost per acquisition, let’s take this watch example.

Kurt: So this is the one issue with doing the sales funnel the way I have suggested it is you have to have the margin on the product that can support this. So if you’ve got a very inexpensive product with a very slim margin PPC is already going to be a problem, but doing these long Facebook campaigns is going to be tough.

And especially you can still do like the remarketing, you could probably still do it, it’s just that step one of getting new people into the sales funnel, that’s where you are spending a lot of money. But presently in my campaigns I’m shooting to get my cost per acquisition under $10, off top of my head the last couple I have worked on I have been in like probably $5 to $9 range.

Steve: That’s actually pretty good.

Kurt: Yeah, it works; it sounds a little crazy in that far — like a lot of people brace off that idea of like well the first ad we don’t actually expect to sell anybody anything. But when you make it part of this longer experience, it works well plus we are then — our third ad is that cart abandonment.

So people who just happen to visit the site for other means, they are still going to see those cart abandonment ads. And then afterward we can segment recent purchase service into an up sale campaign, where we try and sell them additional products. When you add all that together that’s when it really drives the cost per acquisition down.

Steve: So in your cost per acquisition calculations you are kind of including email also it sounds like?

Kurt: Yeah, in my ideal universe those are the two channels you want. You need some — I love Facebook for the segmentation. And then email works phenomenally well for turning people into brand evangelists. Like typically we’ll look at email as a thing that starts the moment they buy, because I want this very — I want to increase lifetime value of a customer. And again this is where we really give in to the advantage that you’ve lost with when you are on Amazon. Like the person buys from you and then they are gone, and you could follow up for customer service and that’s about it, versus…

Steve: I know for me I have problems like kind of tracking email conversions versus Facebook conversations. Even though I might have like just like a separate list or tag just for people who sign up through Facebook. It’s not, like I have to go out of my way to calculate that. Is that something that you do or?

Kurt: The only way around it, I don’t unless it’s like until you are spending — I mean it really depends on how much you are spending. But the solution to that is through UTM tagging, adding — just adding core strings so you could separate out who is buying from where.

Steve: So for all your emails like every link in your email is — okay so you tag it.

Kurt: Yeah, and the issue is because you are right, if someone like got an abandoned cart email and click through that email and bought let’s say you use I like Klaviyo for email, so Shopify because it integrates the best.

That might like that for sure will take credit and say, oh yeah this abandoned cart email earned $300. But then if they had clicked any of my ads in the last 7 days Facebook is going to say, oh they fall on the attribution window and they clicked our ad. And it’s going to take credit too, and it’s like oh you…

Steve: Yeah, it gets all like a little hairy at that point.

Kurt: But then the question is like well would the abandoned cart email have worked had they not seen the Facebook ad. So you get into — and it’s really, it’s hard to know like I mean you start getting to questions of human psychology and behavior.

Steve: Sure, sure, sure. I was just wondering of you had…

Kurt: Like at some point you are just like you could dive so deep that things start to get crazy.

Steve: Cool, Kurt hey we’ve been chatting for quite a while now. I also wanted to give you an opportunity to kind of talk about some of the other web properties that you have, and where people can find you.

Kurt: Sure, probably the easiest thing Google my name kurtelster.com. Sign up for my newsletter and I run my own podcast, the Unofficial Shopify Podcast, we talk about stuff like this once a week, and I send that out as an email to my list. Or if you are looking to DIY, DIY store of ecommerce bootcamp.com is a book on the topic that’s essential, a knowledge transfer to get all these thoughts out of my head into you. Or if you have an existing store and are just looking for ways to optimize my video series called ecommerce X weekly.

Steve: Cool man, hey good thanks a lot for coming on the show, it’s always interesting to see how other people run their ads and how they design their sites. And I think that the listeners will find your insights very useful.

Kurt: Yeah, I hope so. If anyone has questions that’s why sign up for my list and reply to it and I always — people who reply to my list I always make sure to answer.

Steve: Cool man, well Kurt thanks for coming on the show.

Kurt: Yeah, my pleasure.

Steve: All right, take care.

Kurt: You too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. If you are only selling online primarily on third party market places like Amazon, you really need to own your own web property. And I hope Kurt’s traffic strategies are useful for you going forward.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode118. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page and I will send you the free course via e-mail immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

117: How To Create A 20M Dollar Company With Only 2 Employees Selling Vacuum Filters With Chad Rubin

How To Make 20 Million Per Year With Only 2 Employees Selling Physical Products Online With Chad Rubin

Today I have Chad Rubin with me on the show. Chad is an ecommerce veteran who has been selling online for quite some time. He’s the founder of Crucial Vacuum which is a company that is worth 20 million dollars with only 2 employees.

He’s also the creator of Skubana which is software that will pretty much manage your entire ecommerce operation.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Chad got into ecommerce and why he decided to sell vacuum filters.
  • The challenges of selling on his own site.
  • How he exponentially grew his business by leveraging other marketplaces.
  • How he established a recognizable brand.
  • Why he decided to outsource his warehouse
  • His best traffic sources for his website

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have Chad Rubin with me on the show. Now Chad is an ecommerce veteran who has been selling online for quite some time now. He is the founder of Crucial Vacuum which is a company that’s actually worth $20 million, but he only has 2 employees which is pretty impressive. He is also the creator of Skubana, which is software that will pretty much manage your entire ecommerce operation. It’s been a long time, Chad and I had been communicating via email, but I finally was able to get him on the show and with that welcome to the show Chad, how are you doing today man?

Chad: I’m doing great, thanks for having me on.

Steve: Tell us the back story for Crucial Vacuum because like me who sells handkerchiefs, I think vacuum stuff is pretty random also, how did you get into this industry?

Chad: Yeah, completely non sexy niche. So my parents when I was growing up, I used to work in my father’s vacuum store. So he repaired vacuums, he sold vacuums, I was the under paid child. I would be working for him and I saw them struggle through the years and thought to myself I’m never going to be an entrepreneur, because if this is what an entrepreneur is like, I don’t want to do it.

So I decided to work for the man I went to college, I was first generation college grad. I went to Umass Amherst and went on to Wall Street right after college. So I majored in finance which was a deficiency my parents had. Then I got fired from the Street in 2009, early 2009 I was covering internet stocks. So I was giving advice to hedge funds and social investors to buy, sell, hold, Amazon and eBay and all other different internet stocks.

And my parents had a vacuum store; they were going out of business, so I said, “Mum, dad you guys need to be on the internet.” And they said son no one is going to buy vacuum parts on the internet. And I was like, I wouldn’t be too sure about that, and I started my own direct to consumer vacuum company called Crucial Vacuum, selling replacement parts and accessories direct consumer.

Steve: Was your parent’s store like the source of your products, or were you working together?

Chad: No, we weren’t working together. So initially I actually — I took their products and I listed it on a store front called Volusion, a really bad store front, but it was all that was available at the time. And then I also listed their products on Amazon. And when I went to go buy them from the distributor and sell them, I couldn’t get them at that same price.

Steve: Wow okay.

Chad: Because I was buying for 20 and selling for 24, I thought to myself wait a minute, this thing is made of like plastic and paper, why does it cost $20 and why can’t I make money on it? Why is there no margin? I started– really this was before direct consumer was the in vogue or the cool thing to do.

Steve: Okay.

Chad: So before Bobobos or Warby Parker or Dollar Shave Club, like the direct consumer game erupted yeah.

Steve: So for your parents though they were selling these same filters and such right, were their margins that low as well?

Chad: Well they had a brick and motor store, and they are located in a Wal-Mart shopping center. If you think about where do you buy a back TV, you buy either Target, Wal-Mart or you buy it on Amazon. So it wasn’t really a need to have a brick and motor like sell Mom and Pop store anymore. Well so my parents, their store was struggling to exist, and nobody was really shopping in a Mom and Pop vacuum store to buy their vacuum anymore. When was the last time you bought a vacuum at a Mom and Pop store? Likely you would probably go to Amazon or you go to Wal-Mart or you go to Target.

Steve: That’s true yes.

Chad: So they were struggling and like they just didn’t — they didn’t want any piece of the internet game. And I saw an opportunity to go direct to consumer, nobody was doing it, and the market was ripe. And I think there is a lot of naysayers in my life, they were like wait a minute, so your parents own a vacuum store, they were struggling and you think that you could actually make money doing this and be successful? And I was like yeah, I think there is a massive opportunity that nobody has conquered yet.

Steve: Okay so you noticed the margins were pretty low, and so I guess you just went straight to manufacturer?

Chad: Yeah, so the margins were low and I started sourcing products in Asia kind of– well initially I went on Alibaba and I started looking at — I compiled the spreadsheet. I had all these factories, I started sending them samples and comparing prices. And the goal of course is to get as close to the manufacturer as you can get. So there is trading companies out there, there are agencies, but I started building relationships and really started weeding out different factories in the process. It was based on price; it was based on the time to get the product, the lead time, the price and just I would ask them questions, like a great question is this– so I mean a simple question I started — I asked early on in the game is who do you sell to?

So if they tell me who they sell to I already know there is a trust factor. They tell me what they sell to the person, or hey here is the catalogue or here is the invoices we sell to the– that we give. Here is the invoices from this company that buys from us in United States. I immediately know that they are not the most trustworthy company to buy from. Well I’ll get like pictures of the factory and make sure they are a factory. I was really starting to build a relationship and Skype with them.

Steve: Did you ever have to fly over there at all, or you just everything would be on Skype and email.

Chad: Oh yeah, flying over there is fantastic. So you spend time with– like going to KTV to karaoke with the factory manager, it’s probably the best thing you can do in business. It’s like the ROI is tremendous.

Steve: Okay, we never did the karaoke thing, but we did go to dinner and lunch with our vendors and you are right. The quality of our stuff drastically improved after we did that. Cool, so okay so you got your vendors and so you started creating your own stuff, and then did you sell in your own website in the beginning or?

Chad: I did a mix, I did — so I started off on Volusion. Before Volusion I was using FrontPage, but Volusion…

Steve: Hilarious, okay.

Chad: Yeah, I guess I’m dating myself now, but Volusion I started playing around on Amazon and noticed that I would be just competing — when I was re-selling I was just competing for the buy box. And I didn’t really see an added strategy there. I just thought I was like — I was playing musical shares on Amazon with different sellers for different listings. I really wasn’t interested in that game.

So right out of the gate I literally immediately built a brand, and I always viewed selling on ecommerce like playing monopoly. You want to be on every part of the board to win, and that’s the flow I’ve always used. Now I sell online now, and I’m on 15 different channels.

Steve: Okay and so what was your first channel? You said Volusion, how did you drive traffic to your Volusion site in the beginning?

Chad: Volusion was a lot of AdWords, so I bought my first — so I started really small, I always started scrappy. I bought my first min, minimum requirement from the factory was one filter and I loaded that up on Google AdWords and I sold that right away. Then I did a couple of cases, and then I did a pallet and I did 2 pallets. I started with Volusion on Google AdWords.

Steve: Okay, and how much was your ad spend in the beginning?

Chad: That’s a great question. I was tracking at the time; I don’t remember what it is or what it was now.

Steve: Are you guys using AdWords still today?

Chad: Of course yeah, we do a lot of Google AdWords; product listing ads of course has taken over from text ads.

Steve: So in terms of your ads spend, do you do Facebook ads as well like what’s your — like what do you spend your ad dollars?

Chad: Ad dollars is really on Google AdWords, just on sponsored ads, now Amazon has something called Amazon spon [ph] like did plus I believe, where you can bid on certain keywords which is fantastic. But if you think about it with social media nobody really wants to go on Facebook to see a deal for a filter.

Steve: Yes, that’s why I was asking yeah.

Chad: So and I read Gary Vienna charts book back in the day, [inaudible 00:09:48] which I think set my perspective correct on social media. You just have to pick the appropriate channel. So for us like people who go to Twitter, and they yell about their vacuum all day long. Those are great opportunities for us because they are like, “Oh my vacuum smells, oh it stinks, or it doesn’t pick up anything,” and those are ripe opportunities to go in and talk to the customers.

Steve: So that’s interesting, so how do you find these complaints? You just do searches on Twitter or?
Chad: Yeah, you can search for vacuum sucks, vacuum cleaner, of course now we got like I mentioned before when we were chatting before the call, I’ve moved into a lot of new products. So I have moved into vacuums, coffee, air purifications, humidification, marijuana filters, pool filters, you name it, like we are just nailing every vertical possible, repeating that same success.

Steve: So back to Twitter, so it sounds like — I’m just trying to get an idea of what your main channels are. So you said AdWords which is a large portion. And then let’s not talk about Amazon yet, we’ll get to there in a little bit. And then you have Twitter, does that mean you have just like someone full time monitoring these Twitter channels or?

Chad: No, we just — I think we — Okay so if I have to break it down it would be Google AdWords, Fixya, which is like a repair site where people go on to ask repair questions. So we come across as a thought leader. We do a lot, we did a great job with YouTube videos, and YouTube videos ranked really well on Google, so it’s like free …

Steve: So videos like how to replace your filter and that sort of thing or?

Chad: Yeah, the whole bay. Yeah, with very keyword dense titles, playful videos and conversions are fantastic.

Steve: Interesting, so how do you get the person from the YouTube video to your site? Is the link underneath the video or a call to action with video?

Chad: Yeah, so the link is underneath the video. We did a couple of videos where the link is actually in the video itself. So it’s just like anything else. Like we are trying to provide value to people, and when they see that you are a thought leader and you are a fun company and they respect you, they are going to want to buy from you.

Steve: Okay and did you — have you …

Chad: So it’s no different on YouTube.

Steve: Have you run any YouTube ads or is it just straight organic?

Chad: Straight up organic, no YouTube ads.

Steve: Okay, and the way you got those videos to kind of rank was just through keyword research?

Chad: Well, no one’s doing it. So we do keyword research, we obviously already manufacture the part and we just, we invested in all the equipment. And we started just doing — we also had an actress come in and then we had an internal employee do it. So we just had fun with it, we bought the vacuums, we tested the filters, we threw them around, we catch the bloopers and we — and flew them in the video.

Steve: Kind of like the Will It Blend videos right, so to speak?

Chad: I don’t think I’ve seen those.

Steve: Oh well it’s just like shove an iPad in a blender and it blends.

Chad: Oh really.

Steve: You haven’t seen those?

Chad: No.

Steve: Okay like they shove like random things into a blender, they sell blenders obviously, and those videos started going viral because they were blending like all sorts of random stuff.

Chad: That’s cool.

Steve: Okay, so we got YouTube, any other channels that we haven’t talked about?

Chad: Affiliate marketing.

Steve: Oh okay, let’s talk about that. So do you use a standard network like ShareASale or?

Chad: Yeah, so we use ShareASale.

Steve: Okay.

Chad: And it comes back for a vacuum — like no one really wants to promote vacuum filters on their blog.

Steve: Yeah, exactly okay.

Chad: So but the interesting thing is that when you think kind of one step or move from what you sell, so for handkerchiefs I think about like Chivalry, right? So I would approach an affiliate blogger and say, “Hey like you are writing a blog on Chivalry or something, somewhere there and like I do handkerchiefs, so why don’t we integrate the two together?” So with vacuum filters it’s when I think about vacuum filters I think about two things. I think about mothers who are nesting, and they are having children at their home and they are concerned that children are going to like lick up dust bunnies, or I think about allergy sufferers.

Steve: Okay.

Chad: So you approach this like mummy bloggers, the allergy sufferers, and it’s a great network and niche to focus on.

Steve: So for your affiliate program, it’s actually quite a bit of work, because I run a small affiliate program and I noticed that you end up with just like a couple of good ones and then you end up with a bunch of crappy ones. Was there a lot of work involved in doing the outreach?

Chad: There is a ton of work on affiliate marketing, it’s not like you build it, you store it up and people will join.

Steve: Yeah exactly.

Chad: Like if you look at who is probably in your affiliate program right now, it’s likely like these deal sites like RetailMeNot who you are probably giving 5% affiliate commissions to, and if you lower them to a half a percent they’ll be fine with it.

Steve: So I was just curious how you got your affiliates. Like do you have like a dedicated person running your affiliate program or?

Chad: Well yeah, I mean we have people that are multi-faceted that are — I mean look I only have two people at Crucial now.

Steve: Yeah I know that.

Chad: So I do a lot of outsourcing too. I want to mention I do a lot of outsourcing on top of it, but higher value activities are kept in house, things that I don’t want to outsource. So on the affiliate program, like have you ever signed up to — do you use ShareASale?

Steve: I am an affiliate on ShareASale, I don’t — I’m not the like the store that runs an affiliate program on ShareASale.

Chad: So you are part of the network, right?

Steve: Correct, yes.

Chad: So that’s great. Actually you are on the other side of the equation which is fantastic, because now you can actually start looking at all of the competitors or all of the other affiliates in your space, and what are they doing and you can look at how much they want as a commission. There is a lot of research you can do on the other side on the back end, not as a merchant. So if you hit it from both sides.

Steve: I was just curious like what it takes to build up an affiliate program from scratch.

Chad: To build it from scratch, well it takes a lot of outreach, that’s …

Steve: Was that something that you outsourced? Like you only have two guys right, and then …

Chad: Well I didn’t always have two guys, so let’s back it up.

Steve: Okay all right, okay.

Chad: I did not always have two people at Crucial. I used to have 15 warehouse employees, maybe a little more and roughly about 10 clerical workers.

Steve: Okay, and so back then you probably had one of them do outreach for a while, okay.

Chad: Oh yeah, there has been a lot of work and there is a lot of cross pollination. So the people that used to be at Crucial that are awesome employees, I’ve now put on to Skubana to help me steer all that business.

Steve: I see, okay, interesting. So how are you able to go from what is it — it sounded like 30 people down to just two then?

Chad: So I would say the first thing is that I outsourced my warehouse to what’s called a third party logistics company, a 3PL.

Steve: Okay which one are you using, just curious?

Chad: One in New Jersey and I’m happy to — if anybody wants to contact me after this they can. You can reach me @chadskubana, also — so I did that. That took care of whatever, 15 employees, so I’d have to deal with managing certain individuals at a different economic status, or people that were smoking weed in the back of my warehouse or slipping like Irish whiskey into their coffee.

Steve: Okay, these things really happen I gather? Okay.

Chad: Yeah they do, there is a lot of things that happen, a lot of interesting things that happened.
But you know that was my core competency right. I was never trained to run a warehouse; I was trained, like for me I just — I thrive on the thrill of building businesses. So to me that was not focusing on what I was good at.

Steve: Were you using FBA at all?

Chad: Yeah, of course yeah we would bring the containers into the warehouse, and I would even be in the back once in a while labelling products. I’d put on the Beatles, my father-in-law would come in and prep FBA stuff and warning labels and suffocation labels on the packages too, like it just wasn’t good use of my time or his time or anybody’s time.

Steve: So can you comment on why you wouldn’t just send all your stuff to Amazon and fulfil from there versus going a 3PL and Amazon?

Chad: Because firstly Amazon is like a gateway drug, and they’ve made it really easy to sell in their platform but they have also made it hard to ever leave. So multi-channels fulfilment through Amazon is very expensive, and I never believe in a one channel strategy. That was never ever my intention to build — like there is a lot of sellers out there, and I was just at the Crossbar show and they have built channels. I call them channels.

They have built channels, they don’t build businesses, so they just are focused on FBA, that’s the only thing that they do, but for me there is a diversification strategy. I come from Wall Street, I always thought to myself they’ll never invest in a stock that has one customer. Hell no, there is too much risk. So why would I ever invest — why would I ever just invest everything, all my eggs in one basket on Amazon.com?

Steve: Okay, so you probably ship everything then to your 3PL, and then from there you ship stuff to Amazon?

Chad: Yeah we do a mix. So we’ll do, everything comes to the 3PL, they unload the containers and then I’ll do some stuff to FBA in the US, I’ll do some stuff to Canada. I have a 3PL in Ireland, and then we have obviously inventory here for our off channel sales.

Steve: Okay, so that sounds like you got rid of like more than half of your employees?

Chad: Yeah roughly, and then — I then kind of this opportunity with Skubana fell in lap. So I’ve automated, I took care of another seven employees with technology.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk a little — I’m sure the listeners don’t know what Skubana is. So you want to just give brief intro and how that came about?

Chad: Brief intro would be it is a software to manage everything after the checkout. We sit in the center of a market place or shopping cart and the customer, and we do everything in the middle to run your entire business. So any way or just quickly any way you fulfil like printing shipping labels, drop shipping, 3PL connectivity, multichannel fulfilment, FBA etc. Inventory, purchase orders, vendor management and analytics, and we do it all in one unified place, so you don’t need to use unbundled fragmented apps to run your business.

Steve: So while you had all of your employees you were silently creating this system on the side?

Chad: Actually it all happened at the same time. So obviously like there is a very rich history here, right? Like that’s what business is all about. You go through the struggle and the negatives become opportunities over time. Anything that’s painful becomes an opportunity. So I got rid of my warehouse. I had a lot of warehouse issues, warehouse employee issues. We got rid of that and at the same time I was unloading my warehouse. I couldn’t find technology to run my business.

So there is a lot of entry level software that’s out there, but I do a lot of order volume. I do about 60,000 orders a month. So for me I’m an enterprise seller, but there is these fragmented software that exist out there, entry level software that exist out there, but nothing that could actually run my business. I tried a lot of software, there is a lot of noise, and it’s kind of like — it’s all into — it’s like getting into a car and realizing there is no engine.

So I lost a lot of money, I lost a lot of hair and time using these shitty solutions. So and of course you can go with a different solution and they cost a lot of money. There is an implementation fee, there is custom development and there is channel advisor that takes a percentage of the revenue, and I’m really against percentage of revenue. So I decided — I just wrote an email to a bunch of buddies, I said, “Guys who can help me find an enterprise developer here in the United States to help me build what I think is the next generation e-commerce operations platform?”

And I found D.J. Kunovac to found the business with me. He came to my warehouse as I was getting rid of it. So he expected, he used to come to my warehouse and he thought it was going to be like Amazon with cranes and like robots. And my warehouse was a freaking mess, it was a jungle. And he was like there’s got to be something else out there, and we tested all these solutions and they all sucked, so we decided to build our own. So this all happened kind of at the same time and just, the opportunity was just too good to pass up on.

Steve: Okay, and so were you kind of debating whether to go with this software versus a 3PL, or were you going 3PL all the way?

Chad: So 3PL was happening no matter what. It was like my wife; she was like, “Chad you need to do something about this warehouse. It’s like it’s coming down to the wire here, and you need to get rid of this warehouse. It’s causing so much aggravation.” So the warehouse was already on its way out, but in the mean time I was using a shipping software, ShipStation to just gather all my orders.

And then from all my channels and I was still missing some channels, and then I have to export the orders to the 3PL. And then I would have to import them into ShipStation, but I would have to import Amazon-UPS, Amazon-FedEx, Amazon-USPS, and then all the other channels. And I had a full time employee just doing that. And yeah so that’s kind of how everything evolved, and that’s how we have 3PL out of the box, 3PL connectivity now for any market place seller with Skubana.

Steve: So you keep mentioning all these different channels that you sell on. So what are some of these channels outside of Amazon in your own site?

Chad: So to break it down Amazon does 40% of product searches, 40%. That means that there’s 60% that’s happening off of Amazon. So a lot of sellers are like well is there life off Amazon, and I’m always like look man the barrier is worth the squeeze, right. 60% of searches are happening off Amazon today. That means you are missing 60% of searches.

So I like to focus on Amazon, I think it’s a great channel, but the second channel I think that is fantastic if you are looking to migrate off of Amazon is building your own website, and leveraging product listing ads with Google. So Amazon off channel, Google which is your own website, you can do Sears, Newegg, Rakuten, eBay, I do all the international properties; Overstock, Wayfair. I think I got most of them.

Steve: Okay and then so managing all those is a pain in the butt and that’s why you needed to develop this software?

Chad: Well, I think managing a business just even if you are just selling on Amazon it’s actually a pain. But yeah so if you are a multi market place, multi warehouse, and you have different fulfilment methods, and you want to accelerate and automate your business, you need to have a software in place, like it’s just not scalable.

Steve: Just curious what is the percentage breakdown for sales for your own site?

Chad: So I would say that Amazon used to do 100% of my sales, I’ve managed to get it down to 60%. So I think that’s a good number. I think that’s a good goal for people to aim from a 100 to 90 to 60. I’d like to get it down to about 50%. If you think about Amazon it’s just massive and they are becoming more and more massive. They are a monopoly.

Steve: Yeah for sure. Okay and then so the other channels plus your site kind of represent 40% then?

Chad: Yeah, but my second biggest channel is my own site.

Steve: Okay, that was important to know. Yeah I was going to ask about — because I think I read some interview that you did where you basically started on Amazon right; for the most part?

Chad: Yeah, I mean there was Amazon Volusion; I’d mix it up a little bit. But I saw a lot of power in Amazon, I kind of used Amazon as a feeder system to build my own stuff and invest a lot more money and time into that.

Steve: Would you say that most of your customers are consumers or businesses?

Chad: Consumers for sure.

Steve: Consumers for sure. Okay so let’s talk about how you reach these consumers and how you get them to keep coming back for more right. Filters– some of the stuff that you sell is consumables, right?

Chad: It’s all consumables.

Steve: Okay and so what — do you do a lot of email marketing? Like how do you get people come back?

Chad: So we have subscription on our site which was not easy to develop. So it’s subscribed and saved to a degree. So you subscribe …

Steve: Okay, how is that structured?

Chad: It’s structured, you subscribe, you can pick how many months you want to go out and you get 5% upon check out for subscribing. So that’s one way. All of our packaging is driving traffic to our site. We do email marketing; we do have automated drip marketing to our customers with filter reminders to their emails.

Steve: The reason why I’m asking is inherently what you are selling isn’t that sexy, right? As you stated earlier. So these emails, I’m just kind of curious like do people open these emails like for filter reminders and stuff about vacuums equipment?

Chad: So I don’t send people — I’m not like sending them like an info-graphic on vacuum filters right?

Steve: Right.

Chad: I’m literally just– they have a need and I’m solving their need. So you are supposed to change your vacuum filter every six months. So if we email them with a reminder that says, “Hey you purchased from us, it’s about time to change your filter,” like I’m just trying to take a product that’s not very smart at all and make it smarter. So just helping customers change their filter is important, because they need to change it.

It’s either they received our filter in the mail and open up their calendar on Gmail and put in their calendar. but most of them, 99% of them aren’t doing that. So we are just sending them a reminder, and so we have those types of campaigns. We also have win back series of you leave our — if you leave our site it’s likely, and you only halfway went through the checkout, it’s likely you are going to get an email with a deal that says, “Hey by the way …

Steve: Okay, the reason why I’m asking these questions Chad is because I can’t even remember the last time I changed my vacuum filter. It’s like not something that I think about.

Chad: Do you know what kind of vacuum you have?

Steve: I have a Dyson.

Chad: Okay, so every Dyson has two filters in it. And do you vacuum though?

Steve: That’s even a better question. Yeah well we vacuum, yeah.

Chad: Okay I hear a “We” so it’s likely that you are probably one step or move from the vacuum if I had to guess?

Steve: Sure.

Chad: So and likely your clean ladies or whoever is doing is not telling you to change it. So yeah I feel like I built a pretty successful business. I promise you that people in the world, in the United States particularly with — essentially the vacuum penetration rate is higher than internet rate. People are changing…

Steve: No, I believe you, it’s very hilarious though. This makes it more interesting to me because you’ve taken something that’s relatively not sexy, and you’ve made a lot of money doing it, right? So in that respect it makes it a lot more interesting to me.

Chad: I love unsexy businesses. But the thing is that and I think I was mentioning this earlier is that we’ve taken the same success and I’ve moved, like it feels like vacuum, selling vacuum filters online isn’t the most fulfilling.

Steve: Sure.

Chad: But building a business is really fulfilling for me. But like I wanted to move in a direction that would take what I’m passionate about, and then combine it with what I know. So I moved into coffee filter. I love coffee. I’m a huge coffee enthusiast. So I kind of try to like spice it up a little bit, and made things exciting by adding things that I’m interested in into our portfolio.

Steve: Okay, but this is on a separate side obviously.

Chad: So that’s a really good question too. You are asking very good questions though, I’m liking it. So when I started Crucial Vacuum it was a very — my vision, I didn’t like think, like I guess my suggestion to people listening to this would be if you are starting a brand you got to think big.
So when I started Crucial Vacuum I had this myopic vision. It was going to take me six years to disrupt the vacuum space. But I did it in such a short amount of time, and I was always looking behind me to see who is copying me or who is– because I thought I only have like a six month window. So now I mean if you ask me if I would move to vacuum filters now I would say hell no, because there is a lot of imitators in the space.

Steve: Sure.

Chad: Then I was like let me move into the next thing. Okay I need to create another brand which means I need to have another social media strategy, I need to have another LLC, just another layer. So I started Crucial Air which was for air purification, humidification. And then I started Crucial Coffee, and then I decided I was like you know what, why don’t I just create one brand to house it all in one place? So I’m now — we’ve already launched it, but we haven’t launched our site yet. It’s called Think Crucial which is essentially everything that’s replaceable for the home, that’s what we want to sell.

Steve: I see, so if you were to start all over again you would have just started this Think Crucial brand?

Chad: Think Crucial would have been it, yeah.

Steve: Okay, and so how are you going to — are you just going to move everything over and do redirects? Like how is it going to work?

Chad: So I think that’s one of the scariest thing for ecommerce people is re-platform because I’ve done it once already. So I went from Volusion to Magento, and now I actually just downgraded from Magento Enterprise to Community. So I have three properties on Magento and my other property, now I Think Crucial is being built on Shopify.

So right now I’m really just getting unique — I’m building unique content. Really, really thoughtful like I’m putting a lot of money into this venture, but thoughtful content that’s going to end up super, super well with a beautiful sleek design, it’s intuitive, it’s beautiful, it’s going to be powerful. So we are really just building, we are building right now. It’s actually almost done.

Steve: Okay, can we talk about your shopping cart choices real quick? You said you were on Enterprise, Magento Enterprise and then you moved down to Community which I found that the support for community isn’t all that great in my experience at least. Maybe you have a different experience. It seems like they put a lot of their effort on Enterprise and the Community was kind of buggy the last time I used it.

Chad: When was the last time you used it?

Steve: It was probably a year and a half ago, two years ago.

Chad: So look Magento is buggy whether you are on Community or not, it doesn’t really matter. It’s written PHP and it’s really — I mean people have built careers around 15 bugs on Magento. So what I would suggest is finding a good developer, but I don’t even think that — I think Magento is a platform of the past if you want my honest opinion. And right now you’ve got really two choices in the shopping cart world. They are both SAS and it’s either Shopify or BigCommerce. It’s Coke or Pepsi right now. So those are the two platforms I would say are the winners in the space.

Steve: So you are moving all of your stuff off of Magento then?

Chad: I am not moving yet right. Right now I have finished building, I’m almost done building the shopping cart, and making it beautiful, but I have not made the decision if I want to redirect right now. I said to myself …

Steve: That’s a huge decision.

Chad: Yes, and it keeps me up at night, so I’m like you know what, why don’t I leave it right now and let’s just see how my site can do on its own. There is no rush, there is no rush.

Steve: Sure. That’s interesting because you’ve kind of done a 180, I think I read some other interview with you where you are really pushing Magento and maybe this was a couple of years ago.

Chad: So I mean like the thing was is that when I left Volusion, Volusion was like burning cash. And I had so much traffic coming to my site that they literally turned off my site overnight, and they said it was D-Dos attack. So I had to re-platform, I said okay never again am I going to a SAS platform where someone can do that to me. I want to own my own store.

So I started hosting my own store from Magento on a server, and I thought that was the direction for me. But now there is like really great technology out there that is disrupting Magento, which is why Magento tried to come out with Magento 2.0, eBay just spun off Magento. So it’s just right now I mean Shopify raised a billion dollars, and they are really focusing on adding features and making their platform number one.

Steve: Okay, and so you’ve found that your feature set of your shopping cart has been falling behind, and that’s why you’ve kind of been looking to fully hosted carts?

Chad: Well, so like if you were to do a side by side comparison between crucialvacuum.com and Think Crucial which is not live yet but will be, you’d see the difference right away in the check out, the seamless checkout, how quick it is, how responsive it is. It’s like a completely different feel. It’s like next generation e-commerce versus I’ll grow ecommerce.

Steve: Okay, all right let’s switch gears a little bit and kind of talk about branding, because I know you talk a lot about establishing your own brand. We are talking filters in this case. So what were some of the things that you did to kind of establish your brand? So like let’s say I want to replace a filter on my vacuum, and from what I understand most people think of your brand these days, right? So how did you make that happen?

Chad: How did I make that happen? So it takes time. So the success you see right now is not an overnight success. We’ve invested a lot in — and we are always evolving. Like we are never staying constant, we are never just existing. That would be my recommendation. I mean that’s always what we are doing. Like I’m ready — I just moved to Magento like maybe four years ago, and I’m already looking at the next platform and the next thing and the next product and the next everything.

We are constantly looking at changing things up a bit, whether it’s our messaging inside of our packaging or it’s our email marketing blast. Like we are constantly having weekly planning meetings, going through what is the narrative that we want our customer to have about our business.

Steve: So what is that narrative? Like what is your value preposition?

Chad: So the value prop is first of all we are free shipping free returns no matter what. Like all day long 24/7. Our phone number is right on our page. 80% and if we are just looking at the vacuum filters 80% of our filters are washable and reusable. We plant a tree for every 1000 filters sold, not that that really moves the needle that much, but it’s just our signature gesture.

Steve: Sure.

Chad: But yeah I mean I think free shipping, free returns, having somebody to answer the phone, an expert to walk you through replacing your vacuum filter on the phone is a classic differentiator. Like you can’t call up Amazon and be like, “Hey I bought this vacuum filter from you, how do I put it in?”

Steve: Right.

Chad: They are not going to help; they are not going to walk you through that. So it’s focusing on like, so when we do these videos for example they are hosted on our own website, they are not on Amazon. So it’s adding more value, more unique content to your own site because when people go to Amazon they are going to a vending machine, do you want paper or plastic. But when you are coming to Crucial you are coming to us because we’re experts, and we’re going to be there. We got your back, and our phone number is right there.

Steve: Do you find that a lot of your phone calls are how to related phone calls?

Chad: I think there is a good portion of them that are definitely how to phone calls, but there is also a good portion and they are like, “Hey I don’t know how to check out online, I’m not like internet savvy. Let me just place this order on the phone.” And then we’ll say, “Oh fantastic, you are on the phone? Perfect where are you from? Where do you live?

Oh you are replacing your vacuum filter? Cool, well you know what while you are replacing your filter you have another filter on there, and by the way since you are touching your slimy vacuum why don’t you replace your vacuum belt.” So there is a lot of like up selling, there is a lot of magic that goes on behind the scenes to like build that relationship with the customer.

Steve: So for your Amazon sales though do you try to steer some of those customers over to your site as well?

Chad: No, that’s against Amazon’s terms of service.

Steve: Okay, so let me ask you this, when people look on Amazon, are they typing in Crucial Filters?

Chad: Yeah, I mean if you actually were to go to Amazon and type in CRU into their search, I’m pretty sure you are going to see Crucial vacuum pop up. So it’s an index, it’s like an indexed word that Amazon is serving to people that are typing in, or trying to recognize what they are typing to help them with their search query.

Steve: Are you selling to Amazon as a vendor or FBA?

Chad: I sell to Amazon as a vendor and I sell on Amazon, so I sell on the 1P, which is as a vendor and sell 3P, I sell on Amazon.

Steve: Can we talk a little about some of the pros and cons of doing that?

Chad: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Okay, so, I have had other people on the show who are vendors for Amazon, and they were always conflicted, right? They were conflicted at Amazon, like if you didn’t agree to sell to them, they just find someone else, and then your ranking through existing products are lower. So, what was going on through your head when you were approached?

Chad: So firstly, I had been suspended on Amazon, and I have been suspended twice, so I sell replacement filters to feed brands and if Dicing [ph] complains to Amazon, which probably it does; I don’t know, probably close to a billion dollars with Amazon maybe more, I have no idea.

If Dicing says,”Hey, these guys Crucial Vacuum are making replacement filters and they’re knock offs of ours, take care of them,” Amazon in India is not going to think twice about it and do something about it, right? So, we’ve had like complaints before and I went away with my wife, we were on vacation. We were going on our way to Greece and my account was suspended, and I was freaking out.

Steve: That sucks.

Chad: It sucked really bad, because I was like finally taking a break and my mind was preoccupied, it was painful. So, by that point I was never again am I going to be so tied to Amazon that they can take everything away in seconds. So, that was– so in my mind I was like, “How am I going to diversify?”
So yeah, I condone multiple market places which I have done, but also I can start building a relationship with Amazon and sell two times since I’m the brand owner. And they have to approach you, but luckily I have really nice relationships in the Amazon world that I was able to get in with the entire management team there. So that was what was going in for me, so I gave them a handful of excuse and I used it as a hedge.

Steve: Now that makes sense. With the idea that if you’re selling to them as a vendor you’re probably not going to be suspended based on product alone.

Chad: No, you can always get suspended, but the idea is and Amazon can make it themselves; which they are doing with Amazon basics, but the idea here is that I have someone to talk to in Amazon, that’s not in India and 3P and 1P are kind of like the congress and the senate, like they are meant to compete with each other. They are kind of like a check and balance, so if God forbid something happened to one, I have a hedge, I have a back-up.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. So, I was just, when we were chatting before this interview, you were talking about some pretty killer growth numbers like double digits year after year. How have you managed to do that? Was it introducing more products, or just selling in more market places over the years?

Chad: I think it’s a combo, the combo of both so going deeper in our product price, going to different categories, thinking outside of the filter space, and going on other market places and going internationally.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about international. Was that kind of scary, did you do that early on or?

Chad: Actually I think it’s still early on, most sellers are like, they think that the US is where it is at, and there is a lot of things happening internationally and nobody is really focusing on.

Steve: Okay, and so was that something you did right away then, with your business or?

Chad: I was always thinking international, but I think I have been getting more heavy in our approach probably in the last two years or so, really thinking about how to sell overseas because there is different expectations, there is different fulfilment rates.

Steve: Taxes, yeah.

Chad: I mean there are taxes, there is a lot that goes into it, different languages, different brands are in the US versus in the UK or Germany for that matter, but…
Steve: I guess what I was trying to get at was, is international like your biggest place of growth right now?

Chad: The biggest place of growth right now is coming from all over, I would say that they’re posting higher growth numbers because there is a smaller part of my business, so there is a lot more room for growth there, but I was recently reading a Reddit, someone on the Amazon community just had a Reddit. They asked him, “If you were to do it all over again, would you start in the US or would you start intentionally?”

And he wrote, “I would start in the US, there’s not really a whole lot going on, the international doesn’t excite me right now.” And I actually commented in the post and I was like, “That’s crazy, if I was to start right now, actually I would start where the pack is going and there’s so much happening internationally, like you don’t really need to play with the heap in the United States, you can literally have a whole market to yourself internationally where nobody is focusing on, because it’s hard, because it’s harder.

Steve: It’s harder for someone in the US; presumably it’s not hard for somebody who resides in that country, right?

Chad: So, the second biggest channel internationally for Amazon is Amazon Germany. People actually think it’s the UK, it is Germany. So, is it that much hard to take your product, to take it and translate it on Fiverr, or one of these other translation services, and to post it on Germany and to get your product FBA there, or to– I found a warehouse in Europe that has been helping me significantly, but it’s not so hard, right? It’s just you are faced with…

Steve: It is just leg work.

Chad: Yeah, it’s just leg work, it’s just business, it’s just obstacles and there are challenges and you overcome them.

Steve: So, let me ask you this, a lot of the listeners of this podcast are people who are just kind of trying to get into ecommerce, and so for these people who are kind of starting out, what would be your advice on how to just kind of gradually grow into a thing Crucial.

Chad: Well, hopefully there are no other vacuum filter companies that are listening right now. Come up with their own thing, but to grow into, when you are starting, you need to have the proper foundation, for sure and I think a lot of sellers focus on the top-line without thinking about how is this going to scale. So, it’s not like building a house, but realizing there is no foundation, you build it on sewage. Now that works in New Jersey…

Steve: You are from New York, right?

Chad: Actually, one of my offices is in New Jersey, but it’s not built on sewerage, so I have an office in New York, office in New Jersey. So, I would say building a proper foundation, so getting your infrastructure set up correctly and professionalized from the onset. So, for me I probably wouldn’t start again ever, in my doing my own pick and park for my FBA prep ever.

I would immediately outsource that activity. I would have the right technology to automate and run my business, one that actually can take me multi-channel, so if you’re going to invest in a software, you don’t want to invest in a software that’s may give you a glass ceiling, or be what I call, a one trip pony, because it limits…

Steve: It’s hard to predict though early on, but I guess you just have to go with what you think is the best at the time.

Chad: Well, is it hard to predict that you are going to want to expand to other channels? I mean if you really want this to be a serious endeavour, you have to treat it as one.

Steve: Yeah, that’s kind of hard to do for some people though, right? Because if some of the enterprise stuff or some of the better stuff, cost a lot more on a monthly basis, I guess you’d have to be willing to put a lot more money upfront to invest in that then, right?

Chad: Well, luckily Skubana starting price is 500, so…

Steve: See, I led you right there.

Chad: So, the thing is, actually when I started Skubana I had this dream of democratizing ecommerce, so I did not want to leave any fellows behind, but what I quickly realized was that there are entry level software for people that are just casual sellers, that don’t see this as ever becoming a full time thing, that are there for them, to help them. But, if you really are serious about growing your business, you got to get into the right technology from the onset, it’s an investment.

It’s like investing in a stock, and so enrol like if you’re going into the gym, you have different choices when you are at the gym, you can go to Equinox since you are in New York City or you can go to wherever, some sort of cheap fitness club yeah, Gold or Retro or Barleys. So you have choices, but you can choose to– first of all you have to go to the gym, that’s half the battle.

Steve: That’s the hardest part, yeah.

Chad: That’s half the battle, but also if you really want to up the game you can go to a serious gym, so I guess I call Skubana like the Ferrari of operation software. It’s really a one stop shop. It’s really meant for high value merchants, but we’ve kept it a low price point to allow other people to enter in. So now people can access, and so a lot of our customers are top 200 Amazon sellers, but now for the first time ever, smaller sellers have access to what the one percent only had.

Steve: Okay and just be to clear; let’s say I’m selling in all these channels like Sears, EBay, Amazon, Wayfair, Skubana just manages all that, and all the inventory as well. Is that accurate?

Chad: Inventory, yeah any way you want to fulfil whether you add it through EPR or you print a shipping label, so we take care of– like there is no ERP system out there that combines shipping with ERP, we do that, so you don’t need a ship station or another shipping software at all. So, any way you fulfil, but the nice thing, the huge differentiator, that’s the word, so it’s commodity shipping, inventory, purchase orders, but by unifying everything together, you now have data, business intelligence that you have never seen before. Sellers know more about their car than they know about their own business, and our software changes that in a drastic way.

Steve: Because all the analytics across everything is stored in your platform.

Chad: Everything is stored, so you literally have every touch point after that person checks out, including all the hidden FBA fees as well. All that stuff is coming into our software and being sucked in, and now on the analytical section, you push the button and boom! You can see every street you have, which one is profitable, which one is not profitable, which channel you’re not profitable on, what’s dragging down your profitability. It’s really the holy grail of what we do.

Steve: Okay, cool and if there is a platform that you don’t support, you guys will code that up or?

Chad: We have an API ,we support the major market places, but we have an API, so we can communicate with any platform that has another API, but back to your question, so it’s A Foundation, B I think thinking about what your core competences are, and having a– everyone has a to do list, but I encourage everyone to have a don’t do list, like things you don’t want to be doing, and to make sure you find somebody to do that what’s their core-competency.

Steve: Right, it makes a lot of sense. Chad, we’ve been talking for quite a while. Where can people find you, and get in contact with you, or if they are interested in Skubana?

Chad: So scubana.com, you can email me if you have questions at chadscubana.com. I’ve really become more of an educator and helping sellers. E-commerce Renegade is my new property that I just launched, so I’m really trying…

Steve: Is that a blog?

Chad: It’s a– I’m doing videos; I have a book coming out. I’m really trying to cut through a lot of the noise in the Amazon group, and not just Amazon, just ecommerce space in general. People are taking suggestions from people who haven’t been there and done that, and they’re leading them down the wrong path, so I’m coming in to change it up and to remove the noise. So yeah, so I’m launching that so you can find me on E-commerce Renegade, you can sign up for a newsletter where I drop a lot of golden nuggets and things that I think are going to change the way you do business.

Steve: Sounds good Chad, thanks a lot for coming on the show man, it was good.

Chad: Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

Chad: All right.

Steve. Hope you enjoyed that episode, Chad really knows his stuff and his entrepreneurial path is kind of what I want to be going forward. Run a successful ecommerce store, understand the problems that ecommerce store owners face, and then write software to solve their problems.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode117, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. This is by the far the best way to support the show, and please tell you friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 k in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!